{ "$schema": "https://paulineletters.com/data/agent/commons/v1/external-evidence.schema.json", "schemaVersion": "1.0", "version": "1.0.0", "dataset": "external-evidence", "locale": "sw", "title": "Ushahidi nje ya Agano Jipya kuhusu Matendo na barua za Paulo", "description": "Maandishi ya kuchongwa, sarafu, maeneo, hati, waandishi wa Kiyahudi na Kirumi na waandishi wa mapema wa Kikristo wanaohusu Matendo na barua. Kila kipengee husema huthibitisha nini, hakithibitishi nini, na wafasiri hutofautiana wapi.", "method": "Umeandaliwa kutoka vyanzo vya msingi na rekodi za katalogi, kisha kukaguliwa tena kwa kujitegemea: kila nukuu hutoka tafsiri ya milki ya umma na ililinganishwa kwenye ukurasa wake (angalia rekodi za uthibitisho), nambari za katalogi zilifuatiliwa, na uhakiki uliotafuta mapungufu ulikagua madai ya kupita ushahidi. Utafiti wa kisasa hutajwa katika kiwango cha kazi nzima tu. Maandiko hutajwa kwa marejeo.", "license": "https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/", "attribution": "Pauline Letters — https://paulineletters.com", "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/data/agent/commons/v1/external-evidence.json", "scripture": "References only. No Bible translation text is included; cite the reference and read it in a licensed or public-domain edition.", "itemCount": 46, "items": [ { "id": "temple-warning-inscription", "kind": "inscription", "dateFrom": -23, "dateTo": 70, "corpusReferences": [ "OGIS 598", "CIIP I.1 no. 2", "CIJ II 1400", "IIP JERU0598", "IIP JERU0599" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 21:26-36", "Acts 21:28-29", "Acts 20:4", "Acts 23:26", "Acts 24:6", "Acts 24:18", "Acts 25:8", "Acts 26:21", "Ephesians 2:14-15", "Romans 15:30-31" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.trophimus", "person.lysias", "person.tertullus", "person.josephus" ], "placeIds": [ "place.jerusalem", "place.ephesus", "place.judea" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 5.193-194 (Whiston 5.5.2)", "url": "https://www.gutenberg.org/cache/epub/2850/pg2850.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "there was a partition made of stone all round, whose height was three cubits: its construction was very elegant; upon it stood pillars, at equal distances from one another, declaring the law of purity, some in Greek, and some in Roman letters, that \"no foreigner should go within that sanctuary\"", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 6.124-126 (Whiston 6.2.4)", "url": "https://www.gutenberg.org/cache/epub/2850/pg2850.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Have not we given you leave to kill such as go beyond it, though he were a Roman?", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 15.417 (Whiston 15.11.5)", "url": "https://www.gutenberg.org/cache/epub/2848/pg2848.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "In the midst of which, and not far from it, was the second, to be gone up to by a few steps: this was encompassed by a stone wall for a partition, with an inscription, which forbade any foreigner to go in under pain of death.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Temple Warning inscription (Q16934222)", "locator": "Q16934222", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q16934222.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Elias J. Bickerman", "work": "The Warning Inscriptions of Herod's Temple, Jewish Quarterly Review 37", "year": "1947", "view": "Assigns the notices to Herod's temple. The Inscriptions of Israel/Palestine records of both copies take their text and translation from this article." }, { "author": "Hannah M. Cotton, Leah Di Segni, Werner Eck, Benjamin Isaac et al. (eds.)", "work": "Corpus Inscriptionum Iudaeae/Palaestinae, vol. I: Jerusalem, Part 1", "year": "2010", "view": "Edits the warning inscription from Herod's temple as no. 2, covering both copies, in its section of religious and public inscriptions from Jerusalem before AD 70." }, { "author": "Stephen R. Llewelyn and Dionysia van Beek", "work": "Reading the Temple Warning as a Greek Visitor, Journal for the Study of Judaism 42", "year": "2011", "view": "The Greek is not translation Greek. A Greek-speaking visitor would read the warning in terms of Hellenistic law, and the architecture of the outer court would support that reading. Such a visitor would take the warning as royal rather than priestly in authority." }, { "author": "Wilhelm Dittenberger", "work": "Orientis Graeci Inscriptiones Selectae, vol. 2", "year": "1905", "view": "Edits the Istanbul stone alongside the parallels in Josephus. Quotes Mommsen's argument that the Romans had the notices cut after AD 6. Notes that the stone says hieron, a wider term, where Josephus speaks of the hagion." }, { "author": "J. Armitage Robinson", "work": "St Paul's Epistle to the Ephesians", "year": "1903", "view": "Reads the wall image of Ephesians 2:14 as an allusion to the temple balustrade and its warning stones. Links the barrier to the charge about Trophimus in Acts 21:29." }, { "author": "Charles Clermont-Ganneau", "work": "Discovery of a Tablet from Herod's Temple (PEF Quarterly Statement)", "year": "1871", "view": "The discoverer. Holds that the tablet follows Josephus's wording closely and sheds light on the riot of Acts 21." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q16934222", "label": "Temple Warning inscription" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "687928", "label": "Ierusalem/Hierosolyma/Col. Aelia Capitolina" } ], "title": "Maandishi ya onyo la hekalu kutoka Yerusalemu", "summary": "Matangazo mawili ya Kiyunani kutoka hekalu la Herode Mkuu huko Yerusalemu, moja kamili (sasa Istanbul) na jingine lililovunjika (Israel Museum), yanamkataza mtu yeyote asiye Myahudi kuvuka kizuizi kinachozunguka nyua za ndani na kuonya kuwa mvamizi atawajibika kwa kifo chake mwenyewe. Pamoja na maelezo ya Yosefo, yanafanya shtaka dhidi ya Paulo katika Matendo 21:28–29 lieleweke na kuonyesha uzito wake; hata hivyo, hayamtaji mtu yeyote na hayawezi kuonyesha kuwa shtaka lilikuwa la kweli.", "dating": "Yalichongwa wakati fulani kati ya ujenzi mpya wa hekalu wa Herode Mkuu (ulioanza karibu 23–19 KK) na kuharibiwa kwake mwaka 70 BK. Katalogi za maandishi ya kale huweka nakala zote mbili katika kipindi cha 23 KK–70 BK; tarehe kamili ya kuchongwa haijulikani.", "currentLocation": "Istanbul Archaeology Museums (jiwe kamili, lililopatikana 1871); Israel Museum, Yerusalemu (IAA 1936-989) (kipande)", "establishes": [ "Hekalu la Herode Mkuu lilikuwa na kizuizi kuzunguka nyua zake za ndani, chenye matangazo ya Kiyunani. Matangazo hayo yalimkataza mtu yeyote asiye Myahudi (allogenes) kuingia ndani ya uzio na eneo lililozunguka patakatifu, na kuonya kuwa mvamizi aliyekamatwa angewajibika kwa kifo chake mwenyewe. Nakala moja kamili na kipande kimoja zimehifadhiwa.", "Yosefo anaeleza kizuizi na marufuku yake yenye adhabu ya kifo (Ant. 15.417), anasema matangazo yalikuwa ya Kiyunani na Kilatini (War 5.193-194), na anamwasilisha jenerali Titus akidai kuwa Rumi iliwaruhusu Wayahudi kuwaua wavamizi hata kama walikuwa Warumi (War 6.124-126).", "Katika Matendo 21:28–29 Paulo anashtakiwa kwa kuchafua hekalu kwa kuwaingiza watu wasio Wayahudi ndani yake, kwa kudhani kuwa alikuwa amemwingiza Trofimo wa Efeso. Shtaka linategemea kanuni halisi iliyotangazwa hadharani iliyoliona tendo la mtu wa Mataifa kuvuka kizuizi kuwa kosa la kustahili kifo. Hilo husaidia kueleza vurugu za umati (Matendo 21:30–31). Kikosi cha askari kiliingilia ghasia zilizofuata (Matendo 21:31–36).", "Yosefo anaweka kizuizi kwenye njia ya kupanda kutoka ua wa nje hadi nyua za ndani na kusema matangazo yaliwazuia wageni kuendelea mbele (War 5.193-194; Ant. 15.417). Kwa hiyo kosa lililodaiwa lilikuwa kumwingiza mtu wa Mataifa kupita kizuizi, si kumleta tu katika eneo lolote la hekalu." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hayaonyeshi kuwa Paulo alimvusha Trofimo, mwenzake kutoka Asia (Matendo 20:4), au mtu mwingine yeyote wa Mataifa kupita kizuizi. Matendo linawasilisha shtaka kama hitimisho lililotokana na kuwaona pamoja mjini (Matendo 21:29); Paulo anakana kosa lolote dhidi ya hekalu (Matendo 24:18; Matendo 25:8). Tertulo anarudia shtaka mbele ya Feliki (Matendo 24:6), na Paulo anakumbuka kukamatwa hekaluni (Matendo 26:21).", "Maandishi hayamtaji mtu binafsi. Yanathibitisha kuwepo na uzito wa kanuni, si kukamatwa kwenyewe au maelezo mengine ya Matendo 21–26, kama jukumu la kamanda ambaye baadaye Matendo linamtaja kuwa Klaudio Lisia (Matendo 23:26).", "Adhabu kwenye jiwe inamhusu mvamizi wa Mataifa; halitaji adhabu kwa Myahudi aliyemwingiza. Kwa hiyo, lenyewe halielezi kwa nini umati ulimgeukia Paulo mwenyewe.", "Hayamalizi maswali mawili: ikiwa Waefeso 2:14 hudokeza kizuizi hiki, na ikiwa onyo la kifo lilimaanisha hukumu ya mahakama, vurugu za umati zilizovumiliwa au adhabu ya Mungu." ], "debate": "Maswali kadhaa bado yako wazi. Nani aliyetoa matangazo, na lini: wajenzi wa Herode Mkuu, makuhani, au mamlaka za Kirumi baada ya 6 BK? Hilo la mwisho ni wazo la Mommsen, lililonukuliwa katika OGIS 598, likitegemea toleo la Kilatini la matangazo ambalo Yosefo anaripoti (hakuna lililohifadhiwa) na maneno ya jenerali Titus. Je, kuwajibika kwa kifo chake mwenyewe kulimaanisha kuuawa kwa hukumu ya mahakama, hatua ya umati iliyovumiliwa, au adhabu ya Mungu? Hotuba ya jenerali Titus, iliyoandikwa na Yosefo, inaakisi kwa kiwango gani sera halisi ya Kirumi? Mwisho, je, mfano wa ukuta wa Waefeso 2:14 hudokeza kizuizi hiki au Sheria (Waefeso 2:15)? Swali hilo hutegemea kwa sehemu uandishi na tarehe inayobishaniwa ya barua.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Mazingira sahihi, bila kuthibitisha tukio", "statement": "Kanuni ilijulikana sana: Yosefo anairipoti zaidi ya mara moja, na ilitangazwa hekaluni kwa Kiyunani. Mwandishi aliyeishi mbali na matukio angeweza kueleza mazingira kwa usahihi; kwa hiyo ulinganifu unaonyesha kuwa Matendo linalijua hekalu vizuri bila kuthibitisha ghasia na kukamatwa. Barua ya Paulo inaonyesha kuwa alitarajia hatari kutoka kwa wasioamini huko Uyahudi (Warumi 15:30–31), ingawa si ghasia zenyewe." }, { "label": "Waefeso 2:14 humaanisha Sheria, si uzio", "statement": "Kwa usomaji huu mfano wa ukuta unawakilisha Sheria yenye amri zake, ambayo mstari unaofuata unasema iliondolewa (Waefeso 2:15). Msamiati wa ukuta katika Waefeso pia hutofautiana na ule wa jiwe (tryphaktos, peribolos) na wa Yosefo (dryphaktos), hivyo kizuizi cha hekalu ni mfano ulioongezwa na wafasiri kama Robinson (1903). Ikiwa Waefeso iliandikwa baada ya 70 BK, kizuizi kilikuwa kimekwisha kuharibiwa." }, { "label": "Matangazo yalitokana na mamlaka za Kirumi", "statement": "Theodor Mommsen, aliyenukuliwa na Dittenberger katika OGIS 598, alishikilia kuwa Warumi waliagiza matangazo yachongwe baada ya Uyahudi kuwa jimbo mwaka 6 BK. Alitaja toleo la Kilatini ambalo Yosefo anaripoti kando ya Kiyunani (hakuna lililopatikana) na maneno ya jenerali Titus katika Yosefo. Wengine huyachukulia matangazo kama sehemu ya ujenzi mpya wa Herode Mkuu. Kwa maoni yote mawili, yalikuwepo wakati wa uhai wa Paulo." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence/temple-warning-inscription" }, { "id": "ephesus-theatre", "kind": "site", "dateFrom": -200, "dateTo": 117, "corpusReferences": [ "I.Ephesos 27", "SEG 15, 698", "SEG 41, 974", "GIBM III 481" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 19:23-41", "Acts 19:29-31", "Acts 19:35-41", "Acts 19:39", "1 Corinthians 15:32", "1 Corinthians 16:8-9", "2 Corinthians 1:8-10" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.demetrius", "person.gaius", "person.aristarchus", "person.alexander" ], "placeIds": [ "place.ephesus" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "pleiades", "author": "Pleiades", "work": "Theater of Ephesus", "locator": "Pleiades 818256726 (connected to Ephesus 599612)", "url": "https://pleiades.stoa.org/places/818256726/json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "author": "Wikidata", "work": "Theater (Ephesus)", "locator": "Q15723477", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q15723477.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895", "locator": "ch. XII, sec. 5, p. 277", "url": "https://archive.org/download/paulthetraveller00ramsuoft/paulthetraveller00ramsuoft_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The scene which follows is the most instructive picture of society in an Asian city at this period that has come down to us.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "philostratus-conybeare", "author": "Philostratus", "work": "The Life of Apollonius of Tyana", "translator": "F. C. Conybeare", "year": "1912", "locator": "VA 4.10", "url": "https://archive.org/download/lifeofapollonius00philuoft/lifeofapollonius00philuoft_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And with these words he led the population entire to the theatre, where the image of the Averting god has been set up.", "role": "primary-text" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Peter Ruggendorfer and Friedrich Krinzinger (eds.)", "work": "Das Theater von Ephesos: Archäologischer Befund, Funde und Chronologie (Forschungen in Ephesos)", "year": "2017", "view": "Traces the theatre through eight building or usage phases. Dates the Hellenistic stage building to the first half of the 2nd century BC but finds that the auditorium's original date and shape cannot be determined. The most extensive Roman changes (stage building, extended upper seating) are placed under Domitian, with the south wing finished under Trajan, and the whole stage facade is assigned to the late Flavian period rather than to AD 66. Only limited early-imperial work is documented before then." }, { "author": "Gudrun Styhler-Aydın", "work": "Der Zuschauerraum des Theaters von Ephesos: Baubefund und architekturhistorische Analyse", "year": "2022", "view": "The Hellenistic theatre was already one of the large theatres of Asia Minor. Building from the 1st into the first half of the 2nd century AD made it one of the largest Roman-period auditoria in the region, with a diameter close to 150 m." }, { "author": "Rudolf Heberdey, George Niemann and Wilhelm Wilberg", "work": "Das Theater in Ephesos (Forschungen in Ephesos II)", "year": "1912", "view": "The first full Austrian publication of the theatre. As reported in the 2017 volume, it reconstructed the Hellenistic auditorium as already three-tiered, seating about 23,000, and dated the first stage-facade storeys to AD 66 from an architrave inscription." }, { "author": "J. T. Wood", "work": "Discoveries at Ephesus", "year": "1877", "view": "Excavated the theatre, computed its seating at 24,500, and found the Salutaris inscription in its southern entrance." }, { "author": "E. L. Hicks", "work": "The Collection of Ancient Greek Inscriptions in the British Museum, Part III: Priene, Iasos and Ephesos", "year": "1890", "view": "Edits the Salutaris bequest as no. 481 from inscribed marble blocks that formed the wall on the right flank of the theatre's south entrance, most still in their original courses when found. Notes that its documents regulate the carrying of the images to and from the theatre and reserve a place for the city's boys at assemblies held there." }, { "author": "Guy MacLean Rogers", "work": "The Sacred Identity of Ephesos: Foundation Myths of a Roman City", "year": "1991", "view": "Edits and translates the Salutaris foundation (I.Ephesos 27) and argues that its processions of images from the Artemision into the theatre at assemblies and festivals expressed an Ephesian civic identity centred on Artemis." }, { "author": "A. N. Sherwin-White", "work": "Roman Society and Roman Law in the New Testament", "year": "1963", "view": "Judged the author of Acts very well informed about Ephesian municipal institutions: the town clerk's control of the gathering, the theatre as the assembly's usual meeting place (citing a Salutaris inscription), and the appeal to a properly convened assembly. Argued that a scene in which the civic assembly still mattered belongs to an era that did not outlast the Antonines." }, { "author": "Colin J. Hemer", "work": "The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History", "year": "1989", "view": "Argues that Acts' many local and institutional details, including those of the Ephesian episode, reflect accurate knowledge of first-century conditions and support the general reliability of its narrative." }, { "author": "Richard I. Pervo", "work": "Profit with Delight: The Literary Genre of the Acts of the Apostles", "year": "1987", "view": "Reads Acts' riots and crowd scenes as entertaining literary set-pieces comparable to the ancient novel. On this reading a vivid, accurate setting is not by itself evidence that the event happened." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q15723477", "label": "Theater (Ephesus)" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "818256726", "label": "Theater of Ephesus" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "599612", "label": "Ephesus/Arsinoe(ia)" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q47611", "label": "Ephesus" } ], "title": "Ukumbi mkubwa wa maonyesho huko Efeso", "summary": "Ukumbi mkubwa wa maonyesho wa Efeso, uliochongwa kwenye mteremko wa Panayır Dağı, ni mahali halisi panapoonekana hadi leo ambapo Matendo 19:29 unaweka umati. Huenda tayari ulikuwa na nafasi ya umati mkubwa katika kipindi cha Kiyunani, na maandishi ndani ya ukumbi wenyewe yanaonyesha kuwa kufikia 104 BK mkutano wa raia ulikutana humo. Eneo linathibitisha mazingira, si ghasia, na mabaki mengi yanayoonekana ni ya baada ya Paulo.", "dating": "Jengo la jukwaa la kipindi cha Kiyunani, nusu ya kwanza ya karne ya 2 KK (tarehe na umbo la awali la eneo la watazamaji haviwezi kubainishwa); upanuzi mkuu wa Kirumi chini ya Domitian na Trajan (karibu 81–117 BK); maandishi ya Salutaris 104 BK", "currentLocation": "Mahali pake pa asili, eneo la kiakiolojia la Efeso, Selçuk (Jimbo la İzmir), Uturuki; maandishi ya Salutaris yapo kwa sehemu mahali pake pa asili, baadhi ya vitalu katika British Museum", "establishes": [ "Ukumbi wa maonyesho ulikuwepo Efeso, kwenye mteremko wa Panayır Dağı, muda mrefu kabla ya Paulo kukaa huko. Jengo lake la jukwaa ni la nusu ya kwanza ya karne ya 2 KK na lilikuwa miongoni mwa majengo makubwa zaidi ya jukwaa ya kipindi cha Kiyunani huko Asia Ndogo. Hilo hudokeza eneo kubwa la watazamaji, ingawa ukubwa wake kamili haujulikani.", "Maandishi ya Salutaris (I.Ephesos 27, 104 BK), yaliyochongwa kwenye ukuta wa lango la kusini la ukumbi, yanaagiza sanamu za Artemi na watu wengine zibebwe kutoka hekaluni kwake hadi ukumbini na kusimamishwa katika kila kikao kilichowekwa kisheria cha mkutano. Kufikia wakati huo ukumbi ulikuwa mahali pa mkutano wa raia na jukwaa la ibada kwa Artemi, jambo linalolingana na mazingira ya Matendo 19:23–41.", "Eneo na maandishi yanafafanua, katika mazingira ya Efeso, tofauti ambayo Matendo linaweka kati ya umati uliokusanyika ukumbini na mkutano ulioitishwa ipasavyo ambao karani wa mji anautaja (Matendo 19:39).", "Mengi wanayoyaona wageni sasa, pamoja na uso wa mbele wa jukwaa na viti vya juu vilivyoongezwa (kipenyo karibu 150 m), ni ya upanuzi unaowekwa hasa katika tawala za Domitian na Trajan (karibu 81–117 BK), baada ya Paulo. Katikati ya miaka ya 50 jengo lilikuwa ukumbi wa awali wa kipindi cha Kiyunani wenye mabadiliko fulani ya mwanzo wa enzi ya kifalme.", "Simulizi la kimapokeo la karne ya 3 linamwasilisha Apollonius akiongoza wakazi wote wa Efeso hadi ukumbini (Philostratus, Life of Apollonius 4.10). Ni la baadaye na si ushahidi huru kwa Matendo, lakini linaonyesha kuwa ukumbi ulikumbukwa kama mahali mji ulipokusanyika." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hauthibitishi kwa kujitegemea kuwa ghasia za Matendo 19:23–41 zilitokea, wala maelezo yake yoyote: Demetrio, kukamatwa kwa Gayo na Aristarko, Aleksanda, au saa mbili za kupiga kelele. Hakuna kilichopatikana ukumbini kinachomtaja Paulo au ghasia.", "Makadirio ya uwezo (hesabu ya Wood mwenyewe ya 24,500 mwaka 1877; karibu 20,000 kwa cavea ya Kirumi katika juzuu ya Austria ya 2017; hadi 25,000 katika Pleiades) yanaeleza jengo lililopanuliwa la Kirumi au yanategemea uundaji upya. Hayatuambii ukumbi ulikuwa na nafasi ya watu wangapi katikati ya miaka ya 50 au wangapi walikuwepo, na Matendo halitoi idadi.", "Maandishi ya Salutaris ni ya karibu miaka hamsini baada ya Paulo kukaa huko na hutumia kivumishi tofauti cha Kiyunani kwa mkutano uliopangwa kuliko Matendo 19:39. Yanaonyesha desturi ya kiraia, si matukio ya miaka ya 50. Pia Matendo halisemi kuwa Paulo aliingia au kusema ukumbini (Matendo 19:30–31), licha ya baadhi ya masimulizi maarufu." ], "debate": "Maswali mawili yako wazi. La kwanza ni jengo lilivyokuwa wakati wa Paulo. Utafiti wa Austria huweka upanuzi mkuu wa Kirumi na uso wa mbele wa jukwaa wakati wa Domitian na Trajan, ilhali kazi za awali ziliweka ghorofa za kwanza za uso huo mwaka 66 BK; ripoti ya uchimbaji ya 2017 pia inaona kuwa tarehe na umbo la eneo la watazamaji la kipindi cha Kiyunani haviwezi kubainishwa, kwa hiyo uwezo wake wakati huo hauna uhakika. La pili ni maana ya mazingira sahihi. Sherwin-White na Hemer walichukulia usahihi wa maelezo ya kiraia kuwa dalili ya mapokeo yenye taarifa nzuri. Pervo husoma tukio kama muundo wa kisanaa wa kifasihi, na wengine wanaona kuwa mwandishi wa baadaye mwenye maarifa angeweza kutoa maelezo hayo ya eneo; kwa hiyo mazingira peke yake hayawezi kuthibitisha ghasia.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Mazingira sahihi ya ghasia halisi", "statement": "Luka alitumia taarifa za kutegemewa kuhusu mgogoro halisi huko Efeso. Ukumbi kama mahali pa mkutano, istilahi za mkutano, karani wa mji na maasiarkhi vinalingana na Efeso ya mwanzo wa enzi ya kifalme (Sherwin-White, Hemer); Ramsay aliita tukio hilo picha iliyohifadhiwa yenye mafunzo mengi zaidi kuhusu jamii katika mji wa Asia. Barua za Paulo huripoti hatari kubwa huko Efeso na Asia (1 Wakorintho 15:32; 1 Wakorintho 16:8–9; 2 Wakorintho 1:8–10), ingawa hazitaji ghasia za ukumbini." }, { "label": "Tukio la kifasihi kwenye jukwaa linalojulikana", "statement": "Kwa kiasi kikubwa tukio ni utunzi wa kidrama wa Luka, kwa namna ya matukio ya umati ambayo Pervo hulinganisha na riwaya za kale. Ukumbi, ibada kwa Artemi na nyadhifa za kiraia zilikuwa sifa za hadharani na za kudumu za Efeso, zilizokuwa bado mashuhuri mwaka 104 BK; hivyo mwandishi mwenye maarifa angeweza kuweka tukio humo bila chanzo maalumu. Kwa maoni haya mazingira sahihi hayathibitishi tukio wala kuweka tarehe ya Matendo." }, { "label": "Tatizo halisi, tukio lililotungwa", "statement": "Maoni ya kati hushikilia kuwa kulikuwa na ghasia halisi nyuma ya simulizi, kwa kuwa barua za Paulo hushuhudia hatari kubwa huko Efeso, lakini Luka alitunga tukio na hotuba zake. Kwa maoni haya mazingira yanaunga mkono mapokeo ya mgogoro bila kuthibitisha maelezo yake." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-ephesus-theatre" }, { "id": "erastus-inscription", "kind": "inscription", "dateFrom": 31, "dateTo": 150, "corpusReferences": [ "Corinth VIII.3 232", "AE 1930, 118", "EDH HD025815", "EDCS-32001186", "TM 177152" ], "confidence": "medium", "epistemicStatus": "debated", "scriptureReferences": [ "Romans 16:23", "Acts 19:22", "2 Timothy 4:20", "1 Corinthians 1:26" ], "personIds": [ "person.erastus", "person.paul" ], "placeIds": [ "place.corinth", "place.achaia" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "edh-heidelberg", "author": "Epigraphic Database Heidelberg (record last updated 2013-05-24, Cowey)", "work": "EDH inscription record: building/dedicatory inscription from Colonia Laus Iulia Corinthus", "year": "2013", "locator": "EDH HD025815", "url": "https://edh.ub.uni-heidelberg.de/edh/inschrift/HD025815", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "edcs", "author": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss / Slaby", "work": "EDCS monument record (JSON data endpoint)", "locator": "EDCS-32001186", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/data/monument/320/32001186.json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "trismegistos", "author": "Trismegistos", "work": "TM text relations data service", "locator": "TM 177152", "url": "https://www.trismegistos.org/dataservices/texrelations/177152", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "pleiades", "author": "Pleiades", "work": "Corinthus/Korinthos", "locator": "Pleiades 570182", "url": "https://pleiades.stoa.org/places/570182/json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "paley-horae-paulinae", "author": "William Paley", "work": "Horae Paulinae, or, The Truth of the Scripture History of St. Paul", "year": "1790 (Cambridge, Mass. edition, 1806)", "locator": "ch. II (Epistle to the Romans), No. II", "url": "https://archive.org/download/horaepaulinaeort00pale/horaepaulinaeort00pale_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Erastus was one of those who had attended St. Paul in his travels, Acts xix. 22; and when those travels had, upon some occasion, brought our apostle and his train to Corinth, Erastus staid there, for no reason so probable as that it was his home.", "role": "early-study" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Henry J. Cadbury", "work": "\"Erastus of Corinth,\" Journal of Biblical Literature 50", "year": "1931", "view": "Read the civic title in Romans as rendering arcarius rei publicae, a municipal post held by slaves or men of servile origin, and judged identification with the paving aedile improbable and close to impossible, chiefly because one career was unlikely to include both posts. Did not treat the objection that a Christian could not serve as aedile as decisive. Warned that the three New Testament Erasti are not certainly one person and that the aedile may be a later Corinthian." }, { "author": "John Harvey Kent", "work": "Corinth VIII.3: The Inscriptions, 1926-1950", "year": "1966", "view": "Corpus edition of no. 232. As summarised by Gill (1989), Kent dated the pavement to about the middle of the first century and judged the identification with the Erastus of Romans sound. He cited the rarity of the cognomen at Corinth and argued that the civic title in Romans describes a Corinthian aedile's functions." }, { "author": "Gerd Theissen", "work": "The Social Setting of Pauline Christianity: Essays on Corinth (English translation)", "year": "1982", "view": "As reported by Gill (1989) and Clarke (1991), equates the civic title in Romans with a junior office such as quaestor rather than aedile. Allows the identification as possible without being convinced." }, { "author": "Victor P. Furnish", "work": "Corinth in Paul's Time: What Can Archaeology Tell Us?, Biblical Archaeology Review 15", "year": "1988", "view": "As reported by Gill (1989), follows Theissen in proposing that Erastus was first quaestor and later aedile, and accepts that the aedile is the Erastus whom Paul and the author of 2 Timothy mention." }, { "author": "David W. J. Gill", "work": "\"Erastus the Aedile,\" Tyndale Bulletin 40", "year": "1989", "view": "The evidence allows neither a certain identification nor a certain rejection. The lack of space for filiation and tribe suggests the aedile was a freedman, and the civic title in Romans could correspond to aedile at Corinth. Reports the complete slab found in situ in 1929 in the paved area east of the stage building, with other pieces found in 1928 and 1947." }, { "author": "Andrew D. Clarke", "work": "\"Another Corinthian Erastus Inscription,\" Tyndale Bulletin 42", "year": "1991", "view": "Draws attention to a second-century dedication, first published by Pallas and Dantes, that probably names an Erastus at Corinth, and rejects identifying that man with Paul's associate. Holds that identifying the first-century aedile remains a significant possibility." }, { "author": "John K. Goodrich", "work": "\"Erastus, Quaestor of Corinth,\" New Testament Studies 56", "year": "2010", "view": "Argues that Erastus's civic title in Romans 16:23 corresponds to the quaestorship, a high-ranking municipal office held by the economic elite. Rejects arcarius and aedile as the Latin equivalents." }, { "author": "Alexander Weiss", "work": "\"Keine Quästoren in Korinth: Zu Goodrichs (und Theißens) These über das Amt des Erastos (Röm 16.23),\" New Testament Studies 56", "year": "2010", "view": "Argues that the municipal office of quaestor did not exist at Corinth, against Theissen and Goodrich." }, { "author": "Steven J. Friesen", "work": "\"The Wrong Erastus: Ideology, Archaeology, and Exegesis,\" in Corinth in Context: Comparative Studies on Religion and Society (Supplements to Novum Testamentum 134)", "year": "2010", "view": "As summarised in reviews and responses, argues that the inscription lies in a secondary context and was probably not commissioned before the mid-second century, so it names a non-Christian elite aedile rather than Paul's Erastus. Holds that the Erastus of Romans was a low-status public servant, possibly a slave, and probably not a believer." }, { "author": "John K. Goodrich", "work": "\"Erastus of Corinth (Romans 16.23): Responding to Recent Proposals on his Rank, Status, and Faith,\" New Testament Studies 57", "year": "2011", "view": "Responds to Weiss and Friesen, including Friesen's proposal that Erastus was an unbelieving public slave, and defends the view that Erastus was a Christian who served as a Corinthian municipal quaestor." }, { "author": "Timothy A. Brookins", "work": "\"The (In)frequency of the Name 'Erastus' in Antiquity: A Literary, Papyrological, and Epigraphical Catalog,\" New Testament Studies 59", "year": "2013", "view": "Catalogues ancient occurrences of the name and finds it rare, with very few records from first-century Greece." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "trismegistos", "id": "177152", "label": "Building/dedicatory inscription from Colonia Laus Iulia Corinthus" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "570182", "label": "Corinthus/Korinthos" } ], "title": "Maandishi ya Erastus kwenye sakafu ya mawe huko Korintho", "summary": "Maandishi ya Kilatini kwenye uwanja uliowekewa mawe mashariki mwa ukumbi wa maonyesho wa Korintho yanarekodi kuwa mtu aitwaye Erastus aliweka mawe kwa gharama yake mwenyewe kama shukrani kwa kupata wadhifa wa aedile. Yanamweka mtu wa jina hilo miongoni mwa maafisa wa Korintho ya Kirumi, mazingira ya kiraia ya aina inayoelezwa na Warumi 16:23. Hayathibitishi kuwa yeye ni Erasto wa Paulo: jina lake kamili limepotea, inabishaniwa kama cheo katika Warumi kinalingana na wadhifa wa aedile, na tarehe pia inabishaniwa.", "dating": "Yameorodheshwa kuwa ya 31–70 BK (EDH, EDCS), sambamba na tarehe ya Kent ya katikati ya karne ya kwanza. Friesen (2010) anahoji kuwa huenda hayakuwekwa kabla ya katikati ya karne ya pili; kipindi kinachotolewa hapa huishia 150 BK, hatua ya kwanza ya pendekezo hilo, si mwisho wake.", "currentLocation": "Eneo la kiakiolojia la Korintho ya Kale, Ugiriki: bamba mahali pake pa asili kwenye eneo lililowekewa mawe mashariki mwa ukumbi; mahali vilipo vipande vingine hapajathibitishwa hapa.", "establishes": [ "Maandishi ya ujenzi ya Kilatini kutoka Korintho ya Kirumi (Kent, Corinth VIII.3 no. 232; EDH HD025815) yanarekodi kuwa mtu mwenye cognomen Erastus aliweka mawe eneo hilo kwa gharama yake mwenyewe (sua pecunia) kwa ajili ya wadhifa wake wa aedile (pro aedilitate). Praenomen na nomen zake zimepotea, na ni nafasi zilizochongwa kwa herufi za chuma zilizopachikwa tu zinazobaki.", "Yanaonyesha kuwa koloni la Kirumi la Korintho, katika jimbo la Akaya, lilikuwa na maafisa wa aedile, na mwenye wadhifa angeweza kurudisha shukrani kwa kuchaguliwa kwake kwa kulipia sakafu ya umma ya mawe.", "Yanamweka Erastus wa maandishi katika tabaka la wenye nyadhifa huko Korintho wakati fulani kati ya katikati ya karne ya kwanza na, kwa pendekezo la baadaye zaidi, katikati ya karne ya pili au baadaye. Kwa hiyo Erasto wa Korintho mwenye cheo cha kiraia (Warumi 16:23) analingana na mazingira ya mji yaliyoandikwa." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hayaonyeshi kuwa aedile huyo ni Erasto wa Warumi 16:23, Matendo 19:22 au 2 Timotheo 4:20. Praenomen na nomen zake zimepotea, inabishaniwa kama cheo cha kiraia katika Warumi kinalingana na aedile, na tarehe inabishaniwa.", "Hayaonyeshi kuwa Erasto anayetajwa katika Matendo, Warumi na 2 Timotheo ni mtu mmoja; swali hilo hutegemea maandishi, si jiwe hili. Paley (1790) alijenga hoja kutokana na Matendo 19:22, Warumi 16:23 na 2 Timotheo 4:20 kuwa Korintho ulikuwa nyumbani kwa Erasto; hoja hiyo ni ya kabla ya kupatikana kwa jiwe na hutegemea maandishi.", "Hayaonyeshi kuwa kanisa la Paulo huko Korintho lilijumuisha maafisa matajiri, au kwamba Mkristo alishikilia wadhifa wa aedile; yote mawili hutegemea utambulisho unaobishaniwa. Kauli ya Paulo kuwa waamini wachache tu wa Korintho walikuwa na hadhi ya juu (1 Wakorintho 1:26) haiondoi wala kuthibitisha kuwepo kwa mshiriki wa tabaka la juu." ], "debate": "Maswali matatu yako wazi. Tarehe: Kent aliweka sakafu hiyo karibu na katikati ya karne ya kwanza, na EDH na EDCS huiorodhesha kuwa ya 31–70 BK. Gill anaripoti kuwa bamba kamili lilipatikana mahali pake pa asili mwaka 1929, lakini Friesen anahoji kuwa maandishi yako katika mazingira ya matumizi ya pili na huenda hayakuwekwa kabla ya katikati ya karne ya pili. Wadhifa: wengine hulinganisha cheo cha kiraia cha Erasto katika Warumi 16:23 na aedile (Kent, Gill), wengine na quaestor (Theissen, Goodrich), na wengine (Cadbury; Friesen) hukisoma kama wadhifa wa mji wa hadhi ya chini, huenda ulioshikiliwa na mtumwa; Weiss anakataa kuwa Korintho ilikuwa na quaestors wa manispaa. Utambulisho: Brookins anaona jina kuwa adimu, lakini Erastus wa karne ya pili anayewezekana huko Korintho (Clarke 1991) anaonyesha kuwa halikuwa jina la mtu mmoja tu huko. Kwa kuwa praenomen na nomen zimepotea, utambulisho unabaki uwezekano badala ya jambo lililoonyeshwa.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Mtu yuleyule, hatua ya baadaye ya kazi", "statement": "Kent aliona kuwa kumtambua kuwa Erasto wa Warumi ni jambo thabiti, na Clarke hulihifadhi kama uwezekano wenye uzito. Theissen alilinganisha wadhifa wa Warumi na nafasi ya mwanzo kama quaestor; Furnish, akimfuata, alipendekeza kuwa Erasto alikuwa quaestor karibu na wakati wa barua na baadaye aedile. Goodrich pia hujenga hoja ya wadhifa wa quaestor, ambao anauona kuwa cheo cha juu kilichoshikiliwa na tabaka la juu." }, { "label": "Aedile mwingine wa baadaye", "statement": "Friesen anahoji kuwa maandishi yako katika mazingira ya matumizi ya pili na huenda hayakuwekwa kabla ya katikati ya karne ya pili. Kwa maoni haya yanamtaja mtu wa tabaka la juu asiye Mkristo, si Erasto wa Warumi, ambaye alikuwa mtendaji wa mji wa hadhi ya chini, huenda mtumwa; Friesen pia anatia shaka kama Erasto wa Warumi alikuwa mwamini kabisa." }, { "label": "Haiwezi kuamuliwa kwa ushahidi wa sasa", "statement": "Gill hushikilia kuwa ushahidi hauruhusu utambulisho wa uhakika wala kuukataa kwa uhakika. Sakafu huongeza Erastus wa maandishi wa Korintho kwenye rekodi bila kuamua kama yeye ndiye mtu ambaye Paulo anamtaja." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence/erastus-inscription" }, { "id": "gallio-inscription", "kind": "inscription", "dateFrom": 51, "dateTo": 52, "corpusReferences": [ "FD III 4, 286", "SIG3 801 D", "AE 2002, 1335", "Oliver, Greek Constitutions 31", "EDH HD043294", "EDCS-66400014", "PHI 240470", "SEG 32, 546 (Deiana's reading of line 17; PHI 240472)", "TM 177226" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 18:12-17", "Acts 18:1-11", "Acts 18:18", "1 Corinthians 1:1" ], "personIds": [ "person.gallio", "person.claudius", "person.paul" ], "placeIds": [ "place.achaia", "place.corinth" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "edh-heidelberg", "work": "Epigraphic Database Heidelberg: public legal inscription from Delphi (Achaia)", "locator": "EDH HD043294", "url": "https://edh.ub.uni-heidelberg.de/edh/inschrift/HD043294", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record", "author": "Epigraphic Database Heidelberg (record last updated by Cowey)", "year": "2011" }, { "sourceKey": "edcs", "work": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss/Slaby (references FDelphes 286; AE 2002, 1335; dated 52; Delphoi, Achaia)", "locator": "EDCS-66400014", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/monument/66400014", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "trismegistos", "work": "Trismegistos Texts, text-relations service (links EDH HD043294, EDCS 66400014, PHI 240470-240472)", "locator": "TM 177226", "url": "https://www.trismegistos.org/dataservices/texrelations/177226", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata: Delphi Inscription", "locator": "Q5254406", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q5254406.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "collection of letter fragments written by Claudius", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "seneca-epistles-gummere", "work": "Seneca, Moral Letters to Lucilius (Ad Lucilium Epistulae Morales), vol. 3", "locator": "Ep. 104.1", "url": "https://en.wikisource.org/wiki/Moral_letters_to_Lucilius/Letter_104", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "for I remembered my master Gallio’s words, when he began to develop a fever in Achaia and took ship at once, insisting that the disease was not of the body but of the place.", "role": "primary-text", "author": "Seneca", "translator": "Richard Mott Gummere", "year": "1925" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "work": "Tacitus, Annals, Book 15", "locator": "Ann. 15.73", "url": "https://en.wikisource.org/wiki/The_Annals_(Tacitus)/Book_15", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Salienus Clemens denounced Junius Gallio, who was terror-stricken at his brother Seneca's death", "role": "primary-text", "author": "Tacitus", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb (Wikisource text based on their translation)", "year": "1876" }, { "sourceKey": "dio-cassius-cary", "work": "Cassius Dio, Roman History, Book 60 (Loeb vol. VII)", "locator": "60.24.1", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Cassius_Dio/60*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Achaia and Macedonia, which ever since the reign of Tiberius had been assigned to governors directly appointed, Claudius now made to depend upon the lot once more.", "role": "primary-text", "author": "Cassius Dio", "translator": "Earnest Cary", "year": "1924" }, { "sourceKey": "dio-cassius-cary", "work": "Cassius Dio, Roman History, Book 60 (Loeb vol. VII)", "locator": "60.17.3", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Cassius_Dio/60*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "he gave notice to the governors chosen by lot, since they were slow even now about leaving the city, that they must begin their journey before the middle of April.", "role": "primary-text", "author": "Cassius Dio", "translator": "Earnest Cary", "year": "1924" }, { "sourceKey": "edcs", "work": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss/Slaby: CIL 06, 01256 (p 3129, 3798, 4365) = ILS 218a", "locator": "EDCS-17800159 (CIL 06, 01256 (p 3129, 3798, 4365) = ILS 218a)", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/data/monument/178/17800159.json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Émile Bourguet", "work": "De rebus Delphicis imperatoriae aetatis capita duo", "year": "1905", "view": "First published the four fragments together as a letter of Claudius (one had earlier been drawn by Nikitsky). Without discussing Paul, he gave Gallio's year of office as AD 52 on the authority of the Prosopographia (as reported by Deissmann 1912 and SIG3)." }, { "author": "Adolf Deissmann", "work": "St. Paul: A Study in Social and Religious History, Appendix I (English translation of Paulus, 1911)", "year": "1912", "view": "Dated the letter between the end of 51 or, more probably, the beginning of 52 and 1 August 52, using Dessau's acclamation data and Dessau's date of 1 August 52 for the aqueduct's dedication. Argued that Gallio took office in the summer of 51 and placed Paul in Corinth from early 50 to late summer 51." }, { "author": "André Plassart", "work": "Fouilles de Delphes III.4, no. 286", "year": "1970", "view": "Edited the assembled fragments. Read line 5 as showing that Gallio had reported Delphi's depopulation, and divided line 17 to give a second-person singular pronoun, so that the recipient was an individual, probably Gallio's successor as proconsul (as reported by Oliver 1971)." }, { "author": "James H. Oliver", "work": "The Epistle of Claudius Which Mentions the Proconsul Junius Gallio (Hesperia 40)", "year": "1971", "view": "Accepted most of Plassart's text but doubted the second-person reading of line 17, preferring to take the letters as the end of a verb. Argued that Gallio appears to be proconsul when the emperor writes and that the recipient was a community, either the city of Delphi or the Amphictyonic Council." }, { "author": "Gerd Lüdemann", "work": "Paul, Apostle to the Gentiles: Studies in Chronology (German original 1980)", "year": "1984", "view": "Argues that Acts 18 conflates accounts of two of Paul's visits to Corinth and dates the Gallio incident to the later visit. Reported here via Fellows 2005; not checked in the book itself." }, { "author": "Richard G. Fellows", "work": "Renaming in Paul's Churches: The Case of Crispus-Sosthenes Revisited (Tyndale Bulletin 56.2)", "year": "2005", "view": "Names Donfried, Lüdemann and Hurd as proponents of the view that Acts 18 conflates two visits, and rejects it: since Sosthenes was already a believer who had left Corinth when 1 Corinthians was written, the Gallio incident probably belongs to Paul's first visit." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q5254406", "label": "Delphi Inscription" }, { "scheme": "trismegistos", "id": "177226", "label": "Letter of Claudius to Delphi naming Gallio (TM text)" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q452194", "label": "Lucius Junius Gallio Annaeanus" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q75459", "label": "Delphi" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "540726", "label": "Delphi" } ], "title": "Maandishi ya Galio huko Delphi", "summary": "Vipande vya barua ya Klaudio vilivyochongwa huko Delphi vinamtaja Galio, jina lake likirejeshwa kuwa [L. Ju]nius Gallio, kuwa rafiki wa kaisari na liwali. Kutangazwa kwa Klaudio mara ya 26 kuwa imperator huweka barua hiyo kwa uwezekano mkubwa katika miezi saba ya kwanza ya 52 BK, hivyo Galio alitawala Akaya karibu 51/52, au ikiwezekana 52/53. Huupa usikilizaji wa kesi wa Matendo 18:12–17 msingi wa tarehe, ingawa haimtaji Paulo wala kesi.", "dating": "Kwa uwezekano mkubwa miezi saba ya kwanza ya 52 BK (kabla ya 1 Agosti); tarehe ya mwisho kabisa wa 51 BK haiondolewi kabisa. Nakala iliyochongwa ya barua ya Klaudio, iliyowekwa tarehe kwa kutangazwa kwake mara ya 26 kuwa imperator.", "currentLocation": "Delphi (EDH). Deissmann (1912) anaripoti vipande vinne vya Bourguet katika Delphi Museum (Inv. 3883, 2178, 2271, 4001); maonyesho ya sasa hayajathibitishwa.", "establishes": [ "Barua ya Klaudio iliyochongwa Delphi inamtaja Galio kuwa rafiki wa kaisari na liwali, katika kifungu kuhusu ukosefu wa raia wa Delphi ambacho inaonekana alikiripoti (kitenzi kimerejeshwa). Katika jina ni '-nios Gallion' tu iliyohifadhiwa; 'Junius', 'rafiki' na 'liwali' vimerejeshwa kutokana na sehemu za herufi lakini hukubaliwa kwa ujumla. Delphi ilikuwa katika Akaya, hivyo barua inathibitisha bila kutegemea Matendo kuwa Galio alitawala Akaya (Matendo 18:12).", "Vyeo vya Klaudio huhifadhi nambari 26 kwa mara alizotangazwa kuwa imperator. Maandishi kutoka Kys yanaunganisha la 26 na mwaka wake wa 12 wa mamlaka ya tribunicia; maandishi ya mfereji wa Porta Maggiore (CIL VI 1256; EDR104278) yanaunganisha mwaka wa 12 na tangazo la 27. Kwa kuwa Dessau, akifuatwa na Deissmann (1912), aliweka mfereji huo tarehe 1 Agosti 52, barua huangukia kwa uwezekano mkubwa katika miezi saba ya kwanza ya 52; mwisho wa 51 hauondolewi kabisa.", "Kwa kawaida maliwali walihudumu karibu mwaka mmoja, hivyo muhula wa Galio uliingiliana na nusu ya kwanza ya 52: uwezekano mkubwa 51/52, au ikiwezekana 52/53. Ikiwa Matendo 18:12–17 linaweka kesi kwa usahihi, iliangukia karibu 51–53. Deissmann (1912) alijenga hoja ya 51/52; Ramsay, kama Deissmann anavyoripoti, alipendelea 52/53.", "Tacitus (Ann. 15.73) anamtaja Galio kuwa ndugu wa Seneca; Seneca (Ep. 104.1) anakumbuka akiondoka Akaya kwa meli homa ilipoanza, hivyo huenda muhula wake ulikatizwa (hitimisho). Dio (60.24.1) anasema Klaudio alirudisha Akaya kwa watawala walioteuliwa kwa kura ya nasibu mwaka 44 BK, jambo linalolingana na cheo cha liwali katika Matendo 18:12." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hayamtaji Paulo, Wayahudi wa Korintho, wala kesi yoyote. Yanathibitisha mtawala anayetajwa katika Matendo 18:12, si kuwa tukio la Matendo 18:12–17 lilitokea kama linavyosimuliwa.", "Hayatoi tarehe ya kuanza au kumalizika kwa muhula wa Galio. Kuchagua kati ya 51/52 na 52/53 hutegemea muda wa kawaida wa mwaka mmoja, wakati mihula ilipoanza, na ikiwa barua inamchukulia Galio kuwa liwali aliyekuwa madarakani wakati huo.", "Hayawezi kuonyesha kesi iliangukia wapi katika miezi kumi na minane au zaidi ya Paulo huko Korintho (Matendo 18:11 na Matendo 18:18). Kwa hiyo tarehe ya kuwasili kwa Paulo huko Korintho ni hitimisho la ziada.", "Hayaonyeshi kuwa Matendo 18:1–18 hueleza ziara moja isiyokatizwa." ], "debate": "Tarehe ya 52 BK hutegemea nambari ya tangazo iliyohifadhiwa kwenye jiwe; maswali yaliyo wazi huja baada yake. Kikomo cha 1 Agosti kinatumika tu ikiwa maandishi ya Porta Maggiore yanaakisi tarehe ya uzinduzi wa mfereji (EDR huiweka tu katika 52/53), na Dessau alikubali, ingawa aliona kuwa haliwezekani sana, kuwa tangazo la 26 lilitokea mwisho kabisa wa 51. Mwaka wa Galio unaweza kuwa 51/52 au 52/53. Dio (60.17.3) anasema kuwa mwaka 43 BK Klaudio aliagiza watawala walioteuliwa kwa kura ya nasibu kuondoka Rumi kabla ya katikati ya Aprili, jambo linalodokeza kuanza katika majira ya kuchipua au mapema kiangazi (hitimisho); Deissmann, akimfuata Mommsen, alidhani mwanzo rasmi wa 1 Julai. Usomaji wa Plassart wa nafsi ya pili kwenye mstari 17, unaojulikana hapa kama ulivyoripotiwa na Oliver (1971), humfanya mpokeaji kuwa mrithi wa Galio. Oliver alipendelea jumuiya kuwa mpokeaji, na wengine hugawa mstari 17 kuwa kitenzi εἴασε, jambo linaloondoa kiwakilishi (Deiana, SEG 32.546; PHI 240472). Kuweka kesi mapema katika muhula wa Galio, kama Deissmann alivyofanya, ni hitimisho, na kama tukio lilitokea ni hukumu tofauti ya kihistoria.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Mwaka wa Galio ulikuwa 52/53", "statement": "Huenda Galio aliingia madarakani katika majira ya kuchipua au mapema kiangazi cha 52, huku Klaudio akiandika kabla ya 1 Agosti 52. Basi kesi ingeangukia 52 au mapema 53 na kuwasili kwa Paulo huko Korintho karibu 51. Deissmann anaripoti kuwa Ramsay (1909) aliweka uliwali kuanzia Aprili 52 hadi Aprili 53 na kuwasili kwa Paulo Oktoba 51, na kuwa Babut (1911) alipendelea kipindi kama hicho." }, { "label": "Barua ilitumwa baada ya muhula wa Galio", "statement": "Plassart, kama Oliver (1971) anavyoripoti, aligawa mstari 17 ili kupata kiwakilishi cha nafsi ya pili umoja, na kumfanya mpokeaji kuwa mtu binafsi, huenda mrithi wa Galio, anayeambiwa kile Galio alichoripoti. Hilo lingeweka mwaka wa Galio katika 51/52 na kesi katika 51 au mapema 52. Oliver alitilia shaka usomaji huo kwa sababu Klaudio bado humwita Galio liwali, na mgawanyo wa Deiana huondoa kiwakilishi." }, { "label": "Matendo 18 huunganisha ziara mbili", "statement": "Donfried, Lüdemann na Hurd (kama walivyoripotiwa na Fellows 2005) huona Matendo 18 likiunganisha ziara mbili za Korintho, na kuweka tukio la Galio katika ile ya baadaye; basi maandishi yangeweka tarehe ya kesi, si kuwasili kwa Paulo. Fellows anajibu kuwa huenda tukio ni la ziara ya kwanza: ikiwa Sosthene wa Matendo 18:17 alituma pamoja 1 Wakorintho (1 Wakorintho 1:1), ni vigumu kuweka tukio baada ya barua hiyo." }, { "label": "Wadhifa umethibitishwa, tukio halijathibitishwa", "statement": "Msomaji mwenye mashaka anaweza kukubali kuwa Galio alitawala Akaya karibu wakati huu na bado kuona Matendo 18:12–17 kama namna ya Luka ya kuunda simulizi la Korintho. Deissmann anaripoti kuwa Loisy aliweka kesi, ikiwa ni ya kihistoria, katika 52 au mapema 53. Maandishi huamua wadhifa na tarehe ya kukadiria; kama tukio lilitokea huhitaji tathmini tofauti ya Matendo." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence/gallio-inscription" }, { "id": "ephesus-artemis-neokoros", "kind": "inscription", "dateFrom": -334, "dateTo": 244, "corpusReferences": [ "RPC I 2626", "RPC I 2627", "RPC I 2628", "IPriene 231 (= IK Priene 150)", "IEph 27B (= GIBM 481)", "IEph 27E", "IEph 300 (= CIG 2972)", "IEph 1578A (= GIBM 578; SEG 36, 1028)", "IEph 2040", "IEph 2212", "IEph 4336" ], "confidence": "medium-high", "epistemicStatus": "debated", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 19:23-41", "Acts 19:24", "Acts 19:27", "Acts 19:35" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.demetrius", "person.nero" ], "placeIds": [ "place.ephesus" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "pausanias-jones", "work": "Description of Greece", "author": "Pausanias", "translator": "W. H. S. Jones and H. A. Ormerod", "year": "1918", "locator": "Paus. 4.31.8", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0160%3Abook%3D4%3Achapter%3D31%3Asection%3D8", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But all cities worship Artemis of Ephesus, and individuals hold her in honor above all the gods.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "year": "1895 (text read from the 1903 printing)", "locator": "ch. XII §5, 'Demetrius the Silversmith' (p. 278 in the 1903 printing)", "url": "https://archive.org/download/cu31924029332297/cu31924029332297_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The richer tradesmen made shrines in the more expensive material, and silver was evidently a favourite material among the wealthy.", "role": "early-study" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "E. L. Hicks", "work": "Demetrius the Silversmith (The Expositor, 4th series, vol. 1); Ephesus: A Postscript (The Expositor, 4th series, vol. 2)", "year": "1890", "view": "Combined fragments of an honorary list of neopoioi (GIBM 578 = IEph 1578A) and identified the Demetrios of its dating formula, whom he took as foreman of the neopoioi, with the silversmith of Acts 19. He dated the list before Vespasian, possibly to Paul's time, and preferred metal statuettes like the Salutaris images to shrines. The first article is known here through Rogers 1986; the postscript was read." }, { "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895", "view": "The shrines were small shrines of the goddess sold for dedication: cheap ones in terracotta, costlier ones in marble or silver. Demetrius was a leading figure in these trades, and the riot reflects threatened commercial and temple interests." }, { "author": "G. M. Rogers", "work": "Demetrios of Ephesos: Silversmith and Neopoios? (Belleten 50)", "year": "1986", "view": "Doubts Hicks's dating and identification: the Demetrios of the dating formula appears to be a city official and is not definitely a neopoios, while the Demetrios of lines 6-7 certainly is, and identifying him with the silversmith is speculation. Neopoioi conferred citizenship and guarded the Artemision's dedications, including the Salutaris images; if Demetrius was one, Luke's silence about the office would reveal his narrative purpose." }, { "author": "S. J. Friesen", "work": "Twice Neokoros: Ephesus, Asia and the Cult of the Flavian Imperial Family", "year": "1993", "view": "Dates the provincial temple of the Sebastoi at Ephesus, the city's first securely attested imperial neokorate, to AD 89/90, and approves Keil's reading of the Neronian neokoroi coins as referring to Artemis. Both points are reported via Witetschek 2009 and secondary summaries, not checked in the book." }, { "author": "B. Burrell", "work": "Neokoroi: Greek Cities and Roman Emperors", "year": "2004", "view": "A comprehensive study of neokoros cities. Connects the Neronian coins with an imperial temple granted under Nero, and treats Acts 19:35 as reflecting the 50s, arguing that 'neokoros of Artemis' would not have suited Ephesus between its imperial neokorate and the early third century. Reported via Witetschek 2009." }, { "author": "S. Witetschek", "work": "Artemis and Asiarchs: Some Remarks on Ephesian Local Colour in Acts 19 (Biblica 90)", "year": "2009", "view": "Acts 19:35 is the earliest clear attestation of Ephesus as neokoros of Artemis; the official title dates from Caracalla's reign. The coins alone are inconclusive, but read alongside Acts as evidence for the late first century they more plausibly show that Ephesians could already call their city neokoros of Artemis. Acts 19 is evidence mainly for Luke's own time." }, { "author": "C. J. Hemer", "work": "The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History", "year": "1989", "view": "Counts the neokoros title in Acts 19:35 among Luke's specific local knowledge. Reported via Witetschek 2009, not checked in Hemer directly." }, { "author": "J. Keil", "work": "Die erste Kaiserneokorie von Ephesos (Numismatische Zeitschrift 12)", "year": "1919", "view": "Rejected the idea of a Neronian imperial neokorate and took the neokoros title on the coins of AD 65/6 to refer to Artemis. Reported via Witetschek 2009." }, { "author": "F. Kirbihler", "work": "Les grands-prêtres d'Éphèse: aspects institutionnels et sociaux de l'asiarchie (in Pathways to Power, ed. A. D. Rizakis and F. Camia)", "year": "2008", "view": "Supports a provincial neokorate granted to Ephesus under Nero, arguing that Tacitus could have passed over it. Reported via Witetschek 2009." }, { "author": "R. I. Pervo", "work": "Acts (Hermeneia)", "year": "2009", "view": "Suspects that the neokoros title in Acts 19:35 may be a slight anachronism. Reported via Witetschek 2009." }, { "author": "A. Burnett, M. Amandry and P. P. Ripollès", "work": "Roman Provincial Coinage I: From the Death of Caesar to the Death of Vitellius (44 BC-AD 69)", "year": "1992", "view": "Catalogues the Neronian neokoroi coins of Ephesus as RPC I 2626-2628. The online note on 2628 says its legend is mostly illegible, assigns it to the group by type and style, and allows that the bees may symbolize the Artemis temple." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q43018", "label": "Temple of Ephesian Artemis" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1553679", "label": "neocorus (temple-warden office and title)" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "873985034", "label": "Temple of Artemis, Ephesus" } ], "title": "Efeso kama mlinzi wa hekalu la Artemi: sarafu, maandishi na swali la vihekalu vidogo", "summary": "Matendo 19:35 ndiyo maandishi ya kwanza yaliyo wazi kuipa Efeso cheo cha mlinzi wa hekalu kwa Artemi. Sarafu za 65/6 BK huwaita Waefeso neokoroi bila kutaja hekalu; maandishi huongeza 'wa Artemi' kuanzia karibu 200 BK tu. Maandishi ya 104 BK na ya kipindi cha Kirumi hushuhudia maafisa wa hekalu, wafua fedha na sanamu za fedha za Artemi. Vyanzo vilivyopitiwa hapa havitambui kihekalu chochote kidogo cha fedha cha Artemi, tofauti na sanamu ndogo.", "dating": "Karibu 334 KK hadi 244 BK (mkusanyiko wa vyanzo): neokoros wa Artemi kama wadhifa wa mtu binafsi karibu 334 KK (IPriene 231); sarafu za wakati wa Nero 65/6 BK; wakfu wa Salutaris 104 BK; 'neokoros wa Artemi' kama cheo cha mji katika maandishi kuanzia 200/210 hadi 244 BK", "currentLocation": "Eneo la Efeso na Artemision (Selçuk, Türkiye); IPriene 231 ilipatikana Priene. Maandishi ya Salutaris na neopoioi yalichapishwa kutokana na mawe ya British Museum kama GIBM 481 na 578; mahali yalipo sasa hapajalinganishwa na rekodi ya BM. RPC hurekodi mfano pekee unaojulikana wa RPC I 2628 katika British Museum; mifano ya 2626-2627 iko katika makusanyo kadhaa.", "establishes": [ "Sarafu za shaba zilizotengenezwa Efeso mwaka 65/6 BK huwaita Waefeso neokoroi: RPC I 2626-2627, zikimtaja liwali Aviola na afisa Aichmokles, huku 2628 ikiwekwa katika toleo hilo hilo kwa aina na mtindo. Mji ulitumia cheo karibu mwongo mmoja baada ya Paulo kukaa huko, kabla ya neokorate yake ya kwanza ya kifalme iliyothibitishwa kwa uhakika (hekalu la Flavian, ambalo Friesen anaweka katika 89/90 BK). Maandishi ya sarafu hayataji hekalu.", "Neokoros ulikuwa wadhifa unaotambuliwa katika Artemision muda mrefu kabla ya Paulo. Maandishi yaliyopatikana Priene, karibu 334 KK, yanamheshimu Megabyxos mwana wa Megabyxos (jina la kwanza limerejeshwa) kama neokoros wa Artemi huko Efeso (IPriene 231).", "Kuanzia karibu 200 BK, maandishi ya Efeso huuita mji neokoros wa Artemi kando ya neokorates zake za kifalme: IEph 2040 (ukarabati wa ukumbi, 200/210 BK), IEph 300 (214/217 BK; neokoros mara tatu, mara mbili wa makaisari, mara moja wa Artemi) na IEph 4336 (244 BK), ambayo pia humtaja karani wa watu na neopoioi wawili. Huenda IEph 2040 ni ya muda mfupi kabla ya utoaji chini ya Caracalla ambao Witetschek anauchukulia kuwa rasmi.", "Mwaka 104 BK wakfu wa Salutaris (IEph 27) uliweka wakfu sanamu ya dhahabu ya Artemi na sanamu kadhaa za fedha (jumla kamili imerejeshwa). Amri ya baraza iliagiza zibebwe kutoka ukumbi wa mbele wa Artemision hadi mikutanoni na mashindanoni, neopoioi (maafisa wa hekalu) wakihudhuria. Kaburi lisilo na tarehe la kipindi cha Kirumi (IEph 2212) ni la mfua fedha ambaye pia alikuwa neopoios, likitunzwa na synedrion ya wafua fedha.", "Pausanias, akiandika katika karne ya pili BK, anasema miji yote humwabudu Artemi wa Efeso na watu binafsi humheshimu kuliko miungu yote (4.31.8). Ulinganifu huu wa baadaye na dai la ibada yake duniani kote katika Matendo 19:27 hushuhudia umaarufu wake wakati wake, si miaka ya 50." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hauonyeshi kuwa Demetrio, ghasia ukumbini au hotuba ya karani wa mji vilitokea kama Matendo 19:23–41 linavyosimulia. Unaonyesha kuwa mazingira ya kiraia na kidini yanawezekana.", "Haushuhudii vihekalu vidogo vya fedha vya Artemi. Vitu vya fedha vya Salutaris ni sanamu ndogo. Mwaka 1890 Hicks hakujua vihekalu vyovyote vya chuma vya Artemi kutoka Efeso, na vyanzo vilivyopitiwa hapa haviongezi chochote. Vitu vya metali za thamani huhifadhiwa mara chache, hivyo ukimya huu ni ushahidi dhaifu.", "Hauthibitishi kuwa 'neokoros wa Artemi' kilikuwa cheo rasmi cha kiraia katika miaka ya 50. Sarafu za wakati wa Nero hazitaji hekalu, na maneno yanayomtaja Artemi yanaonekana katika maandishi kuanzia karibu 200 BK tu.", "IEph 1578A humtaja Demetrios wa maandishi katika fomula yake iliyovunjika ya kuweka tarehe, wadhifa wake ukiwa umepotea, na Demetrios mwana wa Menophilos kama neopoios wa kwanza aliyeorodheshwa; huenda ni mtu mmoja au watu tofauti. Hakuna anayeweza kutambuliwa kuwa mfua fedha wa Matendo 19:24." ], "debate": "Je, 'neokoros wa Artemi' kilitumika wakati wa Paulo? Keil (1919), akikubaliwa na Friesen, alisoma sarafu za wakati wa Nero kuwa zilimrejelea Artemi. Burrell na Kirbihler huzihusisha na hekalu la kifalme lililoruhusiwa chini ya Nero; Burrell bado huona Matendo 19:35 likiakisi miaka ya 50, kwa kuwa anashikilia kuwa cheo kisingeifaa Efeso kati ya neokorate yake ya kifalme na mwanzo wa karne ya tatu. Witetschek anaona sarafu peke yake hazitoshi kuamua, lakini husoma Matendo 19:35 kama ushahidi kuwa Waefeso wa wakati wa Luka mwishoni mwa karne ya kwanza waliweza kutumia cheo, jambo ambalo huufanya usomaji wa Keil wa sarafu uwezekane zaidi. Pervo anashuku kosa dogo la kuhamisha jambo la baadaye hadi wakati wa awali. Kuhusu vihekalu vya Demetrio, Ramsay alipendekeza vihekalu vidogo vya mungu wa kike katika udongo uliochomwa, marumaru na fedha; Hicks alipendelea sanamu ndogo na kumtambulisha Demetrio na afisa wa neopoioi; Rogers anaona utambulisho huo kuwa wa kubashiri.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Cheo kisicho rasmi tayari kilitumika (Matendo linalingana na miaka ya 50)", "statement": "Efeso ilijiita neokoros wa Artemi kwa namna isiyo rasmi kabla ya hekalu lolote la kifalme, na maandishi ya sarafu ya 65/6 BK ya wakati wa Nero yanamrejelea Artemi (Keil, akikubaliwa na Friesen; maelezo ya RPC kuhusu 2628 pia huzingatia hekalu la Artemi). Kwa maoni haya maneno ya karani wa mji katika Matendo 19:35 yanafaa wakati wa Paulo, ingawa Matendo ndiyo maandishi ya kwanza yaliyo wazi kuupa mji cheo hiki cha Artemi." }, { "label": "Sarafu za wakati wa Nero hurejelea hekalu la kifalme", "statement": "Sarafu za 65/6 BK huakisi hekalu la kifalme la jimbo lililoruhusiwa chini ya Nero na kusitishwa baada ya kifo chake (Burrell, Kirbihler). Basi hazingesema chochote kuhusu cheo cha Artemi, na Matendo 19:35 lingebaki peke yake kama ushahidi wake wa karne ya kwanza. Witetschek anaona nadharia hii kutegemea ubashiri na mapengo katika vyanzo zaidi ya ushahidi wazi." }, { "label": "Wakati wa Luka mwenyewe, au kosa la wakati", "statement": "Maneno huakisi jinsi Waefeso walivyouelewa mji wao wakati Matendo lilipoandikwa, mwishoni mwa karne ya kwanza (Witetschek), au huenda ni kosa dogo la kuweka jambo katika wakati usio wake (Pervo). Kwa namna yoyote ni ushahidi kwa mazingira ya Luka badala ya rekodi ya maneno yaliyosemwa katika miaka ya 50." }, { "label": "Vihekalu vya Demetrio vilikuwa nini?", "statement": "Huenda vilikuwa vihekalu vidogo vya mungu wa kike vilivyouzwa kwa ajili ya kuwekwa wakfu: vya bei ndogo katika udongo uliochomwa, vya gharama kubwa zaidi katika marumaru au fedha (Ramsay). Hicks aliona sanamu ndogo za chuma kama sanamu za Salutaris kuwa na uwezekano zaidi, na kumtambulisha Demetrio na Demetrios wa fomula ya tarehe ya IEph 1578A, ambaye alimchukulia kuwa msimamizi wa neopoioi. Rogers anaona utambulisho huo kuwa ubashiri." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence/ephesus-artemis-neokoros" }, { "id": "ephesus-officials", "kind": "inscription", "dateFrom": 14, "dateTo": 114, "corpusReferences": [ "I.Ephesos 508 (PHI PH248466; McCabe, Ephesos 753)", "I.Ephesos 234 (PHI PH248454; McCabe, Ephesos 741)", "I.Ephesos 424 (PHI PH247993; McCabe, Ephesos 285)", "I.Ephesos 858 (PHI PH248477; McCabe, Ephesos 763)", "Suppl. Ephes. 241 (PHI PH255995; new fragments of the donor list I.Ephesos 1687)", "Suppl. Ephes. 142+0144 (PHI PH255972)", "SEG 57.1220 (PHI PH348884)" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 19:31", "Acts 19:35-41", "Acts 19:23-41" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.demetrius" ], "placeIds": [ "place.ephesus" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "work": "Church History, Book 4 (quoting the Martyrdom of Polycarp), Nicene and Post-Nicene Fathers, Series II vol. 1", "locator": "Hist. eccl. 4.15.27", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250104.htm", "year": "1890", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "they cried out and asked the Asiarch Philip to let a lion loose upon Polycarp. But he said that it was not lawful for him, since he had closed the games.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen (10th ed., CCEL text)", "locator": "ch. XII §5, 'Demetrius the Silversmith'", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/r/ramsay/paul_roman/cache/paul_roman.txt", "year": "1907 (10th ed.; first published 1895)", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The Asiarchs, or High Priests of Asia, were the heads of the imperial, political-religious organisation of the province in the worship of \"Rome and the Emperors\"", "role": "early-study" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Steven J. Friesen", "work": "Asiarchs (Zeitschrift für Papyrologie und Epigraphik 126)", "year": "1999", "view": "Uses a systematic count of attestations to argue that identifying Asiarchs with the high priests of Asia is wrong, and that Magie's conclusion that Asiarchs were a special category of agonothete is more likely. Notes that Asiarch titles begin to appear in the public record only in the late first century AD." }, { "author": "R. A. Kearsley", "work": "Asiarchs, Archiereis, and the Archiereiai of Asia (Greek, Roman and Byzantine Studies 27)", "year": "1986", "view": "Argues that high priestesses of Asia held a real office, not an honorary one. In at least two cases (AD 130/1 and 217/8) a husband was Asiarch while his wife was high priestess of Asia in the same year, which she argues shows that the Asiarch's office was not the provincial high priesthood." }, { "author": "Stephan Witetschek", "work": "Artemis and Asiarchs: Some Remarks on Ephesian Local Colour in Acts 19 (Biblica 90)", "year": "2009", "view": "His abstract states that the Asiarchs of Acts 19:31 call into question their identification with the provincial high priests. He grants that the office existed before AD 89/90, citing Strabo's Asiarchs at Tralles, but reads Acts 19:31 as an updating from Luke's own time, when the office had gained new prominence." }, { "author": "Jürgen Deininger", "work": "Die Provinziallandtage der römischen Kaiserzeit von Augustus bis zum Ende des dritten Jahrhunderts n. Chr.", "year": "1965", "view": "Defended the identification of Asiarchs with the high priests of Asia. Friesen (1999) calls it the last significant exposition of that view, and Witetschek (2009) cites it for the majority position." }, { "author": "M. Rossner", "work": "Asiarchen und Archiereis Asias (Studii Clasice 16)", "year": "1974", "view": "Supported the identification of Asiarchs with the high priests of Asia. Reported via Friesen 1999 and Witetschek 2009." }, { "author": "D. Magie", "work": "Roman Rule in Asia Minor to the End of the Third Century After Christ", "year": "1950", "view": "Concluded that Asiarchs were a special category of agonothete (games-president), the view Friesen 1999 develops. Reported via Friesen 1999." }, { "author": "F. Kirbihler", "work": "Les grands-prêtres d'Éphèse: aspects institutionnels et sociaux de l'asiarchie (in Pathways to Power, ed. A. D. Rizakis and F. Camia)", "year": "2008", "view": "Suggests that Acts 19:31 results from a Flavian rewriting in which Luke used a term of his own time, incorrectly, for an office of Paul's time. Reported via Witetschek 2009." }, { "author": "C. J. Hemer", "work": "The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History", "year": "1989", "view": "Counted the Asiarchs of Acts 19:31 among Luke's specific local knowledge and held that their friendship with Paul should not be dismissed as highly unlikely. Reported via Witetschek 2009." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q727844", "label": "Asiarch" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q47611", "label": "Ephesus" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "599612", "label": "Ephesus/Arsinoe(ia)" } ], "title": "Karani wa mji na maasiarkhi wa Efeso", "summary": "Maandishi yanaonyesha kuwa vyeo vyote viwili vinavyotumiwa na Matendo katika ghasia za Efeso vilikuwa halisi. Kipande cha amri kutoka utawala wa Tiberius kiliridhiwa katika mwaka wa grammateus (karani) wa watu, jina likiwa limepotea, na maandishi ya wakfu ya 92/93 BK huweka tarehe kwa Tiberius Claudius Aristion kama grammateus na 'asiarkhi'. Hakuna kati ya maandishi haya kinachomtaja Paulo au ghasia. Maandishi ya maasiarkhi ya Efeso huanza mwishoni mwa karne ya kwanza tu, na maasiarkhi walikuwa nani bado kunabishaniwa.", "dating": "Kipindi cha tarehe kinahusu maandishi ya Efeso tu, kutoka utawala wa Tiberius (14–37 BK) hadi 102/114 BK. SEG 57.1220 kutoka Silandos katika eneo la Lidia imewekwa na wahariri wake katika karne ya 1 KK lakini lazima iwe ya baada ya 29/27 KK; wengine hupendelea karne ya 1 BK. Martyrdom of Polycarp, iliyotajwa kupitia Eusebius, ni ya katikati ya karne ya 2 BK.", "currentLocation": "Maandishi ya Efeso yalipatikana Efeso (Selçuk, Türkiye), isipokuwa kipande c cha Suppl. Ephes. 241, kilichopatikana Pamucak. SEG 57.1220 inatoka Silandos katika eneo la Lidia (mahali ilipopatikana Tamasis/Selmanhacılar). Mahali mawe yalipo sasa hapajakaguliwa. Martyrdom of Polycarp imehifadhiwa kama maandishi, yanayotajwa hapa kupitia Eusebius.", "establishes": [ "Efeso ilikuwa na afisa wa kiraia aliyeitwa grammateus (karani) wa watu kabla ya Paulo kukaa huko. Kipande cha amri, kilichowekwa katika utawala wa Tiberius (14–37 BK) kwa fomula yake, kiliridhiwa katika mwaka wa kuhani mkuu wa Tiberius na grammateus wa watu (jina limepotea), kwa idhini ya 'strategoi na grammateus wa watu'. Wakfu za baadaye chini ya Domitian na Trajan huweka tarehe kwa grammateus.", "Huenda asiarkhi anashuhudiwa kabla ya Paulo nje ya Efeso. Maandishi kutoka Silandos katika eneo la Lidia (SEG 57.1220) yanamheshimu Tiberius [Iulius?] Damas kama asiarkhi na sebastophant. Wahariri wake huyapa tarehe ya karne ya kwanza KK, lakini cheo cha ibada ya Augusto huhitaji tarehe ya baada ya 29/27 KK, na Campanile hupendelea karne ya kwanza BK (kama Witetschek 2009 anavyoripoti).", "Watu wale wale mashuhuri wangeweza kushikilia nyadhifa zote mbili. Ti. Claudius Aristion ni 'kuhani mkuu wa Asia' mwaka 88/89 BK (I.Ephesos 234) na grammateus na 'asiarkhi' mwaka 92/93 BK (I.Ephesos 508); Claudius Aristion, anayetambuliwa kwa ujumla kuwa yeye, ni 'asiarkhi mara tatu' mwaka 102/114 BK (I.Ephesos 424). T. Flavius Pythion ni grammateus kwa mara ya pili na asiarkhi mwaka 104/105 BK (I.Ephesos 858).", "Vyeo katika simulizi la ghasia (Matendo 19:31 na Matendo 19:35) ni halisi: grammateus huko Efeso kabla ya Paulo, asiarkhi huko Efeso kuanzia mwishoni mwa karne ya kwanza na huenda mapema zaidi sehemu nyingine za Asia." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hakuna kati ya maandishi haya kinachomtaja Paulo, Demetrio, ghasia, au karani wa mji asiyepewa jina wa Matendo 19:35. Yanathibitisha vyeo na mazingira, si matukio yanayosimuliwa na Matendo.", "Hayaamui asiarkhi alikuwa nani au alifanya nini. Cheo kinaweza kuwa jina jingine la kuhani mkuu wa ibada ya kifalme ya jimbo, heshima tofauti iliyohusishwa na kufadhili michezo, au wadhifa wa mji.", "Maandishi ya maasiarkhi ya Efeso huanza mwishoni mwa kipindi cha Flavian (karibu 89/90 BK). Peke yake hayawezi kuonyesha kama Matendo 19:31 linaakisi miaka ya 50 au wakati wa Luka mwenyewe; kati ya maandishi yaliyotajwa hapa ni SEG 57.1220 tu inayoweza kuwa ya mapema zaidi, na tarehe yake haina uhakika.", "Martyrdom of Polycarp, iliyonukuliwa na Eusebius, inatoka Smirna karibu karne moja baada ya Paulo. Inaonyesha asiarkhi akisimamia michezo huko, si desturi ya Efeso katika miaka ya 50." ], "debate": "Wasomi wengi, kutoka Ramsay hadi Deininger na Rossner, wamesoma 'asiarkhi' kama jina jingine la kuhani mkuu wa ibada ya kifalme ya jimbo la Asia. Kearsley (1986) na Friesen (1999) walihoji kuwa vyeo vilikuwa tofauti, na Friesen alifufua maoni ya Magie kuwa maasiarkhi walikuwa tabaka maalumu la wasimamizi wa michezo. Katika Martyrdom of Polycarp, kama Eusebius anavyoinukuu, asiarkhi Philip wa Smirna anakataa kumfungua simba kwa sababu alikuwa amefunga michezo. Swali la pili linahusu tarehe. Witetschek anakubali kuwa wadhifa ulikuwepo kabla ya 89/90 BK, akitaja maasiarkhi wa Strabo huko Tralles wakati wa Augusto, lakini anahoji kuwa umaarufu wake mpya baada ya hapo unafanya Matendo 19:31 kuwa usasishaji kutoka wakati wa Luka mwenyewe. Kirbihler huzungumzia uandishi upya wa Flavian; Hemer alihesabu maasiarkhi miongoni mwa maarifa ya Luka kuhusu eneo.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Asiarkhi kama kuhani mkuu wa jimbo", "statement": "Kwa maoni haya 'asiarkhi' kilikuwa cheo kingine cha kuhani mkuu wa ibada ya kifalme ya Asia. Basi maasiarkhi kadhaa wa Matendo 19:31 wangekuwa waliowahi kushikilia wadhifa na kubaki na cheo (Deininger) au makuhani wakuu wa mahekalu ya jimbo. Witetschek anapinga kwamba kulikuwa na mahekalu mawili au matatu tu ya aina hiyo, mihula ilidumu mwaka mmoja, na maandishi ya Efeso huwaita maasiarkhi wa zamani kwa namna tofauti." }, { "label": "Asiarkhi kama heshima tofauti", "statement": "Kwa maoni haya maasiarkhi walikuwa heshima tofauti iliyotolewa kwa watu wengi zaidi. Kwa Friesen, akimfuata Magie, walikuwa kundi maalumu la wasimamizi wa michezo (agonothetes); baadaye Kearsley alipendekeza maafisa wa mji (kama Friesen 1999 anavyoripoti). Kwa namna yoyote, maasiarkhi kadhaa wangeweza kuwa Efeso wakati mmoja bila uhusiano na ukuhani mkuu wa ibada ya kifalme." }, { "label": "Maelezo ya eneo kutoka wakati wa Luka mwenyewe", "statement": "Maasiarkhi wa Matendo 19:31 huakisi hali wakati Matendo lilipoandikwa, baada ya wadhifa kupata umaarufu mpya: usasishaji badala ya kosa la wakati (Witetschek 2009), au uandishi upya wa Flavian uliotumia istilahi ya baadaye kwa wadhifa wa wakati wa Paulo (Kirbihler, kama Witetschek anavyoripoti). Kwa namna yoyote mstari ni ushahidi wa ulimwengu wa Luka zaidi ya wa Paulo." }, { "label": "Kumbukumbu ya wakati wa Paulo", "statement": "Maasiarkhi wa aina ya awali walikuwepo kabla ya hekalu la Flavian, hivyo huenda Luka anawarejelea, na urafiki wao na Paulo hauhitaji kukataliwa kuwa usiowezekana (Hemer, kama Witetschek anavyoripoti). Witetschek anakubali hili linawezekana lakini hupendelea kusoma mstari kama usasishaji." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-ephesus-officials" }, { "id": "thessalonica-politarchs", "kind": "inscription", "dateFrom": -27, "dateTo": 200, "corpusReferences": [ "CIG 1967", "GIBM II 171" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 17:1-9", "Acts 17:5-9", "Acts 17:6", "Acts 17:8", "Acts 19:29", "Acts 20:4", "Romans 16:21" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.silas", "person.jason" ], "placeIds": [ "place.thessalonica", "place.macedonia" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "museum-record", "author": "C. T. Newton (ed.)", "work": "The Collection of Ancient Greek Inscriptions in the British Museum, Part II", "year": "1883", "locator": "GIBM II no. CLXXI (171), Macedonia section", "url": "https://archive.org/download/collectionofanci00brit/collectionofanci00brit_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895", "locator": "ch. X, sec. 6, p. 227", "url": "https://archive.org/download/paulthetraveller00ramsuoft/paulthetraveller00ramsuoft_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The curious and rare title \"politarchs\" was given to the supreme board of magistrates at Thessalonica, as is proved by an inscription.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata: Golden Gate (Thessaloniki), alias Vardar Gate", "locator": "Q96631855", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/w/api.php?action=wbgetentities&ids=Q96631855&props=labels%7Cdescriptions%7Caliases%7Cclaims%7Csitelinks&languages=en%7Cel%7Cde%7Cfr&format=json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "pleiades", "work": "Pleiades: Thessalonica", "locator": "491741", "url": "https://pleiades.stoa.org/places/491741/json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Ernest DeWitt Burton", "work": "The Politarchs, American Journal of Theology 2", "year": "1898", "view": "Collects 17 inscriptions attesting politarchs (19 with probable restorations). Shows that Thessalonica had politarchs from Augustus to Antoninus Pius, dates the Vardar Gate block after 30 BC and possibly as late as AD 143 or later, and records the office also in Thrace, Bithynia, the Bosporus and Egypt." }, { "author": "Illinois Greek Club (trans.)", "work": "Aeneas Tacticus, Asclepiodotus, Onasander (Loeb Classical Library)", "year": "1923", "view": "In a note on Aeneas Tacticus 26.12, observes that this rare title occurs elsewhere almost exclusively at Thessalonica and its vicinity, and suggests Aeneas met it during military service in the north Aegean." }, { "author": "Charles Edson", "work": "Inscriptiones Graecae X 2,1: Inscriptiones Thessalonicae et viciniae", "year": "1972", "view": "The standard corpus of Thessalonian inscriptions. Athanasiadis (2026) reports that Edson dated the politarch list IG X 2,1 126 to the 2nd century AD." }, { "author": "G. H. R. Horsley", "work": "The Politarchs, in D. W. J. Gill and C. Gempf (eds.), The Book of Acts in Its Graeco-Roman Setting", "year": "1994", "view": "Collects and analyses the non-literary evidence for politarchs; later epigraphers and New Testament scholars cite it as a standard reference on the office." }, { "author": "G. H. R. Horsley", "work": "Politarchs in Macedonia and Beyond, Mediterranean Archaeology 7", "year": "1994", "view": "Collects and analyses the non-literary evidence for politarchs in Macedonia and elsewhere; later epigraphers cite it as a standard reference on the office." }, { "author": "Colin J. Hemer", "work": "The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History", "year": "1989", "view": "Applies epigraphic and archaeological evidence about local titles and institutions to the historicity of Acts, arguing that the author was well informed about the places he describes." }, { "author": "Richard I. Pervo", "work": "Dating Acts: Between the Evangelists and the Apologists", "year": "2006", "view": "Argues that Acts was written in the early 2nd century (about AD 115). On this view, accurate local titles cannot by themselves secure an early date." }, { "author": "Manuela Mari", "work": "Istituzioni cittadine della Macedonia preromana: alcune novità epigrafiche, Historika 7", "year": "2017", "view": "Argues that the ephebarchic law from Amphipolis, a royal-period text recopied in 24/3 BC, settles that politarchs existed before the Roman settlement of 167 BC, while their spread to all Macedonian cities, and probably the growth in their numbers, belongs to the Roman period." }, { "author": "Bradley Ritter", "work": "On the 'politeuma in Heracleopolis', Scripta Classica Israelica 30", "year": "2011", "view": "Reads the petitions to the politarches in the Ptolemaic Heracleopolis papyri as addressed to that city's civic politeuma, not to the head of a Jewish association as their editors proposed. Either way, the title also occurs in Ptolemaic Egypt." }, { "author": "Giorgos Athanasiadis", "work": "Roman Rule and Local Society in the Province of Macedonia: The Case of Thessaloniki, CHS Research Bulletin 14", "year": "2026", "view": "Dates a politarch list he cites as IG X 2,1 126, described in terms that fit the Vardar Gate text (a first politarch named with his mother and his father's full Roman name, two officials surnamed Rheglos), to the early 1st century AD, saying it was rightly redated from Edson's 2nd-century date on prosopographical grounds." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q96631855", "label": "Golden Gate (Vardar Gate), Thessaloniki" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q7210123", "label": "Politarch" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q17151", "label": "Thessaloniki" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "491741", "label": "Thessalonica" } ], "title": "Maandishi ya politarkhi ya Thesalonike na jiwe la Lango la Vardar", "summary": "Maandishi kutoka Thesalonike yanaonyesha kuwa Matendo 17:6 na 17:8 hutumia cheo sahihi, politarkhi, kwa maafisa wakuu wa mji: maandishi kuanzia Augusto hadi 143 BK huorodhesha mabaraza ya watu watano au sita. Jiwe la Lango la Vardar lililo sasa katika British Museum huorodhesha sita kwa usomaji wa kawaida, ingawa tarehe yake inabishaniwa. Cheo ni adimu katika fasihi lakini cha kawaida katika maandishi ya Makedonia. Mawe haya hayathibitishi tukio, dhamana au mtu yeyote katika Matendo 17:1–9.", "dating": "Jiwe la Lango la Vardar halina fomula ya tarehe. Burton aliliweka baada ya 30 KK na huenda hata 143 BK au baadaye; Athanasiadis huweka orodha anayoitaja kama IG X 2,1 126, anayoieleza kwa namna inayolingana na maandishi haya, katika mwanzo wa karne ya 1 BK badala ya karne ya 2 ya Edson. Maandishi mengine ya politarkhi ya Thesalonike huanzia utawala wa Augusto hadi 143 BK.", "currentLocation": "British Museum, London (jiwe la Lango la Vardar, lililotolewa na J. E. Blunt mwaka 1877, kulingana na GIBM). Maandishi ya politarkhi ya wakati wa Augusto kutoka lango la Kalamaria yamepotea (Burton).", "establishes": [ "Maafisa wakuu wa kiraia wa Thesalonike waliunda baraza lenye cheo cha politarkhi, maafisa ambao matoleo ya Kiingereza ya Matendo 17:6 na 17:8 huwaita watawala wa mji. Maandishi ya wakati wa Augusto kutoka lango la Kalamaria yaliyopotea sasa hutaja watano, maandishi ya 143 BK hutaja sita, na jiwe la Lango la Vardar hutaja sita kwa usomaji wa kawaida. Hilo linalingana na baraza la watu kadhaa ambalo Yasoni na waamini wengine waliletwa mbele yake.", "Katika fasihi ya Kiyunani iliyohifadhiwa cheo hutokea katika Matendo tu; Aeneas Tacticus 26.12 (katikati ya karne ya 4 KK) ina umbo linalohusiana, politarchos. Maandishi ya kale hushuhudia wadhifa mara nyingi, hasa sana huko Makedonia. Kwa hiyo Matendo hutumia istilahi maalumu ya eneo badala ya neno la jumla la watawala.", "Maandishi ya 143 BK pia hutaja baraza la mji (boule) na watu (demos), mazingira ya kiraia ambayo Matendo 17:5–9 hudhania wakati umati unapotaka kuwaleta wamisionari mbele ya watu. Mkutano na baraza vilikuwa vya kawaida katika miji ya Kiyunani, hivyo hili ni jambo la jumla; ulinganifu maalumu ni cheo cha politarkhi." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hayathibitishi tukio lolote la Matendo 17:1–9: mahubiri katika sinagogi, ghasia, ukarimu wa Yasoni, wala dhamana iliyochukuliwa kutoka kwa Yasoni na wengine.", "Wadhifa unashuhudiwa kuanzia kabla ya mpangilio wa Kirumi wa 167 KK (kwa usomaji wa Mari wa sheria ya ephebarchic ya Amfipoli) hadi karne ya 3 BK, katika miji mingi ya Makedonia na kwingine. Kwa hiyo matumizi sahihi ya cheo hayawezi yenyewe kuweka tarehe ya Matendo au kuonyesha kuwa mwandishi wake alikuwa shahidi wa macho.", "Majina ya jiwe, Sosipatros, Secundus na Gaius, yalikuwa ya kawaida. Secundus ni baba wa politarkhi wa kwanza na Gaius ni jina la kwanza la politarkhi mwingine, Gaius Agilleius Poteitus. Kwa hiyo hawatambulishi Sekundo au Gayo wa Matendo 19:29 na 20:4, au Sosipater wa Warumi 16:21." ], "debate": "Maswali yaliyo wazi yanajumuisha tarehe ya jiwe la Lango la Vardar. Tarehe ya Boeckh ya Flavian au baadaye (si kabla ya 69 BK) ilitegemea jina lililosomwa vibaya; Burton aliweka baada ya 30 KK na huenda hadi 143 BK au baadaye; Athanasiadis anaripoti kuwekwa upya katika mwanzo wa karne ya 1 kwa orodha anayoitaja kama IG X 2,1 126, inayoonekana kuwa maandishi haya, dhidi ya tarehe ya Edson ya karne ya 2. Jiwe huorodhesha politarkhi sita kwa usomaji wa kawaida, ingawa Mordtmann aliona watano kuwa inawezekana. Swali pana ni cheo sahihi kinaongeza kiasi gani kwa kutegemeka kwa Matendo: Hemer huhesabu maelezo kama haya kuwa ushahidi wa mwandishi mwenye maarifa, huku Pervo akiweka Matendo karibu 115 BK. Madai kuwa wasomi walitia shaka cheo mpaka jiwe hili lilipopatikana hayaungwi mkono: lilichapishwa 1740, na kamusi za Agano Jipya za karne ya 19 tayari zililitaja (Burton).", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Mwandishi mwenye maarifa lakini wa baadaye", "statement": "Ushahidi wa Burton unaonyesha politarkhi hadi karne ya 3 BK, kwa hiyo mwandishi mwenye maarifa aliyeandika mwanzo wa karne ya 2 (kama Pervo anavyohoji kuhusu Matendo) bado angeweza kutumia cheo kwa usahihi. Kwa maoni haya maandishi huthibitisha usahihi wa mazingira, si tarehe ya mapema au usimulizi wa shahidi wa macho." }, { "label": "Maelezo sahihi katika hoja inayojengwa kwa ushahidi mwingi", "statement": "Hemer na wengine huona cheo sahihi kama moja ya maelezo mengi sahihi ya eneo katika Matendo, ambayo kwa pamoja huashiria mwandishi mwenye ufahamu wa karibu wa sehemu zinazoelezwa. Hata kwa maoni haya, maandishi huthibitisha cheo, si tukio." }, { "label": "Cha Makedonia badala ya kuwa cha Thesalonike pekee", "statement": "Politarkhi wanashuhudiwa katika miji mingine ya Makedonia na pia Thrace, Bithinia na Bosporus, na politarches huonekana katika mafunjo ya kipindi cha Ptolemy kutoka Heracleopolis huko Misri. Kwa hiyo istilahi inafaa mji wa Makedonia kwa ujumla badala ya kuwa maarifa ya ndani ya Thesalonike pekee, ingawa Thesalonike hutoa sehemu kubwa isiyo ya kawaida ya ushahidi." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence/thessalonica-politarchs" }, { "id": "sergius-paulus-inscriptions", "kind": "inscription", "dateFrom": 14, "dateTo": 96, "corpusReferences": [ "CIL VI 31545", "ILS 5926", "EDR127293", "TM 281782", "EDH HD046352", "AE 2002, 1457", "TM 176947", "EDH HD046353", "AE 2002, 1458", "TM 176948", "IGR III 300", "Sterrett, EJ 134,108", "JRS 3 (1913) 262,5", "IGR III 930", "ABSA 42 (1947) 201,1", "IGR III 935", "SEG 20:302", "SEG 55:1526", "Myres 1914, no. 1903" ], "confidence": "medium", "epistemicStatus": "debated", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 13:6-12", "Acts 13:7" ], "personIds": [ "person.sergius-paulus", "person.paul", "person.barnabas", "person.elymas", "person.claudius" ], "placeIds": [ "place.rome", "place.cyprus", "place.paphos", "place.pisidian-antioch" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "edcs", "work": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss/Slaby: CIL 06, 31545 (p 3796, 4362) = ILS 5926; TM 281782", "locator": "EDCS-19500065 (CIL 06, 31545 (p 3796, 4362) = ILS 5926; TM 281782)", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/data/monument/195/19500065.json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "edh-heidelberg", "work": "Epigraphic Database Heidelberg: honorific base of L. Sergius Paullus filius, Antiochia Pisidiae", "locator": "EDH HD046352 (AE 2002, 1457; TM 176947)", "url": "https://edh.ub.uni-heidelberg.de/data/api/inschrift/suche?hd_nr=HD046352", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "edh-heidelberg", "work": "Epigraphic Database Heidelberg: fragment naming Paullus Ser[gius] and L. Serg[ius], Antiochia Pisidiae", "locator": "EDH HD046353 (AE 2002, 1458; TM 176948)", "url": "https://edh.ub.uni-heidelberg.de/data/api/inschrift/suche?hd_nr=HD046353", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "museum-record", "author": "John L. Myres", "work": "Handbook of the Cesnola Collection of Antiquities from Cyprus (Metropolitan Museum of Art)", "year": "1914", "locator": "no. 1903, p. 319 (appendix text p. 548)", "url": "https://archive.org/download/handbookofcesnol00metruoft/handbookofcesnol00metruoft_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1896", "locator": "ch. IV, p. 74", "url": "https://archive.org/download/stpaultravellerr00rams/stpaultravellerr00rams_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "dated \"in the proconsulship of Paulus,\" who probably is the same governor that played a part in the strange and interesting scene now to be described.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "dio-cassius-cary", "author": "Cassius Dio", "translator": "Earnest Cary", "work": "Roman History (Loeb Classical Library, vol. VI)", "year": "1917", "locator": "54.4.1", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Cassius_Dio/54*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "It was at this time that he restored to the people both Cyprus and Gallia Narbonensis as districts no longer needing the presence of his armies; and thus proconsuls began to be sent to those provinces also.", "role": "primary-text" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "The Bearing of Recent Discovery on the Trustworthiness of the New Testament", "year": "1915", "view": "Proposed, as a hypothesis, that the Antioch L. Sergius Paullus was the proconsul's son, whom he inferred governed Galatia about AD 72-74, and that Sergia Paulla was the proconsul's daughter. Held that Christianity passed into this female line, while the son's branch stayed pagan." }, { "author": "R. Cagnat (ed.)", "work": "Inscriptiones Graecae ad res Romanas pertinentes III", "year": "1906", "view": "Suggests that the Quintus Ser[gius] of no. 935 was perhaps proconsul of Cyprus, and doubts that the Paulus of no. 930 is L. Sergius Paullus." }, { "author": "T. B. Mitford", "work": "Notes on Some Published Inscriptions of Roman Cyprus (Annual of the British School at Athens 42)", "year": "1947", "view": "Re-edited the Soli epitaph. As reported by van Elderen, he read the Paulus year as 10, computed AD 50 at the earliest if it is a Claudian regnal year, judged the inscription probably considerably later, and thought Myres's restoration at Kythrea at least plausible." }, { "author": "Bastiaan Van Elderen", "work": "Some Archaeological Observations on Paul's First Missionary Journey, in Apostolic History and the Gospel (ed. W. W. Gasque and R. P. Martin)", "year": "1970", "view": "Held that the Soli text cannot be tied to the Acts proconsul and that the Tiber-curator identification is unproven, since nothing links L. Sergius Paullus to Cyprus. Rejected Ramsay's family theory, and thought the Kythrea fragment the most attractive candidate, with reservation." }, { "author": "Douglas A. Campbell", "work": "Possible Inscriptional Attestation to Sergius Paul[l]us (Acts 13:6-12), and the Implications for Pauline Chronology (Journal of Theological Studies n.s. 56)", "year": "2005", "view": "Restores Tiberius and Quintus Sergius Paul[l]us, probably the governor, in the Kythrea text. On that cautious restoration, Paul's first journey took place during or before AD 37, about ten years earlier than usually thought." }, { "author": "Jonathan Bernier", "work": "When Paul Met Sergius: An Assessment of Douglas Campbell's Pauline Chronology for the Years 36 to 37 (Journal of Biblical Literature 138)", "year": "2019", "view": "Judges Campbell's reconstruction not impossible on the present data, but improbable enough that it should be rejected." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q2566388", "label": "Sergius Paulus, proconsul of Cyprus" }, { "scheme": "trismegistos", "id": "281782", "label": "CIL VI 31545, Tiber cippus naming L. Sergius Paullus" }, { "scheme": "trismegistos", "id": "176947", "label": "Base of L. Sergius Paullus filius, Pisidian Antioch (EDH HD046352)" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "423025", "label": "Roma" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "609307", "label": "Antiochia/Col. Caesarea (Pisidian Antioch)" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "707624", "label": "Soloi/Aipeia? (Cyprus)" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "707496", "label": "Chyt(h)roi (Kythrea, Cyprus)" } ], "title": "Maandishi yanayoweza kumtaja liwali Sergio Paulo", "summary": "Hakuna maandishi yaliyohifadhiwa yanayomtaja kwa uhakika liwali Sergio Paulo wa Matendo 13:7. Jiwe la mpaka la wakati wa Klaudio huko Rumi humtaja seneta, L. Sergius Paullus; Antiokia ya Pisidia ina Sergii Paulli baadaye katika karne hiyo; maandishi ya kaburi la Soli hutaja wadhifa ulioshikiliwa chini ya liwali Paulus; kipande cha Kythrea husomwa kama kumtaja Quintus Serg-. Yanaonyesha jina linafaa seneta wa kipindi hicho, lakini kila uhusiano na mtawala wa Kipro hutegemea urejeshaji wa maandishi, hitimisho au maandishi yasiyo na tarehe.", "dating": "Cippus ya Rumi 41–54 BK (Klaudio; EDR hupendekeza 41–47). Kipande cha Kythrea: nusu ya kwanza ya karne ya 1 katika rekodi ya Met na karne ya 1 kwa maumbo ya herufi (van Elderen), huku jina la kaisari likirejeshwa kuwa Tiberius au Klaudio. Maandishi ya kaburi la Soli baada ya Klaudio (PHI); mwaka wa Paulus unaotajwa ni wa mapema zaidi na hautaji enzi ya kuhesabia. Antiokia ya Pisidia: maandishi ya Sergia Paulla 81–96 BK; msingi wa L. Sergius Paullus filius hauna tarehe (Ramsay aliweka herufi za maandishi sawa ya Salir katika 60–100 BK).", "currentLocation": "Rumi, Museo Nazionale Romano, ukumbi wa Michelangelo, inv. 242 (cippus ya Tiber, kulingana na EDR). New York, Metropolitan Museum of Art, Cesnola Collection, accession 74.51.2425 (kipande cha Kythrea, kulingana na rekodi ya Met). Mahali ya sasa ya mawe ya Soli na Antiokia ya Pisidia hayajathibitishwa.", "establishes": [ "Kipro ilitawaliwa na maliwali baada ya Augusto kuirudisha chini ya usimamizi wa watu karibu 22 KK (Dio 54.4.1), kwa hiyo cheo cha Matendo kwa mtawala wa kisiwa kinafaa kipindi, kama Ramsay alivyosisitiza.", "Cippus ya mpaka kutoka Tiber huko Rumi (CIL VI 31545 = ILS 5926), iliyowekwa kwa mamlaka ya Klaudio (41–54 BK), huorodhesha L. Sergius Paullus kama mmoja wa wasimamizi watano wa kingo na mkondo wa mto. Kwa hiyo seneta mwenye majina yote mawili yanayotolewa na Matendo alishikilia wadhifa wa umma huko Rumi chini ya Klaudio.", "Huko Antiokia ya Pisidia msingi wa heshima usio na tarehe (EDH HD046352) humtaja L. Sergius Paullus, mwana wa Lucius, anayeitwa filius (mdogo), mwanzoni mwa kazi ya useneta: kamishna wa barabara (IIIIvir viarum curandarum), jemadari wa kijeshi wa legio VI Ferrata, na quaestor. Ramsay alichapisha maandishi sawa kutoka nakala iliyofanywa Salir mwaka 1912. Kipande (EDH HD046353) humheshimu mama mkwe wa Paullus Ser[gius].", "Maandishi ya heshima ya Kiyunani ya 81–96 BK kutoka Antiokia ya Pisidia (IGR III 300) humtaja [Ser]gia(?) Paulla, binti wa Lucius, kama mke wa C. Caristanius Fronto, legate wa Domitian wa Likia na Pamfilia; jina Sergia limerejeshwa kwa sehemu. Pamoja na msingi, yanaashiria familia ya kiseneta ya Sergii Paulli iliyoheshimiwa huko Antiokia ya Pisidia katika sehemu ya mwisho ya karne ya 1.", "Maandishi ya kaburi ya Soli (IGR III 930) yanarekodi kuwa Apollonios, akiwa censor, alirekebisha orodha ya baraza katika mwaka wa 10 chini ya liwali Paulus (cheo kimerejeshwa kwa sehemu; hakuna enzi iliyotajwa). Kipande cha Kythrea (IGR III 935) husomwa kama Quintus Serg- kando ya kaisari ambaye jina lake limepotea. Wahariri hukirejesha kama fomula ya tarehe inayomtaja mtawala, lakini Rigsby hukisoma tofauti." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hakuna kati ya maandishi haya kinachomtaja kwa uhakika liwali wa Matendo 13:7. Jiwe la Rumi halitoi wadhifa wa Kipro, maandishi ya Soli hutoa Paulus tu, na katika kipande cha Kythrea maneno Paulus na proconsul yamerejeshwa yote na wahariri.", "Hayaweki tarehe ya ziara ya Paulo huko Kipro. Urejeshaji wa maandishi ya Kythrea hutofautiana kutoka Tiberius (Campbell: kufikia 37 BK) hadi Klaudio (SEG 20.302: 46–48 BK), na mwaka wa Paulus wa Soli hautaji enzi.", "Hayaonyeshi kuwa Sergii Paulli wa Antiokia ya Pisidia ni wazao wa mtawala wa Kipro, au kuwa yeye au jamaa zake walikuwa Wakristo. Uundaji upya wa Ramsay wa familia hutegemea hitimisho kutokana na majina na ukimya, naye mwenyewe aliuita dhana. Wala mawe hayathibitishi tukio la Elima." ], "debate": "Je, liwali wa Matendo anashuhudiwa katika maandishi yoyote? Wengi humtambulisha na msimamizi wa Tiber L. Sergius Paullus, kwa sababu uliwali wa Kipro ungeweza kuwa kabla au baada ya usimamizi wa wakati wa Klaudio. Lakini, kama van Elderen alivyosisitiza, hakuna maandishi yanayomuunganisha mtu huyo na Kipro, na Matendo halitoi praenomen. Paulus wa Soli hana jina la familia: Mitford, kama van Elderen anavyoripoti, alihesabu 50 BK kuwa tarehe ya mapema zaidi na kuona huenda maandishi ni ya baadaye sana, ilhali usomaji wa awali wa Ramsay uliona maneno kuwa tarehe ya jiwe lenyewe. Huko Kythrea ni Quintus Serg- tu iliyohifadhiwa, hivyo Myres alikataa uhusiano. Campbell alirejesha Tiberius na kuweka ziara kufikia 37 BK, mpangilio ambao Bernier anaona hauwezekani sana. Van Elderen alikataa nadharia ya Ramsay ya familia ya Antiokia ya Pisidia kuwa ya kubashiri mno.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Kumtambulisha na msimamizi wa Tiber", "statement": "Kwa maoni haya liwali wa Matendo 13:7 alikuwa L. Sergius Paullus, msimamizi wa Tiber wa wakati wa Klaudio wa CIL VI 31545, aliyetawala Kipro kabla au baada ya wadhifa huo. Jina na tarehe hulifanya hilo liwezekane, lakini hakuna maandishi yanayomuunganisha na Kipro, na Matendo halitoi praenomen." }, { "label": "Quintus Sergius huko Kythrea", "statement": "Kwa urejeshaji wa Campbell kipande humtaja Quintus Serg[ius Paullus], huenda mtawala; Paulus na proconsul yamerejeshwa kabisa. Campbell hurejesha Tiberius na hivyo kuweka utume wa Kipro kufikia 37 BK, mapema kuliko kawaida; usomaji wa awali wa SEG 20.302 hurejesha Klaudio (46–48). Myres alidhani liwali wa Matendo alikuwa Lucius na akakataa uhusiano; van Elderen aliona huyu kuwa mgombea wa kuvutia zaidi, huku akihifadhi tahadhari." }, { "label": "Dhana ya Ramsay ya familia", "statement": "Ramsay alipendekeza, kama dhana, kuwa L. Sergius Paullus wa Antiokia ya Pisidia alikuwa mwana wa liwali na Sergia Paulla binti yake, na kuwa Ukristo ulipitia kwake hadi kwa mwana wake, huku ukoo wa kiume ukibaki wa kipagani. Van Elderen, akitaja hukumu ya Lake ya miunganiko yenye ubunifu lakini isiyoshawishi, alikataa mpangilio huo." }, { "label": "Bado hajashuhudiwa", "statement": "Hakuna maandishi yaliyohifadhiwa yanayomtaja kwa uhakika liwali wa Matendo. Maseneta kadhaa waliitwa Paullus: IGR III 939 huko Palaepaphos humtaja Paullus Fabius Maximus, ambaye Dessau alihitimisha alikuwa ametawala Kipro. Jina la pamoja pekee haliwezi kuamua utambulisho." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence/sergius-paulus-inscriptions" }, { "id": "derbe-inscription", "kind": "inscription", "dateFrom": 157, "dateTo": 600, "corpusReferences": [ "SEG 16.758" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "source-supported", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 14:6", "Acts 14:20-21", "Acts 16:1", "Acts 20:4" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.barnabas", "person.timothy", "person.gaius" ], "placeIds": [ "place.derbe", "place.lystra", "place.lycaonia", "place.galatia" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "sterrett-wolfe-expedition", "author": "J. R. S. Sterrett", "work": "The Wolfe Expedition to Asia Minor (Papers of the American School of Classical Studies at Athens III)", "year": "1888", "locator": "p. 22 (itinerary for 5 June, Bosola to Almassen)", "url": "https://archive.org/download/papersofamerican03arch/papersofamerican03arch_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I consider that the ruins of Bosola and Losta, being so near together, represent one and the same ancient city. This city I should like to call Derbe. Stephanus Byzantinus says Derbe was a fortress of Isauria, a designation which would suit this site well enough.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1896", "locator": "ch. VIII §5, p. 192", "url": "https://archive.org/download/stpaultravellerr00rams/stpaultravellerr00rams_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Derbe alone is not mentioned either in the tradition (so far as my knowledge extends) or in the history of the Church until we come down to A.D. 381, when its bishop Daphnus was present at the Council of Constantinople.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1896", "locator": "ch. V §9, p. 120", "url": "https://archive.org/download/stpaultravellerr00rams/stpaultravellerr00rams_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "In Derbe nothing special is recorded : the same process went on as in previous cases. Here on the limits of the Roman province the Apostles turned.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "pleiades", "work": "Pleiades: Derbe/Claudioderbe", "locator": "Pleiades 648620", "url": "https://pleiades.stoa.org/places/648620/json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata: Derbe (ancient city)", "locator": "Q20717624", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q20717624.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "M. Ballance", "work": "The Site of Derbe: A New Inscription (Anatolian Studies 7)", "year": "1957", "view": "Published the dedication by the council and people of Derbe that he found in 1956 at Kerti Höyük, about 22 km north-north-east of Karaman, and argued that Derbe lay north-east of Laranda rather than at the western sites proposed by Sterrett and Ramsay. Van Elderen reports that he judged the block too heavy to have travelled far." }, { "author": "M. H. Ballance", "work": "Derbe and Faustinopolis (Anatolian Studies 14)", "year": "1964", "view": "Judged that the lack of Byzantine settlement at Kerti Höyük counted against it as the city site, and reported the Michael epitaph he was shown at Sudurağı (Sidrova) in 1958. Because that stone was said to come from Devri Şehri, he proposed Devri Şehri as Derbe (as reported by Van Elderen and by Wagner and Wilson)." }, { "author": "George Ogg", "work": "Derbe (New Testament Studies 9)", "year": "1963", "view": "In light of the re-siting, judged that no compelling reason had been given for placing Derbe in the province of Galatia in Paul's time, leaving it an open question (as reported by Van Elderen and by Wagner and Wilson)." }, { "author": "Bastiaan Van Elderen", "work": "Some Archaeological Observations on Paul's First Missionary Journey, in Apostolic History and the Gospel (ed. W. W. Gasque and R. P. Martin)", "year": "1970", "view": "Was told in 1962 that the Michael stone came from Kerti Höyük, and held that Derbe lay near, and probably on, that mound. Argued that Acts 14:20 dates only the departure for Derbe and need not mean a one-day journey, and that Derbe's provincial status in Paul's day could not yet be decided." }, { "author": "Gertrud Laminger-Pascher", "work": "Die kaiserzeitlichen Inschriften Lykaoniens, Faszikel I (Ergänzungsbände zu den Tituli Asiae Minoris 15)", "year": "1992", "view": "Corpus of the imperial-period inscriptions of Lycaonia; the MAMA XI overview of southern Lykaonia cites its Derbe section." }, { "author": "Peter Thonemann (ed.)", "work": "Monumenta Asiae Minoris Antiqua XI (Journal of Roman Studies Monograph)", "year": "2013", "view": "Its overview of southern Lykaonia calls Kerti Höyük the likely site of ancient Derbe." }, { "author": "Richard J. A. Talbert (ed.)", "work": "Barrington Atlas of the Greek and Roman World", "year": "2000", "view": "Map 66 has an entry Derbe/Claudioderbe (cited by Pleiades). Wagner and Wilson report that the map marks Derbe/Claudioderbe at Kerti Höyük and a Derbe at Devri Şehri, leaving the centre ambiguous." }, { "author": "A. H. M. Jones", "work": "The Cities of the Eastern Roman Provinces", "year": "1971", "view": "As reported by Wagner and Wilson, held that Derbe probably received its Claudian prefix from Claudius himself, like Iconium and other cities refounded in his reign, and so was not in the kingdom of Antiochus IV." }, { "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "The Cities of St. Paul", "year": "1907", "view": "Placed Derbe at the Gudelisin mound north-west of Karaman, arguing from surface remains, road geography and a bishopric-list gloss linking Derbe with Possala; he had no inscription naming the city." }, { "author": "Cilliers Breytenbach and Christiane Zimmermann", "work": "Early Christianity in Lycaonia and Adjacent Areas: From Paul to Amphilochius of Iconium", "year": "2018", "view": "As reported by Wagner and Wilson: both mounds lie within Derbe's territory, and the city was near the Laranda-Sidamaria road. They also hold that Derbe was under Antiochus IV of Commagene, not Roman rule, when Paul visited." }, { "author": "Bob Wagner and Mark Wilson", "work": "Why Derbe? An Unlikely Lycaonian City for Paul's Ministry (Tyndale Bulletin 70.1)", "year": "2019", "view": "Review the history of attempts to locate Derbe. They hold that the two inscriptions situate it more precisely but leave the choice between Kerti Höyük and Devri Şehri open, and report that excavation begun at Kerti Höyük in 2013 did not continue and is unpublished." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "648620", "label": "Derbe/Claudioderbe" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q20717624", "label": "Derbe (ancient city)" }, { "scheme": "trismegistos", "id": "59721", "label": "Derbe (Kerti Hüyük)" } ], "title": "Maandishi yanayotaja Derbe karibu na Karaman (Kerti Höyük na Devri Şehri)", "summary": "Maandishi mawili ya Kiyunani hutaja Derbe katika tambarare kaskazini mashariki mwa Karaman (Laranda ya kale). Moja ni wakfu wa kiraia kwa Antoninus Pius wa 157 BK, uliopatikana Kerti Höyük (pia huandikwa Kerti Hüyük) mwaka 1956. Jingine ni maandishi ya kaburi ya baadaye ya Michael, askofu wa Derbe, yaliyoonekana Sudurağı iliyo karibu. Kwa pamoja huweka Derbe ya Matendo 14:20–21 na 16:1 katika wilaya hii. Hakuna ya karne ya kwanza, na eneo kamili la mji bado linabishaniwa.", "dating": "157 BK kwa wakfu wa kiraia kwa Antoninus Pius (Van Elderen; Wagner na Wilson). Maandishi ya kaburi ya askofu hutoa 8 Juni tu ya mwaka wa kumi na nne wa indiction; Van Elderen aliona herufi zake kuwa huenda ni za mwishoni mwa karne ya 4 hadi ya 5, na Wagner na Wilson hutoa karne ya 5–6.", "currentLocation": "Konya Archaeological Museum (wakfu; Van Elderen 1970, na Wagner na Wilson 2019 wakimtaja McLean 2002). Bustani ya Karaman Archaeological Museum (maandishi ya kaburi ya Michael; Wagner na Wilson 2019).", "establishes": [ "Mwaka 1956 Ballance alipata kitalu cha chokaa chenye maandishi kwenye mteremko wa Kerti Höyük, karibu 22 km kaskazini-kaskazini-mashariki mwa Karaman (SEG 16.758). Kinamheshimu Antoninus Pius, ni cha 157 BK, na kiliwekwa na baraza (boule) na watu (demos) wa Derbe; maandishi yaliyochapishwa hurejesha jina la watu wa mji kama [Claudio]derbetans.", "Kwa hiyo katikati ya karne ya 2 Derbe ilikuwa jumuiya ya kiraia inayojitawala, yenye baraza na mkutano wake, ikimheshimu kaisari kwa namna ya kawaida ya miji ya Kiyunani.", "Maandishi ya kaburi ya Kikristo humweleza Michael kama askofu wa Derbe anayempenda Mungu sana, na hutoa tarehe ya 8 Juni tu ya mwaka wa kumi na nne wa indiction. Ballance aliyaona Sudurağı (Sidrova) mwaka 1958 na Van Elderen mwaka 1962. Yanashuhudia uaskofu wa baadaye wa Derbe katika wilaya hiyo hiyo.", "Kwa pamoja maandishi mawili huweka Derbe ya Matendo 14:6, 14:20–21 na 16:1 kaskazini mashariki mwa Laranda, karibu 95 km kwa mstari ulionyooka kutoka Listra. Hilo liliondoa mapendekezo ya awali ya kaskazini magharibi mwa Karaman (Bosola na Losta ya Sterrett, pia ikiitwa Zosta; Gudelisin ya Ramsay), hakuna lililoungwa mkono na maandishi yanayotaja Derbe." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hakuna maandishi ya wakati wa Paulo. Wakfu ni wa karibu karne moja baadaye na maandishi ya kaburi ya baadaye zaidi. Yanashuhudia mji na kanisa lake la baadaye, si mahubiri ya Paulo na Barnaba huko, wanafunzi waliopatikana humo, au uhusiano wa Timotheo au Gayo na Derbe.", "Hakuna jiwe lililopatikana katika uchimbaji uliorekodiwa. Wakfu ulikuwa kwenye mteremko wa kilima, na mahali maandishi ya kaburi yalipopatikana hutegemea taarifa zinazokinzana kwa Ballance na Van Elderen. Kwa hiyo mawe hayaamui kama kitovu cha mji kilikuwa Kerti Höyük, Devri Şehri, au eneo pana lililojumuisha vyote viwili.", "Jina la mji la wakati wa Klaudio haliamui hadhi yake katika miaka ya 40: Breytenbach na Zimmermann (kama Wagner na Wilson wanavyoripoti) huliona kama heshima iliyotolewa chini ya Antiochus IV wa Commagene, huku Jones akichukulia kiambishi cha mwanzo kama zawadi ya Klaudio mwenyewe, ambayo ingeweka Derbe nje ya ufalme wa Antiochus.", "Hayaleti mgongano na Matendo 14:20. Uwekaji mpya huweka Derbe karibu 95 km kutoka Listra, lakini mstari huweka wakati wa kuondoka tu, si wa kuwasili, hivyo si lazima umaanishe safari ya siku moja (Van Elderen)." ], "debate": "Ballance aliona kuwa uwezekano wa kitalu kizito (karibu tani moja, kulingana na Van Elderen) kusogezwa mbali ulikuwa mdogo, na akaweka Derbe katika au karibu na Kerti Höyük. Mwaka 1964 alipendelea Devri Şehri, karibu 4 km kusini-kusini-mashariki, kwa sababu Kerti Höyük haikuonyesha makazi ya Byzantine na jiwe la askofu lilisemekana kutoka Devri Şehri. Van Elderen aliambiwa mwaka 1962 kuwa lilitoka Kerti Höyük, akaona mabaki ya Byzantine kwenye vilima vilivyo karibu, na akabaki na Kerti Höyük. Van Elderen, MAMA na orodha ya maeneo ya jimbo la Karaman hupendelea Kerti Höyük; Barrington Atlas, kama Wagner na Wilson wanavyoripoti, huweka alama kwa vyote viwili. Wagner na Wilson wanaripoti kuwa uchimbaji ulianza 2013 lakini haukuendelea na haujachapishwa. Ikiwa Derbe ilikuwa ndani ya Galatia ya Kirumi wakati Paulo alipokuja bado ni swali tofauti lililo wazi.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Devri Şehri kama eneo la mji", "statement": "Ballance (1964) alipendelea Devri Şehri, karibu 4 km kusini-kusini-mashariki mwa Kerti Höyük, kwa sababu Kerti Höyük haikuonyesha makazi ya Byzantine na maandishi ya kaburi ya askofu yalisemekana kutoka Devri Şehri. Wagner na Wilson wanaona kuwa IVP Atlas hufuata uwekaji huu." }, { "label": "Eneo moja, kitovu hakijabainishwa", "statement": "Kama Wagner na Wilson (2019) wanavyoripoti, Breytenbach na Zimmermann (2018) huona vilima vyote viwili kuwa ndani ya eneo la Derbe na huweka mji karibu na barabara ya Laranda-Sidamaria bila kubainisha kitovu chake cha mjini." }, { "label": "Utambulisho wa awali wa kaskazini magharibi", "statement": "Kabla ya 1956, Sterrett (Bosola na Losta, pia ikiitwa Zosta) na kisha Ramsay (Gudelisin, katika The Cities of St. Paul, 1907) waliweka Derbe kaskazini magharibi mwa Karaman, karibu zaidi na Listra. Sterrett alishawishika kuwa Derbe lazima iwe karibu na Listra; Ramsay alitegemea mabaki ya juu ya ardhi, jiografia ya barabara na maelezo ya baadaye katika orodha ya uaskofu. Hakuna aliyekuwa na maandishi yanayotaja Derbe, na atlasi za karibuni zimeacha maoni hayo." }, { "label": "Derbe nje ya jimbo wakati wa Paulo", "statement": "Ogg (1963) alijenga hoja kuwa uwekaji mpya uliacha wazi kama Derbe ilikuwa ndani ya jimbo la Galatia wakati wa Paulo; Van Elderen aliongeza ushahidi wa sarafu kuwa Laranda iliyo karibu ilikuwa chini ya Antiochus IV kuanzia 41 BK. Breytenbach na Zimmermann (kama ilivyoripotiwa) huweka Derbe chini ya Antiochus IV, huku Jones akishikilia kuwa kiambishi chake cha Klaudio kilitoka kwa Klaudio mwenyewe. Jibu linaathiri nadharia ya Galatia ya Kusini kuhusu Wagalatia." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-derbe-inscription" }, { "id": "corinth-macellum", "kind": "inscription", "dateFrom": -27, "dateTo": 50, "corpusReferences": [ "Corinth VIII.2 124", "Corinth VIII.2 125", "Corinth VIII.3 321", "EDH HD058881", "EDH HD058882", "EDCS-32001248", "EDCS-08200358", "TM 177612", "TM 177613" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "1 Corinthians 10:25", "1 Corinthians 10:23-33", "1 Corinthians 8:1-13", "Acts 18:1-18" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul" ], "placeIds": [ "place.corinth", "place.achaia" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "edh-heidelberg", "work": "Epigraphic Database Heidelberg: building/dedicatory inscription from Colonia Laus Iulia Corinthus (West 124 + Kent 321, copy 1)", "locator": "EDH HD058881", "url": "https://edh.ub.uni-heidelberg.de/edh/inschrift/HD058881", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record", "author": "Epigraphic Database Heidelberg (Cowey)", "year": "2010" }, { "sourceKey": "edh-heidelberg", "work": "Epigraphic Database Heidelberg: building/dedicatory inscription from Colonia Laus Iulia Corinthus (West 125, copy 2)", "locator": "EDH HD058882", "url": "https://edh.ub.uni-heidelberg.de/edh/inschrift/HD058882", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record", "author": "Epigraphic Database Heidelberg (Cowey)", "year": "2012" }, { "sourceKey": "edcs", "work": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss-Slaby (Corinth-08-02, 00124; Corinth-08-03, 00321)", "locator": "EDCS-32001248", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/data/monument/320/32001248.json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "edcs", "work": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss-Slaby (Corinth-08-02, 00125)", "locator": "EDCS-08200358", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/data/monument/082/08200358.json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "trismegistos", "work": "Trismegistos text relations: Corinth macellum dedication, copy 1", "locator": "TM 177612", "url": "https://www.trismegistos.org/dataservices/texrelations/uri/177612", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "trismegistos", "work": "Trismegistos text relations: Corinth macellum dedication, copy 2", "locator": "TM 177613", "url": "https://www.trismegistos.org/dataservices/texrelations/uri/177613", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Henry J. Cadbury", "work": "The Macellum of Corinth (Journal of Biblical Literature 53)", "year": "1934", "view": "Cadbury believed he was the first to link the Corinthian MACELLV fragment, which he says was found in 1898, to Paul's term in 1 Corinthians 10:25. He reported West's dating to the last years of Augustus or the reign of Tiberius, questioned the assumption that both copies had identical wording and named a single Macellum Piscarium, and reported de Waele's proposal of two separate market buildings. He held that macella sold fish and other provisions as well as meat, doubted that they were necessarily close to idolatry, noted that the word's ultimate origin is disputed though it was regarded as Roman, and left the building's location open." }, { "author": "Allen Brown West", "work": "Corinth VIII.2: Latin Inscriptions, 1896-1926", "year": "1931", "view": "West published nos. 124 and 125 as dedications of a macellum by the Cornelii, with a piscarium, and on epigraphic grounds placed them in the last years of Augustus or the reign of Tiberius. Cadbury and Gill describe differently whether he inferred one combined Macellum Piscarium or a separate fish market. Known here only through their reports and the EDH and EDCS records." }, { "author": "John Harvey Kent", "work": "Corinth VIII.3: The Inscriptions, 1926-1950", "year": "1966", "view": "Kent added a thirteenth fragment of copy 1, found in the South Basilica in 1936 (no. 321), revised West's text of no. 124, read the freedman's patron as Quintus, and translated the restored text as a meat market given with a fish market. He dated it to the reign of Augustus by the tail of the letter Q." }, { "author": "Ned Nabers", "work": "A Note on Corinth VIII, 2, 125 (American Journal of Archaeology 73)", "year": "1969", "view": "As Gill (1992) summarizes it, Nabers argued that the Cornelii are unlikely to have built two buildings serving the same function. On this view the 'macellum cum ...' formula lists features of one complex, here including provision for fish." }, { "author": "David W. J. Gill", "work": "The Meat-Market at Corinth (1 Corinthians 10:25) (Tyndale Bulletin 43.2)", "year": "1992", "view": "Gill argues that the pair of Latin inscriptions establishes a Corinthian macellum, given probably in the Augustan period by a member of the local elite, with fish facilities inside one complex. He sets aside the South Stoa graffito once read as naming a butcher because Broneer revised it to a personal name. He reports de Waele's Peribolos proposal, Wiseman's note of a macellum north of Temple Hill and Ward-Perkins's description of the North Market, says the macellum has not been identified with certainty, and infers its probable form from macella at Pompeii and Lepcis Magna." }, { "author": "Gordon D. Fee", "work": "The First Epistle to the Corinthians", "year": "1987", "view": "As quoted by Gill (1992), Fee treated a Latin macellum inscription from Corinth as undoubtedly naming the very market Paul refers to, without citing the inscription." }, { "author": "Vasilis Evangelidis", "work": "Macella and Makelloi in Roman Greece: The Archaeological and Textual Evidence (Hesperia 88.2)", "year": "2019", "view": "Evangelidis surveys the evidence, mostly inscriptions and texts, for food-market buildings in Roman Greece from the 1st century BC to the 3rd century AD, treating makellos as the likely Hellenized form of Latin macellum, and asks what they reveal about Italo-Roman influence. EDCS cites this article for both Corinth texts. Only the abstract was checked." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "570182", "label": "Corinthus/Korinthos" }, { "scheme": "trismegistos", "id": "177612", "label": "Corinth macellum dedication, copy 1 (Corinth VIII.2 124 + VIII.3 321)" }, { "scheme": "trismegistos", "id": "177613", "label": "Corinth macellum dedication, copy 2 (Corinth VIII.2 125)" } ], "title": "Maandishi ya macellum (soko la nyama) ya Korintho ya Kirumi", "summary": "Korintho ya Kirumi ilikuwa na jengo la soko la umma lililoitwa rasmi macellum, istilahi ya Kilatini ambayo kwa kawaida huhusishwa na soko ambalo Paulo anataja katika 1 Wakorintho 10:25. Kipande kimoja huhifadhi MACELLV[M]; wakfu wa pili unaolingana sana umerejeshwa kuufananisha. Maandishi, yanayowekwa kuanzia wakati wa Augusto hadi Tiberius, huwataja Q. Cornelius Secundus na familia yake kama wafadhili, inaonekana pamoja na kituo cha samaki (piscarium). Hayaonyeshi jengo lilikuwa wapi, kama bado lilitumika miaka ya 50, au liliuza nyama gani.", "dating": "Kuanzia Augusto hadi Tiberius. EDCS hutoa 27 KK hadi 14 BK; Kent aliweka nakala 1 katika utawala wa Augusto kwa maumbo ya herufi; West, kama Cadbury anavyoripoti, alitoa miaka ya mwisho ya Augusto au utawala wa Tiberius; rekodi za uchimbaji hutoa nusu ya kwanza ya karne ya 1 BK. Kipindi cha 27 KK hadi 50 BK kinajumuisha makadirio haya.", "currentLocation": "Corinth Excavations, Ancient Corinth (vipande vinavyotajwa kwa nambari za orodha, I 70 na I 27, vyote ni vya nakala 1; hali ya kuhifadhiwa au kuonyeshwa haijathibitishwa).", "establishes": [ "Wakfu mbili za Kilatini zinazolingana sana katika marumaru nyeupe, kwa kawaida zikichukuliwa kuwa nakala, zimehifadhiwa katika vipande. Nakala 1 (Corinth VIII.2 124, iliyopanuliwa na Kent kama VIII.3 321) imeunganishwa na wahariri kutoka vipande kadhaa; nakala 2 ni VIII.2 125. Herufi MACELLV[ zimehifadhiwa katika nakala 1 tu; katika nakala 2 neno macellum limerejeshwa kabisa.", "Wafadhili ni Q. Cornelius Secundus wa kabila la Aemilia, mke wake Maecia na watoto wao. Mtu aliyeachwa huru kutoka utumwani, Q. Maecius Cleogenes, anatajwa katika hali ya umilikishi katika maneno yaliyorejeshwa kwa sehemu, huenda kama mume wa binti Cornelia Secunda, si kama mfadhili.", "Herufi zilizohifadhiwa PI[ (nakala 1) na ]SCARIO (nakala 2) zimerejeshwa kuwa piscarium, kituo cha samaki, kilichotolewa pamoja na macellum. Ikiwa kilikuwa ndani ya macellum au kando yake kunabishaniwa. Kwa namna yoyote zawadi inafaa hoja ya Cadbury kuwa macella ziliuza samaki na vyakula vingine, si nyama tu.", "Kent aliweka nakala 1 katika utawala wa Augusto kwa maumbo ya herufi, na West akaweka maandishi yote mawili katika miaka ya mwisho ya Augusto au chini ya Tiberius. Kwa hiyo jengo lililoitwa macellum lilitolewa kwa koloni kabla ya Paulo kukaa Korintho (Matendo 18), huenda kwa miongo kadhaa.", "Istilahi ya Kilatini ilitumika rasmi hadharani katika koloni la Kirumi. Neno la Paulo katika 1 Wakorintho 10:25 ni makellon, istilahi iliyoonekana katika kipindi cha Kirumi kama macellum ya Kilatini (asili yake ya mwisho inabishaniwa), na, kama Cadbury alivyoona, mojawapo ya maneno machache sana yaliyoazimwa kutoka Kilatini katika barua za Paulo." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Mahali macellum iliposimama. Kipande alichoongeza Kent kilitoka South Basilica, na Gill anasema jengo halijatambuliwa kwa uhakika. Anaripoti maelezo ya Ward-Perkins ya North Market ya Korintho kama soko la aina ya Pompeii na maelezo ya Wiseman ya macellum kaskazini mwa Temple Hill, lakini hakuna kinachounganisha maandishi haya na mojawapo, au na jengo lolote lililotumika kwa uhakika wakati wa Paulo.", "Ikiwa jengo bado lilitumika Paulo alipoandika, au kiasi gani cha nyama iliyouzwa humo kilitoka katika dhabihu za hekalu. Maandishi yaliyohifadhiwa hutaja wafadhili na jengo, si biashara au usambazaji wake.", "Tukio lolote la Matendo 18 au maelezo yoyote ya mjadala wa Korintho kuhusu chakula kilichotolewa kwa sanamu. Kando na hayo, maandishi ya kukwaruza ya Kiyunani kutoka South Stoa yaliyowahi kusomwa kuwa yanamtaja mchinjaji baadaye yalisomwa upya na mchimbaji wake, Broneer, kama jina la mtu, kama Gill anavyoripoti, kwa hiyo si ushahidi kwa soko." ], "debate": "Maswali matatu yako wazi. Kwanza, je, piscarium ilikuwa sehemu ya macellum moja (Nabers, akifuatwa na Gill) au jengo tofauti? De Waele, kama Cadbury anavyoripoti, alipendekeza majengo mawili ya soko karibu na Lechaion Road; Cadbury alikubali uwezekano wa soko la samaki lililotengana lakini kuunganishwa; na Cadbury na Gill hueleza usomaji wa West mwenyewe kwa namna tofauti. Pili, jengo lilikuwa wapi? De Waele aliliweka kwenye eneo la Peribolos of Apollo kando ya Lechaion Road (imeripotiwa na Cadbury na Gill); Gill pia hutaja maelezo ya Ward-Perkins ya North Market kama soko la aina ya Pompeii. Hakuna eneo hili lililounganishwa na maandishi. Tatu, nyama ya sokoni ilihusiana kwa kiwango gani na dhabihu? Cadbury alitia shaka kuwa macella zilikuwa na uhusiano wa lazima wa karibu na ibada za hekalu. Maagizo ya Paulo katika 1 Wakorintho 10:25–28 hudhania kuwa mnunuzi huenda hakujua kama nyama ilikuwa imetolewa dhabihu.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Majengo mawili tofauti ya soko", "statement": "De Waele, katika barua ya 1934 iliyoripotiwa na Cadbury, alipendekeza macellum katika eneo la baadaye la Peribolos of Apollo na piscarium tofauti kaskazini mwa basilika la Kirumi. Cadbury alikubali uwezekano wa soko tofauti la samaki lililounganishwa. Gill anasema West, akifuatwa na Kent, alisoma Macellum Piscarium tofauti; Cadbury anasema usomaji wa awali ulihitimisha moja tu." }, { "label": "Macellum moja yenye sehemu za samaki", "statement": "Gill anaripoti Nabers (1969) akijenga hoja kuwa haiwezekani sana Cornelii wawe walitoa majengo mawili yenye kazi moja. Maandishi mengine ya macellum hutumia 'macellum cum ...' kuorodhesha sehemu za eneo moja, kwa hiyo huenda macellum ya Korintho ilijumuisha sehemu ya samaki. Gill (1992) hufuata usomaji huu." }, { "label": "Soko lenyewe alilomaanisha Paulo", "statement": "Fee (1987), kama alivyonukuliwa na Gill, huona maandishi ya macellum ya Korintho kuwa yanataja soko lenyewe la 1 Wakorintho 10:25. Hilo linawezekana ikiwa jengo bado lilikuwa soko la vyakula la koloni katika miaka ya 50, lakini maandishi hayaonyeshi kwamba lilidumu wala mahali lilipokuwa, wala kuwa lilikuwa mahali pekee nyama ilipouzwa." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-corinth-macellum" }, { "id": "corinth-bema", "kind": "site", "dateFrom": -44, "dateTo": 54, "corpusReferences": [ "Corinth VIII.3 322", "Corinth VIII.2 47", "Corinth VIII.2 52", "Corinth VIII.3 157", "Corinth VIII.3 306", "Corinth VIII.3 728", "AE 1939, 110", "AE 1947, 198", "EDCS-08200272", "EDCS-15300190" ], "confidence": "medium", "epistemicStatus": "reconstructed", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 18:12-17", "Acts 25:6", "Acts 25:17", "John 19:13" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.gallio", "person.sosthenes" ], "placeIds": [ "place.corinth", "place.achaia" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "edcs", "author": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss-Slaby", "work": "EDCS record of the rostra revetment inscription, Corinth (cites West no. 47; = Kent no. 322)", "locator": "EDCS-08200272", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/data/monument/082/08200272.json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "edcs", "author": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss-Slaby", "work": "EDCS record of a governor's letter to Corinth with the note that it was read from the rostra (AE 1939, 110; = Kent no. 306)", "locator": "EDCS-15300190", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/data/monument/153/15300190.json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "pleiades", "author": "Pleiades", "work": "Corinthus/Korinthos", "locator": "570182", "url": "https://pleiades.stoa.org/places/570182/json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Oscar Broneer", "work": "Studies in the Topography of Corinth at the Time of St. Paul (Archaiologike Ephemeris)", "year": "1937", "view": "Cited by Scranton (1957) for the view that the church on the Bema commemorated Paul's trial there (bibliography only, not inspected)." }, { "author": "Robert L. Scranton", "work": "Corinth I.3: Monuments in the Lower Agora and North of the Archaic Temple", "year": "1951", "view": "Standard architectural publication of the Bema; Kent relies on it for the revetment fit and an original poros facade (bibliography only, not inspected)." }, { "author": "Allen Brown West", "work": "Corinth VIII.2: Latin Inscriptions, 1896-1926", "year": "1931", "view": "First published two of the fragments that Kent later joined into no. 322, as West nos. 47 and 52, before the fragment preserving ROST was found in 1937-1938 (known here through Kent's concordance and EDCS)." }, { "author": "John Harvey Kent", "work": "Corinth VIII.3: The Inscriptions, 1926-1950", "year": "1966", "view": "Restored scattered marble fragments as a building text naming the rostra and, matching the slab's thickness and finish to the platform's orthostates, concluded that the central structure was the Bema, officially called the Rostra, with marble revetments of the first half of the 1st century AD, probably the second quarter. He held that it first had a poros facade, and thought a 9th/10th-century text naming a church of Paul probably belonged to the church on the Bema." }, { "author": "Robert L. Scranton", "work": "Corinth XVI: Mediaeval Architecture in the Central Area of Corinth", "year": "1957", "view": "Found a church or burial chapel near the Bema from the 9th or early 10th century, and a church on the Bema certainly by the 12th. He judged that the common explanation, that the church commemorated Paul's trial, requires a continuity from antiquity that is difficult to establish." }, { "author": "Andrew Gallia (Corinth Computer Project, dir. David Gilman Romano)", "work": "Central Shops, Bema, and Temple of Hermes (Corinth Computer Project, Roman Forum ca. A.D. 150)", "year": "2007", "view": "Holds that the Rostra was likely built soon after the colony's foundation in 44 BC, its concrete core faced with poros blocks, and that its white marble decoration and flanking benched alcoves came later, tentatively in the early to mid-1st century AD. It served events such as public oratory and important legal tribunals." }, { "author": "Paul D. Scotton, Catherine de Grazia Vanderpool and Carolynn Roncaglia", "work": "Corinth XXII: The Julian Basilica: Architecture, Sculpture, Epigraphy", "year": "2022", "view": "According to the publisher's description, the Julian Basilica at the east end of the forum held one of the largest known shrines to the imperial cult and was the likely site of the imperial court of law for the province of Achaia. That makes it a possible alternative venue for formal proconsular hearings." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "570182", "label": "Corinthus/Korinthos (the ancient city; no separate Pleiades entry for the bema)" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1363688", "label": "Ancient Corinth (the city; no Wikidata item found for the bema itself)" } ], "title": "Bema (rostra) katika uwanja wa umma wa Kirumi huko Korintho", "summary": "Inawezekana, lakini haijathibitishwa. Jukwaa kubwa katika uwanja wa umma wa Kirumi wa Korintho ni pendekezo linalofaa kwa mahakama (bēma) ambako Galio alikataa kumhukumu Paulo (Matendo 18:12–17). Kent alirejesha vipande vya marumaru vilivyotawanyika kama vinavyoita jukwaa rostra ya koloni, na huenda jukwaa fulani lilikuwepo hapo wakati wa Paulo. Hakuna chanzo cha kale kinachotaja sehemu hiyo; utambulisho ni hitimisho la kisasa kutokana na uchimbaji, na mahakama katika Julian Basilica ni uwezekano mwingine wenye uzito.", "dating": "Huenda jukwaa lilijengwa muda mfupi baada ya kuanzishwa kwa koloni mwaka 44 KK, mwanzoni likiwa na uso wa poros (Corinth Computer Project; Kent). Epistyle yenye maandishi kutoka chumba cha mashariki chenye viti huwekwa kwa tahadhari wakati wa Augusto (Kent 157). Kent aliweka uso wa marumaru (Kent 322) kwa maumbo ya herufi katika nusu ya kwanza ya karne ya 1 BK, huenda robo ya pili, ingawa jedwali lake la majengo huiorodhesha chini ya Klaudio. Kanisa au chapeli ya mazishi ilikuwa karibu nalo kuanzia karne ya 9 au mwanzo wa ya 10; kanisa juu ya jukwaa linathibitishwa kufikia ya 12 (Scranton).", "currentLocation": "Jukwaa mahali pake pa asili katika uwanja wa umma wa Kirumi katika eneo la kiakiolojia la Korintho ya Kale, Ugiriki. Vipande vya kifuniko vya Kent 322 (inv. za Kent 285, 410, 682, 727, 1929, 2119) ni vya mkusanyiko wa Corinth Excavations; uhifadhi au maonyesho yake hayajathibitishwa.", "establishes": [ "Kent aliunganisha vipande vya kifuniko vya marumaru nyeupe, vilivyopatikana 1901–1938 kuzunguka uwanja, kuwa maandishi ya jengo ambayo herufi zake zilizohifadhiwa ROST alizirejesha kuwa rost[ra] (Corinth VIII.3 322; EDCS-08200272). Akilinganisha unene na umaliziaji wa bamba na uso wa jukwaa, alihitimisha kuwa jukwaa la katikati liliitwa rasmi Rostra, jina la Kilatini linalolingana na bēma ya Kiyunani (mahakama).", "Epistyle yenye maandishi kutoka schola ya mashariki huwekwa kwa tahadhari wakati wa Augusto (Kent 157). Kent aliweka uso wa marumaru katika nusu ya kwanza ya karne ya 1, huenda robo ya pili, ingawa jedwali lake la majengo huiorodhesha chini ya Klaudio. Kwa hiyo jukwaa, angalau katika umbo la awali lililofunikwa poros, huenda lilikuwa uwanjani wakati Galio alipotawala Akaya mapema miaka ya 50.", "Korintho ilikuwa na rostra ambako barua rasmi zilisomwa karibu 170 BK (Kent 306; AE 1939, 110). Maandishi hayasemi lilikuwa jengo gani, na yanaonyesha desturi ya karne ya 2 tu.", "Matendo 18:12, 16 na 17 huweka kesi ya Galio kwenye bēma. Uchimbaji unaonyesha kuwa kitovu cha kiraia cha Korintho kilikuwa na jukwaa mashuhuri la umma la aina hiyo, hivyo mazingira ya Luka yanafaa mpangilio wa mji. Mji mkuu wowote wa jimbo ungekuwa na mahakama kama hiyo, hivyo ulinganifu unatarajiwa badala ya kuwa wa pekee." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Kuwa Paulo alisimama mbele ya jukwaa hili. Hakuna maandishi ya kale yanayoliunganisha na Galio au Paulo; utambulisho ni hitimisho la kisasa kutokana na mahali na kazi ya jukwaa.", "Tarehe au maelezo ya kesi. Muhula wa Galio huwekwa tarehe kwa barua tofauti ya Klaudio ya Delphi, na Matendo ndiyo simulizi pekee la kesi.", "Kumbukumbu endelevu ya Kikristo ya Paulo mahali hapo. Kanisa au chapeli ya mazishi ilikuwa karibu na jukwaa kuanzia karne ya 9 au mapema ya 10, na kanisa juu yake linathibitishwa kufikia ya 12; Scranton aliona kuwa mwendelezo unaohitajika kutoka nyakati za kale ni mgumu kuthibitisha. Maandishi ya karne ya 9/10 yanayotaja kanisa la [Mtakatifu] Paulo (Kent 728) yanaonyesha wakfu kwa Paulo kufikia wakati huo, si kumbukumbu ya karne ya 1." ], "debate": "Kent aliona utambulisho wa rostra ya mtawala kuwa wa uhakika, na katalogi za baadaye (EDCS) hurudia urejeshaji wake, ingawa ni ROST tu ya neno muhimu iliyohifadhiwa na Kent alikubali kuwa urejeshaji wake huenda usiwe sahihi katika kila jambo. Maswali matatu yako wazi. Kwanza, kesi ya Galio ilisikilizwa kwenye jukwaa hili au katika mahakama kwingine? Kulingana na maelezo ya mchapishaji ya Corinth XXII (2022), Julian Basilica ilikuwa uwezekano mkubwa wa makao ya mahakama ya kifalme ya jimbo. Pili, ni kiasi gani cha awamu ya marumaru inayoonekana leo kilikuwepo kabla ya muhula wa Galio? Tatu, je, kanisa la enzi za kati juu ya jukwaa huhifadhi kumbukumbu ya kale au huakisi utambulisho wa baadaye?", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Kesi ilisikiwa katika basilika", "statement": "Huenda kesi rasmi za liwali zilisikilizwa katika basilika badala ya rostra ya wazi. Maelezo ya mchapishaji ya Corinth XXII (2022) huiita Julian Basilica, upande wa mashariki wa uwanja, uwezekano mkubwa wa makao ya mahakama ya kifalme ya Akaya. Mahakama ya Galio ingeweza kuwa humo. Maelezo hayo hayajadili Paulo." }, { "label": "Bēma hutaja mahakama, si jengo", "statement": "Matendo hutumia istilahi ileile kwa mahakama ya Festo huko Kaisaria (Matendo 25:6; Matendo 25:17), na Yohana huitumia kwa ile ya Pilato mahali palipoitwa Sakafu ya Mawe (Yohana 19:13). Mahakama ya mtawala huelezwa katika mazingira mbalimbali, hivyo Matendo 18 si lazima limaanishe rostra ya kudumu; jukwaa la uwanjani ni uwezekano mmoja unaofaa kati ya mingine." }, { "label": "Utambulisho wa enzi za kati badala ya kumbukumbu", "statement": "Huenda kanisa la Byzantine juu ya jukwaa huakisi utambulisho wa baadaye wa Kikristo wa eneo badala ya kumbukumbu iliyopitishwa kutoka karne ya 1. Scranton aliona mwendelezo unaohitajika kuwa mgumu kuthibitisha, na wakfu wa Paulo wa mapema zaidi ulioshuhudiwa karibu (Kent 728) ni wa karne ya 9 au ya 10." }, { "label": "Jengo la awali au lisilokamilika wakati wa Paulo", "statement": "Jedwali la Kent la majengo huweka uso wa marumaru chini ya Klaudio (41–54 BK), ingawa maandishi yake hupendelea robo ya pili ya karne. Kwa hiyo huenda rostra ya marumaru ilimalizika muda mfupi kabla ya muhula wa Galio au baada yake, na Paulo angeweza kuwa aliona jukwaa la awali lililofunikwa poros (chokaa cha eneo)." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence/corinth-bema" }, { "id": "malta-protos", "kind": "inscription", "dateFrom": 1, "dateTo": 200, "corpusReferences": [ "IG XIV 601", "IGRR I 512", "CIG 5754", "PHI 140928", "I.Sicily ISic003683", "TM 285166", "EDR112577", "EDCS-39101548", "CIL X 7495", "ILS 5415", "EDCS-22100614", "EDR112567", "TM 285139" ], "confidence": "medium-high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 28:7", "Acts 28:1-10", "Acts 13:50", "Acts 28:17" ], "personIds": [ "person.publius", "person.paul" ], "placeIds": [ "place.malta" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "kaibel-ig-xiv", "work": "Inscriptiones Graecae XIV: Inscriptiones Siciliae et Italiae", "author": "Georg Kaibel (ed.)", "year": "1890", "locator": "IG XIV 601, p. 142 (lemma, text and commentary)", "url": "https://archive.org/details/bub_gb_WNFOCQoUpq4C/page/n190", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "edcs", "work": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss/Slaby: IG XIV 601", "locator": "EDCS-39101548 (IG 14, 00601)", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/data/monument/391/39101548.json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "trismegistos", "work": "Trismegistos text relations: IG XIV 601", "locator": "TM 285166", "url": "https://www.trismegistos.org/dataservices/texrelations/uri/285166", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "edcs", "work": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss/Slaby: CIL X 7495", "locator": "EDCS-22100614 (CIL 10, 07495 (p 994) = D 05415)", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/data/monument/221/22100614.json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "trismegistos", "work": "Trismegistos text relations: CIL X 7495", "locator": "TM 285139", "url": "https://www.trismegistos.org/dataservices/texrelations/uri/285139", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "smith-voyage-shipwreck-1848", "work": "The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul", "author": "James Smith", "year": "1848", "locator": "pp. 112-114 (Malta; the title of Publius)", "url": "https://archive.org/details/voyageandshipwr01smitgoog/page/n168", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "may mean either that Publius was the principal person in the island, as our translators have understood it, or it may be an official title.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "year": "1895", "locator": "ch. XIV, sec. 9 'Malta', p. 343", "url": "https://archive.org/details/paulthetraveller00ramsuoft/page/n362", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The title \"first\" is technically correct in Melita: it has inscriptional authority.", "role": "early-study" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Colin J. Hemer", "work": "First Person Narrative in Acts 27-28 (Tyndale Bulletin 36)", "year": "1985", "view": "Treats IG XIV 601 (= IGRR I 512), dated AD 14-37, as attesting the title of Malta's chief local magistrate. He judges the Latin CIL X 7495 indecisive, because its first line is usually quoted out of a mutilated context, and, citing Greek parallels, thinks primus there more likely means first to perform the benefactions listed. He notes that several commentators cite the Latin text as confirming Luke without addressing its restoration." }, { "author": "Loredana Cappelletti", "work": "Documenti epigrafici sulle istituzioni di Melita (Malta) in età romana (Gerión 42, special issue)", "year": "2024", "view": "Treats the Greek inscription's title, the title in Acts 28:7 and CIL X 7495 as one settled, official local title rooted in Melita's social and economic hierarchy, with likely municipal effects; agrees with Suhl's honorific parallels; and leaves its actual powers open. She records that modern opinion is divided between a supreme local magistracy and an honorific title, notes that IG XIV 601 is now lost, and dates Melita's municipium probably to Augustus, against Ashby's later date." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "462311", "label": "Melita/Malta (island)" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "462310", "label": "Melita (town at Mdina/Rabat; findspot of both texts)" }, { "scheme": "trismegistos", "id": "285166", "label": "IG XIV 601 (TM text record)" }, { "scheme": "trismegistos", "id": "285139", "label": "CIL X 7495 (TM text record)" } ], "title": "'Wa kwanza wa Wamelita' wa Melita: cheo cha protos katika maandishi ya Kiyunani na Kilatini", "summary": "Cheo kama kile ambacho Matendo 28:7 humpa Publio kilitumika Melita: maandishi ya Kiyunani yaliyopotea, yanayojulikana tu kutoka nakala za mwanzo wa enzi ya kisasa (IG XIV 601), humwita mtu wa tabaka la equites la Kirumi L. Castricius Prudens wa kwanza wa Wamelita. Msingi wa Kilatini wa karne ya 2 (CIL X 7495) una primus omni[um] iliyovunjika na kurejeshwa kwa sehemu, ambayo maana yake inabishaniwa. Hakuna maandishi yanayomtaja Publio, na wasomi hawakubaliani kama cheo kilionyesha wadhifa au heshima.", "dating": "IG XIV 601: karne ya 1 BK (EDR na EDCS 1–100 BK; wakati wa Tiberius kwa Mommsen kama Kaibel anavyorekodi, na kwa Hemer, 14–37 BK). CIL X 7495: karne ya 2 BK (EDR 100–200 BK; EDCS 101–200 BK).", "currentLocation": "IG XIV 601: yamepotea (EDR112577; Cappelletti 2024). CIL X 7495: Museum of Roman Antiquities, Rabat, Malta (kulingana na EDR112567).", "establishes": [ "IG XIV 601, yaliyopotea sasa na kujulikana kutoka nakala za mwanzo wa enzi ya kisasa, humwita mtu wa tabaka la equites la Kirumi, L. Castricius Prudens wa kabila la Quirina (nomen imerejeshwa kwa sehemu), wa kwanza wa Wamelita na mlezi, baada ya kuwa archon na amphipolos (kuhani) wa mungu Augusto.", "Angalau Mmelita mmoja kiongozi alikuwa na cheo hiki mapema katika enzi ya kifalme, hivyo istilahi ambayo Matendo 28:7 humpa Publio inalingana na matumizi ya eneo.", "CIL X 7495, kitalu cha marumaru cha Kilatini cha karne ya 2 kilichovunjika kutoka Mdina, huenda msingi wa sanamu, humheshimu mfadhili asiyepewa jina wa kazi za hekalu, pamoja na nguzo, podium na sakafu ya mawe. Mstari wake wa kwanza uliovunjika husomeka [muni]cipi(i) Mel(itensium) primus omni[um]; mwanzo wa mstari umepotea, na maana ya maneno yaliyobaki inabishaniwa.", "Maandishi ya Kiyunani yanaonyesha archons, mlezi na ukuhani wa Augusto mapema karne ya 1. Kati ya maandishi haya mawili, ni msingi wa Kilatini wa karne ya 2 tu unaoshuhudia decurions na hadhi ya manispaa. Melita ilikuwa municipium lini kunabishaniwa." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hakuna maandishi yanayomtaja Publio. Hakuna yanayothibitisha kuvunjika kwa meli, kukaa kwa Paulo, kuponywa kwa baba ya Publio au tukio jingine lolote la Matendo 28:1–10.", "Mamlaka yoyote ambayo cheo kilibeba karibu 60 BK. Maandishi ni ya kuanzia mwanzo wa karne ya 1 hadi karne ya 2 BK, na maandishi ya Kiyunani huorodhesha 'wa kwanza' kando ya wadhifa wa awali wa archon wa mwenye cheo, si badala yake.", "Kuwa primus omni[um] katika CIL X 7495 ni cheo badala ya mwanzo wa kifungu cha 'wa kwanza kati ya wote kufanya...' kuhusu ufadhili ulioorodheshwa.", "Meli ilifika ufukweni wapi huko Melita." ], "debate": "Maswali mawili yako wazi. Kwanza, 'wa kwanza' ilimaanisha nini Melita? Smith na Ramsay waliiona kama cheo rasmi; Kaibel aliona heshima mahususi ya kiraia na kuihusisha na Publio; Hemer aliisoma kama cheo cha afisa mkuu wa eneo. Wengine, hasa Suhl, huiona kama ya heshima. Cappelletti anakubali mifano ya Suhl ya heshima lakini huiita cheo rasmi cha eneo kilichoimarika ndani ya mfumo wa madaraja ya kijamii na kiuchumi, akiacha wazi mamlaka yake. Katika IG XIV 601 inasimama kando ya 'aliyewahi kuwa archon', si badala yake. Pili, je, maneno ya Kilatini yaliyovunjika katika CIL X 7495 ni sawa nayo? Hemer, akitaja mifano ya Kiyunani, anaona maandishi ya Kilatini kutotosha kuamua na anaona primus kuwa huenda zaidi inamaanisha wa kwanza kufanya ufadhili ulioorodheshwa. Melita ilikuwa municipium lini pia kunabishaniwa: Mommsen, kama Kaibel anavyorekodi, alihitimisha kutokana na maandishi ya Castricius kuwa Wamelita hawakuwa na hadhi ya kiraia ya Kirumi chini ya Tiberius; Cappelletti anaona huenda municipium ni ya Augusto, dhidi ya tarehe ya baadaye ya Ashby.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Daraja la heshima, si wadhifa", "statement": "Huenda cheo huweka mtu mashuhuri mkuu wa kisiwa katika daraja la heshima badala ya kutaja wadhifa maalumu. Vyeo vinavyofanana vya 'wa kwanza wa jimbo' na 'wa kwanza wa mji' huonekana katika maandishi ya Kiyunani ya mashariki mwa ufalme, ambayo Suhl alikusanya na Cappelletti huyapitia. Kwa maoni haya Publio alikuwa mtu mkuu wa Melita, lakini cheo hakituambii chochote kuhusu mamlaka yake rasmi." }, { "label": "Maneno ya kueleza katika Matendo", "statement": "Huenda Luka humweleza tu Publio kama mtu kiongozi wa kisiwa kwa maana isiyo ya kitaalamu. Luka hutumia wingi kwa watu viongozi huko Antiokia ya Pisidia na kwa viongozi wa Wayahudi huko Rumi (Matendo 13:50; Matendo 28:17). Smith (1848) aliweka usomaji huu, ambao watafsiri wa awali wa Kiingereza walifuata, kabla ya kujenga hoja ya cheo rasmi." }, { "label": "'Wa kwanza kufanya X' katika CIL X 7495", "statement": "Katika msingi wa Kilatini, primus omni[um] huenda inaanza kifungu cha 'wa kwanza kati ya wote kufanya...'. Hemer (1985) aliona maandishi hayatoshi kuamua, akitaja mifano ya Kiyunani. Maandishi ya heshima ya Kilatini yenye fomula hii yapo, kwa mfano CIL XI 6054 na CIL IX 2237; mifano hii hutoka utafutaji wa EDCS wa kipengee hiki, si kwa Hemer." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-malta-protos" }, { "id": "philippi-colony-magistrates", "kind": "inscription", "dateFrom": -42, "dateTo": 161, "corpusReferences": [ "RPC I 1649", "RPC I 1650", "RPC I 1653", "EDCS-15900071", "AE 1938, 52", "Pilhofer, Philippi II 253", "CIPh II.1, 136", "EDCS-43000131", "AE 2006, 1330", "Pilhofer, Philippi II 324a", "CIPh II.1, 121", "EDCS-24200017", "CIL III 14206,19", "Pilhofer, Philippi II 452", "CIPh II.1, 15", "EDCS-20200004", "CIL II 5439", "ILS 6087", "CIL II²/5, 1022" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 16:10-17", "Acts 16:12", "Acts 16:19-24", "Acts 16:35-39", "Acts 22:25-29", "Acts 25:10-12", "1 Thessalonians 2:2", "2 Corinthians 11:25" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.silas", "person.claudius" ], "placeIds": [ "place.philippi", "place.macedonia", "place.amphipolis" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "edcs", "author": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss/Slaby (University of Zurich)", "work": "Funerary text for [Varin]ius Macedo, aedile, quaestor, IIvir iure dicundo at Philippi, munerarius (dated 1st century AD)", "locator": "EDCS-15900071 = AE 1938, 52 = Pilhofer, Philippi II 253 = CIPh II.1, 136", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/monument/15900071", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "edcs", "author": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss/Slaby (University of Zurich)", "work": "Inscription for M. Figilius Pudens, holder of honorary decurional rank (ornamenta decurionalia), aedile, IIvir iure dicundo at Philippi, flamen of Antoninus (AD 138-161)", "locator": "EDCS-43000131 = AE 2006, 1330 = Pilhofer, Philippi II 324a = CIPh II.1, 121", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/monument/43000131", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "edcs", "author": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss/Slaby (University of Zurich)", "work": "Dedication by col(onia) Philipp(iensium) to the children and grandchildren of Augustus (EDCS date 1st century AD)", "locator": "EDCS-24200017 = CIL III 14206,19 = Pilhofer, Philippi II 452 = CIPh II.1, 15", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/monument/24200017", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "edcs", "author": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss/Slaby (University of Zurich)", "work": "Lex Coloniae Genetivae Iuliae (Urso charter), ch. 62: each duovir to have two lictors, an accensus, two scribes and two viatores", "locator": "EDCS-20200004 = CIL II 5439 = ILS 6087 = CIL II²/5, 1022, ch. LXII", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/monument/20200004", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "dio-cassius-cary", "author": "Cassius Dio", "translator": "Earnest Cary", "year": "1917", "work": "Roman History, Book 51", "locator": "51.4.6", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Cassius_Dio/51*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "To most of those who were dispossessed he made compensation by permitting them to settle in Dyrrachium, Philippi, and elsewhere", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "suetonius-rolfe", "author": "Suetonius", "translator": "J. C. Rolfe", "year": "1914", "work": "Life of Claudius", "locator": "Claud. 25.3", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Suetonius/12Caesars/Claudius*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Those who usurped the privileges of Roman citizenship he executed in the Esquiline field.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "year": "1895", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen (CCEL text of the 10th edition, 1907)", "locator": "ch. X, §3 'Accusation and Condemnation in Philippi'", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/r/ramsay/paul_roman/cache/paul_roman.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The title Prætors was not technically accurate, but was frequently employed as a courtesy title for the supreme magistrates of a Roman colony; and, as usual, Luke moves on the plane of educated conversation in such matters, and not on the plane of rigid technical accuracy.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "year": "1895", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen (CCEL text of the 10th edition, 1907)", "locator": "ch. V, §4 'The Church at Pisidian Antioch'", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/r/ramsay/paul_roman/cache/paul_roman.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Now, since the Roman governors whom he met were favourable to him, these beatings must have taken place in \"colonies,\" whose magistrates were attended by lictors.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "year": "1895", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen (CCEL text of the 10th edition, 1907)", "locator": "ch. IX, §4 'The Entrance into Macedonia'", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/r/ramsay/paul_roman/cache/paul_roman.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Of old Amphipolis had been the chief city of the division, to which both belonged. Afterwards Philippi quite outstripped its rival; but it was at that time in such a position, that Amphipolis was ranked first by general consent, Philippi first by its own consent.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "paley-horae-paulinae", "author": "William Paley", "year": "1790", "work": "Horae Paulinae (SPCK edition, 1855)", "locator": "ch. IV (Second Epistle to the Corinthians), No. IX", "url": "https://archive.org/download/horpaulinortrut00palegoog/horpaulinortrut00palegoog_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "These particulars cannot be extracted out of the Acts of the Apostles; which proves, as hath been already observed, that the epistle was not framed from the history; yet they are consistent with it", "role": "early-study" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Cédric Brélaz", "work": "Philippes, colonie romaine d'Orient: Recherches d'histoire institutionnelle et sociale (BCH Supplément 59)", "year": "2018", "view": "Antony founded the colony, and its duoviri iure dicundo were its highest financial and judicial authority. Brélaz notes that the Greek title Acts uses commonly rendered duumvir, as in Greek inscriptions of the colony of Corinth, and that Acts applies it specifically to Philippi's duoviri, who send their lictors to the prison. He uses the episode to illustrate summary municipal justice while leaving its truth open." }, { "author": "Cédric Brélaz", "work": "Corpus des inscriptions grecques et latines de Philippes, II.1: La colonie romaine, La vie publique de la colonie", "year": "2014", "view": "Standard corpus of the colony's public inscriptions, including a section on municipal magistrates and local administration. It is the CIPh II.1 numbering used in the EDCS records cited here." }, { "author": "Peter Pilhofer", "work": "Philippi, Band 2: Katalog der Inschriften von Philippi (2nd edition)", "year": "2009", "view": "Catalogue of the inscriptions of Philippi and its territory. It is the source of the 'Philippi' catalogue numbers in EDCS concordances (e.g. no. 253, 324a, 452)." }, { "author": "Andrew Burnett, Michel Amandry and Pere Pau Ripollès", "work": "Roman Provincial Coinage, vol. I: From the Death of Caesar to Vitellius (44 BC-AD 69)", "year": "1992", "view": "Catalogues Philippi's colonial coinage, including RPC I 1649 (legend A I C V P, expanded as Antoni iussu colonia victrix Philippensis, with Q. Paquius Rufus named as legate for founding the colony), RPC I 1650 (Augustus) and RPC I 1653 (Claudius, reverse COL AVG IVL PHILIP)." }, { "author": "A. N. Sherwin-White", "work": "Roman Society and Roman Law in the New Testament", "year": "1963", "view": "A Roman historian's Sarum Lectures, including 'The Roman citizenship and Acts'. He discusses the Roman rules, notably the Julian law on public violence, that protected citizens from being bound or beaten, and argues that Acts' picture of Roman legal and civic procedure fits first-century conditions as far as it can be tested." }, { "author": "John Clayton Lentz Jr.", "work": "Luke's Portrait of Paul (SNTSMS 77)", "year": "1993", "view": "Sceptical. He judges it improbable that a strict Pharisee held Roman and Tarsian citizenship, and he reads Acts' citizenship motif as part of a deliberate literary portrayal of Paul's high status and virtue." }, { "author": "Ekkehard Weber", "work": "Das römische Bürgerrecht des Apostels Paulus (Tyche 27)", "year": "2012", "view": "Argues that the appeal to the emperor (Acts 25:11) implies that Paul held Roman citizenship. He leaves open how the family acquired it, either through a grant to Tarsus or through a manumitted ancestor." }, { "author": "H. G. Liddell, R. Scott, H. S. Jones", "work": "A Greek-English Lexicon (9th edition)", "year": "1940", "view": "Its entry for the Greek title Acts gives Philippi's magistrates includes the sense Roman praetor and applies the word to the duoviri, or chief magistrates, of Roman colonies. Its example for colonies is Acts 16:20 itself, so for that usage it is not independent of Acts." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "501482", "label": "Krenides/Philippi/Col. Augusta Iulia Philippensis" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q379652", "label": "Philippi (ancient city in eastern Macedonia)" } ], "title": "Filipi kama koloni la Kirumi: sarafu zake, duoviri na lictors wa koloni", "summary": "Sarafu, maandishi ya Kilatini na Dio Cassius huonyesha kuwa Filipi ilikuwa koloni la Kirumi, kama Matendo 16:12 linavyosema, lililoongozwa na maafisa wakuu wawili (duoviri). Hati ya koloni jingine, Urso huko Hispania, huwapa maafisa kama hao lictors. Hilo linafaa Matendo, ambapo maafisa huagiza kipigo cha fimbo na baadaye kutuma maafisa wanaobeba fimbo (Matendo 16:22, 35–38). Hakuna kati ya haya kinachothibitisha tukio, na uraia wa Paulo unashuhudiwa katika Matendo tu.", "dating": "Sarafu za koloni kuanzia kuanzishwa na Antony baada ya 42 KK hadi Klaudio (41–54 BK); maandishi ya Kilatini yanayotaja maafisa wa koloni, karne ya 1–2 BK (ya baadaye zaidi yaliyotajwa yamewekwa katika 138–161 BK); ushahidi linganishi kutoka hati ya Urso (EDCS huiweka katika 44 KK)", "currentLocation": "Filipi (Krenides), mashariki mwa Makedonia, Ugiriki (mahali maandishi ya Filipi yalipopatikana); hati ya Urso inatoka Osuna kusini mwa Hispania; mifano ya sarafu iko katika makusanyo mengi ya umma na binafsi (RPC); maandishi ya Dio yamehifadhiwa katika mapokeo ya hati za kale", "establishes": [ "Filipi ilikuwa koloni la Kirumi wakati wa Paulo. Sarafu zake huiita koloni chini ya Antony, ambaye agizo lake linatajwa na maandishi ya sarafu (RPC I 1649), chini ya Augusto (RPC I 1650, COL AVG IVL PHIL IVSSV AVG) na chini ya Klaudio (RPC I 1653). Dio Cassius (51.4.6) hurekodi Octavian akiwapa makazi Wataliano walionyang'anywa mali huko. Matendo 16:12 ndiyo kifungu pekee cha Agano Jipya kinachouita mji koloni la Kirumi.", "Maandishi ya Kilatini kutoka Filipi huwapa maafisa wakuu wa koloni cheo IIvir iure dicundo, ndani ya mfuatano wa kazi wa mtindo wa Kirumi unaojumuisha aedile na quaestor. EDCS huweka moja katika karne ya 1 BK (EDCS-15900071) na jingine, la M. Figilius Pudens, aliyekuwa na daraja la heshima la decurion (ornamenta decurionalia), katika 138–161 BK (EDCS-43000131). Koloni lenyewe huonekana kama mtoaji wa wakfu (EDCS-24200017).", "Maafisa wa koloni walikuwa na lictors. Hati ya koloni la Urso (sura 62) humpa kila duovir lictors wawili, pamoja na mhudumu (accensus), waandishi wawili na wajumbe wawili (EDCS-20200004). Ramsay alihitimisha kuwa Paulo alipigwa fimbo katika makoloni, ambayo maafisa wake waliandamana na lictors. Matendo linafaa picha hii: maafisa ambao cheo chao humaanisha wabeba fimbo, yaani lictors, hubeba ujumbe wa maafisa (Matendo 16:35, 38).", "Suetonius anaripoti kuwa Klaudio aliwaua waliojipatia uraia kwa udanganyifu (Claud. 25.3); kwa mpangilio wa kawaida ziara ya Paulo (karibu 49–50 BK) iliangukia katika utawala wake. Sherwin-White (1963) alijadili kanuni za Kirumi, hasa sheria ya Julian kuhusu vurugu za umma, zilizowalinda raia dhidi ya kufungwa au kupigwa na maafisa. Kwa hiyo hofu ya maafisa katika Matendo 16:38 inaeleweka katika sheria ya Kirumi." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hakuna maandishi au sarafu inayowataja maafisa, mlinzi wa gereza, Lidia au mtu mwingine wa Matendo 16, au kurekodi kukamatwa, kupigwa, kufungwa au kuachiliwa kwa Paulo na Sila. Mazingira sahihi ya taasisi hayaonyeshi yenyewe kuwa tukio lilitokea kama linavyosimuliwa.", "Hauthibitishi kuwa Paulo alikuwa raia wa Kirumi. Dai huonekana katika Matendo tu (Matendo 16:37 na 22:25–29). Barua za Paulo huthibitisha kutendewa vibaya huko Filipi (1 Wathesalonike 2:2) na kupigwa fimbo mara tatu (2 Wakorintho 11:25), lakini hazitaji uraia. Wengine pia huuliza kwa nini raia alipigwa fimbo mara tatu (2 Wakorintho 11:25); barua hazielezi hilo.", "Hati yenyewe ya Filipi haijahifadhiwa, hivyo ushahidi wa lictors hutokana na kulinganisha koloni jingine (Urso). Maandishi ya Kilatini yaliyotajwa hapa hutumia IIvir; ikiwa wasemaji wa Kiyunani huko Filipi waliwaita watu hawa rasmi au kwa namna isiyo rasmi kwa cheo cha Kiyunani ambacho Matendo hutumia haijaamuliwa." ], "debate": "Maswali yaliyo wazi yanabaki. Maandishi ya Kilatini ya Filipi husema IIvir (duovir). Ramsay alichukulia cheo cha Matendo kwa watu hawa, alichokitafsiri 'praetors', kama cheo cha heshima; Brélaz anaona kuwa cheo hicho hicho cha Kiyunani kwa kawaida kilitafsiri duumvir, kama katika maandishi ya Kiyunani ya koloni la Korintho. Kuhusu uraia, Lentz anatia shaka kuwa Farisayo mkali angekuwa nao na husoma hilo kama sehemu ya picha ya Luka ya Paulo; Weber anahoji kuwa kukata rufaa kwa kaisari kunamaanisha alikuwa nao. Wakosoaji pia huuliza kwa nini Paulo aliutaja baada ya kupigwa tu. Mwisho, hadhi ya Filipi kama mji unaoongoza wa wilaya yake katika Matendo 16:12 haipatani kwa urahisi na hadhi ya zamani ya Amfipoli kama mji mkuu wa sehemu hiyo. Ramsay alisoma maneno hayo kama fahari ya kiraia, daraja ambalo Filipi ilidai huku Amfipoli ikiwa nalo kwa makubaliano ya jumla. Wengine hukubali usomaji tofauti au wa kukisia, unaochapishwa katika baadhi ya matoleo ya kisasa ya kitaalamu, unaoifanya Filipi kuwa mji wa wilaya ya kwanza, au husoma daraja kama alama ya heshima badala ya daraja la kiutawala.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Mazingira sahihi, tukio lililotungwa", "statement": "Luka au chanzo chake walijua jinsi makoloni ya mashariki yalivyofanya kazi. Vyeo na taratibu sahihi huonyesha ufahamu wa mazingira, lakini vinaendana pia na tukio lililoigizwa kidrama au kutungwa. Kwa maoni haya, kufunuliwa kwa uraia mwishoni ni sehemu ya picha ya kifasihi ya Matendo ya hadhi ya juu ya Paulo (hivyo Lentz) badala ya tukio linaloweza kuthibitishwa." }, { "label": "Cheo cha heshima, si kosa la istilahi", "statement": "Kisheria maafisa walikuwa duoviri, kama maandishi yanavyoonyesha. Cheo cha Kiyunani ambacho Matendo huwapa huakisi matumizi ya heshima au ya watu kwa maafisa wa koloni. Ramsay alikiona kuwa sahihi kwa kiwango cha mazungumzo ya watu wenye elimu badala ya usahihi wa istilahi za kiufundi. Brélaz hukiona kama jina la kawaida la Kiyunani linalolingana na duumvir, na LSJ hutumia neno kwa duoviri wa koloni, ingawa mfano wake ni Matendo yenyewe." }, { "label": "Msimulizi mwenye maarifa na msaada huru wa sehemu", "statement": "Simulizi la nafsi ya kwanza wingi hufika Filipi (Matendo 16:10–17), ingawa hukoma kabla ya kukamatwa. Barua za Paulo mwenyewe huripoti bila kutegemea simulizi kutendewa vibaya Filipi (1 Wathesalonike 2:2) na kupigwa fimbo (2 Wakorintho 11:25). Paley alijenga hoja kuwa barua haikutokana na Matendo lakini inakubaliana nayo; Ramsay alisoma msimulizi kama mwenye taarifa za eneo. Bado barua hazithibitishi dai la uraia au maelezo ya kesi." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-philippi-colony-magistrates" }, { "id": "festus-coins", "kind": "coin", "dateFrom": 58, "dateTo": 59, "corpusReferences": [ "RPC I 4972", "Meshorer 35 (as cited by RPC I 4972)" ], "confidence": "medium", "epistemicStatus": "debated", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 24:10", "Acts 24:27", "Acts 25:1-12", "Acts 27:9" ], "personIds": [ "person.festus", "person.felix", "person.nero", "person.claudius", "person.paul" ], "placeIds": [ "place.judea", "place.jerusalem", "place.caesarea" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1895 edition", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 20.182 (Whiston 20.8.9)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0146%3Abook%3D20%3Awhiston+chapter%3D8%3Awhiston+section%3D9", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Now when Porcius Festus was sent as successor to Felix by Nero, the principal of the Jewish inhabitants of Cesarea went up to Rome to accuse Felix; and he had certainly been brought to punishment, unless Nero had yielded to the importunate solicitations of his brother Pallas", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1895 edition", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 20.137-138 (Whiston 20.7.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0146%3Abook%3D20%3Awhiston+chapter%3D7%3Awhiston+section%3D1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "SO Claudius sent Felix, the brother of Pallas, to take care of the affairs of Judea; and when he had already completed the twelfth year of his reign, he bestowed upon Agrippa the tetrarchy of Philip and Batanea", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1895 edition", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 20.197 (Whiston 20.9.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0146%3Abook%3D20%3Awhiston+chapter%3D9%3Awhiston+section%3D1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "AND now Caesar, upon hearing the death of Festus, sent Albinus into Judea, as procurator.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1895 edition", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 20.200 (Whiston 20.9.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0146%3Abook%3D20%3Awhiston+chapter%3D9%3Awhiston+section%3D1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Festus was now dead, and Albinus was but upon the road", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1895 edition", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "locator": "War 2.271 (Whiston 2.14.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0148%3Abook%3D2%3Awhiston+chapter%3D14%3Awhiston+section%3D1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "NOW it was that Festus succeeded Felix as procurator, and made it his business to correct those that made disturbances in the country.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1895 edition", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "locator": "War 6.300 (Whiston 6.5.3)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0148%3Abook%3D6%3Awhiston+chapter%3D5%3Awhiston+section%3D3", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "four years before the war began, and at a time when the city was in very great peace and prosperity, came to that feast whereon it is our custom for every one to make tabernacles to God in the temple", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1895 edition", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "locator": "War 6.305 (Whiston 6.5.3)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0148%3Abook%3D6%3Awhiston+chapter%3D5%3Awhiston+section%3D3", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Albinus (for he was then our procurator)", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb", "year": "1942 reprint", "work": "Annals", "locator": "Ann. 13.14 (narrative of AD 55)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.02.0078%3Abook%3D13%3Achapter%3D14", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And so Nero, furious with those who abetted such arrogance in a woman, removed Pallas from the charge of the business with which he had been entrusted by Claudius, and in which he acted, so to say, as the controller of the throne.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb", "year": "1942 reprint", "work": "Annals", "locator": "Ann. 13.23 (narrative of AD 55)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.02.0078%3Abook%3D13%3Achapter%3D23", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But the proved innocence of Pallas did not please men so much, as his arrogance offended them.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "suetonius-rolfe", "author": "Suetonius", "translator": "J. C. Rolfe", "year": "1914", "work": "Lives of the Caesars: Claudius", "locator": "Claud. 45", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Suetonius/12Caesars/Claudius*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "He died on the third day before the Ides of October in the consulship of Asinius Marcellus and Acilius Aviola, in the sixty-fourth year of his age and the fourteenth of his reign.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "work": "Church History", "locator": "HE 2.22.1", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Festus was sent by Nero to be Felix's successor. Under him Paul, having made his defense, was sent bound to Rome.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "work": "Notes to Eusebius, Church History (NPNF, Second Series, vol. 1)", "locator": "HE 2.22.1, note 469", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/npnf201/npnf201.iii.vii.xxiii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The exact year of the accession of Festus is not known, but it is known that his death occurred before the summer of 62 a.d.; for at that time his successor, Albinus, was already procurator, as we can see from Josephus, B. J. VI. 5. 3.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "year": "1895", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen (CCEL text of the 10th edition, 1907)", "locator": "ch. XIV, §3 'The Council'", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/r/ramsay/paul_roman/cache/paul_roman.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The great Fast fell in 59 on Oct. 5, and, as Paul and Aristarchus observed the Fast, Luke uses it as an indication of date.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "year": "1895", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen (CCEL text of the 10th edition, 1907)", "locator": "Chronological Index to the Life of St. Paul", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/r/ramsay/paul_roman/cache/paul_roman.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Imprisonment in Palestine June 57 to July 59", "role": "early-study" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Andrew Burnett, Michel Amandry and Pere Pau Ripollès", "work": "Roman Provincial Coinage, vol. I: From the Death of Caesar to Vitellius (44 BC-AD 69)", "year": "1992 (online edition 2019)", "view": "Catalogues the type as RPC I 4972, struck at Jerusalem under Nero in year 5 and dated AD 59, without naming the governor who issued it. Its Claudius year-14 issues (RPC I 4970-4971, AD 54) name Julia Agrippina, and Britannicus and Nero, but no governor." }, { "author": "Frederic W. Madden", "work": "Coins of the Jews (International Numismata Orientalia II)", "year": "1881", "view": "Lists the year-5 type (AD 58-59) under Felix and dates Festus to AD 60 to the end of 61, while reporting that de Saulcy had assigned the coin to Festus." }, { "author": "Emil Schürer", "work": "A History of the Jewish People in the Time of Jesus Christ, Division I (English translation by John Macpherson)", "year": "1890", "view": "Holds that Felix was probably recalled in AD 60, the date most investigators then preferred. Reports that Kellner (November 54) and V. Weber (summer 55) argued for an early recall from Eusebius's Chronicle and Pallas's influence, and rebuts them: the Chronicle's dates are often arbitrary, Josephus puts almost all of Felix's acts under Nero, and Pallas was acquitted before the end of 55." }, { "author": "Michael J. G. Gray-Fow", "work": "Why Festus, Not Felix? Paul's Caesarem Appello (Journal of the Evangelical Theological Society 59/3)", "year": "2016", "view": "Places Festus's arrival and Paul's appeal in the summer of AD 60, and calls that date approximate but traditional." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q464307", "label": "Porcius Festus" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "687928", "label": "Ierusalem/Hierosolyma (mint named by RPC)" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "678401", "label": "Stratonos Pyrgos/Caesarea (governor's seat)" } ], "title": "Sarafu za Uyahudi za mwaka wa tano wa Nero, zinazohusishwa na Festo", "summary": "Sarafu ndogo za shaba zilizotengenezwa kwa Uyahudi katika mwaka wa tano wa Nero (58/59 BK), ambazo maandishi yake hutoa majina Nero na kaisari na mwaka tu, mara nyingi huhusishwa na Porcius Festo, mtawala aliyemrithi Feliki katika Matendo 24:27. Zinafaa mazingira ya Kirumi ya Matendo 24–25, lakini hazimtaji mtawala kamwe, hivyo haziwezi zenyewe kuweka wakati Festo alipofika; mapendekezo huanzia 54 hadi 61 BK.", "dating": "Mwaka wa 5 wa Nero (uliowekwa L E), 58/59 BK, Nero akiwa alimrithi Klaudio Oktoba 54 (Suetonius, Claud. 45); RPC huweka aina hii katika 59 BK", "currentLocation": "Mifano mingi; RPC I 4972 huorodhesha 34, katika makusanyo ya umma na binafsi.", "establishes": [ "Sarafu ndogo za shaba zilitengenezwa kwa Uyahudi kwa jina la Nero katika mwaka wake wa tano wa utawala (uliowekwa L E, 58/59 BK). Upande mmoja una jina la Nero ndani ya taji la majani; mwingine hutoa mwaka na jina kaisari kando ya tawi la mtende. RPC huorodhesha aina hiyo huko Yerusalemu kama RPC I 4972 na kuiweka katika 59 BK.", "Matoleo ya Uyahudi yaliyowekwa katika mwaka wa 14 wa Klaudio (54 BK; RPC I 4970-4971), yaliyotengenezwa wakati Feliki alipotawala, vivyo hivyo hayamtaji mtawala. De Saulcy alihusisha aina ya mwaka wa 5 na Porcius Festo, kama Madden (1881) anavyoripoti, na katalogi nyingi za kisasa humfuata. Matendo 24:27 na Yosefo (Ant. 20.182; War 2.271) zote humtaja Festo kama mrithi wa Feliki, na Yosefo anasema Nero alimtuma.", "Festo alikufa madarakani kabla ya Albinus kufika (Ant. 20.197-200), na Albinus alikuwa procurator kufikia Sikukuu ya Vibanda miaka minne kabla ya vita (War 6.300-305), hivyo muhula wa Festo ulikuwa umemalizika kufikia 62 BK." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Sarafu hazimtaji mtawala. Ikiwa ni za Festo au Feliki hutegemea mpangilio unaokubaliwa: Madden (1881) aliweka Festo katika 60–61 BK na kuorodhesha aina ya mwaka wa 5 chini ya Feliki.", "Haziweki mwaka Festo alipofika. Kuzichukulia kuwa toleo lake la kwanza hudhania kuwa watawala wapya walitengeneza sarafu muda mfupi baada ya kufika. Yosefo husimulia uteuzi wa Feliki kabla tu ya tukio lililowekwa baada ya Klaudio kumaliza mwaka wake wa kumi na mbili (karibu 53 BK; Ant. 20.137), lakini sarafu za Uyahudi za muhula wake zenye tarehe ya Klaudio ni za 54 BK. Kwa hitimisho hilo, utengenezaji wa sarafu haukufuata kuwasili lazima.", "Hazisemi chochote kuhusu Paulo, kesi zake mbele ya Feliki na Festo, au alizuiliwa kwa muda gani (Matendo 24:27)." ], "debate": "Kuwasili kwa Festo, kunakotegemea wakati Feliki aliporudishwa, kumewekwa kuanzia 54 hadi 61 BK. Tarehe za mapema hutegemea Chronicle ya Eusebius, ambayo maandishi yake ya Kiarmenia huweka kurudishwa katika mwaka wa mwisho wa Klaudio na toleo la Jerome katika mwaka wa pili wa Nero, na kauli ya Yosefo kuwa Pallas, aliyeondolewa madarakani mwaka 55, bado alimlinda Feliki (Ant. 20.182; Tacitus, Ann. 13.14). Schürer alijibu kuwa tarehe za Chronicle mara nyingi ni za kubahatisha, kuwa Yosefo huweka karibu matendo yote ya Feliki chini ya Nero, na kuwa Pallas aliondolewa shtaka kabla ya mwisho wa 55 (Ann. 13.23). Pongezi ya Paulo kuhusu uzoefu mrefu wa Feliki kama mwamuzi wa taifa (Matendo 24:10) pia hudokeza muhula mrefu. Ramsay aliweka safari ya baharini kwa mfungo ambao Matendo 27:9 linasema ulikuwa umepita, ambao mwaka 59 uliangukia 5 Oktoba. Ikiwa sarafu za mwaka wa 5 ni za Festo, alikuwa madarakani kufikia 59 BK, jambo linalopinga 60 au 61; lakini usomaji huo hutegemea sarafu isiyomtaja mtawala na mpangilio unaodhaniwa wa utengenezaji.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Kurudishwa mapema kwa Feliki (54–55 BK)", "statement": "Kama Schürer (1890) anavyoripoti, Kellner aliweka kurudishwa kwa Feliki Novemba 54 na V. Weber katika kiangazi cha 55, wakitaja Chronicle ya Eusebius na ushawishi wa Pallas kwa Nero (Ant. 20.182). Schürer alijibu kuwa Yosefo huweka karibu matendo yote ya Feliki chini ya Nero na kuwa Pallas alikuwa ameachiliwa kabla ya mwisho wa 55 (Tacitus, Ann. 13.23). Kwa maoni ya mapema sarafu za mwaka wa 5 zingeangukia katikati ya muhula." }, { "label": "Kuwasili mwaka 59 BK (Ramsay)", "statement": "Ramsay aliweka safari ya Rumi katika vuli ya 59 kwa hoja ya kalenda, si ya sarafu: mfungo ambao Matendo 27:9 linasema ulikuwa umepita uliangukia 5 Oktoba mwaka 59. Fahirisi yake ya mpangilio huweka kufungwa kwa Paulo huko Palestina kuanzia Juni 57 hadi Julai 59, hivyo kwa hesabu yake Festo alifika 59. Hilo linakubaliana na kuhusisha sarafu za mwaka wa 5 na Festo, zikitengenezwa katika miezi yake ya kwanza." }, { "label": "Tarehe ya jadi (60 BK)", "statement": "Watafiti wengi ambao Schürer aliwapitia mwaka 1890 waliweka kurudishwa kwa Feliki katika 60, na McGiffert (1890), akimfuata Wieseler, alitoa 59–61 kama mpaka mpana zaidi wa Festo kuingia madarakani. Gray-Fow (2016) bado huona kiangazi cha 60 kama tarehe ya jadi. Kwa maoni haya sarafu za mwaka wa 5 zilitolewa chini ya Feliki, kama Madden alivyoziorodhesha 1881, na katika orodha yake hakuna sarafu za Festo zinazojulikana." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-festus-coins" }, { "id": "aretas-damascus", "kind": "literary-non-christian", "dateFrom": -9, "dateTo": 40, "corpusReferences": [ "RPC I 4781-4806 (civic coinage of Damascus, 37/36 BC to AD 65/6)", "RPC I 4800-4802A (Damascus under Tiberius, year 345 = AD 33/4, the last dated issue before the gap)", "RPC I 4803-4806 (Damascus under Nero, year 377 = AD 65/6)" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "source-supported", "scriptureReferences": [ "2 Corinthians 11:32-33", "Acts 9:23-25", "Acts 9:26", "Galatians 1:17-18", "Galatians 1:21" ], "personIds": [ "person.aretas", "person.paul", "person.josephus", "person.claudius", "person.nero" ], "placeIds": [ "place.damascus", "place.nabatea", "place.arabia", "place.syria" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text of the 1895 Beardsley edition)", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 18.109-115 (Whiston 18.5.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=18:whiston%20chapter=5:whiston%20section=1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "So Herod wrote about these affairs to Tiberius, who being very angry at the attempt made by Aretas, wrote to Vitellius to make war upon him, and either to take him alive, and bring him to him in bonds, or to kill him, and send him his head.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text of the 1895 Beardsley edition)", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 18.120-129 (Whiston 18.5.3)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=18:whiston%20chapter=5:whiston%20section=3", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But when on the fourth day letters came to him, which informed him of the death of Tiberius, he obliged the multitude to take an oath of fidelity to Caius; he also recalled his army, and made them every one go home, and take their winter quarters there", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text of the 1895 Beardsley edition)", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 16.293-299 (Whiston 16.9.4)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=16:whiston%20chapter=9:whiston%20section=4", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "who indeed was angry that Aretas had not sent to him first before he took the kingdom", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text of the 1895 Beardsley edition)", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 16.351-355 (Whiston 16.10.9)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=16:whiston%20chapter=10:whiston%20section=9", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "so he admitted Aretas's ambassadors; and after he had just reproved him for his rashness, in not tarrying till he received the kingdom from him, he accepted of his presents, and confirmed him in his government.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text of the 1895 Beardsley edition)", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 14.117 (Whiston 14.7.2), quoting Strabo on the Jews of Egypt", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=14:whiston%20chapter=7:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "There is also an ethnarch allowed them, who governs the nation, and distributes justice to them, and takes care of their contracts, and of the laws to them belonging, as if he were the ruler of a free republic.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text of the 1895 Beardsley edition)", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "locator": "War 2.93 (Whiston 2.6.3)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=2:whiston%20chapter=6:whiston%20section=3", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "he gave the one half of Herod's kingdom to Archelaus, by the name of Ethnarch, and promised to make him king also afterward, if he rendered himself worthy of that dignity.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text of the 1895 Beardsley edition)", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 13.392 (Whiston 13.15.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=13:whiston%20chapter=15:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "reigned over Celesyria, being called to the government by those that held Damascus, by reason of the hatred they bare to Ptolemy Menneus.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "dio-cassius-cary", "author": "Cassius Dio", "translator": "Earnest Cary", "year": "1924", "work": "Roman History, Book 59", "locator": "59.12.2", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Cassius_Dio/59*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "he granted to Sohaemus the land of the Ituraean Arabians, to Cotys Lesser Armenia", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "paley-horae-paulinae", "author": "William Paley", "year": "1790 (London: Religious Tract Society printing, 1852)", "work": "Horae Paulinae", "locator": "ch. IV (Second Epistle to the Corinthians), No. II", "url": "https://archive.org/download/horaepaulinaeort00pale_0/horaepaulinaeort00pale_0_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The account in the Epistle of St. Paul’s escape from Damascus, though agreeing in the main fact with the account of the same transaction in the Acts, is related with such difference of circumstance, as renders it utterly improbable that one should be derived from the other.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "author": "Wikidata", "work": "Aretas IV Philopatris", "locator": "Q302986", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q302986.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "pleiades", "author": "Pleiades", "work": "Damascus", "locator": "Pleiades 678106", "url": "https://pleiades.stoa.org/places/678106/json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Rainer Riesner", "work": "\"Pauline Chronology,\" in Stephen Westerholm (ed.), The Blackwell Companion to Paul", "year": "2011", "view": "Neither literary nor numismatic evidence establishes that Gaius handed Damascus to Aretas or that the Nabataeans seized it. Aretas's official was probably the overseer of the Nabataean quarter of Damascus, as the Jewish ethnarch was at Alexandria. The only firm point is that the flight came before Aretas IV died in AD 40. Riesner dates Paul's call to 31/32 and his first Jerusalem visit to 33/34." }, { "author": "Emil Schürer", "work": "A History of the Jewish People in the Time of Jesus Christ, Division I, vol. II, Appendix II (English translation by John Macpherson)", "year": "1890", "view": "Takes 2 Corinthians 11:32 to show that Damascus then belonged to Aretas, probably restored to him by Gaius, noting that no Damascus coins with the emperor's image are known from Gaius and Claudius. Judges a forcible seizure very improbable. Reports el-Hegr inscriptions and coins of Aretas IV reaching his 48th year." }, { "author": "Benjamin W. Bacon", "work": "A Criticism of the New Chronology of Paul, II (The Expositor, 5th series, vol. 10)", "year": "1899", "view": "Argues that Aretas was probably not in control of Damascus before late AD 38. Reports Holtzmann's view that Aretas's official was only the representative of Arabian interests in the city, and doubts that such a consul-like appointee could guard a Roman-held city to stop a Roman citizen leaving. Inclines to Weizsäcker's view that the escape belongs c. AD 39, after Paul's first Jerusalem visit." }, { "author": "Douglas A. Campbell", "work": "\"An Anchor for Pauline Chronology: Paul's Flight from 'the Ethnarch of King Aretas' (2 Corinthians 11:32-33),\" Journal of Biblical Literature 121", "year": "2002", "view": "Treats the flight from Aretas's official as a fixed point on which to build a Pauline chronology from the letters, and dates it narrowly in the later 30s." }, { "author": "Laurence L. Welborn", "work": "\"The Runaway Paul,\" Harvard Theological Review 92", "year": "1999", "view": "Calls the episode important for chronology because Aretas is the only political figure named in an authentic letter of Paul, and notes that Acts 9:23-25 parallels it in partly overlapping wording, which is unusual for Acts." }, { "author": "Laurence L. Welborn", "work": "\"Primum tirocinium Pauli (2 Cor 11,32-33),\" Biblische Zeitschrift 43", "year": "1999", "view": "As Riesner (2011) reports it, argues that Gaius (Caligula) handed Damascus over to Aretas IV in 37-39." }, { "author": "Martin Hengel and Anna Maria Schwemer", "work": "Paul Between Damascus and Antioch: The Unknown Years", "year": "1997", "view": "As cited by Riesner, they hold that the literary sources do not establish Nabataean rule of Damascus, and that Paul's early activity in the Nabataean kingdom may explain Aretas's hostility." }, { "author": "Zeyad Al-Salameen", "work": "\"A new Ancient North Arabian inscription with a reference to the Nabataean king Aretas,\" Arabian Archaeology and Epigraphy 22", "year": "2011", "view": "Publishes an inscription from al-Hussayniah, north of Ma'an, dated to the year a king Aretas died. He takes this most likely to be Aretas IV's death in AD 40." }, { "author": "Andrew Burnett, Michel Amandry and Pere Pau Ripollès", "work": "Roman Provincial Coinage, vol. I: From the Death of Caesar to Vitellius (44 BC-AD 69)", "year": "1992 (online edition 2019)", "view": "Catalogues Damascus's civic coinage as RPC I 4781-4806 with 4802A. Dated issues under Tiberius end with year 345 (AD 33/4); the next secure issues are Nero's, of year 377 (AD 65/6), and none of Gaius or Claudius are listed." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q302986", "label": "Aretas IV Philopatris" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q3766", "label": "Damascus" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "678106", "label": "Damascus" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q11029653", "label": "Nabataean kingdom" } ], "title": "Mfalme Areta IV na kutoroka kwa Paulo kutoka Dameski", "summary": "Yosefo anamshuhudia Areta IV, Mfalme Areta pekee ambaye utawala wake unafaa kipindi cha uhai wa Paulo na hivyo mfalme anayetajwa katika 2 Wakorintho 11:32. Maandishi yenye tarehe na sarafu huweka utawala wake karibu 9 KK–40 BK, hivyo kutoroka kwa Paulo kwa kikapu kutoka Dameski kulitokea kabla ya karibu 40 BK. Ikiwa Mfalme Areta alitawala Dameski wakati huo hakujathibitishwa; hoja hutegemea pengo la sarafu za mji na namna cheo cha afisa wa Mfalme Areta kinavyosomwa, istilahi ambayo Yosefo hutumia kwa mtawala wa eneo na mkuu wa jumuiya.", "dating": "Utawala wa Areta IV, karibu 9 KK–40 BK. Kutoroka kwa Paulo kulitokea kabla ya Mfalme Areta kufa na kunakumbukwa katika 2 Wakorintho, iliyoandikwa katikati ya miaka ya 50.", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi (Yosefo, Antiquities na Jewish War; Cassius Dio). Sarafu za kiraia za Dameski ziko katika makusanyo kadhaa ya makumbusho na binafsi na zimeorodheshwa katika RPC.", "establishes": [ "Areta IV ni mfalme wa Nabatea anayeshuhudiwa nje ya Agano Jipya. Yosefo anaripoti kuwa alichukua madaraka Obodas alipokufa na kuwa Augusto alimthibitisha kwa kusita tu. Yosefo pia anaripoti ushindi wake dhidi ya Herode Antipas wa Galilaya, na kuwa Vitellius aliacha msafara wake dhidi ya Mfalme Areta habari za kifo cha Tiberius zilipofika mwaka 37 BK.", "Utawala wake huhesabiwa karibu 9 KK–40 BK, ingawa mwaka wa kuingia madarakani hauna uhakika. Schürer (1890) anaripoti maandishi na sarafu za el-Hegr zilizowekwa katika mwaka wake wa 48; Al-Salameen (2011) huchapisha maandishi yenye tarehe ya mwaka ambao mfalme aitwaye Aretas alikufa, uwezekano mkubwa Areta IV mwaka 40 BK.", "Paulo anasema kuwa afisa wa Mfalme Areta aliilinda Dameski ili kumkamata, hivyo kutoroka (2 Wakorintho 11:32–33; linganisha Matendo 9:23–25) kulitokea kabla ya karibu 40 BK. Ikiwa kutoroka kulitangulia ziara ya kwanza ya Paulo ya Yerusalemu (Matendo 9:23–26; Wagalatia 1:17–18), kuongoka kwake kulitokea si baada ya karibu 37 BK.", "RPC I huorodhesha sarafu za kiraia za Dameski chini ya Tiberius hadi mwaka 345 (33/4 BK). Toleo linalofuata lenye uhakika ni chini ya Nero (mwaka 377, 65/6 BK), na hakuna matoleo ya Dameski ya Gaius au Klaudio yaliyoorodheshwa." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hauonyeshi kuwa Mfalme Areta alitawala Dameski. Hakuna maandishi ya jiwe, sarafu au maandishi yasiyo ya Kikristo yanayosema hivyo. Orodha ya Dio ya zawadi za Gaius mwaka 38 BK hutaja maeneo ya Arabia lakini si Mfalme Areta au Dameski (59.12.2).", "Pengo la sarafu halithibitishi kubadilika kwa mtawala. Dameski ilitengeneza sarafu kwa vipindi tu: RPC I haina matoleo yenye tarehe kati ya 4/3 KK na 13/14 BK. Pengo ni hoja kutokana na ukimya.", "Hauweki mwaka wa kutoroka, na hauyafanyi Matendo na 2 Wakorintho kuwa mashahidi huru kabisa. Wasomi hutetea tarehe kuanzia mapema miaka ya 30 hadi 39/40 BK, na masimulizi mawili hushiriki baadhi ya maneno.", "Matendo na Paulo hutaja wafuatiliaji tofauti: katika Matendo Wayahudi hulinda malango (Matendo 9:23–24), huku Paulo akimtaja afisa wa Mfalme Areta (2 Wakorintho 11:32). Upatanishaji wowote, kama ushirikiano kati yao, ni hitimisho." ], "debate": "Swali lililo wazi ni afisa wa Mfalme Areta huko Dameski alikuwa nani. Schürer (1890) alichukulia maneno ya Paulo kumaanisha kuwa Dameski ilikuwa ya Mfalme Areta wakati huo, huenda ilirudishwa kwake na Gaius, na akataja pengo la sarafu za mji; kama Riesner (2011) anavyoripoti, Welborn alijenga hoja ya kukabidhiwa na Gaius katika 37–39. Bacon (1899) aliweka utawala wowote kama huo si kabla ya mwisho wa 38. Riesner, akiwataja Hengel na Schwemer miongoni mwa wengine, haoni kuthibitishwa kwa zawadi wala kutekwa. Holtzmann, kama Bacon (1899) anavyoripoti, alisoma afisa kama mwakilishi wa maslahi ya Arabia huko Dameski; Riesner humsoma kama msimamizi wa sehemu ya mji ya watu wa Nabatea, kama mkuu wa Wayahudi wa Aleksandria ambaye Yosefo, akimnukuu Strabo, humwita ethnarch (Ant. 14.117). Campbell huona kutoroka kama msingi thabiti wa mpangilio wa matukio ya Paulo.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Utawala wa Nabatea wa mji, karibu 37–40 BK", "statement": "Mfalme Areta alitawala Dameski kwa muda mfupi kupitia afisa wake, labda kwa zawadi kutoka kwa Gaius baada ya Tiberius kufa. Waliokuwa wakiishikilia Dameski waliwahi kumwita Areta III wa awali kutawala Coele-Syria (Ant. 13.392), na Yosefo humpa Archelaus cheo kilekile kama mtawala wa nusu ya ufalme wa Herode Mkuu (War 2.93). Basi pengo la sarafu linafaa, kutoroka huangukia karibu 37–40 BK, na kwa Wagalatia 1:18 kuongoka kwa Paulo husogea hadi katikati ya miaka ya 30." }, { "label": "Afisa kama mkuu wa jumuiya au wakala wa mfalme", "statement": "Dameski ilibaki mji wa Shamu ya Kirumi. Afisa wa Mfalme Areta alikuwa ama mkuu wa jumuiya ya wenyeji wa Nabatea (Riesner) au wakala anayewakilisha maslahi ya mfalme (Holtzmann, kama Bacon anavyoripoti). Kwa namna yoyote angeweza kumwangalia Paulo bila kutawala mji, hivyo kutoroka kunaweza kuangukia mapema zaidi katika miaka ya 30. Bacon (1899) alitia shaka kuwa mteule kama huyo angeweza kulinda mji ulioshikiliwa na Warumi ili kumzuia mtu kuondoka." }, { "label": "Tarehe finyu ya msingi", "statement": "Campbell hufanya kukimbia afisa wa Mfalme Areta kuwa msingi wa mpangilio uliojengwa kutoka barua na kukiweka kwa ufinyu mwishoni mwa miaka ya 30. Riesner (2011) anapinga kuwa mamlaka ya Nabatea juu ya Dameski hayawezi kuthibitishwa, hivyo jambo pekee lenye uhakika ni kuwa kukimbia kulitangulia kifo cha Mfalme Areta mwaka 40 BK." }, { "label": "Kutoroka baada ya wakati unaotolewa na Matendo", "statement": "Weizsäcker, kama alivyoripotiwa na kufuatwa kwa tahadhari na Bacon (1899), aliweka kutoroka katika kukaa kwa baadaye huko Dameski karibu 39 BK, baada ya ziara ya kwanza ya Paulo ya Yerusalemu (Matendo 9:26), wakati wa kazi yake katika Shamu na Kilikia (Wagalatia 1:21). Kwa maoni haya Matendo 9 linaweka tukio wakati usio sahihi." }, { "label": "Mapokeo ya pamoja au kutegemeana kifasihi", "statement": "Paley (1790) aliweka masimulizi mawili kando kwa kando, moja lenye afisa wa mfalme akilinda mji na jingine lenye Wayahudi wakilinda malango, na akaona kuwa mazingira yake hutofautiana mno kwa moja kuwa limetokana na jingine. Welborn anaona kuwa hukubaliana kwa sehemu katika maneno, jambo lisilo la kawaida kati ya Matendo na barua. Ikiwa Matendo lilitumia barua ya Paulo au mapokeo ya pamoja bado iko wazi." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-aretas-damascus" }, { "id": "aratus-epimenides-menander", "kind": "literary-non-christian", "dateFrom": -343, "dateTo": -274, "corpusReferences": [ "Aratus, Phaenomena 5 (CTS urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0653.tlg001)", "Menander, Thais fr. 218 Kock", "Euripides fr. 1013 Nauck (cross-reference given by Allinson 1921)", "Callimachus, Hymn 1 (To Zeus) 8", "Diogenes Laertius 1.109-112 (Epimenides)" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 17:28", "Acts 17:22-31", "1 Corinthians 15:33", "Titus 1:12-13", "Acts 22:3" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.luke", "person.titus" ], "placeIds": [ "place.athens", "place.areopagus", "place.crete", "place.corinth", "place.tarsus" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "aratus-mair", "author": "Aratus", "work": "Phaenomena (English translation, Loeb Classical Library)", "translator": "G. R. Mair", "year": "1921", "locator": "Phaen. 4-6 (English translation)", "url": "https://archive.org/download/callimachuslycop0000wmai/callimachuslycop0000wmai_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "always we all have need of Zeus. For we are also his offspring; and he in his kindness unto men giveth favourable signs and wakeneth the people to work", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "aratus-mair", "author": "Aratus", "work": "Phaenomena (Greek text, ed. G. R. Mair)", "year": "1921", "locator": "Phaen. 5", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:2008.01.0483", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "τοῦ γάρ καὶ γένος εἰμέν", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "aratus-mair", "author": "G. R. Mair", "work": "Introduction to Aratus, in Callimachus and Lycophron; Aratus (Loeb Classical Library)", "year": "1921", "locator": "Introduction to Aratus, p. 360 (birthplace)", "url": "https://archive.org/download/callimachuslycop0000wmai/callimachuslycop0000wmai_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Aratus of Soli in Cilicia—as distinct from Soli in Cyprus—was the son of Athenodorus and Letophila", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "aratus-mair", "author": "G. R. Mair", "work": "Introduction to Aratus, in Callimachus and Lycophron; Aratus (Loeb Classical Library)", "year": "1921", "locator": "Introduction to Aratus, p. 363 (date of the Phaenomena)", "url": "https://archive.org/download/callimachuslycop0000wmai/callimachuslycop0000wmai_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "This must have been between 276-274, because in the latter year this literary circle was broken up by the invasion of Pyrrhus", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "clement-alexandria-stromata-anf", "author": "Clement of Alexandria", "work": "Stromata, Book I (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 2)", "translator": "William Wilson", "year": "1885", "locator": "Strom. 1.14 (Epimenides)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/02101.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "others, Epimenides the Cretan, whom Paul knew as a Greek prophet, whom he mentions in the Epistle to Titus", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "clement-alexandria-stromata-anf", "author": "Clement of Alexandria", "work": "Stromata, Book I (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 2)", "translator": "William Wilson", "year": "1885", "locator": "Strom. 1.14 (Greek poems; 1 Corinthians line)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/02101.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "is not ashamed, when discoursing for the edification of some and the shaming of others, to make use of Greek poems. Accordingly to the Corinthians (for this is not the only instance), while discoursing on the resurrection of the dead, he makes use of a tragic Iambic line", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "clement-alexandria-stromata-anf", "author": "Clement of Alexandria", "work": "Stromata, Book I (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 2)", "translator": "William Wilson", "year": "1885", "locator": "Strom. 1.19 (Aratus)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/02101.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Whence it is evident that the apostle, by availing himself of poetical examples from the Phenomena of Aratus, approves of what had been well spoken by the Greeks", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "diogenes-laertius-hicks", "author": "Diogenes Laertius", "work": "Lives of Eminent Philosophers, Book I (Epimenides)", "translator": "R. D. Hicks", "year": "1925", "locator": "1.110 (date of Epimenides' visit to Athens)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0258%3Abook%3D1%3Achapter%3D10", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And he came in the 46th Olympiad", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "diogenes-laertius-hicks", "author": "Diogenes Laertius", "work": "Lives of Eminent Philosophers, Book I (Epimenides)", "translator": "R. D. Hicks", "year": "1925", "locator": "1.111 (works ascribed to Epimenides)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0258%3Abook%3D1%3Achapter%3D10", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "He wrote a poem On the Birth of the Curetes and Corybantes and a Theogony", "role": "primary-text" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Francis G. Allinson", "work": "Menander: The Principal Fragments (Loeb Classical Library)", "year": "1921", "view": "Prints the line of 1 Corinthians 15:33, in its elided form, as Menander, Thais fr. 218 Kock, and cross-references Euripides fr. 1013 Nauck." }, { "author": "A. W. Mair", "work": "Callimachus: Hymns, in Callimachus and Lycophron; Aratus (Loeb Classical Library)", "year": "1921", "view": "Prints Callimachus' Hymn to Zeus, whose line 8 opens with the same three words as Titus 1:12, and annotates the saying as proverbial and attributed to Epimenides." }, { "author": "J. Rendel Harris", "work": "The Cretans Always Liars (The Expositor, 7th series, vol. 2)", "year": "1906", "view": "Argues from a passage in the Syriac Gannat Busame, which he took to come from Theodore of Mopsuestia, that the first clause of Acts 17:28 also derives from Epimenides." }, { "author": "Martin Dibelius", "work": "Paulus auf dem Areopag", "year": "1939", "view": "Reads the Areopagus speech as a Lukan literary composition in a Hellenistic philosophical idiom, not as a record of Paul's own words." }, { "author": "Bertil Gärtner", "work": "The Areopagus Speech and Natural Revelation", "year": "1955", "view": "Argues against Dibelius that the speech's thought is rooted in Old Testament and Jewish tradition, with the Greek citations used in its service." }, { "author": "Clare K. Rothschild", "work": "Paul in Athens: The Popular Religious Context of Acts 17 (WUNT 341)", "year": "2014", "view": "Argues that popular second-century traditions about Epimenides make sense of the Athens episode, including the unknown-god altar and the first clause of Acts 17:28, and that scholars have overlooked them in favour of the philosophers named in the chapter." }, { "author": "Erkki Koskenniemi", "work": "The Famous Liar and the Apostolic Truth (Filología Neotestamentaria 24)", "year": "2011", "view": "Argues that the Cretan-liar proverb came first, was turned into a logical paradox, and was attached to Epimenides only later and ahistorically, so the verse in Titus does not prove that its writer knew classical literature well." }, { "author": "John Granger Cook", "work": "Titus 1,12: Epimenides, Ancient Christian Scholars, Zeus's Death, and the Cretan Paradox (Zeitschrift für Antikes Christentum 25)", "year": "2021", "view": "Reads Titus 1:12 in its history-of-religions context rather than as a liar's paradox." }, { "author": "I. Howard Marshall (with Philip H. Towner)", "work": "A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Pastoral Epistles (ICC)", "year": "1999", "view": "Holds that a Pauline associate wrote the Pastorals under Paul's name without deceptive intent ('allonymity'), rather than Paul himself." }, { "author": "William D. Mounce", "work": "Pastoral Epistles (Word Biblical Commentary 46)", "year": "2000", "view": "Defends Pauline authorship of the Pastorals and explains their stylistic differences partly by an amanuensis." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q180671", "label": "Aratus" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q42194191", "label": "Phaenomena (poem by Aratus)" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q319406", "label": "Epimenides of Crete" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q118992", "label": "Menander" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q192417", "label": "Callimachus" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1992415", "label": "Stromata (Clement of Alexandria)" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q4789055", "label": "Areopagus sermon" } ], "title": "Washairi wa Kiyunani walionukuliwa katika Matendo na barua za Paulo: Aratus, Menander na 'Epimenides'", "summary": "Mistari mitatu katika Matendo na barua za Paulo hurudia ushairi wa Kiyunani. Matendo 17:28 hulingana na nusu ya kwanza ya mstari wa 5 wa Phaenomena ya Aratus (karne ya 3 KK). 1 Wakorintho 15:33 hulingana, isipokuwa irabu moja isiyodondoshwa, na mstari wenye vipimo vitatu vya iambi unaochapishwa kama wa Menander, kutoka vichekesho vyake vilivyopotea Thais. Tito 1:12 ni mstari wenye vipimo sita ambao Clement wa Aleksandria alihusisha na mwonaji wa Krete Epimenides. Mistari huonyesha upeo wa kifasihi wa Kiyunani, lakini si kwamba Paulo aliwasoma washairi hawa au kwamba hotuba ya Athene imeripotiwa neno kwa neno.", "dating": "Mashairi: Diogenes Laertius humweka Epimenides katika Olimpiyadi ya 46 (596–593 KK), tarehe ya kimapokeo, na hakuna kazi yake iliyohifadhiwa kamili; Menander 343/42–292/91 KK (Allinson); Phaenomena ya Aratus karibu 276–274 KK (hitimisho la Mair); Hymn to Zeus ya Callimachus, karne ya 3 KK. Uhusishaji wa mapema zaidi wa Kikristo uliotajwa: Clement wa Aleksandria, Stromata (karibu 200 BK).", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Maneno ambayo Matendo 17:28 huhusisha na washairi wa Kiyunani hulingana na nusu ya kwanza ya mstari wa 5 wa Phaenomena ya Aratus; Kiyunani hutofautiana katika umbo la kitenzi tu (Aratus ana εἰμέν ya kishairi). Aratus alitoka Soli katika Kilikia na, kwa tarehe ya Mair ya 1921, alitunga shairi karibu 276–274 KK.", "1 Wakorintho 15:33 hulingana, isipokuwa irabu moja isiyodondoshwa, na mstari wenye vipimo vitatu vya iambi ambao Allinson (1921) huchapisha kama Menander, Thais fr. 218 Kock. Tamthilia imepotea, kwa hiyo kuhusishwa kwake hutegemea ushuhuda wa kale badala ya maandishi yaliyohifadhiwa. Clement wa Aleksandria tayari aliuita mstari wa iambi wa tanzia ulioazimwa.", "Tito 1:12 hutaja mstari wenye vipimo sita kama kauli ya nabii wa Krete. Maneno yake matatu ya kwanza pia hufungua mstari wa 8 wa Hymn to Zeus ya Callimachus (karne ya 3 KK), ambayo Loeb ya Mair ya 1921 huiwekea maelezo kama msemo wa kimethali unaohusishwa na Epimenides. Clement humtambulisha nabii wa Tito kama Epimenides (Strom. 1.14).", "Clement wa Aleksandria hutaja mistari yote mitatu katika Stromata 1.14 na 1.19. Anasema Paulo hakuona aibu kutumia mashairi ya Kiyunani, na hujenga hoja kutokana na nukuu ya Aratus kuwa Paulo alikubali yale Wayunani waliyosema vizuri." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Kuwa Paulo alisoma Aratus, Menander au Epimenides moja kwa moja. Kila mstari ni mfupi na rahisi kunukuu, na mstari wa 1 Wakorintho unaitwa wa tanzia na Clement lakini huchapishwa miongoni mwa vipande vya Menander na Allinson, ambaye pia hutoa rejeo la kulinganisha la Euripides. Hilo linafaa kusambaa kama kauli ya hekima.", "Kuwa Epimenides aliandika mstari wa Krete. Hakuna kazi yake iliyohifadhiwa kamili, na uhusishaji wa mapema zaidi uliotajwa hapa (Clement, karibu 200 BK) huja karibu karne nane baada ya tarehe anayopewa na Diogenes Laertius.", "Nani aliandika Tito, au Matendo 17 hurudia kwa ukaribu kiasi gani maneno ya Paulo huko Athene. Nukuu zinaendana na uandishi wa Paulo, utunzi wa Luka wa hotuba, au mwandishi wa baadaye katika mapokeo ya Paulo." ], "debate": "Maswali matano yako wazi. Kwanza, je, Luka alitunga hotuba ya Areopago kwa mtindo wa Kiyunani (Dibelius), au nukuu zake za Kiyunani hutumikia teolojia ya kibiblia (Gärtner)? Pili, je, kifungu cha kwanza cha Matendo 17:28 pia hutokana na Epimenides? Harris alijenga hoja hiyo kutokana na ufafanuzi wa Kisiria alioona kuhifadhi Theodore wa Mopsuestia, na Rothschild kutokana na mapokeo maarufu ya Epimenides. Tatu, je, Epimenides aliandika mstari wa Krete, au jina lake liliunganishwa baadaye na methali iliyokuwa imegeuka kuwa kitendawili cha kimantiki (Koskenniemi)? Cook husoma mstari katika mazingira yake ya historia ya dini badala ya kama kitendawili. Nne, je, mstari wa 1 Wakorintho ni wa Menander, wa mtunzi wa tanzia au wa matumizi ya kawaida? Tano, je, Paulo (Mounce) au mshirika (Marshall) aliandika Tito?", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Nukuu za Paulo mwenyewe", "statement": "Paulo, Myahudi anayesema Kiyunani kutoka Tarso (Matendo 22:3), alitumia ufahamu wa washairi wa Kiyunani wa kiwango cha shuleni na kuchagua mistari inayofaa wasikilizaji wake. Clement alisoma mistari hivyo (Strom. 1.14; 1.19), na kwa Tito, Mounce hutetea uandishi wa Paulo." }, { "label": "Kusambaa kama methali", "statement": "Mistari ilikuwa kauli za kawaida za hekima, hivyo matumizi yake huonyesha ufahamu wa mapokeo ya Kiyunani ya kauli za hekima badala ya kusoma kazi za washairi. Chanzo kisicho na uhakika cha mstari wa 1 Wakorintho, vichekesho vya Menander au tanzia kama neno la Clement linavyodokeza, huashiria hivyo." }, { "label": "Utunzi wa Luka huko Athene", "statement": "Nukuu ya Aratus ni sehemu ya Luka kuunda kifasihi hotuba ya mtindo wa Kiyunani (Dibelius). Kwa maoni haya huonyesha elimu ya mwandishi wa Matendo, si lazima ya Paulo." }, { "label": "Epimenides kama uhusishaji wa baadaye", "statement": "Mstari wa Krete wenye vipimo sita huenda ni ushairi usio na mwandishi unaojulikana uliohusishwa na Epimenides baada ya kuwa methali na kitendawili cha kimantiki (Koskenniemi). Matumizi ya Callimachus ya maneno yake ya mwanzo huonyesha tu kuwa nusu ya mstari ilitumika kufikia karne ya 3 KK." }, { "label": "Tito ya baada ya Paulo", "statement": "Ikiwa mshirika aliandika Tito baada ya kifo cha Paulo ('allonymity' ya Marshall), nukuu yake huonyesha upeo wa kifasihi wa mzunguko wa Paulo badala ya Paulo mwenyewe." }, { "label": "Euripides au matumizi ya pamoja badala ya Menander", "statement": "Clement huita mstari wa 1 Wakorintho wa tanzia, na Allinson hutoa rejeo la kulinganisha la Euripides fr. 1013 Nauck. Huenda mstari ulitumiwa na mshairi zaidi ya mmoja, au ulikuwa wa kimethali kabla ya Menander." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-aratus-epimenides-menander" }, { "id": "josephus-agrippa-death", "kind": "literary-non-christian", "dateFrom": 93, "dateTo": 94, "corpusReferences": [ "Josephus, Antiquitates Judaicae 19.343-350 (CTS urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0526.tlg001)", "Josephus, Bellum Judaicum 2.218-219 (CTS urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0526.tlg004)" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 12:19-23", "Acts 12:1-4", "Acts 11:27-30", "Acts 12:24-25" ], "personIds": [ "person.herod-agrippa-i", "person.josephus", "person.claudius", "person.barnabas", "person.paul" ], "placeIds": [ "place.caesarea", "place.judea", "place.tyre", "place.sidon" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 19.343 (Whiston 19.8.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=19:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Now when Agrippa had reigned three years over all Judea, he came to the city Cesarea, which was formerly called Strato's Tower; and there he exhibited shows in honor of Caesar", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 19.344 (Whiston 19.8.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=19:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "On the second day of which shows he put on a garment made wholly of silver, and of a contexture truly wonderful, and came into the theater early in the morning", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 19.345 (Whiston 19.8.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=19:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "presently his flatterers cried out, one from one place, and another from another, (though not for his good,) that he was a god", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 19.346 (Whiston 19.8.2; no rebuke and the owl)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=19:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Upon this the king did neither rebuke them, nor reject their impious flattery. But as he presently afterward looked up, he saw an owl", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 19.346 (Whiston 19.8.2; the owl as messenger)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=19:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "immediately understood that this bird was the messenger of ill tidings, as it had once been the messenger of good tidings to him", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 19.347 (Whiston 19.8.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=19:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I, whom you call a god, am commanded presently to depart this life; while Providence thus reproves the lying words you just now said to me", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 19.350 (Whiston 19.8.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=19:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "when he had been quite worn out by the pain in his belly for five days, he departed this life, being in the fifty-fourth year of his age, and in the seventh year of his reign", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 18.200 (owl omen, 18.195-202; Whiston 18.6.7)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=18:whiston%20chapter=6:whiston%20section=7", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But do thou remember, when thou seest this bird again, that thou wilt then live but five days longer.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 17.168-169 (Whiston 17.6.5)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=17:whiston%20chapter=6:whiston%20section=5", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But now Herod's distemper greatly increased upon him after a severe manner, and this by God's judgment upon him for his sins", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.101 (Whiston 20.5.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=5:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Under these procurators that great famine happened in Judea, in which queen Helena bought corn in Egypt at a great expense, and distributed it to those that were in want", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.267 (Whiston 20.11.3)", "url": "https://www.gutenberg.org/cache/epub/2848/pg2848.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "which is the thirteenth year of the reign of Cæsar Domitian, and the fifty-sixth year of my own life", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Jewish War", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 2.218-219 (Whiston 2.11.6)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=2:whiston%20chapter=11:whiston%20section=6", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "but his death, which happened at Cesarea, before he had raised the walls to their due height, prevented him. He had then reigned three years, as he had governed his tetrarchies three other years.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History (Nicene and Post-Nicene Fathers, Series II vol. 1)", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.10.6", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But after a little, looking up, he saw an angel sitting above his head.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History (Nicene and Post-Nicene Fathers, Series II vol. 1)", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.10.10", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "the time at least and the events show that the same person is meant, whether the change of name has been caused by the error of a copyist, or is due to the fact that he, like so many, bore two names", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata item: Agrippa I", "locator": "Q298636", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q298636.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "pleiades", "work": "Pleiades place: Stratonos Pyrgos/Caesarea", "locator": "678401", "url": "https://pleiades.stoa.org/places/678401/json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Max Krenkel", "work": "Josephus und Lucas: der schriftstellerische Einfluss des jüdischen Geschichtschreibers auf den christlichen", "year": "1894", "view": "Argues that Luke drew on Josephus in many passages, but for Acts 12 judges it doubtful: the Tyre and Sidon embassy and Blastus point to a source other than Josephus. He takes the acclamation at Caesarea and the sudden fatal illness as a shared historical core, and the owl, the angel and the worms as legend." }, { "author": "Steve Mason", "work": "Josephus and the New Testament (2nd ed.)", "year": "2003", "view": "Lists Agrippa's death among the points where Luke-Acts agrees with Josephus and finds it easier to believe that Luke knew something of Josephus's work than that the agreements arose independently, while granting that this cannot be proved. On this view Luke-Acts postdates the Antiquities." }, { "author": "Richard I. Pervo", "work": "Dating Acts: Between the Evangelists and the Apologists", "year": "2006", "view": "Argues that the author of Acts knew Josephus's later writings and that Acts is better dated to the second century, around 115." }, { "author": "O. Wesley Allen Jr.", "work": "The Death of Herod: The Narrative and Theological Function of Retribution in Luke-Acts (SBL Dissertation Series 158)", "year": "1997", "view": "Reads Acts 12:19b-24 against death-of-tyrant scenes in biblical and Greco-Roman literature. He treats the death as divine retribution for Herod's failure to give glory to God, a theme that does literary work across Luke-Acts." }, { "author": "Colin J. Hemer", "work": "The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History", "year": "1989", "view": "Defends the historical reliability of Acts in general by comparing its details with literary, epigraphic and papyrological evidence from its setting." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q298636", "label": "Agrippa I" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q319242", "label": "Caesarea Maritima" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1232616", "label": "Antiquities of the Jews" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q134461", "label": "Josephus" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "678401", "label": "Stratonos Pyrgos/Caesarea" } ], "title": "Yosefo kuhusu kifo cha Herode Agripa I huko Kaisaria", "summary": "Yosefo, mwanahistoria asiye Mkristo, huripoti kwa muhtasari kifo cha Matendo 12:19–23. Katika Antiquities 19.343-350 (iliyokamilishwa 93/94 BK), Herode Agripa I, Herode wa Matendo 12, hufa huko Kaisaria baada ya kukubali kusifiwa kama mungu na kushikwa na maumivu ya ghafla. Hesabu zake za utawala kwa kawaida husomwa kama kuweka kifo katika 44 BK. Masimulizi hutofautiana katika tukio, ishara na ugonjwa, na ikiwa Luka alizijua kazi za Yosefo kunabishaniwa.", "dating": "Antiquities ilikamilishwa katika mwaka wa kumi na tatu wa Domitian na wa hamsini na sita wa Yosefo (Ant. 20.267), yaani 93/94 BK. Kifo kwa kawaida huwekwa 44 BK, uundaji upya wa kisasa kutokana na hesabu za utawala za Yosefo; Yosefo hatoi mwaka wa kalenda.", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Yosefo, ambaye hakuwa Mkristo, hurekodi kuwa Herode Agripa I alikufa Kaisaria baada ya kuonekana katika maonyesho yaliyofanywa huko kwa heshima ya kaisari, na kuwa maumivu ya tumbo yalimwua baada ya siku tano (Ant. 19.343-350). War yake pia huweka kifo Kaisaria (War 2.219).", "Yosefo na Matendo 12:19–23 hushiriki mfuatano mkuu: mfalme huonekana hadharani Kaisaria katika mavazi ya kifalme, husifiwa kama mungu, hakatai heshima, na huugua ghafla kwa ugonjwa unaomwua. Matendo linasema malaika wa Bwana alimpiga kwa kutompa Mungu utukufu; Yosefo anamwasilisha Herode Agripa I akisoma maumivu yake kama hatima (Whiston: 'Providence') ikikanusha wasifiaji.", "Yosefo anasema Herode Agripa I alikuwa ametawala Uyahudi yote miaka mitatu na kufa katika mwaka wa saba wa utawala wake (Ant. 19.343, 350; War 2.219). Hesabu hizi, zikichukuliwa pamoja na mwanzo wa utawala wa Klaudio, kwa kawaida husomwa kama kuweka kifo 44 BK. Mwaka huo ni uundaji upya wa kisasa; Yosefo hatoi tarehe ya kalenda.", "Mfalme ambaye Matendo humwita Herode ndiye mtu ambaye Yosefo humwita 'Agrippa', yaani Herode Agripa I. Eusebius tayari alijenga hoja kuwa wakati na matukio huonyesha mtu yuleyule anamaanishwa (HE 2.10.10)." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hauthibitishi maelezo yanayotolewa na Luka tu: ujumbe kutoka Tiro na Sidoni, Blastus, hotuba, malaika wa Bwana na kifo cha kuliwa na minyoo. Badala yake Yosefo ana maonyesho ya kifalme, ishara ya bundi na siku tano za maumivu ya tumbo.", "Hauyafanyi wenyewe masimulizi mawili kuwa mashahidi huru. Ikiwa Luka aliijua Antiquities, au waandishi wote walitumia taarifa ya pamoja, kunabishaniwa, hivyo makubaliano yao yasihesabiwe mara mbili.", "Hauweki tarehe ya ziara ya msaada wa njaa ya Barnaba na Sauli (Matendo 11:27–30; 12:25). Yosefo huweka njaa kubwa huko Uyahudi chini ya watawala waliomfuata Herode Agripa I (Ant. 20.101), hivyo huenda Matendo huweka kifo ndani ya simulizi hilo kwa mada badala ya mfuatano mkali." ], "debate": "Wasomi wamejadili tangu karne ya kumi na tisa ikiwa Luka alizijua kazi za Yosefo. Krenkel (1894) alijenga hoja ya Luka kumtumia Yosefo katika vifungu vingi na kuleta wazo kuwa Luka alibadilisha bundi, ambaye Yosefo humwita 'mjumbe' (Kiyunani angelos), kuwa malaika. Hata hivyo, kwa Matendo 12 aliona ujumbe wa Tiro na Sidoni na Blastus kuwa umetoka chanzo kingine, jambo lililofanya matumizi ya Yosefo hapa kuwa ya shaka, na alisoma bundi, malaika na minyoo kama mapokeo yaliyozunguka msingi wa pamoja wa kihistoria. Mason (2003) huorodhesha kifo cha Herode Agripa I miongoni mwa makubaliano yanayofanya ufahamu wa Luka wa Yosefo uwe rahisi kuamini kuliko sadfa, na Pervo (2006) hujenga hoja ya ufahamu huo na Matendo ya karne ya pili. Nukuu ya Eusebius ya kifungu (HE 2.10.6) husoma 'malaika' mahali hati za Yosefo zina bundi. Masimulizi yote mawili pia hufuata muundo wa kawaida wa watawala wasiomcha Mungu, hivyo bado iko wazi ni kiasi gani cha kila moja ni taarifa na kiasi gani ni uundaji wa kifasihi.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Luka alibadilisha simulizi la Yosefo", "statement": "Mwandishi wa Matendo aliijua Antiquities (iliyokamilishwa 93/94 BK) na kuunda upya simulizi lake kwa wasomaji wa Kikristo, ili malaika na minyoo vichukue nafasi ya ishara ya bundi. Mason (2003) anaona ufahamu wa Luka wa Yosefo kuwa rahisi kuamini kuliko sadfa, na Pervo (2006) hujenga hoja hiyo. Kwa maoni haya Matendo liliandikwa baada ya katikati ya miaka ya 90." }, { "label": "Taarifa huru za kifo cha hadharani", "statement": "Luka na Yosefo kila mmoja alitumia taarifa za kifo ambacho watu wengi walishuhudia huko Kaisaria. Hutofautiana katika hafla, maelezo kadhaa na jina la mfalme, jambo linalopinga kuazima kifasihi; Krenkel, aliyejenga hoja ya Luka kumtumia Yosefo kwingine, aliona hilo la shaka hapa. Ikiwa hivyo, makubaliano yao kuhusu mazingira, sifa na ugonjwa wa ghafla ni uthibitisho huru." }, { "label": "Desturi ya kifasihi iliunda masimulizi yote", "statement": "Waandishi wote walisimulia kifo kwa muundo unaojulikana wa kisasi dhidi ya watawala wanaokubali heshima za kiungu. Yosefo mwenyewe hueleza ugonjwa wa mwisho wa Herode Mkuu, wenye minyoo, kama hukumu ya Mungu kwa dhambi zake (Ant. 17.168-169), na 2 Wamakabayo 9 husimulia Antiochus IV kwa namna ileile. Huenda muhtasari wa pamoja unatokana na desturi hii kwa kiwango sawa na ufahamu tofauti wa tukio (ling. Allen 1997 kuhusu Matendo)." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-josephus-agrippa-death" }, { "id": "athens-altar-unknown-god", "kind": "literary-non-christian", "dateFrom": 150, "dateTo": 250, "corpusReferences": [ "Pausanias, Description of Greece 1.1.4; 5.14.8 (CTS urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0525.tlg001)", "Diogenes Laertius, Lives of Eminent Philosophers 1.110 (CTS urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0004.tlg001)", "Philostratus, Life of Apollonius of Tyana 6.3 (CTS urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0638.tlg001)" ], "confidence": "medium-high", "epistemicStatus": "source-supported", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 17:23", "Acts 17:16-34" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.luke" ], "placeIds": [ "place.athens", "place.areopagus" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "pausanias-jones", "author": "Pausanias", "work": "Description of Greece", "translator": "W. H. S. Jones", "year": "1918", "locator": "1.1.4", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0160:book=1:chapter=1:section=4", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Here there is also a temple of Athena Sciras, and one of Zeus some distance away, and altars of the gods named Unknown, and of heroes, and of the children of Theseus and Phalerus", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "pausanias-jones", "author": "Pausanias", "work": "Description of Greece", "translator": "W. H. S. Jones", "year": "1918", "locator": "5.14.8", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0160:book=5:chapter=14:section=8", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "An account of the great altar I gave a little way back; it is called the altar of Olympian Zeus. By it is an altar of Unknown Gods", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "diogenes-laertius-hicks", "author": "Diogenes Laertius", "work": "Lives of Eminent Philosophers, Book I (Epimenides)", "translator": "R. D. Hicks", "year": "1925", "locator": "1.110 (nameless altars)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0258:book=1:chapter=10", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "offer a sacrifice to the local divinity. And thus, it is said, the plague was stayed. Hence even to this day altars may be found in different parts of Attica with no name inscribed upon them, which are memorials of this atonement.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "diogenes-laertius-hicks", "author": "Diogenes Laertius", "work": "Lives of Eminent Philosophers, Book I (Epimenides)", "translator": "R. D. Hicks", "year": "1925", "locator": "1.110 (46th Olympiad)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0258:book=1:chapter=10", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And he came in the 46th Olympiad", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "philostratus-conybeare", "author": "Philostratus", "work": "Life of Apollonius of Tyana", "translator": "F. C. Conybeare", "year": "1912", "locator": "6.3", "url": "https://archive.org/download/lifeofapollonius02philuoft/lifeofapollonius02philuoft_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "a much greater proof of wisdom and sobriety to speak well of all the gods, especially at Athens, where altars are set up in honour even of unknown gods.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "Against Marcion (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 3)", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "1.9", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03121.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I find, no doubt, that altars have been lavished on unknown gods; that, however, is the idolatry of Athens. And on uncertain gods; but that, too, is only Roman superstition.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "clement-alexandria-stromata-anf", "author": "Clement of Alexandria", "work": "Stromata, Book I (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 2)", "translator": "William Wilson", "year": "1885", "locator": "Strom. 1.19 (the unknown God)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/02101.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "intimates that, by the unknown God, God the Creator was in a roundabout way worshipped by the Greeks", "role": "primary-text" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Eduard Norden", "work": "Agnostos Theos: Untersuchungen zur Formengeschichte religiöser Rede", "year": "1913", "view": "Finds no attested dedication of an altar to a single unknown god; the pagan reports use the plural. He quotes Jerome's comment on Titus 1:12 about a plural inscription and assigns that fuller wording to a different, probably Roman, altar. He argues that the Areopagus speech depends on a literary account of Apollonius of Tyana at Athens, the change to the singular showing which text is dependent, and rejects Blass's plural conjecture and Usener's memory-slip view." }, { "author": "Adolf Deissmann", "work": "St. Paul: A Study in Social and Religious History", "year": "1912", "view": "Holds that anonymous altars and altars to unknown gods were not altogether rare. He argues that a Pergamon altar, probably of the second century AD and restored by Hepding as a torchbearer's dedication to unknown gods, makes Pausanias and Philostratus credible, while granting that certainty is unattainable. In his view the altar Paul read was probably one Athenian's thank-offering to a single unknown god." }, { "author": "Clare K. Rothschild", "work": "Paul in Athens: The Popular Religious Context of Acts 17 (WUNT 341)", "year": "2014", "view": "Popular second-century traditions about the Cretan seer Epimenides, which Rothschild connects with the altar to an unknown god, explain the apparently ad hoc features of Acts 17 and reinforce Luke's theme of cult transfer." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q114315369", "label": "Unknown Gods" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q3825645", "label": "Description of Greece" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1225196", "label": "Life of Apollonius of Tyana" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1282359", "label": "Lives and Opinions of Eminent Philosophers" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q319406", "label": "Epimenides of Crete" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q4789055", "label": "Areopagus sermon" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "580072", "label": "Phaleron" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "579885", "label": "Athenae" } ], "title": "Madhabahu za miungu isiyojulikana huko Athene: Pausanias, Philostratus na Diogenes Laertius", "summary": "Waandishi wasio Wakristo wa karne ya 2–3 BK huripoti madhabahu za miungu isiyojulikana huko Athene na bandari yake Phalerum, lakini daima kwa wingi; hakuna anayeshuhudia wakfu wa umoja wa Matendo 17:23. Pausanias huorodhesha madhabahu za miungu inayoitwa Isiyojulikana huko Phalerum. Philostratus anamwasilisha Apollonius akitaja madhabahu hizo Athene, na Diogenes Laertius hueleza madhabahu zisizo na majina katika Attica. Mazingira yanafaa Matendo; maneno yenyewe bado hayajathibitishwa.", "dating": "Karne ya 2–3 BK (Pausanias, karne ya 2; Philostratus na Diogenes Laertius, karne ya 3). Maoni ya Kikristo kutoka Clement wa Aleksandria na Tertullian (karibu 200 BK); taarifa ya baadaye ya Jerome ya maandishi ya wingi (mwishoni mwa karne ya 4) inajulikana hapa kupitia Norden.", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Pausanias (karne ya 2 BK) hurekodi madhabahu za miungu 'inayoitwa Isiyojulikana' huko Phalerum, bandari ya Athene, na madhabahu ya Miungu Isiyojulikana kando ya madhabahu ya Zeu wa Olimpiki huko Olympia (1.1.4; 5.14.8).", "Philostratus (karne ya 3 BK) anamwasilisha Apollonius wa Tyana, katika mazungumzo yaliyowekwa Misri, akishauri miungu yote isemwe vizuri, hasa huko Athene, ambako hata miungu isiyojulikana huwekewa madhabahu za heshima (Life of Apollonius 6.3). Kiyunani husema daimones wasiojulikana, ambayo Conybeare hutafsiri 'miungu'.", "Diogenes Laertius (1.110) huhifadhi mapokeo kuwa Epimenides alimaliza tauni huko Athene kwa dhabihu katika sehemu zilizochaguliwa na kondoo waliotangatanga, na kuwa madhabahu zisizo na majina kutoka utakaso huo bado zingeweza kupatikana Attica.", "Matendo 17:23 hueleza madhabahu ya aina inayoshuhudiwa na waandishi wasio Wakristo, lakini kwa wingi tu. Tertullian, katika kifungu kisichotaja Matendo wala Paulo, ni shahidi mwingine wa wingi: huita madhabahu za miungu isiyojulikana ibada ya sanamu ya Athene (Against Marcion 1.9). Clement wa Aleksandria humwona Paulo akidokeza kuwa Wayunani walimwabudu Mungu Muumba kwa namna isiyo ya moja kwa moja kupitia mungu asiyejulikana (Strom. 1.19)." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hakuna mwandishi huyu anayeeleza madhabahu iliyowekwa wakfu kwa mungu mmoja asiyejulikana. Wanaunga mkono aina ya madhabahu, si wakfu wenyewe wa umoja ambao Matendo huripoti.", "Hawawezi kuweka mahali au kutambua madhabahu ambayo Paulo anasemekana kuiona. Maelezo sahihi ya eneo hayathibitishi yenyewe hotuba ya Areopago au sehemu nyingine ya tukio.", "Madhabahu zisizo na majina za Diogenes haziitwi madhabahu za miungu isiyojulikana, na simulizi lake la Epimenides ni mapokeo yaliyowekwa katika Olimpiyadi ya 46, mapema karne ya 6 KK." ], "debate": "Swali lililo wazi ni umoja. Pausanias, Philostratus na Tertullian huzungumzia miungu isiyojulikana kwa wingi. Norden (1913) hunukuu maoni ya Jerome kuhusu Tito 1:12, yanayosema maandishi yalikuwa ya wingi, yakitaja miungu ya Asia ya kijiografia, Ulaya na Afrika pamoja na miungu isiyojulikana na ya kigeni, na kuwa Paulo aliyafanya ya umoja kwa hoja yake. Norden alihusisha maneno hayo mapana na madhabahu tofauti, huenda huko Rumi, na kusoma umoja katika Matendo kama kuundwa upya kwa wazo la wingi kutoka mapokeo ya Apollonius. Deissmann (1912) aliona mtu mmoja anayeabudu angeweza kuweka wakfu madhabahu kwa mungu mmoja asiyejulikana, akitaja madhabahu ya Pergamon ambayo urejeshaji wake kama wakfu kwa miungu isiyojulikana wenyewe hauna uhakika.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Fomula ya wingi, iliyobadilishwa", "statement": "Jerome alishikilia kuwa maandishi halisi yalikuwa ya wingi na kwamba Paulo aliyanukuu kwa umoja kwa sababu hoja yake ilihitaji Mungu mmoja. Kwa maoni haya Matendo hubadilisha aina halisi ya wakfu. Norden, anayemnukuu Jerome, aliona maneno yake mapana kuwa yametoka madhabahu tofauti, huenda Rumi, ambayo mfasiri wa awali alikuwa ameitambulisha kimakosa na ile ya Athene." }, { "label": "Kuazima kifasihi", "statement": "Norden alijenga hoja kuwa hotuba ya Areopago hutegemea simulizi la kifasihi la Apollonius wa Tyana akisema huko Athene, na kuwa mabadiliko kutoka wingi hadi umoja huonyesha Matendo kuwa ndilo lililoazima. Hoja hutegemea kuunda upya simulizi la awali la Apollonius kutoka kazi ya Philostratus ya karne ya 3." }, { "label": "Wakfu halisi wa umoja", "statement": "Deissmann aliona kuwa inaelekea mtu binafsi, akishukuru mungu ambaye hakuweza kumtaja, aliweka wakfu madhabahu kwa mungu mmoja asiyejulikana, kama inavyoonekana kuhani wa Demeter huko Pergamon alivyofanya kwa miungu isiyojulikana karne ya pili BK. Kwa maoni haya Matendo huenda huripoti maneno kwa usahihi, ingawa hakuna madhabahu ya umoja iliyohifadhiwa na urejeshaji wa Pergamon hauna uhakika." }, { "label": "Mapokeo ya Epimenides kama mfumo wa simulizi", "statement": "Rothschild hujenga hoja kuwa mapokeo maarufu ya mwonaji wa Krete Epimenides, ambayo anayaunganisha na madhabahu ya Matendo 17:23, hueleza sifa zinazoonekana kuongezwa kwa kusudi la wakati huo katika tukio la Athene na hutumikia mada ya Luka ya kuhamishwa kwa ibada." }, { "label": "Kuharibika kwa maandishi au kosa la kumbukumbu", "statement": "Norden anaripoti kuwa Blass alikisia Matendo awali lilisoma wingi, na kuwa Usener aliona Paulo kukumbuka maandishi vibaya. Norden alikataa dhana ya Blass kwa sababu umoja tu hufaa hoja ya hotuba, na akakataa maoni ya Usener kama kuacha kutafuta suluhisho." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-athens-altar-unknown-god" }, { "id": "josephus-felix-drusilla", "kind": "literary-non-christian", "dateFrom": 75, "dateTo": 122, "corpusReferences": [ "urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0526.tlg001 (Josephus, Antiquities)", "urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0526.tlg004 (Josephus, Jewish War)", "urn:cts:latinLit:phi1351.phi004 (Tacitus, Histories)", "urn:cts:latinLit:phi1351.phi005 (Tacitus, Annals)" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 23:24-24:27", "Acts 24:24", "Acts 24:27", "Acts 25:14" ], "personIds": [ "person.felix", "person.drusilla", "person.herod-agrippa-i", "person.agrippa", "person.bernice", "person.festus", "person.paul", "person.claudius", "person.nero", "person.josephus" ], "placeIds": [ "place.caesarea", "place.judea", "place.jerusalem" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)", "locator": "Ant. 20.137 (Whiston 20.7.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=7:whiston%20section=1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "SO Claudius sent Felix, the brother of Pallas, to take care of the affairs of Judea", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)", "locator": "Ant. 20.141-144 (Whiston 20.7.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=7:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Accordingly she acted ill, and because she was desirous to avoid her sister Bernice's envy, for she was very ill treated by her on account of her beauty, was prevailed upon to transgress the laws of her forefathers, and to marry Felix", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)", "locator": "Ant. 19.354 (Whiston 19.9.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=19:whiston%20chapter=9:whiston%20section=1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "three daughters; one of which, Bernice, was married to Herod, his father's brother, and was sixteen years old; the other two, Mariamne and Drusilla, were still virgins; the former was ten years old, and Drusilla six.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)", "locator": "Ant. 20.160-166 (Whiston 20.8.5)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=5", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Felix also bore an ill-will to Jonathan, the high priest, because he frequently gave him admonitions about governing the Jewish affairs better than he did", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)", "locator": "Ant. 20.182 (Whiston 20.8.9)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=9", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Now when Porcius Festus was sent as successor to Felix by Nero, the principal of the Jewish inhabitants of Cesarea went up to Rome to accuse Felix; and he had certainly been brought to punishment, unless Nero had yielded to the importunate solicitations of his brother Pallas", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)", "locator": "War 2.247 (Whiston 2.12.8)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=2:whiston%20chapter=12:whiston%20section=8", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)", "locator": "War 2.252-253 (Whiston 2.13.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=2:whiston%20chapter=13:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "but over the rest of Judea he made Felix procurator. This Felix took Eleazar the arch-robber, and many that were with him, alive, when they had ravaged the country for twenty years together, and sent them to Rome", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)", "locator": "War 2.271 (Whiston 2.14.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=2:whiston%20chapter=14:whiston%20section=1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "NOW it was that Festus succeeded Felix as procurator, and made it his business to correct those that made disturbances in the country.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-histories-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "The Histories", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb", "year": "1873 (Perseus text: Random House reprint, 1942)", "locator": "Hist. 5.9", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0080:book=5:chapter=9", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Antonius Felix, indulging in every kind of barbarity and lust, exercised the power of a king in the spirit of a slave. He had married Drusilla, the granddaughter of Antony and Cleopatra, and so was the grandson-in-law, as Claudius was the grandson, of Antony.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "The Annals", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb", "year": "19th-century translation (Perseus text: Random House reprint, 1942)", "locator": "Ann. 12.54", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0078:book=12:chapter=54", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Not equally moderate was his brother, surnamed Felix, who had for some time been governor of Judæa, and thought that he could do any evil act with impunity, backed up as he was by such power.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "The Annals", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb", "year": "19th-century translation (Perseus text: Random House reprint, 1942)", "locator": "Ann. 13.14", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0078:book=13:chapter=14", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Nero, furious with those who abetted such arrogance in a woman, removed Pallas from the charge of the business with which he had been entrusted by Claudius", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "suetonius-rolfe", "author": "Suetonius", "work": "The Lives of the Caesars: Claudius", "translator": "J. C. Rolfe", "year": "1914", "locator": "Claud. 28.1", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Suetonius/12Caesars/Claudius*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "He was equally fond of Felix, giving him the command of cohorts and of troops of horse, as well as of the province of Judaea; and he became the husband of three queens.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "William Whiston", "work": "Translator's note to Antiquities 20.7.2", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)", "locator": "Note 1 to Ant. 20.142 (Whiston 20.7.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=7:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "It is probable that Tacitus may say true, when he informs us that this Felix (who had in all three wives, or queens, as Suetonius in Claudius, sect. 28, assures us) did once marry such a grandchild of Antonius and Cleopatra", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895 (CCEL text: 10th edition, 1907)", "locator": "Ch. 13 (The Voyage to Jerusalem), note 56", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/r/ramsay/paul_roman/cache/paul_roman.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The remarkable contradiction between Josephus (who makes Cumanus governor of Palestine 48-52, Felix being his successor in 52), and Tacitus (who makes Felix governor of Samaria [and probably of Judea], contemporary with Cumanus as governor of Galilee", "role": "early-study" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Colin J. Hemer", "work": "The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History", "year": "1989", "view": "Lists the points where Acts agrees with independently known first-century people, offices and places, the Caesarea trial chapters among them, and argues that these show an author well informed about the period." }, { "author": "Steve Mason", "work": "Josephus and the New Testament", "year": "1992 (2nd ed. 2003)", "view": "Argues that Luke probably knew Josephus's narrative, pointing to shared material such as Theudas, Judas the Galilean and the Egyptian prophet. He concedes that the case cannot be proved, and it bears on how independent Acts and Josephus are." }, { "author": "Richard I. Pervo", "work": "Dating Acts: Between the Evangelists and the Apologists", "year": "2006", "view": "Dates Acts to about AD 115 and argues that its author used Josephus's Antiquities among his sources." }, { "author": "Frederick E. Brenk and Filippo Canali De Rossi", "work": "\"The 'Notorious' Felix, Procurator of Judaea, and His Many Wives (Acts 23-24)\", Biblica 82", "year": "2001", "view": "Argue that the sources are confused about Felix's family name and wives, and that 'Antonius' and 'Claudius' may both be correct. They hold that the inscription used to fix his name and career has serious problems, that none of his wives may descend from Cleopatra VII (if one did, she was more likely a great-granddaughter), and that his 'notorious' reputation should be treated with caution." }, { "author": "Roman Deiksler", "work": "\"Żony Feliksa, prokuratora Judei\" (The Wives of Felix, Procurator of Judea), Res Historica 49", "year": "2020", "view": "Re-examines Felix's wives and, against common scholarly scepticism, argues that Tacitus was right to make Drusilla of Mauretania a granddaughter of Cleopatra VII. Treats Agrippa I's daughter as a second, separate wife." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q316915", "label": "Antonius Felix" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q255778", "label": "Drusilla, daughter of Agrippa I" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q5309410", "label": "Drusilla of Mauretania (Tacitus's Drusilla)" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q298636", "label": "Agrippa I" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q464307", "label": "Porcius Festus" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q319242", "label": "Caesarea Maritima" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "678401", "label": "Stratonos Pyrgos/Caesarea" } ], "title": "Feliki na Drusila katika Yosefo na Tacitus", "summary": "Yosefo huthibitisha maafisa na uhusiano wa familia ambao Matendo 23–25 hudhania. Humtaja Feliki, ndugu wa Pallas, kuwa procurator wa Uyahudi chini ya Klaudio na Nero, anasema Drusila, binti wa Herode Agripa I, alimwacha mume wake ili kuolewa na Feliki, na humtaja Porcius Festo kuwa mrithi wake. Tacitus na Suetonius huthibitisha wadhifa wa Feliki. Hakuna chanzo nje ya Matendo kinachotaja kesi za Paulo, na ikiwa Matendo linajitegemea kutoka Yosefo kunabishaniwa.", "dating": "Yosefo: Jewish War karibu 75–79 BK (tarehe ya kawaida); Antiquities ilikamilishwa 93/94 BK (Ant. 20.267). Tacitus na Suetonius: mwanzo wa karne ya pili BK. Matukio yanayoelezwa: kuanzia kifo cha Herode Agripa I (44 BK) hadi kurithi kwa Festo, mwaka wake ukibishaniwa.", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Yosefo (Ant. 20.137; War 2.247) na Tacitus (Hist. 5.9; Ann. 12.54), ambao masimulizi yao hutofautiana kwa maelezo, hurekodi kuwa Feliki, ndugu wa Pallas, alitawala Uyahudi chini ya Klaudio. Yosefo huongeza kuwa Nero alimthibitisha madarakani (War 2.252). Huyu ndiye mtawala ambaye Matendo 23:24–24:27 huweka kesi za Paulo mbele yake huko Kaisaria.", "Yosefo anasema Drusila alikuwa binti wa Herode Agripa I, mwenye miaka sita baba yake alipokufa (Ant. 19.354). Agripa II alimwoza kwa Azizus wa Emesa, aliyekubali kutahiriwa; wakati Feliki alipokuwa procurator alimwacha Azizus kwa ajili yake, jambo ambalo Yosefo huita kuvunja sheria ya mababu (Ant. 20.139-143). Matendo 24:24 vivyo hivyo humwasilisha Drusila kama mke Myahudi wa Feliki.", "Yosefo hurekodi kuwa Nero alimtuma Porcius Festo kumrithi Feliki (Ant. 20.182; War 2.271 hutaja Festo tu), urithi ambao Matendo 24:27 huripoti. Huongeza kuwa Wayahudi viongozi wa Kaisaria walikwenda Rumi kumshtaki Feliki, aliyeepuka adhabu kupitia ushawishi wa ndugu yake Pallas.", "Vyanzo visivyo vya Kikristo humchora Feliki kwa ukali. Yosefo anasema alimkamata jambazi Eleazar kwa hila, alipanga kuuawa kwa aliyekuwa kuhani mkuu Jonathan, na kutuma wanajeshi dhidi ya wafuasi wa nabii kutoka Misri na Wayahudi waliokuwa na ghasia Kaisaria (Ant. 20.160-178; War 2.253). Tacitus humshtaki kwa ukatili na tamaa (Hist. 5.9). Mtawala wa Matendo aliyetarajia pesa anafaa sifa hii." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hakuna chanzo nje ya Matendo kinachomtaja Paulo, kesi zake mbele ya Feliki, mazungumzo yake ya faragha na Feliki na Drusila, au miaka yake miwili ya kuzuiliwa. Makubaliano huthibitisha maafisa, uhusiano wao wa familia na mazingira. Hayathibitishi matukio yanayosimuliwa na Matendo.", "Vyanzo haviweki tarehe kamili. Mwanzo wa utawala wa Feliki (Tacitus anasema alitawala Samaria sambamba na Cumanus na alikuwa madarakani kwa muda kufikia 52 BK) na mwaka ambao Festo alimrithi vyote vinabishaniwa.", "Drusila wa Tacitus, mjukuu wa Antony na Cleopatra, si binti Myahudi wa Herode Agripa I, hivyo Tacitus hathibitishi Matendo 24:24 kuhusu Drusila alikuwa nani." ], "debate": "Maswali matatu yako wazi. Mpangilio wa matukio: Tacitus anamwasilisha Feliki akitawala Samaria huku Cumanus akiwa na Galilaya kabla ya 52 BK, ilhali Yosefo humfanya Feliki kuwa mrithi wa Cumanus; mwaka ambao Festo alifika pia unabishaniwa. Jibu hutegemea kwa sehemu ikiwa Pallas, ambaye Yosefo anasema alimlinda Feliki, alihifadhi ushawishi huo baada ya Nero kumwondoa madarakani karibu 55 BK (Ann. 13.14), na kwa sehemu ikiwa miaka miwili ya Matendo 24:27 hupima kuzuiliwa kwa Paulo au muhula wa Feliki. Wake: Drusila wa Tacitus ni wa ukoo wa Antony na Cleopatra, na Suetonius humhusisha Feliki na malkia watatu. Kujitegemea: baadhi ya wasomi hujenga hoja kuwa Luka aliijua Antiquities ya Yosefo. Ikiwa hivyo, makubaliano yana uzito mdogo zaidi kama uthibitisho tofauti.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Matendo hutumia Yosefo", "statement": "Richard Pervo, na kwa tahadhari zaidi Steve Mason, hujenga hoja kuwa mwandishi wa Matendo aliyajua maandishi ya Yosefo; ikiwa hivyo, makubaliano si uthibitisho huru. Kinachopinga kuazima hapa: ndoa ya Drusila huonekana katika Antiquities tu (93/94 BK), ambayo wasomi wengi huiweka baada ya Matendo, na Matendo halishiriki maelezo yoyote maalumu ya Yosefo (Azizus; mchawi wa Kipro, Atomos katika Kiyunani cha Niese, Simon katika Kiingereza cha Whiston)." }, { "label": "Kupendelea Tacitus kuhusu kazi na wake wa Feliki", "statement": "Ramsay aliripoti kuwa Mommsen alipendelea Tacitus kuliko Yosefo kuhusu uongozi wa awali wa Feliki. Roman Deiksler (2020) hujenga hoja kuwa Tacitus alikuwa sahihi kumfanya mmoja wa wake wa Feliki kuwa wa ukoo wa Cleopatra. Hakuna maoni yanayoondoa uwezekano wa Feliki pia kumwoa binti wa Herode Agripa I, kwa kuwa Suetonius humhusisha na wake watatu wa kifalme. Swali linahusu usahihi wa Yosefo, si Matendo 24:24." }, { "label": "Huenda sifa mbaya za Feliki zimetiwa chumvi", "statement": "Brenk na Canali De Rossi (2001) hujenga hoja kuwa sifa mbaya zinazojulikana za Feliki zinahitaji tahadhari. Angalizo la mhariri: Tacitus huandika kwa dharau ya wazi kwa watu waliowahi kuwa watumwa wa kifalme, na Yosefo anaeleza njia iliyoelekea kwenye vita vya Wayahudi. Kwa hiyo picha ya uadui katika wote wawili haithibitishi yenyewe picha ya Matendo ya mtawala aliyetaka pesa." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-josephus-felix-drusilla" }, { "id": "lystra-inscription", "kind": "inscription", "dateFrom": 14, "dateTo": 100, "corpusReferences": [ "CIL III 6786", "MAMA VIII 5", "AE 1888, 89", "EDCS-27800574", "Sterrett, The Wolfe Expedition to Asia Minor (1888), no. 242" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 14:6-21", "Acts 16:1-2", "2 Timothy 3:11" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.barnabas", "person.timothy" ], "placeIds": [ "place.lystra", "place.derbe", "place.iconium", "place.galatia" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "sterrett-wolfe-expedition", "author": "J. R. Sitlington Sterrett", "work": "The Wolfe Expedition to Asia Minor (Papers of the American School of Classical Studies at Athens, vol. 3)", "year": "1888", "locator": "No. 242, p. 142", "url": "https://archive.org/details/papersofamerican03arch/page/142/mode/1up", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Divum Aug(ustum) Col(onia) Iul(ia) Fe-lix Gemina Lustra conse-cravit d(ecreto) d(ecurionum).", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "sterrett-wolfe-expedition", "author": "J. R. Sitlington Sterrett", "work": "The Wolfe Expedition to Asia Minor (Papers of the American School of Classical Studies at Athens, vol. 3)", "year": "1888", "locator": "Itinerary entry for 10 July (Maï to Khatün Serai), p. 141", "url": "https://archive.org/download/papersofamerican03arch/page/n152_w500.jpg", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "sterrett-wolfe-expedition", "author": "J. R. Sitlington Sterrett", "work": "The Wolfe Expedition to Asia Minor (Papers of the American School of Classical Studies at Athens, vol. 3)", "year": "1888", "locator": "p. 15 (itinerary entry for 1 June, at Serpek)", "url": "https://archive.org/details/papersofamerican03arch/page/15/mode/1up", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The site was thought to be that of Derbe, as long as Lystra was supposed to be at Bin Bir Kalesi", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "edcs", "work": "Epigraphik-Datenbank Clauss/Slaby", "locator": "EDCS-27800574 (CIL 03, 06786; MAMA 08, 00005; AE 1888, 00089; place: Hatunsaray / Katin Serai / Lystra)", "url": "https://edcs.hist.uzh.ch/data/monument/278/27800574.json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895", "locator": "Ch. V, Note 2 ('Declension of Lystra'); p. 129 in the 1895 first edition", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/ramsay/paul_roman/paul_roman.viii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Incidentally we notice that the name of the city is spelt Lustra, not Lystra (like Prymnessos), on coins and inscriptions. That is an indication of Latin tone, and of the desire to make the city name a Latin word.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "pleiades", "work": "Pleiades gazetteer of ancient places", "locator": "Place 648699 (Lystra/Col. Iulia Felix Gemina)", "url": "https://pleiades.stoa.org/places/648699/json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata", "locator": "Q535982 (Lystra)", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q535982.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "The Historical Geography of Asia Minor", "year": "1890", "view": "Credits Sterrett's inscription with proving Leake's earlier identification of Lystra near Khatün Serai." }, { "author": "Barbara Levick", "work": "Roman Colonies in Southern Asia Minor", "year": "1967", "view": "Treats Lystra as one of the Augustan veteran colonies of southern Galatia and draws on its inscriptions and coins to reconstruct that colonial programme." }, { "author": "Stephen Mitchell", "work": "Anatolia: Land, Men, and Gods in Asia Minor", "year": "1993", "view": "Places Lystra within the Augustan colonisation and Roman organisation of southern Galatia and Lycaonia." }, { "author": "Colin J. Hemer", "work": "The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History", "year": "1989", "view": "Argues that many incidental local details in Acts, including the Lycaonian setting of Acts 14, fit first-century conditions and support the book's historical value." }, { "author": "Cilliers Breytenbach", "work": "Paulus und Barnabas in der Provinz Galatien", "year": "1996", "view": "Reads Acts 13-14 against the epigraphy and geography of the Roman province of Galatia, including Lystra. Argues that the churches Paul addressed as Galatian lay in this southern region." }, { "author": "Richard I. Pervo", "work": "Dating Acts: Between the Evangelists and the Apologists", "year": "2006", "view": "Dates Acts to the early second century. On this view, the author's knowledge of local conditions does not imply eyewitness or early composition." }, { "author": "H. Bahar, T. Çay, Ö. Koçak and F. Işcan", "work": "A Plan for Archaeological Excavation of Lystra (Zoldura Höyük), CIPA 2005 XX International Symposium", "year": "2005", "view": "Report surveys since 1994 that found material from the Chalcolithic to the Roman period on the Zoldura mound north of Hatunsaray. State that Sterrett's inscription is in the Konya Archaeological Museum." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "648699", "label": "Lystra/Col. Iulia Felix Gemina" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q535982", "label": "Lystra (historic settlement in Konya, Turkey)" }, { "scheme": "trismegistos", "id": "16230", "label": "TM Geo 16230 (Lystra), place id as cross-referenced by Pleiades; not a text id" } ], "title": "Wakfu wa Kilatini uliobainisha mahali pa Listra", "summary": "Msingi huu wa sanamu wenye maandishi ya Kilatini ndio ushahidi mkuu wa kuweka Listra, mji wa Likaonia wa Matendo 14 na 16, kwenye kilima cha Zoldera karibu na Hatunsaray. Ukiwekwa wakfu kwa Augusto aliyefanywa mungu na koloni la 'Iulia Felix Gemina Lustra', unaonyesha kuwa Listra ilikuwa koloni la Kirumi wakati fulani baada ya 14 BK. J. R. S. Sterrett aliunakili Julai 1885. Haumtaji Paulo au kuthibitisha tukio lolote ambalo Matendo linasimulia huko.", "dating": "Hauna tarehe finyu. Ni wa baada ya 14 BK, kwa kuwa Augusto anaitwa divus; rekodi za katalogi zilizochunguzwa hazitoi tarehe, na dateTo 100 ni kikomo cha juu cha kawaida. Sterrett aliunakili Julai 1885 na kuuchapisha 1888.", "currentLocation": "Unaripotiwa kuwa katika Konya Archaeological Museum, Uturuki (Bahar et al. 2005, wakitaja MAMA VIII); hakuna rekodi ya katalogi ya makumbusho iliyothibitishwa.", "establishes": [ "J. R. S. Sterrett alinukuu msingi mkubwa wa pande nne Julai 1885 kwenye kilima cha Zoldera, karibu dakika kumi na tano kaskazini mwa Khatün Serai (Hatunsaray ya sasa). Una wakfu wa Kilatini wa 'Colonia Iulia Felix Gemina Lustra' (Sterrett no. 242; CIL III 6786).", "Wakfu wa kiraia wa ukubwa huu, uliopatikana kwenye kilima chenyewe, ndio ushahidi mkuu wa kuweka Listra huko, katika tambarare ya Likaonia kusini-kusini-magharibi mwa Konya (Ikonio ya kale). Katika The Historical Geography of Asia Minor (1890), Ramsay alimpa Sterrett sifa kwa kupata uthibitisho kuwa utambulisho wa awali wa Leake ulikuwa sahihi.", "Wakfu ulipofanywa, Listra ilikuwa koloni la Kirumi ambalo decurions zake (baraza la mji) walimheshimu hadharani Augusto aliyefanywa mungu. Kwa hiyo maandishi ni ya baada ya 14 BK.", "Mahali panaendana na Matendo, ambalo huweka Listra pamoja na Derbe kama miji ya Likaonia na kuihusisha na Ikonio iliyo karibu (Matendo 14:6, 14:19–21; 16:1–2)." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Haumtaji Mkristo yeyote. Hauwezi kuthibitisha uponyaji, kusifiwa kwa Barnaba na Paulo kama Zeu na Herme, au kupigwa mawe kwa Paulo (Matendo 14:8–20).", "Hauna tarehe finyu. Hauonyeshi koloni lilianzishwa lini au mji ulikuwaje Paulo alipotembelea.", "Matendo haliiti Listra koloni kamwe, kwa hiyo jiwe hutoa mazingira badala ya kuthibitisha kauli maalumu katika Matendo. Jiografia sahihi peke yake haionyeshi mwandishi alikuwa shahidi wa macho, au Matendo liliandikwa lini." ], "debate": "Kabla ya 1885 Listra ilikuwa imewekwa kwingine; Sterrett anaona kuwa ilidhaniwa kuwa Bin Bir Kalesi. Ramsay (1890) humpa Leake sifa ya utambulisho sahihi na Sterrett ya kuuthibitisha, na orodha ya maeneo ya Pleiades na katalogi za maandishi hufuata huo. Tafiti tangu 1994 huripoti mabaki kuanzia kipindi cha Chalcolithic hadi cha Kirumi kwenye kilima (Bahar et al. 2005), ingawa kimsingi jiwe moja lingeweza kusogezwa. Swali lililo wazi ni jinsi ya kulitafsiri. Baadhi huona mazingira sahihi ya Likaonia katika Matendo kama dalili ya taarifa zenye maarifa na za mapema. Wengine hutaja kuwa Listra ilikuwepo kwa karne nyingi na kwamba maelezo sahihi ya eneo hayathibitishi tukio ambalo Matendo linasimulia.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Mapendekezo ya awali ya maeneo", "statement": "Kabla ya ugunduzi wa Sterrett, Listra ilikuwa imewekwa kwingine; Sterrett anaona kuwa ilidhaniwa kuwa Bin Bir Kalesi. Orodha za sasa za maeneo na katalogi za maandishi (Pleiades, EDCS) hufuata utambulisho wa Zoldera, unaotegemea hasa wakfu huu na mahali ulipopatikana, ukiungwa mkono na mabaki ya utafiti wa kilima." }, { "label": "Kusoma Matendo kama utunzi wa baadaye", "statement": "Richard Pervo na wengine huweka Matendo mwanzo wa karne ya pili na kusoma matukio yake mengi kama utunzi wa kifasihi, hivyo maelezo sahihi ya eneo huonyesha kuwa mwandishi alilijua eneo, si kuwa alikuwa shahidi wa macho. Wafasiri pia hulinganisha tukio la Zeu na Herme na Jupiter na Mercury wa Ovid wakitembelea Frigia (Metamorphoses 8), wakilisoma kama kufuata mfano wa kifasihi au kama mapokeo ya eneo yanayoshirikiwa na umati wa Matendo." }, { "label": "Usomaji wa kutegemeka kihistoria", "statement": "Ramsay, Hemer na wengine hujenga hoja kuwa Matendo hushughulikia jiografia na siasa za Likaonia kwa usahihi, jambo linalodokeza taarifa zenye maarifa na huenda za mapema. Huona mahali palipothibitishwa pa koloni kama sehemu ya hoja inayojengwa kwa ushahidi mwingi. Hata hivyo, jiwe lenyewe linahusu mazingira tu." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-lystra-inscription" }, { "id": "josephus-ananias", "kind": "literary-non-christian", "dateFrom": 75, "dateTo": 94, "corpusReferences": [ "urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0526.tlg001 (Josephus, Antiquities)", "urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0526.tlg004 (Josephus, Jewish War)" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 23:2-5", "Acts 24:1", "Acts 9:10-19", "Acts 22:12-16", "Acts 5:1-11" ], "personIds": [ "person.ananias-high-priest", "person.paul", "person.felix", "person.tertullus", "person.claudius", "person.agrippa", "person.josephus", "person.ananias" ], "placeIds": [ "place.jerusalem", "place.caesarea", "place.rome" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.103 (Whiston 20.5.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=5:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But now Herod, king of Chalcis, removed Joseph, the son of Camydus, from the high priesthood, and made Ananias, the son of Nebedeu, his successor.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.131 (Whiston 20.6.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=6:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "but still he sent away Ananias the high priest, and Ananus the commander [of the temple], in bonds to Rome, to give an account of what they had done to Claudius Caesar.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.162 (Whiston 20.8.5)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=5", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Felix also bore an ill-will to Jonathan, the high priest, because he frequently gave him admonitions about governing the Jewish affairs better than he did", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.179 (Whiston 20.8.8)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=8", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "About this time king Agrippa gave the high priesthood to Ismael, who was the son of Fabi.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.205 (Whiston 20.9.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=9:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "had obtained the favor and esteem of the citizens in a signal manner; for he was a great hoarder up of money: he therefore cultivated the friendship of Albinus, and of the high priest [Jesus], by making them presents", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.206 (Whiston 20.9.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=9:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "he also had servants who were very wicked, who joined themselves to the boldest sort of the people, and went to the thrashing-floors, and took away the tithes that belonged to the priests by violence, and did not refrain from beating such as would not give these tithes to them.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "William Whiston", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews, translator's note to 20.9.2", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Whiston's note on Ant. 20.205 (Whiston 20.9.2 n. 1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=9:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "This Ananias was not the son of Nebedeus, as I take it, but he who was called Annas or Ananus the elder", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.213 (Whiston 20.9.4)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=9:whiston%20section=4", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But Ananias was too hard for the rest, by his riches, which enabled him to gain those that were most ready to receive.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Jewish War", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 2.243 (Whiston 2.12.6)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=2:whiston%20chapter=12:whiston%20section=6", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "both Jonathan and Ananias, the high priests", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Jewish War", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 2.426 (Whiston 2.17.6)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=2:whiston%20chapter=17:whiston%20section=6", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The others then set fire to the house of Ananias the high priest, and to the palaces of Agrippa and Bernice", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Jewish War", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 2.441 (Whiston 2.17.9)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=2:whiston%20chapter=17:whiston%20section=9", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But on the next day the high priest was caught where he had concealed himself in an aqueduct; he was slain, together with Hezekiah his brother, by the robbers", "role": "primary-text" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "James C. VanderKam", "work": "From Joshua to Caiaphas: High Priests after the Exile", "year": "2004", "view": "Gathers and assesses the surviving evidence for each high priest of the Second Temple period down to about AD 70, including Ananias son of Nedebaeus." }, { "author": "Martin Goodman", "work": "The Ruling Class of Judaea: The Origins of the Jewish Revolt against Rome, A.D. 66-70", "year": "1987", "view": "Argues that the Rome-backed ruling class of Judaea, including the high-priestly families, lacked popular legitimacy and that its rivalries helped bring on the revolt of AD 66." }, { "author": "Steve Mason", "work": "Josephus and the New Testament", "year": "1992 (2nd ed. 2003)", "view": "Introduces Josephus for New Testament readers and argues that the author of Luke-Acts probably knew Josephus's writings, which bears on whether their agreements are independent." }, { "author": "Richard I. Pervo", "work": "Dating Acts: Between the Evangelists and the Apologists", "year": "2006", "view": "Dates Acts to the early second century and argues that its author drew on Josephus." }, { "author": "F. F. Bruce", "work": "The Book of the Acts (New International Commentary on the New Testament, rev. ed.)", "year": "1988", "view": "Identifies the high priest of Acts 23:2 with Ananias son of Nedebaeus and uses Josephus's account of his greed and violent death as background to the scene." }, { "author": "Craig S. Keener", "work": "Acts: An Exegetical Commentary, vol. 3 (15:1-23:35)", "year": "2014", "view": "Sets Acts 23:1-5 against Josephus's evidence for Ananias and surveys the explanations proposed for Paul's statement that he did not know Ananias was high priest." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q485854", "label": "Ananias ben Nedebaios" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "687928", "label": "Ierusalem/Hierosolyma/Col. Aelia Capitolina" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "678401", "label": "Stratonos Pyrgos/Caesarea" } ], "title": "Yosefo kuhusu kuhani mkuu Anania mwana wa Nedebaeus", "summary": "Yosefo huthibitisha kuwa kuhani mkuu aliyeitwa Anania mwana wa Nedebaeus aliteuliwa karibu 47/48 BK, akabaki tajiri na mwenye nguvu, akamvutia mtawala Albinus kwa zawadi, na kuuawa na waasi mwaka 66 BK. Hilo linafaa jina na wadhifa ambao Matendo humpa kuhani mkuu anayeagiza Paulo apigwe na kumshtaki mbele ya Feliki (Matendo 23:2–5; 24:1). Yosefo hamtaji Paulo kamwe na hatoi tarehe ya mwisho wa muhula wa Anania.", "dating": "Jewish War karibu 75–79 BK (tarehe ya kawaida); Antiquities ilikamilishwa 93/94 BK (Ant. 20.267); matukio yanayoelezwa huanzia karibu 47 hadi 66 BK.", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Yosefo humtaja kuhani mkuu, Anania mwana wa Nedebaeus, aliyeteuliwa na Herode wa Chalcis karibu 47/48 BK (Ant. 20.103). Karibu 52 BK mtawala wa Shamu, Quadratus, alimtuma kwa Klaudio, akiwa amefungwa kulingana na Antiquities (Ant. 20.131; War 2.243). Matendo humtaja kuhani mkuu katika kesi ya Paulo, karibu 57 BK, kuwa Anania (Matendo 23:2; 24:1).", "Yosefo humweleza Anania kuwa tajiri na mwenye uhusiano mzuri: mwenye kuheshimiwa na raia, anayelimbikiza pesa, na kumvutia mtawala Albinus kwa zawadi, huku watumishi wake wakinyakua zaka za makuhani na kuwapiga waliokataa (Ant. 20.205-207, 213). Makuhani wakuu wengine walifanya vivyo hivyo (Ant. 20.207). Picha fupi ya Matendo ya kuhani mkuu anayeagiza mfungwa apigwe inaendana na hili.", "Yosefo anaripoti kuwa mwaka 66 BK waasi waliteketeza nyumba ya Anania na kisha kumuua pamoja na ndugu yake Hezekiah (War 2.426, 441). Kwa hiyo kuhani mkuu wa jina hili alikuwa miongoni mwa viongozi wa Yerusalemu kutoka mwisho wa miaka ya 40 hadi uasi." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Yosefo hamtaji Paulo, kesi mbele ya baraza, agizo la kumpiga au kesi mbele ya Feliki. Matukio ya Matendo 23–24 yenyewe hayajathibitishwa.", "Yosefo hatoi tarehe ya mwisho wa muhula wa Anania. Matendo humwita kuhani mkuu karibu 57 BK; Yosefo hathibitishi wala kupinga hilo, na pia huwapa cheo watu wasiokuwa madarakani tena (Jonathan katika Ant. 20.162; Anania mwenyewe chini ya Albinus katika Ant. 20.205).", "Matendo halisimulii kuuawa kwa Anania mwaka 66 BK. Kusoma karipio la Paulo katika Matendo 23:3 kama utabiri uliotimia ni tafsiri, si ushahidi wa kihistoria.", "Ushahidi wa Yosefo unahusu kuhani mkuu tu, si Anania wa Dameski (Matendo 9:10–19; 22:12–16) au Anania mume wa Safira (Matendo 5:1–11)." ], "debate": "Yosefo haweki tarehe ya mwisho wa muhula wa Anania kamwe. Humwita Jonathan, aliyeshikilia wadhifa mwaka 36–37 BK, 'kuhani mkuu' wakati Jonathan anapouawa chini ya Feliki (Ant. 20.162), na hurekodi uteuzi wa Ishmael baadaye (Ant. 20.179). Kwa hiyo kutokana na Yosefo pekee, kushikilia kwa Anania wadhifa karibu 57 BK ni hitimisho; Matendo linasema hivyo. Paulo anasema hakujua Anania alikuwa kuhani mkuu (Matendo 23:5). Maelezo ya Albert Barnes ya karne ya kumi na tisa kuhusu mstari hupitia kejeli, kuomba radhi kwa kusema kwa haraka, kutomfahamu baada ya kutokuwepo muda mrefu, na Anania kutokukaa au kuvaa kama kuhani mkuu, kabla ya kupendelea nafasi kuwa wazi. Wasomi wanaoona kuwa Luka alizijua kazi za Yosefo huuliza kama masimulizi mawili hukubaliana kwa kujitegemea. Picha ya uadui ya Yosefo pia huakisi maslahi yake ya tabaka la juu na utetezi.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Anania hakuwa madarakani mwaka 57 BK", "statement": "Yosefo hatoi tarehe ya mwisho wa muhula wa Anania. Baadhi ya wafafanuzi wa karne ya kumi na tisa, kama Albert Barnes kuhusu Matendo 23:5, walishikilia kuwa wadhifa ulikuwa wazi wakati huo na Anania aliongoza kwa heshima, jambo ambalo lingeeleza jibu la Paulo. Ukimya wa Yosefo hauthibitishi pengo, na Jonathan anayemwita 'kuhani mkuu' katika Ant. 20.162 alikuwa ameshikilia wadhifa katika 36–37 BK tu (Ant. 18.95, 123)." }, { "label": "Luka alitumia Yosefo", "statement": "Richard Pervo, na kwa tahadhari zaidi Steve Mason, hujenga hoja kuwa mwandishi wa Matendo aliyajua maandishi ya Yosefo. Ikiwa hivyo, Matendo lingeweza kuchukua jina na wadhifa wa Anania kutoka Yosefo badala ya ufahamu huru. Wengine huweka Matendo kabla ya Antiquities (93/94 BK), au hawaoni dalili ya kuazima hapa, kwa kuwa kesi ya Matendo 23 haina inayolingana nayo katika Yosefo." }, { "label": "Tukio lililotungwa", "statement": "Baadhi ya wafafanuzi wakosoaji huona Matendo 23:1–10 kama tukio ambalo Luka alitunga kuzunguka mada zake, kama heshima ya Paulo kwa Sheria na mjadala kati ya Mafarisayo na Masadukayo juu ya ufufuo. Kwa usomaji huu jina na wadhifa sahihi huonyesha kuwa Luka alijua kipindi, lakini havithibitishi kuwa kesi ilitokea kama ilivyosimuliwa." }, { "label": "Utambulisho wa Whiston katika Ant. 20.205", "statement": "Katika maelezo ya tafsiri yake ya 1737, Whiston alimchukulia 'kuhani mkuu Anania' tajiri wa Ant. 20.205-213 kuwa Annas mzee. Maandishi ya Yosefo humtaja kuwa Anania hapo, kama tafsiri ya Whiston mwenyewe inavyochapisha, huku umbo lake la kawaida la Annas likiwa Ananus." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-josephus-ananias" }, { "id": "josephus-festus", "kind": "literary-non-christian", "dateFrom": 75, "dateTo": 94, "corpusReferences": [ "CTS urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0526.tlg001 (Josephus, Jewish Antiquities)", "CTS urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0526.tlg004 (Josephus, Jewish War)" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 24:27-26:32", "Acts 24:10", "Acts 21:18", "Galatians 1:19" ], "personIds": [ "person.festus", "person.felix", "person.agrippa", "person.nero", "person.josephus", "person.paul", "person.james" ], "placeIds": [ "place.judea", "place.caesarea", "place.jerusalem", "place.rome" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.182 (Whiston 20.8.9)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=9", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Now when Porcius Festus was sent as successor to Felix by Nero, the principal of the Jewish inhabitants of Cesarea went up to Rome to accuse Felix; and he had certainly been brought to punishment, unless Nero had yielded to the importunate solicitations of his brother Pallas", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.185-188 (Whiston 20.8.10)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=10", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "So Festus sent forces, both horsemen and footmen, to fall upon those that had been seduced by a certain impostor, who promised them deliverance and freedom from the miseries they were under, if they would but follow him as far as the wilderness.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.189-196 (Whiston 20.8.11)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=11", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "At these doings both king Agrippa, and principally Festus the procurator, were much displeased; and Festus ordered them to pull the wall down again: but the Jews petitioned him to give them leave to send an embassage about this matter to Nero", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.197 (Whiston 20.9.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=9:whiston%20section=1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "AND now Caesar, upon hearing the death of Festus, sent Albinus into Judea, as procurator.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.200 (Whiston 20.9.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=9:whiston%20section=1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Festus was now dead, and Albinus was but upon the road; so he assembled the sanhedrim of judges, and brought before them the brother of Jesus, who was called Christ, whose name was James", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.267 (Whiston 20.11.3)", "url": "https://www.gutenberg.org/cache/epub/2848/pg2848.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "which is the thirteenth year of the reign of Cæsar Domitian, and the fifty-sixth year of my own life", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Jewish War", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 2.271-272 (Whiston 2.14.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=2:whiston%20chapter=14:whiston%20section=1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Festus succeeded Felix as procurator, and made it his business to correct those that made disturbances in the country. So he caught the greatest part of the robbers, and destroyed a great many of them. But then Albinus, who succeeded Festus, did not execute his office", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Jewish War", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 6.300 (Whiston 6.5.3)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=6:whiston%20chapter=5:whiston%20section=3", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Jesus, the son of Ananus, a plebeian and a husbandman, who, four years before the war began, and at a time when the city was in very great peace and prosperity, came to that feast whereon it is our custom for every one to make tabernacles", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Jewish War", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 6.305 (Whiston 6.5.3)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=6:whiston%20chapter=5:whiston%20section=3", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And when Albinus (for he was then our procurator) asked him, Who he was? and whence he came? and why he uttered such words?", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Annals", "translator": "A. J. Church and W. J. Brodribb", "year": "1876", "locator": "Ann. 13.14", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0078:book=13:chapter=14", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Nero, furious with those who abetted such arrogance in a woman, removed Pallas from the charge of the business with which he had been entrusted by Claudius", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Annals", "translator": "A. J. Church and W. J. Brodribb", "year": "1876", "locator": "Ann. 13.23", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0078:book=13:chapter=23", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But the proved innocence of Pallas did not please men so much, as his arrogance offended them.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Annals", "translator": "A. J. Church and W. J. Brodribb", "year": "1876", "locator": "Ann. 14.65", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0078:book=14:chapter=65", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Nero was believed to have destroyed by poison two of his most powerful freedmen, Doryphorus, on the pretext of his having opposed the marriage with Poppæa, Pallas for still keeping his boundless wealth by a prolonged old age.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.22.1", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Festus was sent by Nero to be Felix's successor. Under him Paul, having made his defense, was sent bound to Rome.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.23.21", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But the emperor, when he learned of the death of Festus, sent Albinus to be procurator of Judea.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "A. C. McGiffert", "work": "Church History (Nicene and Post-Nicene Fathers, Series II vol. 1), note on HE 2.21", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.21.3, note 468", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/npnf201.iii.vii.xxii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Valesius and Heinichen proceed on the erroneous assumption that Festus succeeded Felix in the second year of Nero", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "A. C. McGiffert", "work": "Church History (Nicene and Post-Nicene Fathers, Series II vol. 1), note on HE 2.22", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.22.1, note 469", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/npnf201.iii.vii.xxiii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The widest possible margin for his accession is from 59–61.", "role": "early-study" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Emil Schürer", "work": "A History of the Jewish People in the Time of Jesus Christ, Division I, vol. 2 (English translation of the second German edition)", "year": "1890", "view": "Dates Festus AD 60-62. Records the case for recalling Felix early in Nero's reign (Jerome's Chronicle; Pallas's fall in 55) and answers that Josephus puts most of Felix's acts under Nero and that Pallas was acquitted before the end of 55." }, { "author": "Roger Pearse and others (trans.)", "work": "Jerome, Chronicle (Latin version of Eusebius's Chronicle)", "year": "2005", "view": "Enters Festus's succession to Felix under Nero's second year, which the translator's column equates with AD 56." }, { "author": "A. N. Sherwin-White", "work": "Roman Society and Roman Law in the New Testament", "year": "1963", "view": "Tests Acts against Roman law and administration, including a lecture on Paul before Felix and Festus, and judges the trial narratives consistent with Roman provincial practice of the period." }, { "author": "Colin J. Hemer", "work": "The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History", "year": "1989", "view": "Examines literary, epigraphic and papyrological evidence and argues that Acts is a coherent and consistent product of its first-century Hellenistic setting." }, { "author": "Steve Mason", "work": "Josephus and the New Testament (2nd ed.)", "year": "2003", "view": "Argues that Luke probably knew Josephus's narrative. Overlaps between Acts and Josephus may therefore reflect Luke's reading rather than independent knowledge." }, { "author": "Richard I. Pervo", "work": "Dating Acts: Between the Evangelists and the Apologists", "year": "2006", "view": "Dates Acts to about AD 115 and argues that its author knew Josephus's writings." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q464307", "label": "Porcius Festus" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q316915", "label": "Antonius Felix" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q134461", "label": "Josephus" } ], "title": "Yosefo kuhusu mtawala Porcius Festo", "summary": "Yosefo humtaja Porcius Festo kama mteule wa Nero aliyemrithi Feliki huko Uyahudi. Humwonyesha Festo akishirikiana na Mfalme Herode Agripa II katika mgogoro wa ukuta wa Hekalu, na anaripoti kuwa Festo alikufa madarakani na kurithiwa na Albinus. Hilo linalingana na urithi na wahusika wa Matendo 24:27–26:32. Yosefo hamtaji Paulo kamwe na hatoi mwaka. Kuwasili kwa Festo, kwa kawaida kukiwekwa karibu 59–60 BK, ni uundaji upya.", "dating": "Jewish War kwa kawaida huwekwa karibu 75–79 BK; Jewish Antiquities ilikamilishwa 93/94 BK (Ant. 20.267); hueleza matukio ya karibu 59–62 BK", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Yosefo humtaja Porcius Festo kama mtawala ambaye Nero alimtuma kumrithi Feliki huko Uyahudi (Ant. 20.182; War 2.271). Matendo 24:27 hutoa jina hilo hilo kamili na mpangilio uleule wa urithi.", "Yosefo huwaweka Festo na Mfalme Herode Agripa II upande mmoja katika mambo ya Yerusalemu. Wote walipinga ukuta uliozuia mfalme kuona ndani ya Hekalu na walinzi wa Kirumi kuona kutoka kumbi zake za magharibi. Festo aliagiza ubomolewe lakini akaruhusu ujumbe wa Wayahudi kukata rufaa kwa Nero (Ant. 20.189-196). Matendo 25:13–26:32 vivyo hivyo humwasilisha Festo akiomba ushauri kwa Agripa II kuhusu mgogoro wa kidini wa Wayahudi.", "Festo alikufa madarakani. Nero alimtuma Albinus aliposikia habari, na katika kipindi cha kati kuhani mkuu Ananus aliagiza Yakobo, ndugu wa Yesu aliyeitwa Kristo, na wengine wahukumiwe kupigwa mawe (Ant. 20.197-203). Wengi humtambulisha na Yakobo wa Matendo 21:18 na Wagalatia 1:19; kifungu kinakubaliwa kwa upana kuwa halisi, ingawa si na wote.", "Yosefo humwasilisha Festo kama mtawala mwenye shughuli wa jimbo lenye matatizo. Festo alituma wapanda farasi na wanajeshi wa miguu dhidi ya wafuasi wa mdanganyifu wa jangwani (Ant. 20.185-188), na War humpa sifa kwa kuwakamata wengi wa wanyang'anyi, tofauti na mrithi wake Albinus (War 2.271-272)." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Yosefo hamtaji Paulo kamwe. Kesi mbele ya Festo, rufaa kwa kaisari na kuonekana mbele ya Agripa II na Bernike (Matendo 25:1–26:32) hutegemea Matendo pekee.", "Yosefo hatoi mwaka wa kuwasili kwa Festo wala urefu wa muhula wake. Tarehe za kawaida (kuwasili karibu 59–60 BK, kufa karibu 62 BK) ni uundaji upya. Kuwasili mapema zaidi, karibu 55–56 BK, hutegemea ingizo la historia ya karne ya nne (toleo la Kilatini la Jerome la Chronicle ya Eusebius, chini ya mwaka wa pili wa Nero), ambalo msingi wake haujulikani, na hoja kutokana na Pallas kupoteza wadhifa mwaka 55.", "Makubaliano kuhusu jina la mtawala, nafasi yake katika urithi na shughuli zake na Agripa II huonyesha kuwa Matendo linafaa mazingira haya ya kisiasa. Hayathibitishi hotuba au matukio yanayosimuliwa na Matendo. Ikiwa Luka alitumia Yosefo, makubaliano yasingehesabiwa kama uthibitisho huru.", "Taarifa za Eusebius (HE 2.22.1; 2.23.21) hutumia Matendo na Yosefo, ambaye humrejelea kwa kunukuu. Hurudia mashahidi hao badala ya kuongeza shahidi huru." ], "debate": "Maswali mawili yako wazi. Mpangilio: wasomi wengi huweka kuwasili kwa Festo karibu 59–60 BK; McGiffert (1890) aliruhusu 59–61 kwa upana zaidi, na Schürer (1890) alitoa 60. Hutaja kauli ya Paulo kuwa Feliki alikuwa amehukumu taifa kwa miaka mingi (Matendo 24:10) na matukio ya wakati wa Feliki ambayo Yosefo huweka chini ya Nero (Ant. 20.160-181). Tarehe ya mwisho hutegemea War 6.300-305, inayomwasilisha Albinus akitawala wakati Yesu mwana wa Ananus, ambaye vilio vyake vilianza katika Sikukuu ya Vibanda miaka minne kabla ya vita, alipoletwa mbele yake. Wachache hupendelea 55–56 BK. Hutaja toleo la Jerome la Chronicle ya Eusebius na kuhoji kuwa Pallas, ambaye Yosefo anasema wakati huo alikuwa katika heshima kubwa zaidi kwa Nero na kumwokoa Feliki (Ant. 20.182), alipoteza wadhifa mwaka 55 (Tacitus, Ann. 13.14). Wengine hujibu kuwa Pallas alihifadhi hadhi baada ya kupoteza wadhifa: aliachiliwa shtaka la njama baadaye mwaka 55 (Ann. 13.23) na kuishi hadi 62 (Ann. 14.65). Kutegemeana: wengine huhoji kuwa Luka alitumia Yosefo; wengine huona Matendo kujitegemea kutoka kwake.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Mpangilio wa mapema", "statement": "Festo alifika karibu 55–56 BK. Toleo la Kilatini la Jerome la Chronicle ya Eusebius huweka mabadiliko ya mtawala katika mwaka wa pili wa Nero, na kauli ya Yosefo kuwa Pallas alimwokoa Feliki imesomwa kuhitaji tarehe ya kabla ya Pallas kupoteza wadhifa mwaka 55. Wahariri Valesius na Heinichen walidhani tarehe hii, na Schürer (1890) huwataja Kellner na Weber miongoni mwa watetezi wa baadaye wa kurudishwa mapema katika utawala wa Nero. Kwa maoni haya kuzuiliwa kwa Paulo huko Kaisaria na safari yake ya baharini hadi Rumi husogea miaka kadhaa mapema." }, { "label": "Luka alitumia Yosefo", "statement": "Ikiwa Matendo liliandikwa baada ya Antiquities (93/94 BK) na mwandishi wake akamtumia Yosefo, jina la pamoja, urithi na uhusiano na Agripa II vingeonyesha matumizi ya chanzo ya Luka badala ya uthibitisho huru. Wakosoaji wa maoni haya huona kuwa matukio ya Festo ya Matendo yana mengi ambayo Yosefo hana, na hayana tukio lolote la Festo la Yosefo mwenyewe: sicarii, mdanganyifu wa jangwani na ukuta wa Hekalu." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-josephus-festus" }, { "id": "josephus-egyptian", "kind": "literary-non-christian", "dateFrom": 75, "dateTo": 94, "corpusReferences": [ "CTS urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0526.tlg004 (Josephus, Jewish War)", "CTS urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0526.tlg001 (Josephus, Jewish Antiquities)" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 21:37-39", "Acts 22:1-21", "Acts 23:24-26" ], "personIds": [ "person.josephus", "person.felix", "person.paul", "person.lysias" ], "placeIds": [ "place.jerusalem", "place.judea", "place.mount-of-olives" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Jewish War", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 2.261-262 (Whiston 2.13.5)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=2:whiston%20chapter=13:whiston%20section=5", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "got together thirty thousand men that were deluded by him; these he led round about from the wilderness to the mount which was called the Mount of Olives, and was ready to break into Jerusalem by force from that place", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Jewish War", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 2.263 (Whiston 2.13.5)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=2:whiston%20chapter=13:whiston%20section=5", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "the Egyptian ran away, with a few others, while the greatest part of those that were with him were either destroyed or taken alive", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Jewish War", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 2.254 (Whiston 2.13.3)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=2:whiston%20chapter=13:whiston%20section=3", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "there sprang up another sort of robbers in Jerusalem, which were called Sicarii, who slew men in the day time, and in the midst of the city", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.169 (Whiston 20.8.6)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=6", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "advised the multitude of the common people to go along with him to the Mount of Olives, as it was called, which lay over against the city", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.171-172 (Whiston 20.8.6)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=6", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "He also slew four hundred of them, and took two hundred alive. But the Egyptian himself escaped out of the fight, but did not appear any more.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.267 (Whiston 20.11.3)", "url": "https://www.gutenberg.org/cache/epub/2848/pg2848.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "which is the thirteenth year of the reign of Cæsar Domitian, and the fifty-sixth year of my own life", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.21.3", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Josephus relates these events in the second book of his History. But it is worth while comparing the account of the Egyptian given here with that contained in the Acts of the Apostles.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "A. C. McGiffert", "work": "Church History (Nicene and Post-Nicene Fathers, Series II vol. 1), note on HE 2.21", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.21.3, note 466 (the three figures)", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/npnf201.iii.vii.xxii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "the Egyptian escaped with a small number (i.e. small in comparison with the thirty thousand), who may well have been the four thousand mentioned by the author of the Acts", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "A. C. McGiffert", "work": "Church History (Nicene and Post-Nicene Fathers, Series II vol. 1), note on HE 2.21", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.21.3, note 466 (on numerals)", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/npnf201.iii.vii.xxii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "numbers are so treacherous in transcription that the difference may really have been originally less than it is. Whenever the main elements of two accounts are in substantial agreement, little stress can be laid upon a difference in figures.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "A. C. McGiffert", "work": "Church History (Nicene and Post-Nicene Fathers, Series II vol. 1), note on HE 2.21", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.21.3, note 468", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/npnf201.iii.vii.xxii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Josephus in both of his accounts relates the uproar among events which he expressly assigns to Nero’s reign", "role": "early-study" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Steve Mason", "work": "Josephus and the New Testament (2nd ed.)", "year": "2003", "view": "Argues that Luke probably knew Josephus's writings. On Acts 21:38 judges the link of the Egyptian with the sicarii too close to the War's sequence to be coincidence." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q134461", "label": "Josephus" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q44276", "label": "The Jewish War" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1232616", "label": "Antiquities of the Jews" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q316915", "label": "Antonius Felix" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q205976", "label": "Mount of Olives" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q282586", "label": "Sicarii" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "687928", "label": "Ierusalem/Hierosolyma/Col. Aelia Capitolina" } ], "title": "Yosefo kuhusu nabii kutoka Misri katika Matendo 21:38", "summary": "Yosefo mara mbili humweleza nabii kutoka Misri asiyepewa jina ambaye, wakati Feliki alipotawala Uyahudi, aliongoza wafuasi hadi Mlima wa Mizeituni na kutoroka wanajeshi wa Feliki waliposhambulia. Katika Matendo 21:38 jemadari wa Kirumi huuliza kama Paulo ndiye mtu huyo. Yosefo hushuhudia tukio ambalo swali hudhania, si kukamatwa kwa Paulo kwenyewe, na idadi hutofautiana: karibu wafuasi 30,000 katika War, 400 waliouawa na 200 waliokamatwa katika Antiquities, watu 4,000 katika Matendo.", "dating": "Tukio katikati ya miaka ya 50 BK, chini ya Feliki na baada ya Nero kuingia madarakani (54); limeripotiwa katika Jewish War (kwa kawaida karibu 75–79 BK) na Antiquities (iliyokamilishwa 93/94 BK, Ant. 20.267)", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Yosefo, mwanahistoria asiye Mkristo, huripoti mara mbili kuwa wakati Feliki alipotawala Uyahudi mtu aliyejiita nabii, anayejulikana kama 'Mmisri' tu, aliongoza wafuasi hadi Mlima wa Mizeituni, akashindwa na wanajeshi wa Feliki, na kutoroka (War 2.261-263; Ant. 20.169-172).", "Msingi wa swali la jemadari katika Matendo 21:38 hulingana na Yosefo: mtawala yuleyule (Matendo 23:24–26), jina lilelile la utani, harakati zinazohusishwa na jangwa, ingawa katika mwelekeo tofauti (War 2.262), na kiongozi aliyetoroka na kutotokea tena (Ant. 20.172).", "Matendo 21:38 hutumia neno la kuazimwa kutoka Kilatini sicarii, istilahi ambayo Yosefo huwapa watu wenye majambia anaowaweka Yerusalemu chini ya Feliki (War 2.254-257), hivyo maneno ya Matendo yanafaa miaka ya 50 kama Yosefo anavyoieleza (kuhusu kutegemeana, angalia chini).", "Masimulizi ya Yosefo mwenyewe ni magumu kupatanisha: War ina karibu wafuasi 30,000 na husema wengi waliokuwa na Mmisri waliuawa au kukamatwa, huku Antiquities ikihesabu 400 waliouawa na 200 waliokamatwa. Watu 4,000 wa Matendo ni idadi ya tatu, si mgongano na nambari moja thabiti." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hauthibitishi kukamatwa kwa Paulo, mazungumzo yake na jemadari, au hotuba inayofuata (Matendo 22:1–21); hushuhudia tukio la awali ambalo swali hudhania.", "Hauamui idadi ipi ni sahihi, au ikiwa Luka alizijua kazi za Yosefo, alitegemea taarifa ya pamoja au alikuwa na chanzo chake. Masimulizi mawili ya Yosefo ni shahidi mmoja, si wawili.", "Yosefo hamhusishi Mmisri na sicarii kamwe. Hueleza watu wenye majambia, manabii wa jangwani na Mmisri kama matatizo tofauti (War 2.254-263), hivyo uhusiano huo huonekana katika Matendo tu.", "Masimulizi hutofautiana katika mwelekeo: Yosefo huwaleta wafuasi wa Mmisri kutoka jangwani (War) au mjini (Antiquities) hadi Mlima wa Mizeituni, huku Matendo 21:38 likizungumzia watu walioongozwa kutoka kwenda jangwani." ], "debate": "Maswali mawili yanabaki wazi. Kuhusu idadi, 30,000 ya War huenda ni makadirio ya jumla ya ukubwa wa umati au makadirio yaliyotiwa chumvi. McGiffert (1890), akimtaja Tholuck, badala yake alisoma 30,000 kama umati uliotawanyika, 600 kama wanyang'anyi ambao Feliki aliwaua au kuwakamata na 4,000 kama idadi ndogo waliotoroka na Mmisri, akiongeza kuwa nambari hunakiliwa vibaya kwa urahisi. Kuhusu kutegemeana, Steve Mason huhoji kuwa Luka alizijua kazi za Yosefo, kwa kuwa kuunganisha Mmisri na sicarii, ambao War huwaeleza kabla yake tu, hufuata mfuatano wa War kwa ukaribu mno kuwa sadfa. Wengine hujibu kuwa 4,000 ya Matendo, mwelekeo wake wa msafara na maneno yake hayalingani na simulizi lolote la Yosefo, vikidokeza ufahamu huru wa uasi maarufu wa karibuni.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Matendo lilitumia Yosefo", "statement": "Luka alizijua kazi za Yosefo na kuwaunganisha sicarii, walioelezwa kabla tu ya Mmisri katika War 2.254-263, na harakati za Mmisri. Kwa maoni haya Matendo liliandikwa baada ya War, au baada ya 93/94 BK ikiwa Luka alitumia Antiquities." }, { "label": "Kumbukumbu huru ya uasi", "statement": "Luka, au chanzo chake, angeweza kuunganisha uasi maarufu wa karibuni na watu wenye majambia wa miaka ileile bila kumsoma Yosefo. Idadi, mwelekeo wa msafara na maneno ya Matendo hayafuati simulizi lolote la Yosefo, jambo linaloashiria ufahamu tofauti badala ya kunakili." }, { "label": "Idadi zilizopatanishwa", "statement": "Nambari tatu huhesabu makundi tofauti: umati wa 30,000 uliotawanyika, karibu 600 waliouawa au kukamatwa, na kundi la 4,000 lililotoroka na kiongozi. McGiffert (1890), akimtaja Tholuck, alipendekeza hili huku akikubali kuwa nambari hunakiliwa vibaya kwa urahisi. Hili huhitaji kusoma kauli ya War kuwa alitoroka na wengine wachache kama wachache ikilinganishwa na 30,000." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-josephus-egyptian" }, { "id": "josephus-famine", "kind": "literary-non-christian", "dateFrom": 93, "dateTo": 94, "corpusReferences": [ "CTS urn:cts:greekLit:tlg0526.tlg001 (Josephus, Jewish Antiquities)" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 11:27-30", "Acts 12:25", "Acts 12:20-23", "Acts 5:36-37", "Galatians 2:1-10" ], "personIds": [ "person.josephus", "person.claudius", "person.agabus", "person.barnabas", "person.paul", "person.herod-agrippa-i" ], "placeIds": [ "place.jerusalem", "place.judea", "place.antioch", "place.alexandria", "place.cyprus", "place.rome" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.51-53 (Whiston 20.2.5)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=2:whiston%20section=5", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "for whereas a famine did oppress them at that time, and many people died for want of what was necessary to procure food withal, queen Helena sent some of her servants to Alexandria with money to buy a great quantity of corn", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.101 (Whiston 20.5.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=5:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Under these procurators that great famine happened in Judea, in which queen Helena bought corn in Egypt at a great expense, and distributed it to those that were in want, as I have related already.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.102 (Whiston 20.5.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=5:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "the sons of Judas of Galilee were now slain; I mean of that Judas who caused the people to revolt, when Cyrenius came to take an account of the estates of the Jews", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.103-104 (Whiston 20.5.2)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=5:whiston%20section=2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And now it was that Cumanus came as successor to Tiberius Alexander; as also that Herod, brother of Agrippa the great king, departed this life, in the eighth year of the reign of Claudius Caesar.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.17 (Whiston 20.2.1)", "url": "https://www.gutenberg.org/cache/epub/2848/pg2848.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "About this time it was that Helena, queen of Adiabene, and her son Izates, changed their course of life, and embraced the Jewish customs", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.97 (Whiston 20.5.1)", "url": "https://www.gutenberg.org/cache/epub/2848/pg2848.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Now it came to pass, while Fadus was procurator of Judea, that a certain magician, whose name was Theudas", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 3.320 (Whiston 3.15.3)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=3:whiston%20chapter=15:whiston%20section=3", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "a little before the beginning of this war, when Claudius was emperor of the Romans, and Ismael was our high priest, and when so great a famine", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.179 (Whiston 20.8.8)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=8:whiston%20section=8", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "About this time king Agrippa gave the high priesthood to Ismael, who was the son of Fabi.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.267 (Whiston 20.11.3)", "url": "https://www.gutenberg.org/cache/epub/2848/pg2848.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "which is the thirteenth year of the reign of Cæsar Domitian, and the fifty-sixth year of my own life", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "suetonius-rolfe", "author": "Suetonius", "work": "The Lives of the Caesars: Claudius", "translator": "J. C. Rolfe", "year": "1914", "locator": "Claud. 18.2", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Suetonius/12Caesars/Claudius*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "When there was a scarcity of grain because of long-continued droughts, he was once stopped in the middle of the Forum by a mob and so pelted with abuse and at the same time with pieces of bread", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Annals", "translator": "A. J. Church and W. J. Brodribb", "year": "1876", "locator": "Ann. 12.43", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0078:book=12:chapter=43", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Scanty crops too, and consequent famine were regarded as a token of calamity.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Annals", "translator": "A. J. Church and W. J. Brodribb", "year": "1876", "locator": "Ann. 12.41", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0078:book=12:chapter=41", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "In the fifth consulship of Tiberius Claudius with Sextius Cornelius Orfitus for his colleague", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "dio-cassius-cary", "author": "Cassius Dio", "work": "Roman History", "translator": "Earnest Cary", "year": "1914–1927", "locator": "Dio 60.10.1", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Cassius_Dio/60*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Claudius was now consul with Gaius Largus.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "dio-cassius-cary", "author": "Cassius Dio", "work": "Roman History", "translator": "Earnest Cary", "year": "1914–1927", "locator": "Dio 60.11.1", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Cassius_Dio/60*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "On the occasion of a severe famine he considered the problem of providing an abundant food-supply, not only for that particular crisis but for all future time.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.8.1", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Under him the world was visited with a famine, which writers that are entire strangers to our religion have recorded in their histories.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.11.3-2.12.1", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Besides this he also makes mention of the famine, which took place in the reign of Claudius, in the following words.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "orosius-latin", "author": "Orosius", "work": "Historiae adversus paganos", "locator": "Hist. 7.6.12", "url": "https://www.thelatinlibrary.com/orosius/orosius7.shtml", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895", "locator": "ch. III §3 (Schürer's verdict)", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/ramsay/paul_roman/paul_roman.vi.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Luke’s brief statement about the famine is declared by Dr. Schürer to be unhistorical, improbable, and uncorroborated by other evidence.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895", "locator": "ch. III §3 (date of the famine)", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/ramsay/paul_roman/paul_roman.vi.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The great famine in Palestine occurred probably in A.D. 46.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895", "locator": "ch. III §3 (Galatians and the relief visit)", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/ramsay/paul_roman/paul_roman.vi.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But we are not reduced to this single account of the mission to Jerusalem. Paul, in writing to the Galatians, also mentions it", "role": "early-study" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895", "view": "Dates the Palestinian famine probably to AD 46 and reads Acts as claiming dearth across the Roman world in different years of Claudius's reign. Treats Orosius's date as one year too early, placing the famine's onset in 45. Reads Acts 12 as a digression between the sending and the delivery of the relief, and identifies the relief visit with Galatians 2:1-10." }, { "author": "Kenneth S. Gapp", "work": "The Universal Famine under Claudius (Harvard Theological Review 28)", "year": "1935", "view": "Uses Egyptian papyri pointing to a failed wheat harvest c. AD 45-46, after a very high Nile, to argue that the universal famine cannot be explained as a mere sequence of local famines; dates the Judean famine to AD 46 or 47 under Tiberius Alexander." }, { "author": "Joachim Jeremias", "work": "Jerusalem in the Time of Jesus (ET)", "year": "1969", "view": "Dates the Judean famine's height to AD 47-48, aggravated by a sabbatical year." }, { "author": "Emil Schürer (rev. Geza Vermes and Fergus Millar)", "work": "The History of the Jewish People in the Age of Jesus Christ (175 B.C.-A.D. 135), vol. 1", "year": "1973", "view": "Treats the view that a world-wide famine occurred under Claudius as improbable." }, { "author": "Bruce W. Winter", "work": "Secular and Christian Responses to Corinthian Famines (Tyndale Bulletin 40)", "year": "1989", "view": "Argues the Claudian dearth was widespread though not felt everywhere at once, citing repeated grain shortages at Corinth." }, { "author": "Peter Garnsey", "work": "Famine and Food Supply in the Graeco-Roman World: Responses to Risk and Crisis", "year": "1988", "view": "Distinguishes frequent, usually local food shortages from rarer true famines. This is a caution against reading ancient famine reports as a single empire-wide catastrophe." }, { "author": "Steve Mason", "work": "Josephus and the New Testament (2nd ed.)", "year": "2003", "view": "Argues that Luke probably knew Josephus's Antiquities. On that view, parallels such as the Theudas and Judas notices beside the famine report would be literary dependence rather than independent corroboration." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1232616", "label": "Antiquities of the Jews" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q134461", "label": "Josephus" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q2655769", "label": "Helena of Adiabene" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q3047056", "label": "Izates bar Monobaz" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q459841", "label": "Cuspius Fadus" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q361357", "label": "Tiberius Julius Alexander" } ], "title": "Yosefo kuhusu njaa huko Uyahudi chini ya Klaudio", "summary": "Yosefo, mwanahistoria Myahudi akiandika karibu 93/94 BK, huripoti njaa kali huko Yerusalemu na Uyahudi chini ya Klaudio, chini ya Fadus au, kwa Kiyunani kilichochapishwa na Niese, mrithi wake Tiberius Alexander (karibu 44–48 BK). Ununuzi wa nafaka wa Malkia Helena wa Adiabene uliipunguza. Hilo linalingana na njaa ya Matendo katika utawala wa Klaudio yenye mahitaji huko Uyahudi. Lakini Yosefo hawataji Wakristo, Agabo, Barnaba au Sauli kamwe, na hakuna chanzo kinachorekodi njaa moja katika ulimwengu wote wa Kirumi.", "dating": "Antiquities ilikamilishwa 93/94 BK (Ant. 20.267). Njaa inayoiripoti huangukia chini ya Cuspius Fadus au Tiberius Alexander, karibu 44–48 BK; tarehe zinazopendekezwa za kilele chake huanzia 46 hadi 47/48 BK.", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Yosefo alikuwa mwanahistoria Myahudi, si Mkristo. Huripoti njaa kali huko Yerusalemu na Uyahudi katika utawala wa Klaudio, ambamo wengi walikufa (Ant. 20.51, 20.101), chini ya Fadus au, kwa Kiyunani kilichochapishwa na Niese, mrithi wake Tiberius Alexander (karibu 44–48 BK). Cumanus alimrithi Tiberius Alexander karibu na wakati Herode wa Chalcis alipokufa, katika mwaka wa nane wa Klaudio (Ant. 20.103-104).", "Msaada kwa Yerusalemu ulitoka nje ya Uyahudi. Helena wa Adiabene, aliyekuwa amekubali desturi za Wayahudi (Ant. 20.17), aliagiza nafaka inunuliwe Aleksandria na tini zilizokaushwa Kipro. Mwana wake Izates alituma pesa kwa viongozi wa Yerusalemu (Ant. 20.51-53). Kwa hiyo msaada wa nje kwa Yerusalemu katika njaa hii unashuhudiwa kando na Matendo.", "Waandishi wa Kirumi hurekodi upungufu wa nafaka uliorudiwa huko Rumi chini ya Klaudio. Dio huripoti njaa kali katika simulizi lake la 42 BK (Dio 60.10.1, 60.11.1). Mwaka 51 BK, baada ya mavuno mabaya, Rumi ilikuwa na chakula cha siku kumi na tano na umati ulimzingira kaisari katika Forum (Tacitus, Ann. 12.41, 12.43; ling. Suetonius, Claud. 18.2).", "Matendo huweka njaa katika utawala wa Klaudio na kusimulia msaada ukitumwa Uyahudi (Matendo 11:28–30). Hilo linakubaliana na Yosefo katika utawala na eneo. Matendo halitoi mwaka, na kuiweka karibu na kifo cha Herode Agripa I (44 BK; Matendo 12:20–23) hulingana na karibu 44–48 ya Yosefo kwa takriban tu; Ramsay alisoma Matendo 12 kama mchepuko wa simulizi." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Yosefo hasemi chochote kuhusu Wakristo, unabii wa Agabo, mchango wa Antiokia, au safari ya Barnaba na Sauli (Matendo 11:30; 12:25). Maelezo hayo hutegemea Matendo pekee. Kuwa sahihi kuhusu njaa na utawala hakuthibitishi kwenyewe ziara.", "Hakuna chanzo kinachoeleza njaa moja ya wakati mmoja katika ulimwengu wa Kirumi. Upungufu ulioshuhudiwa huangukia miaka na maeneo tofauti (Rumi 42 na 51; Misri karibu 45–46; Uyahudi karibu 44–48). Ikiwa hiyo ni uhaba mmoja ulioenea au Matendo linajumlisha kunabishaniwa.", "Mwaka kamili wa njaa hauwezi kubainishwa. Ant. 20.101 inaweza kusomwa kama kuwahusu procurators wote wawili au Tiberius Alexander tu. Taarifa nyingine ya Yosefo ya njaa (Ant. 3.320) humtaja kuhani mkuu Ismael, lakini Kitabu 20 kinamwasilisha Agripa II akimteua Ismael baada tu ya kuripoti kifo cha Klaudio (Ant. 20.179).", "Waandishi wa baadaye wa Kikristo hawaongezi ushahidi huru. Eusebius humrejelea Yosefo kwa kunukuu (HE 2.11.3-2.12.1), na Orosius (Hist. 7.6.12) huweka njaa katika Shamu yote katika mwaka wa nne wa Klaudio na kumfanya Helena kuwa aliyeongoka kwa Kristo, kinyume na Yosefo. Ikiwa Luka alitumia Yosefo, taarifa ya njaa ya Matendo isingekuwa huru pia." ], "debate": "Tarehe: Whiston hutafsiri Ant. 20.101 kuwa chini ya procurators hawa, akijumuisha Fadus na Tiberius Alexander; Kiyunani kilichochapishwa na Niese husoma umoja, jambo ambalo lingeifanya njaa kuwa ya Tiberius Alexander tu (karibu 46–48). Tarehe zilizopendekezwa huanzia 46 (Ramsay) au 46/47 (Gapp, kutoka mafunjo ya Misri) hadi 47/48 (Jeremias, mwaka wa Sabato). Upeo: Ramsay na Gapp husoma njaa ya duniani kote ya Matendo kuwa halisi, ingawa kwa namna tofauti; Schürer aliiona kuwa ujumlishaji usio wa kihistoria. Kutegemeana: Ant. 20.97-102 huripoti Theudas na kisha wana wa Judas, hivyo wengine huhoji kuwa Luka alimsoma Yosefo; wengine huona tofauti kuwa kubwa mno. Ziara: wengine huitambulisha na Wagalatia 2:1–10; wengine huona Wagalatia 1–2 kuiacha bila nafasi.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Luka alijumlisha njaa ya eneo", "statement": "Ramsay anaripoti kuwa Emil Schürer aliona kauli ya Luka kuhusu njaa kutokuwa ya kihistoria, kuwa na uwezekano mdogo na kutothibitishwa, na Schürer iliyorekebishwa (1973) bado huona njaa ya duniani kote kuwa na uwezekano mdogo. Kwa maoni haya Matendo iligeuza njaa ya Uyahudi kuwa tukio la dunia. Baadhi ya wakosoaji, wakisoma simulizi la Paulo mwenyewe la ziara zake za Yerusalemu katika Wagalatia 1–2, pia huona ziara ya msaada ya Barnaba na Sauli kama ujenzi wa Luka badala ya safari tofauti." }, { "label": "Utawala wenye upungufu wa maeneo uliofuatana", "statement": "Ramsay alijenga hoja kuwa Matendo linadai njaa katika ulimwengu wa Kirumi wakati wa utawala wa Klaudio, si katika mwaka mmoja. Kwa usomaji wake, upungufu huko Rumi na kwingine katika miaka tofauti, pamoja na njaa ya Uyahudi (aliyoipa huenda tarehe ya 46 BK), hutimiza dai hilo." }, { "label": "Uhaba mmoja ulioenea", "statement": "Gapp (1935) alijenga hoja kutoka mafunjo ya Misri kuwa Nile iliyokuwa juu sana ilifanya ukuzaji wa ngano Misri usiwe na faida katika 45–46, na kuwa njaa ya jumla haiwezi kuelezwa kama mfuatano tu wa njaa za maeneo. Winter (1989) vivyo hivyo aliona upungufu kuwa ulienea, ingawa haukuhisiwa kila mahali wakati mmoja." }, { "label": "Matendo lilitumia Yosefo", "statement": "Antiquities 20.97-102 huripoti Theudas chini ya Fadus na kisha kuuawa kwa wana wa Judas wa Galilaya, ikikumbuka uasi wa Judas. Matendo 5:36–37 hutaja Theudas na kisha Judas, hivyo wengine huhoji kuwa Luka alifuata mfuatano wa Yosefo. Wengine hujibu kuwa Matendo huweka Theudas kabla ya uasi wa Judas wa 6 BK, akiwa na wafuasi tofauti, jambo ambalo msomaji wa Yosefo asingetarajiwa kutunga." }, { "label": "Ziara ya msaada ni Wagalatia 2", "statement": "Ramsay, kama wengi wanaokubali ziara ya msaada kuwa ya kihistoria, aliitambulisha na mkutano wa faragha wa Paulo wa Yerusalemu katika Wagalatia 2:1–10, akitaja ombi la huko la kuwakumbuka maskini. Wengine hulinganisha Wagalatia 2 na mkutano wa Matendo 15 na kupatanisha ziara ya msaada na Wagalatia kwa namna nyingine, au hutia shaka kuwa ilitokea." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-josephus-famine" }, { "id": "josephus-agrippa-bernice", "kind": "literary-non-christian", "dateFrom": 75, "dateTo": 130, "corpusReferences": [], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 25:13-26:32", "Acts 25:13-22", "Acts 25:23", "Acts 26:3", "Acts 26:30-32" ], "personIds": [ "person.agrippa", "person.bernice", "person.festus", "person.paul", "person.josephus", "person.herod-agrippa-i", "person.claudius", "person.nero" ], "placeIds": [ "place.caesarea", "place.jerusalem", "place.rome" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 20.145-147 (Whiston 20.7.3)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0146%3Abook%3D20%3Awhiston%20chapter%3D7%3Awhiston%20section%3D3", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "when the report went that she had criminal conversation with her brother, [Agrippa, junior,] she persuaded Poleme, who was king of Cilicia, to be circumcised, and to marry her, as supposing that by this means she should prove those calumnies upon her to be false", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 20.137-140 (Whiston 20.7.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0146%3Abook%3D20%3Awhiston%20chapter%3D7%3Awhiston%20section%3D1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "he bestowed upon Agrippa the tetrarchy of Philip and Batanea, and added thereto Trachonites, with Abila; which last had been the tetrarchy of Lysanias; but he took from him Chalcis, when he had been governor thereof four years.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 20.158-159 (Whiston 20.8.4)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0146%3Abook%3D20%3Awhiston%20chapter%3D8%3Awhiston%20section%3D4", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Caesar also bestowed on Agrippa a certain part of Galilee, Tiberias, and Tarichae, and ordered them to submit to his jurisdiction. He gave him also Julias, a city of Perea, with fourteen villages that lay about it.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 20.189-196 (Whiston 20.8.11)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0146%3Abook%3D20%3Awhiston%20chapter%3D8%3Awhiston%20section%3D11", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "At these doings both king Agrippa, and principally Festus the procurator, were much displeased; and Festus ordered them to pull the wall down again", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 20.222-223 (Whiston 20.9.7)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0146%3Abook%3D20%3Awhiston%20chapter%3D9%3Awhiston%20section%3D7", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But king Agrippa, who had the care of the temple committed to him by Claudius Caesar", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 19.354 (Whiston 19.9.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0146%3Abook%3D19%3Awhiston%20chapter%3D9%3Awhiston%20section%3D1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But he left behind him a son, Agrippa by name, a youth in the seventeenth year of his age, and three daughters; one of which, Bernice, was married to Herod, his father's brother, and was sixteen years old;", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "locator": "War 2.342-344 (Whiston 2.16.3)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0148%3Abook%3D2%3Awhiston%20chapter%3D16%3Awhiston%20section%3D3", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "He therefore called the multitude together into a large gallery, and placed his sister Bernice in the house of the Asamoneans, that she might be seen by them,", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "locator": "War 2.402-404 (Whiston 2.16.5)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0148%3Abook%3D2%3Awhiston%20chapter%3D16%3Awhiston%20section%3D5", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "When Agrippa had spoken thus, both he and his sister wept, and by their tears repressed a great deal of the violence of the people;", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "locator": "War 2.405-407 (Whiston 2.17.1)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0148%3Abook%3D2%3Awhiston%20chapter%3D17%3Awhiston%20section%3D1", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "THIS advice the people hearkened to, and went up into the temple with the king and Bernice, and began to rebuild the cloisters;", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Wars of the Jews", "locator": "War 2.426 (Whiston 2.17.6)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.01.0148%3Abook%3D2%3Awhiston%20chapter%3D17%3Awhiston%20section%3D6", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The others then set fire to the house of Ananias the high priest, and to the palaces of Agrippa and Bernice;", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)" }, { "sourceKey": "juvenal-ramsay", "author": "Juvenal", "work": "Satires (Satire 6)", "locator": "Sat. 6.156-159", "url": "https://www.tertullian.org/fathers/juvenal_satires_06.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "a diamond of great renown, made precious by the finger of Berenice. It was given as a present long ago by the barbarian Agrippa to his incestuous sister, in that country where kings celebrate festal sabbaths with bare feet", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "G. G. Ramsay", "year": "1918" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-histories-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Histories", "locator": "Hist. 2.2", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.02.0080%3Abook%3D2%3Achapter%3D2", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Some supposed that he retraced his steps for love of Queen Berenice, nor was his young heart averse to her charms, but this affection occasioned no hindrance to action.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb", "year": "1873 (reprinted 1942, as given by Perseus)" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-histories-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Histories", "locator": "Hist. 2.81", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.02.0080%3Abook%3D2%3Achapter%3D81", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Queen Berenice too, who was then in the prime of youth and beauty, and who had charmed even the old Vespasian by the splendour of her presents, promoted his cause with equal zeal.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb", "year": "1873 (reprinted 1942, as given by Perseus)" }, { "sourceKey": "suetonius-rolfe", "author": "Suetonius", "work": "Lives of the Caesars: Titus", "locator": "Tit. 7.1", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Suetonius/12Caesars/Titus*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "his notorious passion for queen Berenice, to whom it was even said that he promised marriage.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "J. C. Rolfe", "year": "1914" }, { "sourceKey": "dio-cassius-cary", "author": "Cassius Dio", "work": "Roman History (Epitome)", "locator": "66.15.3-4 (Boissevain numbering, as in the LacusCurtius section anchors; printed in Cary's Loeb as Book 65)", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Cassius_Dio/65*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Berenice was at the very height of her power and consequently came to Rome along with her brother Agrippa. The latter was given the rank of praetor, while she dwelt in the palace, cohabiting with Titus.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Earnest Cary", "year": "1925" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Max Krenkel", "work": "Josephus und Lucas", "year": "1894", "view": "Argued at length that Luke-Acts depends on Josephus' writings. This classic case for literary dependence would make Acts' agreement with Josephus derivative." }, { "author": "Colin J. Hemer", "work": "The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History", "year": "1989", "view": "Argued that the accuracy of Acts' local and official details reflects early, independent knowledge. He rejected the case for Luke's dependence on Josephus." }, { "author": "Steve Mason", "work": "Josephus and the New Testament", "year": "1992", "view": "Argues that Luke probably knew Josephus' writings, since the overlaps between them, including Agrippa II and Bernice, would otherwise be a near-incredible series of coincidences. He grants that this cannot be proved." }, { "author": "Richard I. Pervo", "work": "Dating Acts: Between the Evangelists and the Apologists", "year": "2006", "view": "Dates Acts to the early second century and argues that its author used Josephus' Antiquities." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q313419", "label": "Agrippa II" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q466696", "label": "Berenice (daughter of Agrippa I)" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1232616", "label": "Antiquities of the Jews" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q44276", "label": "The Jewish War" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q7426233", "label": "Satire VI (Juvenal)" } ], "title": "Mfalme Herode Agripa II na Bernike katika maandishi ya Yosefo na Juvenal", "summary": "Yosefo anathibitisha kwamba Agripa II alikuwa mfalme tegemezi wa dola ya Rumi, aliyekabidhiwa usimamizi wa hekalu la Yerusalemu. Anamwonyesha pia dada yake Bernike akiwa naye hadharani, kama Matendo 25:13–26:32 inavyofanya huko Kaisaria. Pia anaripoti uvumi wa uhusiano wa kingono kati ya ndugu hao, ambao Juvenal anarudia kwa kejeli. Vyanzo hivi vinathibitisha watu hao wawili na hadhi yao, si kusikilizwa kwa kesi ya Paulo, na baadhi ya wasomi wanafikiri Luka alitumia maandishi ya Yosefo.", "dating": "Jewish War ya Yosefo, karibu 75-79 BK, na Antiquities, 93/94 BK (ilikamilishwa katika mwaka wa kumi na tatu wa Domitian, Ant. 20.267); Satire 6 ya Juvenal, mwanzoni mwa karne ya pili. Matukio yanayoelezwa yanaanzia 44 BK hadi miaka ya 70. Tacitus na Suetonius (mwanzoni mwa karne ya pili) wako ndani ya kipindi cha dateFrom-dateTo; Dio (mwanzoni mwa karne ya tatu) ni shahidi wa baadaye anayeunga mkono, aliye nje ya kipindi hicho.", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Agripa II, mwana wa Herode Agripa I, alitawala ufalme aliopewa na dola ya Rumi katika miaka ya Matendo 25–26. Klaudio alimpa eneo lililokuwa chini ya Filipo mtawala badala ya Chalcis, na Nero akaongeza Tiberia, Taricheae na Julias (Yosefo, Ant. 19.354; 20.138, 20.159). Cheo cha kifalme ambacho Matendo inampa kinaendana na rekodi hii.", "Yosefo anawaonyesha Agripa II na mtawala Festo wote wakihusika katika mzozo kuhusu hekalu la Yerusalemu. Anasema Klaudio alikuwa amemkabidhi Agripa II utunzaji wa hekalu, naye alikuwa akiteua na kuondoa makuhani wakuu (Ant. 20.189-196, 20.222-223). Hii inaendana na picha ya Matendo ya Festo kumpelekea mzozo wa kidini wa Kiyahudi (Matendo 25:13–22; 26:3).", "Bernike, dada wa Agripa II na mjane wa Herode wa Chalcis (Ant. 20.145), anaonekana naye hadharani mwaka wa 66 BK. Anawekwa mahali ambapo umati wa Yerusalemu unaweza kumwona wakati wa hotuba yake, analia pamoja naye, na kupanda naye kwenda hekaluni. Waasi wanachoma majumba ya Agripa II na Bernike (War 2.344, 402, 405, 426). Matendo inamwonyesha akiwa na mfalme huko Kaisaria (Matendo 25:13, 23; 26:30).", "Waandishi wa kale walieneza uvumi wa uhusiano wa kingono kati ya Bernike na kaka yake. Yosefo anauripoti, pamoja na jaribio lake la kuukanusha kwa kuolewa na Polemo, mfalme wa Kilikia (Ant. 20.145-146), na Juvenal anaurudia kama kejeli (Sat. 6.156-159). Hii inaonyesha sifa walizokuwa nazo watu hao wawili, si ukweli wa tuhuma." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hakuna chanzo kati ya hivi kinachomtaja Paulo au kusikilizwa kwa kesi huko Kaisaria. Vinathibitisha watu na hadhi yao, si tukio, hotuba au uamuzi unaosimuliwa katika Matendo 25:13–26:32.", "Havithibitishi tuhuma ya uhusiano wa kingono kati ya ndugu. Yosefo anaiwasilisha kama habari ya kusikia ambayo Bernike aliichukulia kuwa uzushi. Juvenal ni mwandishi wa kejeli aliyeandika miongo kadhaa baadaye, katika Rumi iliyokuwa imemchukia malkia huyo wa mashariki aliyehusishwa na Tito mfalme wa baadaye (Tacitus, Hist. 2.2; Suetonius, Tit. 7.1; Dio 66.15.3-4).", "Kukubaliana na Yosefo hakuthibitishi peke yake kwamba Luka hakumtegemea. Majina na vyeo sahihi vingeweza kutoka katika ujuzi wa kawaida kuhusu watu hao maarufu wa kifalme, na baadhi ya wasomi wanasema Luka alijua kazi za Yosefo." ], "debate": "Maswali mawili bado yako wazi. Kwanza, uhusiano kati ya Matendo na Yosefo. Baadhi ya wasomi wanasema Luka alitumia Antiquities, jambo ambalo lingefanya maelezo yanayolingana kuhusu Agripa II na Bernike yatokane na chanzo hicho badala ya kuwa huru. Wengine wanaonyesha tofauti sehemu nyingine na umaarufu wa watu hao wawili katika miaka ya 50 na 60, na kuona ujuzi wa kujitegemea. Pili, kilichokuwa nyuma ya uvumi wa uhusiano wa kingono kati yao. Huenda ulikuwa uvumi wenye uadui kuhusu malkia mjane aliyeishi katika makazi ya kifalme ya kaka yake na baadaye kuisumbua Rumi kwa uhusiano wake na Tito mfalme wa baadaye, au huenda ulikuwa mtazamo ulioenea wakati huo. Hakuna chanzo kinachotoa zaidi ya taarifa kuhusu sifa yao.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Luka alitumia Yosefo", "statement": "Ikiwa Matendo iliandikwa baada ya 93/94 BK, picha yake ya Agripa II na Bernike ingeweza kutoka katika Antiquities ya Yosefo, kama Max Krenkel (1894) na Richard Pervo (2006) walivyosema. Kwa mtazamo huo, kufanana huko kunaonyesha chanzo cha Luka, si uthibitisho wa kujitegemea. Steve Mason (1992) anasema inaelekea Luka alijua kazi za Yosefo, ingawa anakubali kwamba haiwezi kuthibitishwa." }, { "label": "Ujuzi wa mapema wa kujitegemea", "statement": "Colin Hemer (1989) na wengine wanaamini kwamba maelezo ya Matendo kuhusu maafisa wa dola ya Rumi na watawala tegemezi yanaonyesha ujuzi wa mapema wa kujitegemea. Kwa mtazamo huu, Agripa II na Bernike walikuwa watu maarufu ambao kuonekana kwao pamoja kungejulikana sana katika Uyahudi na Shamu, kwa hiyo Luka hakuhitaji chanzo cha maandishi ili kuwataja kwa usahihi." }, { "label": "Uvumi kama kashfa au kama imani iliyoenea", "statement": "Yosefo anaiweka tuhuma kama habari ambayo Bernike alijaribu kuikanusha, na mstari wa Juvenal ni shambulizi la maneno, kwa hiyo wasomaji wengi huuchukulia uvumi huo kama porojo. Wengine wanaona kwamba Yosefo, aliyekuwa na mtazamo mzuri kwa Agripa II, bado alichagua kuurekodi, na anasema Bernike alimwacha Polemo, kama ilivyosemekana, akiwa na nia chafu (Ant. 20.146). Wanaelewa hili kumaanisha kwamba imani hiyo ilikuwa imeenea, ingawa bado haijathibitishwa." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-josephus-agrippa-bernice" }, { "id": "claudius-expulsion", "kind": "literary-non-christian", "dateFrom": 119, "dateTo": 122, "corpusReferences": [], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 18:1-3", "Acts 18:12-17", "Romans 16:3-5", "Acts 28:17" ], "personIds": [ "person.claudius", "person.aquila", "person.priscilla", "person.paul" ], "placeIds": [ "place.rome", "place.corinth" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "suetonius-rolfe", "author": "Suetonius", "work": "Life of Claudius (Lives of the Caesars)", "locator": "Claud. 25.4", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Suetonius/12Caesars/Claudius*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Since the Jews constantly made disturbances at the instigation of Chrestus, he expelled them from Rome.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "J. C. Rolfe", "year": "1914" }, { "sourceKey": "suetonius-rolfe", "author": "J. C. Rolfe", "work": "Loeb Suetonius, editor's note 75 on Claud. 25.4", "locator": "Claud. 25.4, note 75", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Suetonius/12Caesars/Claudius*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Another form of Christus; see Tert. Apol. 3 (at the end). It is uncertain whether Suetonius is guilty of an error in chronology or is referring to some Jew of that name. The former seems probable because of the absence of quodam.", "role": "early-study", "year": "1914" }, { "sourceKey": "suetonius-rolfe", "author": "Suetonius", "work": "Divus Claudius (Latin text as printed in the Loeb Classical Library, 1913)", "locator": "Claud. 25.4", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/L/Roman/Texts/Suetonius/12Caesars/Claudius*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Iudaeos impulsore Chresto assidue tumultuantis Roma expulit.", "role": "edition", "year": "1913" }, { "sourceKey": "suetonius-rolfe", "author": "J. C. Rolfe", "work": "Suetonius, vol. 1 (Loeb Classical Library), Introduction", "locator": "Introduction, 'The Life and Works of Suetonius'", "url": "https://archive.org/download/suetonius01suet_0/suetonius01suet_0_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Of all these the only work which has come down to us entire, or nearly so, is the Lives of the Caesars, published in 120.", "role": "early-study", "year": "1913" }, { "sourceKey": "suetonius-rolfe", "author": "J. C. Rolfe", "work": "Suetonius, vol. 1 (Loeb Classical Library), Introduction", "locator": "Introduction, 'The Life and Works of Suetonius'", "url": "https://archive.org/download/suetonius01suet_0/suetonius01suet_0_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "probably during the period when his friend and patron Gaius Septicius Clarus was a prefect of the praetorian guard (119 to 121).", "role": "early-study", "year": "1913" }, { "sourceKey": "suetonius-rolfe", "author": "Suetonius", "work": "Life of Nero (Lives of the Caesars)", "locator": "Nero 16.2", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Suetonius/12Caesars/Nero*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Punishment was inflicted on the Christians, a class of men given to a new and mischievous superstition.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "J. C. Rolfe", "year": "1914" }, { "sourceKey": "dio-cassius-cary", "author": "Cassius Dio", "work": "Roman History", "locator": "60.6.6", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Cassius_Dio/60*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "he did not drive them out, but ordered them, while continuing their traditional mode of life, not to hold meetings.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Earnest Cary", "year": "1924" }, { "sourceKey": "orosius-latin", "author": "Paulus Orosius", "work": "Historiarum adversum paganos libri VII", "locator": "7.6.15", "url": "https://www.thelatinlibrary.com/orosius/orosius7.shtml", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Anno eiusdem nono expulsos per Claudium urbe Iudaeos Iosephus refert. sed me magis Suetonius mouet, qui ait hoc modo: Claudius Iudaeos inpulsore Christo adsidue tumultuantes Roma expulit", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "orosius-latin", "author": "Paulus Orosius", "work": "Historiarum adversum paganos libri VII", "locator": "7.6.16", "url": "https://www.thelatinlibrary.com/orosius/orosius7.shtml", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "quod, utrum contra Christum tumultuantes Iudaeos coherceri et conprimi iusserit, an etiam Christianos simul uelut cognatae religionis homines uoluerit expelli, nequaquam discernitur.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "locator": "Ant. 18.81-84 (Whiston 18.3.5)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=18:whiston%20chapter=3:whiston%20section=5", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "ordered all the Jews to be banished out of Rome; at which time the consuls listed four thousand men out of them, and sent them to the island Sardinia", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737 (Perseus text: Auburn and Buffalo, 1895)" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Annals", "locator": "Ann. 15.44", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0078:book=15:chapter=44", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Christus, from whom the name had its origin, suffered the extreme penalty during the reign of Tiberius at the hands of one of our procurators, Pontius Pilatus", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb", "year": "1942 (Random House reprint, as given by Perseus)" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Gerd Lüdemann", "work": "Paul, Apostle to the Gentiles: Studies in Chronology", "year": "1984 (German original 1980)", "view": "Dates Claudius's edict to AD 41, treating Suetonius's notice and Dio 60.6.6 as one measure and setting aside Orosius's date. On that basis he argues for an early Pauline mission in Greece, including Corinth, before the Jerusalem meeting, and reads Acts 18 as combining material from more than one visit." }, { "author": "Rainer Riesner", "work": "Paul's Early Period: Chronology, Mission Strategy, Theology", "year": "1998 (German original 1994)", "view": "Defends AD 49 for the expulsion and reads Chrestus as Christ. Treats Dio's ban on meetings as an earlier, separate measure, consistent with Acts 18:2." }, { "author": "H. Dixon Slingerland", "work": "Claudian Policymaking and the Early Imperial Repression of Judaism at Rome", "year": "1997", "view": "Argues that 'Chrestus' is not Christ and that the burden of proof lies with those who identify them. Holds that Claud. 25.4 and Dio 60.6.6 describe different events, and suggests Chrestus may have been someone, perhaps a freedman adviser, who prompted Claudius to act. Reads Claudius's measures as Roman repression of Judaism, not as evidence about the Roman church." }, { "author": "Peter Lampe", "work": "From Paul to Valentinus: Christians at Rome in the First Two Centuries", "year": "2003 (German original 1987)", "view": "Reads Chrestus as Christ and rejects dating the edict to AD 41. Disputes over Jesus within Rome's synagogues led Claudius to expel those involved, not the whole Jewish community." }, { "author": "Robert E. Van Voorst", "work": "Jesus Outside the New Testament: An Introduction to the Ancient Evidence", "year": "2000", "view": "Judges Chrestus most likely an error for Christus, reflecting Suetonius's misunderstanding of disputes about Christ among Roman Jews." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q5129460", "label": "Claudius' expulsion of Jews from Rome" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1411", "label": "Claudius" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q11085604", "label": "Priscilla and Aquila" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q220", "label": "Rome" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "423025", "label": "Roma" } ], "title": "Klaudio kuwafukuza Wayahudi kutoka Rumi (Suetonius, Claudius 25.4)", "summary": "Suetonius, mwandishi wa wasifu wa Kirumi asiye Mkristo, anaripoti kwamba Klaudio aliwafukuza Wayahudi kutoka Rumi kwa sababu waliendelea kusababisha vurugu kwa uchochezi wa Chrestus (Claud. 25.4). Huu ni ushahidi wa kujitegemea wa aina ya amri inayotajwa katika Matendo 18:2. Suetonius hatoi tarehe. Mwaka unaotumiwa sana wa 49 BK unatoka kwa Orosius wa karne ya tano tu, Dio anaripoti marufuku ya mikutano pekee mwaka wa 41 BK, na kama Chrestus humaanisha Kristo bado inabishaniwa.", "dating": "Shahidi mkuu: Lives of the Caesars ya Suetonius, karibu 119-122 BK. Rolfe (1913) anaweka kuchapishwa kwake mwaka wa 120 na kipindi cha Septicius Clarus, ambaye kazi hiyo ilitolewa kwake, akiwa mkuu wa walinzi katika 119-121; dateFrom na dateTo zinaonyesha kipindi hiki cha uandishi. Kipindi cha tukio: hatua za Klaudio za 41 hadi karibu 49 BK. Dio (mwanzoni mwa karne ya 3) anaweka marufuku ya mikutano ya Wayahudi kati ya hatua za mwaka wa kwanza wa Klaudio (41 BK); Orosius (mwanzoni mwa karne ya 5) anaweka kufukuzwa katika mwaka wa tisa wa Klaudio (karibu 49 BK).", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Suetonius (Claud. 25.4), mwandishi wa wasifu wa Kirumi asiye Mkristo, anaripoti kwamba Klaudio aliwafukuza Wayahudi kutoka Rumi kwa sababu waliendelea kufanya ghasia kwa uchochezi wa mtu aliyeitwa Chrestus. Huu ni ushahidi wa kujitegemea wa kufukuzwa chini ya Klaudio, kama kule ambako Matendo 18:2 inatoa kuwa sababu ya Akila na Prisila kuwa wametoka Italia hivi karibuni. Inaelekea ilikuwa amri ileile, lakini hilo linategemea tarehe inayobishaniwa.", "Dio Cassius (60.6.6) anaorodhesha hatua kuhusu Wayahudi kati ya hatua za mwaka wa kwanza wa Klaudio (41 BK). Anasema walikuwa wengi mno kuweza kuzuiwa kuingia mjini bila vurugu, kwa hiyo Klaudio hakuwafukuza, bali aliwaruhusu kuendelea na maisha yao ya kimapokeo na kuwakataza kufanya mikutano. Kama hii ni hatua ileile iliyoripotiwa kwa namna tofauti au hatua tofauti bado inajadiliwa.", "Orosius (Hist. adv. pag. 7.6.15) anatoa tarehe pekee iliyo wazi: mwaka wa tisa wa Klaudio, karibu 49 BK. Anasema habari hiyo imetoka kwa Yosefo, lakini hakuna kifungu kama hicho kinachojulikana katika kazi za Yosefo zilizohifadhiwa. Kazi hizo zinaeleza kufukuzwa kwa Wayahudi kutoka Rumi kulikotangulia chini ya Tiberius (Ant. 18.81-84).", "Waandishi wa kale walichanganya tahajia hizo mbili. Orosius anamnukuu Suetonius kwa maneno »inpulsore Christo« na kuyasoma kama Kristo, ingawa anasema hawezi kujua kama Klaudio alimaanisha Wayahudi waliofanya ghasia dhidi ya Kristo au pia Wakristo (7.6.16). Tanbihi ya Rolfe inaita Chrestus aina nyingine ya Christus na kuelekeza kwenye malalamiko ya Tertullian kuhusu matamshi ya kipagani »Chrestianus« (Apol. 3). Hii inafanya tafsiri inayomhusisha Kristo iwe ya kuaminika, lakini haiithibitishi." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Haionyeshi kwamba Chrestus alikuwa Yesu, au kwamba ghasia zilikuwa mabishano kuhusu mahubiri ya Kikristo. Suetonius hasemi lolote kati ya hayo. Maandishi ya Kilatini yaliyochapishwa katika Loeb yanasema »Chresto«, na Suetonius anatumia »Christiani« kwa kundi lililoadhibiwa chini ya Nero (Nero 16.2).", "Haionyeshi Wayahudi wangapi waliondoka Rumi, au kwa muda gani. Matendo inaeleza amri iliyowahusu Wayahudi wote, ilhali taarifa ya Dio ya 41 BK inasema Klaudio hakuwafukuza. Priska na Akila (ikiwa Warumi 16 ilielekezwa Rumi) na viongozi wa Kiyahudi wa Rumi wako mjini tena baadaye (Warumi 16:3–5; Matendo 28:17).", "Haitoi tarehe ya uhakika ya 49 BK. Suetonius hatoi tarehe na anaweka taarifa hiyo kati ya hatua zisizohusiana, na chanzo ambacho Orosius anataja hakiwezi kukaguliwa." ], "debate": "Wanahistoria wengi huchukulia Chrestus kuwa tahajia ya Kirumi iliyokosewa ya Christus. Kwa mtazamo huo, kuhubiri Yesu kama Masihi kulisababisha mizozo katika masinagogi ya Rumi, na waliohusika wakafukuzwa. Matendo haisemi kama Akila na Prisila tayari walikuwa waumini. Wengine, kama Slingerland, wanaona kwamba Chrestus lilikuwa jina la mtu lililotumika sana, kwamba Suetonius anajua neno »Christiani«, na kwamba Tacitus, aliyeandika karibu wakati huohuo, anatumia umbo sahihi »Christus« (Ann. 15.44). Kwa mtazamo huo, Chrestus alikuwa mtu mwingine: mchochezi wa mahali hapo, au mtu aliyemshawishi Klaudio kuchukua hatua. Kuhusu tarehe, wengi hukubali 49 BK ya Orosius na kuchukulia marufuku ya mikutano ya Dio kama hatua ya awali mwaka wa 41. Wengine wanafikiri taarifa hizo mbili zinaeleza tukio moja na hawaamini rejeo la Orosius kwa Yosefo, ambalo haliwezi kukaguliwa.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Chrestus kama mtu mwingine tofauti na Kristo", "statement": "Huenda Suetonius anamaanisha mtu aliyeitwa Chrestus kweli. Tanbihi ya Rolfe ya 1914 ilitaja uwezekano huu wa Myahudi fulani mwenye jina hilo, ingawa aliona tafsiri inayomhusisha Kristo kuwa yenye uwezekano mkubwa zaidi. H. Dixon Slingerland (1997) anakataa tafsiri inayomhusisha Kristo na kupendekeza kwamba Chrestus alikuwa mtu, labda mshauri aliyekuwa mtumwa aliyeachwa huru, aliyemshawishi Klaudio kuchukua hatua. Vyovyote vile, kifungu kinathibitisha kufukuzwa chini ya Klaudio, lakini hakisemi chochote kuhusu waumini wa Rumi." }, { "label": "Hatua moja mwaka wa 41 BK", "statement": "Suetonius na Dio wanaeleza hatua moja mwanzoni mwa utawala wa Klaudio, na mwaka wa 49 wa Orosius si wa kutegemewa. Ikiwa ndivyo, kuwasili karibuni kwa Akila na Prisila huko Korintho kunahitaji ama ziara ya mapema zaidi ya Paulo huko, kama katika mpangilio wa matukio wa Lüdemann, au usomaji usio mkali sana wa Matendo 18:1–3." }, { "label": "Hatua mbili: 41 BK na karibu 49 BK", "statement": "Dio anaeleza marufuku ya kwanza ya mikutano ya Wayahudi mwaka wa 41. Suetonius, Matendo na Orosius wanaeleza kufukuzwa kwa baadaye karibu mwaka wa 49, huenda kukiwa kwa wale tu waliohusika katika vurugu. Hii inaendana na Paulo kufika Korintho muda mfupi kabla ya kipindi cha Galio kama liwali (Matendo 18:12–17)." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-claudius-expulsion" }, { "id": "tacitus-neronian-persecution", "kind": "literary-non-christian", "dateFrom": 110, "dateTo": 120, "corpusReferences": [], "confidence": "medium-high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 28:15", "Acts 28:30-31", "Romans 1:7-8" ], "personIds": [ "person.nero", "person.paul", "person.peter" ], "placeIds": [ "place.rome", "place.judea" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Annals", "locator": "Ann. 15.44", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0078:book=15:chapter=44", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Consequently, to get rid of the report, Nero fastened the guilt and inflicted the most exquisite tortures on a class hated for their abominations, called Christians by the populace.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb", "year": "1942 (Random House reprint, as given by Perseus)" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Annals", "locator": "Ann. 15.38", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0078:book=15:chapter=38", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "A disaster followed, whether accidental or treacherously contrived by the emperor, is uncertain, as authors have given both accounts", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb", "year": "1942 (Random House reprint, as given by Perseus)" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Annals", "locator": "Ann. 15.41", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0078:book=15:chapter=41", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Some persons observed that the beginning of this conflagration was on the 19th of July, the day on which the Senones captured and fired Rome.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb", "year": "1942 (Random House reprint, as given by Perseus)" }, { "sourceKey": "suetonius-rolfe", "author": "Suetonius", "work": "Lives of the Caesars: Nero", "locator": "Nero 16.2", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Suetonius/12Caesars/Nero*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Punishment was inflicted on the Christians, a class of men given to a new and mischievous superstition.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "J. C. Rolfe", "year": "1914" }, { "sourceKey": "dio-cassius-cary", "author": "Cassius Dio", "work": "Roman History (epitome of Book 62)", "locator": "62.16.1 (fire narrative 62.16-18; Christians not mentioned)", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Cassius_Dio/62*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "After this Nero set his heart on accomplishing what had doubtless always been his desire, namely to make an end of the whole city and realm during his lifetime.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Earnest Cary", "year": "1925" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "Clement of Rome (traditional attribution)", "work": "1 Clement", "locator": "1 Clem. 5.5-6", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/1clement-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "when he had borne his testimony before the rulers, so he departed from the world and went unto the holy place", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius (quoting Tertullian)", "work": "Church History", "locator": "HE 2.25.4", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Examine your records. There you will find that Nero was the first that persecuted this doctrine", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "locator": "HE 2.25.5", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "It is, therefore, recorded that Paul was beheaded in Rome itself, and that Peter likewise was crucified under Nero.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "locator": "HE 2.22.2", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Thus after he had made his defense it is said that the apostle was sent again upon the ministry of preaching, and that upon coming to the same city a second time he suffered martyrdom.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-prescription-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "The Prescription against Heretics", "locator": "Prescr. 36 (of the church at Rome)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0311.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "How happy is its church, on which apostles poured forth all their doctrine along with their blood! Where Peter endures a passion like his Lord's! Where Paul wins his crown in a death like John's", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Brent D. Shaw", "work": "The Myth of the Neronian Persecution (Journal of Roman Studies 105)", "year": "2015", "view": "Contests the conventional picture of a state persecution under Nero, including the mass execution after the fire and the deaths of Peter and Paul. Holds that Annals 15.44 is probably genuine Tacitus but reflects ideas current when Tacitus wrote, not the realities of the 60s." }, { "author": "Christopher P. Jones", "work": "The Historicity of the Neronian Persecution: A Response to Brent Shaw (New Testament Studies 63)", "year": "2017", "view": "Holds that there are no grounds for doubting Tacitus's report of the persecution. Notes that later sources dating the deaths of Peter and Paul to Nero's reign have no bearing on whether Tacitus's account is true." }, { "author": "Richard Carrier", "work": "The Prospect of a Christian Interpolation in Tacitus, Annals 15.44 (Vigiliae Christianae 68)", "year": "2014", "view": "Argues that the arguments for a late interpolation have no strong rebuttal, so the sentence referring to Christ should be considered suspect." }, { "author": "Henry Furneaux, rev. H. F. Pelham and C. D. Fisher", "work": "The Annals of Tacitus, vol. 2: Books XI-XVI (Oxford, 2nd ed.)", "year": "1907", "view": "Defends the passage as genuine on grounds of its Tacitean style and its partial transcription by Sulpicius Severus, while calling it a narrative necessarily at second hand. Judges that Suetonius follows a different authority, that Tertullian shows no knowledge of the passage, and that only Sulpicius Severus unmistakably follows Tacitus's narrative. Describes the second Medicean manuscript (latter half of the 11th century, Laurentian Library) as containing all that survives of Books 11-16." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q564358", "label": "Annals (Tacitus)" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q7673903", "label": "Tacitus on Christ" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q215231", "label": "Great Fire of Rome" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q2161", "label": "Tacitus" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1413", "label": "Nero" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "423025", "label": "Roma" } ], "title": "Tacitus kuhusu Nero kuwaadhibu Wakristo baada ya moto wa Rumi (Annals 15.44)", "summary": "Annals 15.44 ya Tacitus, iliyoandikwa mwanzoni mwa karne ya pili, ndiyo maelezo pekee ya kina ya kujitegemea kuhusu Nero kuwalaumu Wakristo wa Rumi kwa moto wa Julai 64 na kuwaua wengi wao; toleo la baadaye la Sulpicius Severus linaitegemea. Inaashiria kundi kubwa kiasi la Wakristo katika Rumi ya Warumi na Matendo 28. Haitaji mtume yeyote wala kusema chochote kuhusu kifo cha Paulo, na wanahistoria wachache wanasema inaonyesha zaidi wakati wa Tacitus mwenyewe kuliko miaka ya 60.", "dating": "Iliandikwa mwanzoni mwa karne ya 2 BK: Annals huwekwa kwa kawaida karibu 110-120, na Furneaux (1907) anaweka kukamilika kwake miaka hamsini kamili baada ya mateso hayo. Inaripoti matukio yaliyofuata moto wa 19 Julai 64 BK (Ann. 15.41).", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi. Annals 11–16 zimehifadhiwa kupitia hati ya pili ya Medicean (nusu ya mwisho ya karne ya 11), sasa katika Laurentian Library, Florence (Furneaux 1907)", "establishes": [ "Tacitus alikuwa seneta na mwanahistoria wa Kirumi, na aliuchukia mkondo huo. Anaripoti kwamba baada ya moto wa Julai 64, Nero alihamishia lawama kwa watu ambao umati uliwaita Wakristo, na kwamba idadi kubwa ilipatikana na hatia na kuuawa katika maonyesho kwenye bustani za Nero (Ann. 15.44; tarehe ya moto iko katika 15.41).", "Kwa maelezo ya Tacitus, kufikia 64 Wakristo wa Rumi walikuwa wengi na walionekana kiasi cha kuweza kutengwa kama kundi. Hii inaendana na jumuiya iliyoimarika ya waumini wa Rumi inayodokezwa katika Warumi 1:7–8, na ambayo wanachama wake wanatoka kumpokea Paulo katika Matendo 28:15.", "Suetonius anaorodhesha kando adhabu ya Wakristo kati ya hatua za Nero za usalama wa umma (Nero 16.2). Furneaux aliona kwamba anafuata chanzo tofauti; haihusishi adhabu hiyo na moto. Kwa hiyo hatua dhidi ya Wakristo katika Rumi wakati wa Nero hazitegemei Tacitus pekee, lakini uhusiano wake na moto unamtegemea: maelezo ya Dio kuhusu moto hayawataji Wakristo (Dio 62.16-18).", "Kifungu kinatoa mazingira yasiyo ya Kikristo kwa mapokeo ya Kikristo kwamba Paulo alikufa Rumi chini ya Nero. 1 Clement 5 (kwa kawaida karibu 96 BK) inasema Paulo alitoa ushahidi mbele ya watawala na kuondoka duniani, bila kumtaja Nero. Tertullian anamtaja Nero kama mtesaji wa kwanza na kuweka kifo cha Paulo huko Rumi; Eusebius anakitia katika utawala wa Nero (HE 2.25.4-5; Prescr. 36). Mapokeo hayo yalikua kwa sehemu kubwa bila Tacitus." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Haimtaji Paulo, Petro wala Mkristo yeyote binafsi, kwa hiyo si ushahidi kwamba Paulo alikufa katika hatua za kulipiza kisasi za 64. Uhusiano kati ya Nero na kifo cha Paulo unatoka kwa waandishi Wakristo. Kati ya waandishi Wakristo wa kale, ni Sulpicius Severus pekee (karibu 400 BK) anayefuata wazi simulizi la Tacitus (Furneaux 1907), na anaendelea kuweka kuhukumiwa kwa Paulo na Petro katika kipindi hicho (Chron. 2.29).", "Haibainishi mwaka, mahali ndani ya Rumi au namna ya kifo cha Paulo. Tertullian anadokeza kukatwa kichwa, kwa kusema kifo kama cha Yohana, na Eusebius anaripoti hivyo; Tacitus hasemi chochote kuhusu hilo. Kama Paulo aliachiliwa baada ya kuzuiliwa kwa Matendo 28 ni swali tofauti.", "Haionyeshi kwamba Wakristo waliwasha moto, au kwamba Nero aliuwasha: Tacitus anasema chanzo chake hakikuwa na uhakika (Ann. 15.38). Wala haionyeshi kwamba mwaka wa 64 kulikuwa na sheria ya jumla dhidi ya Wakristo au mateso katika dola nzima." ], "debate": "Wanahistoria wengi hukubali Annals 15.44 kuwa kazi halisi ya Tacitus. Brent Shaw (2015) anafikiri huenda ni halisi, lakini anasema inaonyesha mawazo ya wakati wa Tacitus mwenyewe. Anapinga mauaji ya umati yaliyoamriwa na Nero na vifo vya Petro na Paulo chini ya Nero. Christopher P. Jones (2017) anajibu kwamba hakuna msingi wa kutilia shaka taarifa ya Tacitus. Richard Carrier (2014) anasema sentensi inayomtaja Christus inapaswa kuchukuliwa kama nyongeza ya baadaye inayoshukiwa. Swali jingine lililo wazi ni kama Paulo alikufa katika hatua za kulipiza kisasi za 64, kabla yake, au baadaye katika utawala wa Nero baada ya kuachiliwa.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Halisi lakini ina mawazo ya wakati wa baadaye (Shaw)", "statement": "Huenda sura ni kazi ya Tacitus mwenyewe, lakini uhusiano wake kati ya Wakristo na moto unaonyesha dhana za mwanzoni mwa karne ya pili. Kwa mtazamo huu, Nero hakuamuru mauaji ya umati ya Wakristo mwaka wa 64, na kifungu hakithibitishi kuuawa kwa Petro na Paulo kama wafia imani chini ya Nero." }, { "label": "Sentensi kuhusu Christus inayoshukiwa (Carrier)", "statement": "Sentensi inayomtambulisha Christus kuwa aliuawa chini ya Pontio Pilato huenda ni nyongeza ya baadaye ya Kikristo na inapaswa kutiliwa shaka. Pingamizi linahusu sentensi hiyo, si taarifa ya adhabu za Nero yenyewe." }, { "label": "Kifo cha Paulo bila uhusiano na moto", "statement": "Huenda Paulo alikufa kabla ya 64, mwishoni mwa miaka miwili ya kuzuiliwa ya Matendo 28:30–31. Au huenda alikufa baadaye katika utawala wa Nero, baada ya kuachiliwa na kufungwa tena na dola ya Rumi, jambo ambalo Eusebius anaripoti kama mapokeo (»inasemekana«, HE 2.22.2). Kwa mtazamo wowote, Tacitus anatoa mazingira ya jumla, si tukio lenyewe." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-tacitus-neronian-persecution" }, { "id": "polycarp-paul", "kind": "literary-early-christian", "dateFrom": 110, "dateTo": 140, "corpusReferences": [ "CPG 1040" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 16:11-40", "Acts 2:24", "Philippians 1:5", "Philippians 2:16", "2 Thessalonians 1:4", "1 Corinthians 6:2", "1 Corinthians 6:9-10", "Galatians 4:26", "Galatians 6:7", "Ephesians 2:8-9", "Ephesians 4:26", "1 Timothy 2:1-2", "1 Timothy 6:7-10", "2 Timothy 4:10" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul" ], "placeIds": [ "place.philippi" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-lightfoot", "author": "Polycarp of Smyrna", "work": "Letter to the Philippians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "locator": "Phil. 3.2", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/polycarp-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "able to follow the wisdom of the blessed and glorious Paul, who when he came among you taught face to face with the men of that day the word which concerneth truth carefully and surely; who also, when he was absent, wrote a letter unto you", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-lightfoot", "author": "Polycarp of Smyrna", "work": "Letter to the Philippians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "locator": "Phil. 9.1", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/polycarp-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "which also ye saw with your own eyes in the blessed Ignatius and Zosimus and Rufus, yea and in others also who came from among yourselves, as well as in Paul himself and the rest of the Apostles", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-lightfoot", "author": "Polycarp of Smyrna", "work": "Letter to the Philippians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "locator": "Phil. 9.2", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/polycarp-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "being persuaded that all these ran not in vain but in faith and righteousness, and that they are in their due place in the presence of the Lord, with whom also they suffered.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-lightfoot", "author": "Polycarp of Smyrna", "work": "Letter to the Philippians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "locator": "Phil. 11.2", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/polycarp-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "as Paul teacheth?", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-lightfoot", "author": "Polycarp of Smyrna", "work": "Letter to the Philippians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "locator": "Phil. 11.3", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/polycarp-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "among whom the blessed Paul labored, who were his letters in the beginning. For he boasteth of you in all those churches which alone at that time knew God; for we knew Him not as yet.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-lightfoot", "author": "Polycarp of Smyrna", "work": "Letter to the Philippians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "locator": "Phil. 12.1", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/polycarp-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "For I am persuaded that ye are well trained in the sacred writings, and nothing is hidden from you. But to myself this is not granted. Only, as it is said in these scriptures,", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-lightfoot", "author": "Polycarp of Smyrna", "work": "Letter to the Philippians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "locator": "Phil. 13.2", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/polycarp-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Moreover concerning Ignatius himself and those that were with him, if ye have any sure tidings, certify us.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-anf", "author": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson (translators' notes)", "work": "Ante-Nicene Fathers, vol. 1: The Epistle of Polycarp to the Philippians", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson", "year": "1885", "locator": "ch. 3, note 358", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.iv.ii.iii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The form is plural, but one Epistle is probably meant.", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-anf", "author": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson (translators' notes)", "work": "Ante-Nicene Fathers, vol. 1: The Epistle of Polycarp to the Philippians", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson", "year": "1885", "locator": "ch. 1, note 341", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.iv.ii.i.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Acts ii. 24. Literally, “having loosed the pains of Hades.”", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-anf", "author": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson (translators' notes)", "work": "Ante-Nicene Fathers, vol. 1: The Epistle of Polycarp to the Philippians", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson", "year": "1885", "locator": "ch. 10, note 391", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.iv.ii.x.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "This and the two following chapters are preserved only in a Latin version.", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-anf", "author": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson (translators' notes)", "work": "Ante-Nicene Fathers, vol. 1: The Epistle of Polycarp to the Philippians", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson", "year": "1885", "locator": "ch. 11, note 401", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.iv.ii.xi.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Some read, “named;” comp. Phil. i. 5.", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-anf", "author": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson (translators' notes)", "work": "Ante-Nicene Fathers, vol. 1: The Epistle of Polycarp to the Philippians", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson", "year": "1885", "locator": "ch. 13, note 414", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.iv.ii.xiii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Henceforth, to the end, we have only the Latin version.", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-anf", "author": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson (translators' notes)", "work": "Ante-Nicene Fathers, vol. 1: The Epistle of Polycarp to the Philippians", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson", "year": "1885", "locator": "ch. 13, note 415", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.iv.ii.xiii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The Latin version reads “are,” which has been corrected as above.", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-anf", "author": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson (translators' notes)", "work": "Ante-Nicene Fathers, vol. 1: The Epistle of Polycarp to the Philippians", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson", "year": "1885", "locator": "ch. 13, note 416", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.iv.ii.xiii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Polycarp was aware of the death of Ignatius (chap. ix.), but was as yet apparently ignorant of the circumstances attending it.", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-anf", "author": "Ante-Nicene Fathers translators", "work": "Ante-Nicene Fathers, vol. 1: Introductory Note to the Epistle of Polycarp to the Philippians", "year": "1885", "locator": "Introductory Note (original Introductory Notice), on chapter 13", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.iv.i.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "While there is no ground for supposing, as some have done, that the whole Epistle is spurious, there seems considerable force in the arguments by which many others have sought to prove chap. xiii. to be an interpolation.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-anf", "author": "Ante-Nicene Fathers translators", "work": "Ante-Nicene Fathers, vol. 1: Introductory Note to the Epistle of Polycarp to the Philippians", "year": "1885", "locator": "Introductory Note (original Introductory Notice), on the date", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.iv.i.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "We shall not, however, probably be far wrong if we fix it about the middle of the second century.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 3.36.13", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250103.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Polycarp also mentions these letters in the epistle to the Philippians which is ascribed to him.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 3.36.15", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250103.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "For they comprise faith and patience, and every kind of edification that pertains to our Lord. So much concerning Ignatius.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 4.14.9", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250104.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But Polycarp, in his above-mentioned epistle to the Philippians, which is still extant, has made use of certain testimonies drawn from the First Epistle of Peter.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus of Lyons", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "AH 3.3.4 (Polycarp's letter)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0103303.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "There is also a very powerful Epistle of Polycarp written to the Philippians, from which those who choose to do so, and are anxious about their salvation, can learn the character of his faith, and the preaching of the truth.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus of Lyons", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "AH 3.3.4 (Polycarp and Marcion)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0103303.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And Polycarp himself replied to Marcion, who met him on one occasion, and said, Do you know me? I do know you, the first-born of Satan.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata item: Epistle of Polycarp to the Philippians", "locator": "Q914111 (P7988 Clavis Patrum Graecorum ID 1040)", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q914111.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "pleiades", "work": "Pleiades place record: Krenides/Philippi/Col. Augusta Iulia Philippensis", "locator": "501482", "url": "https://pleiades.stoa.org/places/501482/json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "J. B. Lightfoot", "work": "The Apostolic Fathers, Part II: S. Ignatius, S. Polycarp", "year": "1885", "view": "Defended the authenticity and integrity of Polycarp's letter as a single letter written soon after Ignatius passed through Smyrna and Philippi, and used it as key external evidence for the Ignatian letters." }, { "author": "P. N. Harrison", "work": "Polycarp's Two Epistles to the Philippians", "year": "1936", "view": "Influential partition theory: chapter 13 (with 14) is an early covering note sent with Ignatius's letters, and chapters 1–12 are a separate, later letter of about 135." }, { "author": "Hans von Campenhausen", "work": "Polykarp von Smyrna und die Pastoralbriefe", "year": "1951", "view": "Proposed that Polycarp or his circle composed the Pastoral Epistles, a minority view that would explain the 1 Timothy parallels as common origin rather than reception." }, { "author": "Kenneth Berding", "work": "Polycarp of Smyrna's View of the Authorship of 1 and 2 Timothy (Vigiliae Christianae)", "year": "1999", "view": "Argues that because allusions to 1 and 2 Timothy follow Polycarp's explicit references to Paul, Polycarp probably regarded those letters as Paul's." }, { "author": "Kenneth Berding", "work": "Polycarp and Paul: An Analysis of Their Literary and Theological Relationship in Light of Polycarp's Use of Biblical and Extra-Biblical Literature", "year": "2002", "view": "Finds Polycarp heavily indebted to the Pauline letters, with Pauline allusions clustering near his mentions of Paul, and argues he knew most of the Pauline corpus, including the Pastorals." }, { "author": "Paul Hartog", "work": "Polycarp and the New Testament: The Occasion, Rhetoric, Theme, and Unity of the Epistle to the Philippians and Its Allusions to New Testament Literature", "year": "2002", "view": "Defends the unity of the letter against the two-letter theory and assesses its allusions to New Testament writings." }, { "author": "Michael W. Holmes", "work": "Polycarp's Letter to the Philippians and the Writings that Later Formed the New Testament, in A. F. Gregory and C. M. Tuckett (eds.), The Reception of the New Testament in the Apostolic Fathers", "year": "2005", "view": "Grades each proposed parallel by probability instead of counting every verbal echo, separating very likely uses of Pauline letters from merely possible ones." }, { "author": "Timothy D. Barnes", "work": "The Date of Ignatius (Expository Times)", "year": "2008", "view": "Argues that Ignatius's letters belong to the 140s rather than Trajan's reign. If accepted, this would also move the date of Polycarp's letter, which is tied to Ignatius." }, { "author": "Kirsopp Lake", "work": "The Apostolic Fathers, vol. 1 (Loeb Classical Library)", "year": "1912", "view": "Edition and translation that renders the plural of 3.2 as letters and describes the textual basis: defective Greek manuscripts, Eusebius's quotations and the Latin version. Named here as further reading; not cited as a source." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q914111", "label": "Epistle of Polycarp to the Philippians" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q192371", "label": "Polycarp" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "501482", "label": "Krenides/Philippi/Col. Augusta Iulia Philippensis" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "550893", "label": "Smyrna/Eurydikeia" } ], "title": "Letter to the Philippians ya Polykarp kuhusu Paulo na barua zake", "summary": "Barua ya Polykarp wa Smyrna kwa kanisa la Filipi (karibu 110–140 BK) inakumbuka kwamba Paulo alifundisha huko mwenyewe na baadaye kuwaandikia (3.2; 11.3). Inamweka Paulo kati ya mitume walioteseka (9.1–2), inamhusisha na fundisho linalopatikana katika 1 Wakorintho, na ina mwangwi wa Waefeso na 1 Timotheo, kwa hiyo barua na kumbukumbu hizi zilikuwa zikitumika mapema. Haiamui nani aliandika Waefeso au 1 Timotheo, wala haiongezi matukio katika Matendo.", "dating": "Karibu 110–140 BK. Kwa kawaida huwekwa muda mfupi baada ya Ignatius kupita Smyrna na Filipi njiani kwenda Rumi; kwa nadharia ya Harrison ya barua mbili, sura 1–12 ni za karibu 135. Taarifa ya watafsiri katika Ante-Nicene Fathers iliweka barua karibu na katikati ya karne ya pili, na wachache wanaofuata tarehe ya miaka ya 140 kwa Ignatius (Barnes) wangeiweka baadaye.", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Polykarp anawaambia watu wa Filipi kwamba Paulo alifundisha kati yao mwenyewe, aliwaandikia alipokuwa mbali na alifanya kazi kati yao (3.2; 11.3). Hii ni kumbukumbu ya kanisa ya mwanzoni mwa karne ya pili inayoendana na Matendo 16 na Wafilipi ya Paulo.", "Anasema Paulo ndiye anayefundisha jambo linalopatikana katika 1 Wakorintho 6:2 (11.2). Maneno yake yanafanana sana na 1 Timotheo 6:7 na 6:10 (4.1), Waefeso 2:8–9 (1.3) na Waefeso 4:26 (12.1). Kwa hiyo kuna uwezekano mkubwa sana kwamba maneno ya Waefeso yalijulikana Smyrna alipoandika, na inaelekea maneno ya 1 Timotheo yalijulikana pia.", "Maneno mengine yanafanana na Wagalatia 4:26 (3.3), Wagalatia 6:7 (5.1), 1 Wakorintho 6:9–10 (5.3), Wafilipi 2:16 na 2 Timotheo 4:10 (9.2), na 1 Timotheo 2:1–2 (12.3). Haya ni malinganisho ya wahariri kuhusu matumizi ya maneno; yanaonyesha kuzoea lugha ya Paulo, si barua ambazo Polykarp alikuwa nazo au alivyozichukulia.", "Anamweka Paulo mwenyewe na mitume wengine pamoja na Ignatius na waumini wa Filipi kama mifano ya uvumilivu, watu walioteseka pamoja na Bwana na sasa wako pamoja naye (9.1–2).", "Barua imethibitishwa mapema. Irenaeus anaipendekeza kufikia karibu 180 (Against Heresies 3.3.4). Eusebius baadaye ananukuu 9.1–2 na 13.1–2 kwa Kigiriki, akisimama kabla ya ombi la habari za Ignatius, na kutaja matumizi yake ya 1 Petro (Church History 3.36.13–15; 4.14.9)." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Polykarp hataji barua yoyote kwa kichwa chake wala kuweka jina la mwandishi kwenye maneno ya 1 Timotheo au Waefeso. Kufanana huko kunaonyesha kwamba maneno yalikuwa yakitumika, si kwamba Paulo aliandika barua hizo.", "Haiongezi maelezo ya kujitegemea kuhusu kazi ya Paulo huko Filipi au kuhusu kifo chake. 9.2 inasema mitume waliteseka na wako pamoja na Bwana, lakini haisemi namna, wakati au mahali Paulo alipokufa.", "Wingi wa Kigiriki uliotafsiriwa kama barua moja katika 3.2 hauthibitishi wenyewe kwamba Paulo aliwaandikia watu wa Filipi zaidi ya barua moja.", "Sura 10–12, mwisho wa sura 13 na sura 14 zimehifadhiwa kwa Kilatini tu (Eusebius anahifadhi sura 9 na sehemu kubwa ya sura 13 kwa Kigiriki), kwa hiyo maneno halisi humo, pamoja na kitenzi cha wakati wa sasa katika 13.2 na kuhusishwa na Paulo katika 11.2, hayana uhakika." ], "debate": "Umoja na tarehe: 9.1–2 inamweka Ignatius kati ya walio sasa pamoja na Bwana, lakini 13.2 inaomba habari zake na wale walio pamoja naye. Kwa hiyo P. N. Harrison aligawa maandishi kuwa ujumbe mfupi wa mapema ulioambatana na barua (ch. 13, labda pamoja na 14) na barua ya baadaye ya karibu 135 (chs. 1–12). Lightfoot kabla yake, na Hartog baadaye, wanatetea barua moja iliyoandikwa muda mfupi baada ya safari ya Ignatius. Baadhi ya wakosoaji wa awali badala yake walichukulia ch. 13 kama nyongeza, mtazamo ambao taarifa ya watafsiri wa Ante-Nicene Fathers iliiona kuwa na nguvu. Rejeo: kama wingi katika 3.2 humaanisha barua moja au kadhaa. Utegemezi: kama kufanana na Waefeso na 1 Timotheo ni kukopa maandishi, na kama Polykarp alifikiri barua hizo zilikuwa za Paulo.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Barua mbili (Harrison)", "statement": "P. N. Harrison (1936) alisoma sura 13 kama ujumbe mfupi wa mapema uliotumwa pamoja na barua za Ignatius wakati hatima yake bado haikujulikana; Kilatini cha 13.2 kinatumia wakati wa sasa kuhusu walio pamoja naye. Alisoma sura 1–12 kama barua ya baadaye ya karibu 135, labda ikijibu mafundisho kama ya Marcion, uhusiano ambao wengine wanapinga. Watetezi wa barua moja wanajibu kwamba Polykarp angeweza kujua kuhusu kifo cha Ignatius kabla ya kujua mazingira yake." }, { "label": "Maana ya wingi katika 3.2", "statement": "Wingi wa Kigiriki unaweza kumaanisha barua moja, kama watafsiri wa Ante-Nicene wanavyotaja na kama Lightfoot anavyotafsiri. Unaweza kuonyesha zaidi ya barua moja kwa Filipi, kama baadhi ya nadharia za kugawa Wafilipi ya kanoni zinavyopendekeza. Au unaweza kujumuisha kwa upana barua za Paulo kwa Thesalonike na Korintho, kama tanbihi ya mhariri iliyo kwenye mabano katika toleo hilo inavyodokeza; Paulo kuwasifu watu wa Filipi kati ya makanisa (11.3) kunafanana na 2 Wathesalonike 1:4." }, { "label": "Maneno ya 11.3", "statement": "Kilatini cha 11.3 hakiko wazi. Lightfoot anakitafsiri kuwa watu wa Filipi walikuwa barua za Paulo mwanzoni; watafsiri wa Ante-Nicene wanakitafsiri kuwa walisifiwa mwanzoni mwa barua yake na kulinganisha Wafilipi 1:5. Kwa tafsiri yoyote, kinakumbuka mawasiliano ya Paulo kwa barua na Filipi bila kuongeza taarifa mpya." }, { "label": "Mapokeo au uandishi wa pamoja, si kunukuu", "statement": "Ule usemi wa 4.1 kuhusu kupenda pesa na kutokuja na chochote duniani una mwangwi wa kanuni za maadili zilizokuwa zimeenea zaidi, kwa hiyo baadhi huona utegemezi kwa 1 Timotheo kuwa unaelekea badala ya kuwa wa uhakika. Hans von Campenhausen (1951) alipendekeza kwamba Polykarp au watu wa karibu naye waliandika barua za kichungaji; kufanana huko basi kungeonyesha chanzo cha pamoja badala ya kupokelewa, lakini wasomi wengi hawajaukubali mtazamo huu." }, { "label": "Waefeso iliitwa Maandiko?", "statement": "Katika 12.1, iliyohifadhiwa kwa Kilatini tu, Polykarp anatambulisha maneno ya Zaburi 4:4 na Waefeso 4:26 kwa kusema yanaelezwa katika maandiko hayo. Baadhi wanachukulia hili kama kuipa Waefeso hadhi ya Maandiko. Wengine wanafikiri Polykarp aliamini mistari yote miwili ilitoka Agano la Kale, au kwamba maneno ya mtafsiri hayawezi kubeba hitimisho hilo." }, { "label": "Kujua Matendo?", "statement": "Katika 1.2, maneno ya Polykarp kuhusu Mungu kuondoa maumivu ya kuzimu yanafanana sana na Matendo 2:24, kama watafsiri wa Ante-Nicene walivyotaja. Huenda yanaonyesha kujua Matendo au usemi wa mapema wa pamoja kuhusu ufufuo, kwa hiyo si ushahidi thabiti kwamba Matendo ilikuwa ikisambaa Smyrna." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-polycarp-paul" }, { "id": "first-clement-paul", "kind": "literary-early-christian", "dateFrom": 70, "dateTo": 140, "corpusReferences": [ "CPG 1001", "Gregory-Aland 02 (Codex Alexandrinus), London, British Library, Royal MS 1 D VIII, 5th century; 1 Clement incomplete (a leaf lost near the end)", "Codex Hierosolymitanus 54 (Jerusalem, Holy Sepulchre collection), dated AD 1056, 1 Clement on fols. 51b-70a; formerly no. 456 in the Holy Sepulchre library at Constantinople (Lightfoot 1890)" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "1 Corinthians 1:10-12", "1 Corinthians 3:4-6", "2 Corinthians 11:23-25", "Acts 13:50", "Acts 14:19", "Romans 15:24", "Romans 15:28", "Acts 28:30-31" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.peter", "person.apollos" ], "placeIds": [ "place.rome", "place.corinth" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "Church of Rome (traditionally Clement of Rome)", "work": "First Epistle of Clement to the Corinthians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "year": "1890", "locator": "1 Clem. 5.6", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/lightfoot/pt1vol2/translation1.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "After that he had been seven times in bonds, had been driven into exile, had been stoned, had preached in the East and in the West, he won the noble renown which was the reward of his faith", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "Church of Rome (traditionally Clement of Rome)", "work": "First Epistle of Clement to the Corinthians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "year": "1890", "locator": "1 Clem. 5.7", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/lightfoot/pt1vol2/translation1.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "having taught righteousness unto the whole world and having reached the farthest bounds of the West; and when he had borne his testimony before the rulers, so he departed from the world and went unto the holy place, having been found a notable pattern of patient endurance.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "Church of Rome (traditionally Clement of Rome)", "work": "First Epistle of Clement to the Corinthians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "year": "1890", "locator": "1 Clem. 5.1", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/lightfoot/pt1vol2/translation1.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "let us come to those champions who lived very near to our time. Let us set before us the noble examples which belong to our generation.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "Church of Rome (traditionally Clement of Rome)", "work": "First Epistle of Clement to the Corinthians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "locator": "1 Clem. 5.2", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/1clement-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "By reason of jealousy and envy the greatest and most righteous pillars of the Church were persecuted, and contended even unto death.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "Church of Rome (traditionally Clement of Rome)", "work": "First Epistle of Clement to the Corinthians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "year": "1890", "locator": "1 Clem. 47.1-3", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/lightfoot/pt1vol2/translation1.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Take up the epistle of the blessed Paul the Apostle. What wrote he first unto you in the beginning of the Gospel? Of a truth he charged you in the Spirit concerning himself and Cephas and Apollos, because that even then ye had made parties.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "Church of Rome (traditionally Clement of Rome)", "work": "First Epistle of Clement to the Corinthians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "year": "1890", "locator": "1 Clem. 6.1", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/lightfoot/pt1vol2/translation1.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Unto these men of holy lives was gathered a vast multitude of the elect, who through many indignities and tortures, being the victims of jealousy, set a brave example among ourselves.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "Church of Rome (traditionally Clement of Rome)", "work": "First Epistle of Clement to the Corinthians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "year": "1890", "locator": "1 Clem. 1.1", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/lightfoot/pt1vol2/translation1.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "By reason of the sudden and repeated calamities and reverses which are befalling us, brethren, we consider that we have been somewhat tardy in giving heed to the matters of dispute that have arisen among you", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "Church of Rome (traditionally Clement of Rome)", "work": "First Epistle of Clement to the Corinthians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "year": "1890", "locator": "1 Clem. inscription (salutation)", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/lightfoot/pt1vol2/translation1.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The Church of God which sojourneth in Rome to the Church of God which sojourneth in Corinth", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "J. B. Lightfoot", "work": "The Apostolic Fathers, Part I: S. Clement of Rome, vol. 2", "year": "1890", "locator": "Note on 1 Clem. 5 ('the extreme west'), p. 30", "url": "https://archive.org/stream/apostolicfathers0102clem/apostolicfathers0102clem_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "In the Epistle to the Romans (xv. 24) S. Paul had stated his intention of visiting Spain. From the language of Clement here it appears that this intention was fulfilled.", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "J. B. Lightfoot", "work": "The Apostolic Fathers, Part I: S. Clement of Rome, vol. 2", "year": "1890", "locator": "Note on 1 Clem. 5 ('the extreme west'), p. 31", "url": "https://archive.org/stream/apostolicfathers0102clem/apostolicfathers0102clem_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But it is incredible that a writer living in the metropolis and centre of power and civilization could speak of it as ‘the extreme west,’", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "J. B. Lightfoot", "work": "The Apostolic Fathers, Part I: S. Clement of Rome, vol. 2", "year": "1890", "locator": "Note on 1 Clem. 5 ('seven times'), p. 29", "url": "https://archive.org/stream/apostolicfathers0102clem/apostolicfathers0102clem_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "the imprisonment at Philippi is the only one recorded in the Acts before the date of the Second Epistle to the Corinthians. Clement therefore must have derived his more precise information from some other source.", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "J. B. Lightfoot", "work": "The Apostolic Fathers, Part I: S. Clement of Rome, vol. 1", "year": "1890", "locator": "Part I, vol. 1, p. 27", "url": "https://archive.org/stream/apostolicfathers0101clem/apostolicfathers0101clem_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "the date of this epistle, as determined by internal and external evidence alike, is about A.D. 95 or 96", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "J. B. Lightfoot", "work": "The Apostolic Fathers, Part I: S. Clement of Rome, vol. 1", "year": "1890", "locator": "Part I, vol. 1, p. 118 (Alexandrian MS)", "url": "https://archive.org/stream/apostolicfathers0101clem/apostolicfathers0101clem_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "In addition to this, a leaf is wanting towards the close of the First Epistle, between fol. 167 and fol. 168,", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "J. B. Lightfoot", "work": "The Apostolic Fathers, Part I: S. Clement of Rome, vol. 1", "year": "1890", "locator": "Part I, vol. 1, p. 122 (Constantinople MS)", "url": "https://archive.org/stream/apostolicfathers0101clem/apostolicfathers0101clem_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The date A.M. 6564 is here given according to the Byzantine reckoning, and corresponds to A.D. 1056, which is therefore the date of the completion of the ms.", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus of Lyons", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "AH 3.3.3", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0103303.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "In the time of this Clement, no small dissension having occurred among the brethren at Corinth, the Church in Rome dispatched a most powerful letter to the Corinthians, exhorting them to peace, renewing their faith, and declaring the tradition which it had lately received from the apostles", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 3.16", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250103.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "There is extant an epistle of this Clement which is acknowledged to be genuine and is of considerable length and of remarkable merit. He wrote it in the name of the church of Rome to the church of Corinth, when a sedition had arisen in the latter church.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea, quoting Dionysius of Corinth (c. 170)", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 4.23.11", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250104.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Today we have passed the Lord's holy day, in which we have read your epistle. From it, whenever we read it, we shall always be able to draw advice, as also from the former epistle, which was written to us through Clement.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.25.5", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "It is, therefore, recorded that Paul was beheaded in Rome itself, and that Peter likewise was crucified under Nero.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea, quoting Dionysius of Corinth (c. 170)", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.25.8", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And they taught together in like manner in Italy, and suffered martyrdom at the same time.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-prescription-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "The Prescription against Heretics", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "Praescr. 36", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0311.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Where Peter endures a passion like his Lord's! Where Paul wins his crown in a death like John's", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "muratorian-fragment-anf", "author": "Anonymous", "work": "Muratorian Fragment (Canon Muratorianus)", "translator": "S. D. F. Salmond", "year": "1886", "locator": "§2 in ANF numbering (on Acts)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0510.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "by the omission of the passion of Peter, and also of the journey of Paul, when he went from the city — Rome — to Spain.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Annals", "translator": "Alfred John Church and William Jackson Brodribb", "year": "1876", "locator": "Ann. 15.44", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus%3Atext%3A1999.02.0078%3Abook%3D15%3Achapter%3D44", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "an immense multitude was convicted, not so much of the crime of firing the city, as of hatred against mankind.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste: GA 02 (Codex Alexandrinus)", "locator": "docID 20002 (GA 02; London, British Library, Royal 1 D.VIII; 5th century)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=20002&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "author": "Wikidata", "work": "First Epistle of Clement", "locator": "Q10993949 (P7988 Clavis Patrum Graecorum ID 1001)", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q10993949.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "author": "Wikidata", "work": "Codex Hierosolymitanus", "locator": "Q2724904 (inventory Codex Hierosolymitanus 54; inception 1056)", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q2724904.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "J. B. Lightfoot", "work": "The Apostolic Fathers, Part I: S. Clement of Rome (2 vols., 2nd ed.)", "year": "1890", "view": "Dated the letter about AD 95 or 96. Read 'the extreme west' as Spain, which implies Paul was released after the Roman custody of Acts. Held that the seven imprisonments must come from information beyond Acts. Rejected identifying the author with the Clement of Philippians 4:3." }, { "author": "Oxford Society of Historical Theology (committee)", "work": "The New Testament in the Apostolic Fathers", "year": "1905", "view": "Judged it beyond doubt that 1 Clement 47 refers to 1 Corinthians, citing the references to Cephas and Apollos and actual quotations from the letter." }, { "author": "George Edmundson", "work": "The Church in Rome in the First Century", "year": "1913", "view": "Dated the letter to the beginning of AD 70, reading the calamities of 1.1 as the troubles of AD 69. Took Clement as a contemporary witness that Paul travelled to the far West after his acquittal." }, { "author": "John A. T. Robinson", "work": "Redating the New Testament", "year": "1976", "view": "Followed Edmundson in placing 1 Clement around AD 70, before the fall of the temple." }, { "author": "Andreas Lindemann", "work": "Paulus im ältesten Christentum", "year": "1979", "view": "Treats 1 Clement as a key early witness to how Paul and his letters, especially 1 Corinthians, were received and used as authority." }, { "author": "L. L. Welborn", "work": "On the Date of First Clement (Biblical Research 29)", "year": "1984", "view": "Argued that the 'calamities' of 1.1 do not show a Domitianic persecution, so the conventional 95-96 date lacks a firm anchor and the letter can be placed only within a broader window." }, { "author": "L. L. Welborn", "work": "Clement, First Epistle of (The Anchor Bible Dictionary, vol. 1)", "year": "1992", "view": "Treats the delay formula of 1.1 as a convention of letters on concord and, from internal evidence and second-century references, places the letter between AD 80 and 140." }, { "author": "Odd Magne Bakke", "work": "'Concord and Peace': A Rhetorical Analysis of the First Letter of Clement", "year": "2001", "view": "Reads the letter as deliberative rhetoric urging concord at Corinth. Its examples, including Peter and Paul, serve that argument." }, { "author": "Andrew F. Gregory", "work": "1 Clement and the Writings that Later Formed the New Testament, in The Reception of the New Testament in the Apostolic Fathers (ed. Gregory and Tuckett)", "year": "2005", "view": "Judges 1 Clement's use of 1 Corinthians secure and assesses its possible use of other New Testament writings case by case." }, { "author": "Thomas J. Herron", "work": "Clement and the Early Church of Rome: On the Dating of Clement's First Epistle to the Corinthians", "year": "2008", "view": "Argues for a date around AD 70, before the temple's destruction." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q10993949", "label": "First Epistle of Clement" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q42887", "label": "Clement of Rome (traditional author)" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q2724904", "label": "Codex Hierosolymitanus" } ], "title": "First Clement kuhusu kifo cha Paulo na barua yake kwa Korintho", "summary": "Kwa tarehe yake ya kawaida (karibu 95–97 BK), First Clement, iliyotumwa na kanisa la Rumi kwa kanisa la Korintho, ndiyo maandishi ya mapema zaidi nje ya Agano Jipya kuripoti mwisho wa maisha ya Paulo, baada ya vifungo, uhamisho, kupigwa mawe na kutoa ushahidi mbele ya watawala. Pia ndiyo ya kwanza kuwarudisha wasomaji kwenye barua yake kuhusu makundi ya Korintho (1 Wakorintho). Haisemi alikufa wapi, lini au kwa namna gani.", "dating": "Kwa kawaida karibu 95–97 BK, mwishoni mwa utawala wa Domitian au baada yake mara moja (Lightfoot: karibu 95 au 96 BK). Mapendekezo yanaanzia karibu 70 BK (Edmundson, Robinson, Herron) hadi karibu 140 (kikomo cha juu cha Welborn). Nakala ya kale zaidi iliyohifadhiwa iko katika Codex Alexandrinus (karne ya 5).", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Barua iliyotumwa kwa jina la kanisa la Rumi inawasilisha Petro na Paulo kama mashujaa wa kizazi chake walioteswa na kushindana hadi kufa (1 Clem. 5.1–7). Kwa tarehe ya kawaida, kanisa la Rumi kizazi kimoja baadaye lilichukulia kifo cha Paulo kama historia ya karibuni inayojulikana.", "Inafupisha kazi ya Paulo na mwisho wake: kufungwa mara saba, kuhamishwa, kupigwa mawe, kuhubiri mashariki na magharibi, kufika mipaka ya mbali kabisa ya magharibi, kutoa ushahidi mbele ya watawala, kisha kuondoka duniani kwenda mahali patakatifu (1 Clem. 5.6–7).", "Inawaambia watu wa Korintho kuichukua barua ya Paulo anayeheshimika na kukumbuka kukemea kwake makundi yaliyoundwa karibu naye mwenyewe, Kefa na Apolo (1 Clem. 47.1–3). Hii inalingana na 1 Wakorintho 1:10–12 (linganisha 1 Wakorintho 3:4–6) na kuonyesha kwamba Rumi ilijua barua na kudhani Korintho bado ilikuwa nayo.", "Orodha yake ya taabu inakubaliana na orodha ya Paulo mwenyewe na Matendo kuhusu kupigwa mawe (2 Wakorintho 11:25; Matendo 14:19), vifungo vya kurudiwa (2 Wakorintho 11:23) na kufukuzwa kama katika Matendo 13:50. Hesabu yake ya vifungo saba ni zaidi ya vinavyosimuliwa katika Matendo, kwa hiyo orodha si muhtasari wa Matendo tu." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Haitaji mahali, tarehe, kaisari au namna ya kifo. Rumi huhitimishwa kutoka 6.1; Dionisio wa Korintho (karibu 170, katika Eusebius, Church History 2.25.8) anawahusisha Petro na Paulo na Rumi na kusema walifundisha Italia na kuuawa kwa imani wakati mmoja. Kukatwa kichwa kunadokezwa na Tertullian (karibu 200), na Eusebius anakiweka Rumi chini ya Nero.", "Kauli kuhusu mipaka ya mbali kabisa ya magharibi haithibitishi yenyewe safari ya kuhubiri kwenda Hispania au kuachiliwa baada ya Matendo 28. Wengi husoma Hispania (linganisha Warumi 15:24, 28), na Muratorian Fragment baadaye inasema Paulo alitoka Rumi kwenda Hispania (tarehe yake inabishaniwa). Wengine husoma Rumi au usemi wa balagha wa ulimwengu wote, na huenda kauli hiyo inatoka Warumi 15 badala ya ujuzi wa kujitegemea.", "Barua haitaji mwandishi wake wala kutoa tarehe yake yenyewe. Kuhusishwa na Clement na tarehe ya karibu 95–97 kunategemea ushahidi wa karne ya pili (Dionisio wa Korintho, Hegesippus, Irenaeus) na hitimisho kutoka katika maandishi." ], "debate": "Maswali matatu bado yanajadiliwa. Tarehe: wasomi wengi huweka barua karibu 95–97, wakisoma majanga ya ghafla na ya kurudiwa ya 1.1 katika mazingira ya utawala wa Domitian. Edmundson, Robinson na Herron wanasema karibu 70, na Welborn anapendekeza kipindi kipana zaidi cha 80–140 BK. Jiografia: Lightfoot aliamini mipaka ya mbali kabisa ya magharibi lazima imaanishe Hispania, jambo linalodokeza Paulo aliachiliwa baada ya Matendo 28. Wengine husoma Rumi, balagha ya ulimwengu wote, au mwangwi wa Warumi 15:24. Maelezo: je, kufungwa mara saba kunahifadhi mapokeo huru au ni namba iliyozoeleka? Na je, kutoa ushahidi tayari humaanisha kufa kwa imani, au ushahidi tu katika kesi? Wengi pia wanahusisha umati mkubwa wa wahanga katika 6.1 na mateso ya Nero yanayoelezwa na Tacitus (Annals 15.44), ingawa barua haitaji kaisari yeyote.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Tarehe ya mapema (karibu 70 BK)", "statement": "Edmundson (1913) alisema majanga ya 1.1 yanaendana na misukosuko ya 69 BK na kwamba barua iliandikwa mwanzoni mwa 70 BK. Robinson (1976) na Herron (2008) pia wanatetea tarehe ya karibu 70. Kwa mtazamo huu, ushahidi unatoka ndani ya miaka michache baada ya kifo cha Paulo." }, { "label": "Kipindi kipana au cha baadaye", "statement": "Welborn (1984; 1992) alisema 1.1 si lazima irejelee mateso chini ya Domitian, kwa hiyo tarehe ya kimapokeo haina msingi thabiti. Kwa mtazamo huu, barua ingeweza kuwa ya wakati wowote kati ya karibu 80 na 140 BK, hivyo muda kati yake na kifo cha Paulo hauna uhakika." }, { "label": "Mipaka ya magharibi kama Rumi au balagha", "statement": "Baadhi wanaamini Paulo alikufa mwishoni mwa kuzuiliwa na dola ya Rumi katika Matendo 28. Wanasoma kauli kama Rumi, mpaka wa magharibi wa kazi yake mwenyewe, au kama jozi ya balagha na ulimwengu wote. Lightfoot aliorodhesha tafsiri hizo na kuzikataa, kwa sababu mwandishi wa Rumi asingetarajiwa kuiita Rumi mwisho wa mbali wa magharibi." }, { "label": "Saba kama namba iliyozoeleka", "statement": "Idadi ya vifungo saba huenda ni namba iliyokadiriwa au ya ishara katika orodha ya mfano ya taabu iliyoandikwa kuhimiza umoja, si hesabu iliyotokana na rekodi." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-first-clement-paul" }, { "id": "second-peter-pauls-letters", "kind": "literary-early-christian", "dateFrom": 60, "dateTo": 150, "corpusReferences": [ "Gregory-Aland P72 (P. Bodmer VIII, Vatican Library; 2 Peter 3:11-18 on pp. 35-36)" ], "confidence": "medium-high", "epistemicStatus": "debated", "scriptureReferences": [ "2 Peter 3:15-16", "2 Peter 3:1", "2 Peter 1:14", "Colossians 4:16", "1 Thessalonians 5:27", "Galatians 2:9", "Galatians 2:11-14", "Acts 15:7-11", "1 Corinthians 6:2" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.peter" ], "placeIds": [], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History, Book III", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 3.3.1", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250103.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But we have learned that his extant second Epistle does not belong to the canon; yet, as it has appeared profitable to many, it has been used with the other Scriptures.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History, Book III", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 3.25.3", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250103.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Among the disputed writings, which are nevertheless recognized by many, are extant the so-called epistle of James and that of Jude, also the second epistle of Peter", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea (quoting Origen, Commentary on John, Book 5)", "work": "Church History, Book VI", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 6.25.8", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250106.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "has left one acknowledged epistle; perhaps also a second, but this is doubtful.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "ignatius-lightfoot", "author": "Ignatius of Antioch", "work": "Epistle to the Ephesians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "year": "1891", "locator": "Eph. 12.2", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/ignatius-ephesians-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Ye are associates in the mysteries with Paul, who was sanctified, who obtained a good report, who is worthy of all felicitation; in whose foot-steps I would fain be found treading, when I shall attain unto God; who in every letter maketh mention of you in Christ Jesus.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-lightfoot", "author": "Polycarp of Smyrna", "work": "Epistle to the Philippians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "locator": "Phil. 3.2", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/polycarp-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "the blessed and glorious Paul, who when he came among you taught face to face with the men of that day the word which concerneth truth carefully and surely; who also, when he was absent, wrote a letter unto you", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-lightfoot", "author": "Polycarp of Smyrna", "work": "Epistle to the Philippians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "locator": "Phil. 11.2", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/polycarp-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "as Paul teacheth?", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "Clement of Rome (the church at Rome to the church at Corinth)", "work": "First Epistle of Clement to the Corinthians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "year": "1890", "locator": "1 Clem. 47.1-2", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/lightfoot/pt1vol2/translation1.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Take up the epistle of the blessed Paul the Apostle. What wrote he first unto you in the beginning of the Gospel?", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung, Münster", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste (NTVMR), P72", "locator": "docID 10072 (P72; P. Bodmer VIII, Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana: 1 Pet 1:1-5:14, 2 Pet 1:1-3:18; P. Bodmer VII, Bibliotheca Bodmeriana: Jude); date III/IV (200-399)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=10072&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung, Münster", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste (NTVMR), P46", "locator": "docID 10046 (P46; Dublin, Chester Beatty Library, CBL BP II, and Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Library, Inv. 6238; date III (A), 200-225)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=10046&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata entity: Second Epistle of Peter", "locator": "Q131178", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q131178.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata entity: Papyrus 72", "locator": "Q673569", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q673569.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Michael J. Kruger", "work": "\"The Authenticity of 2 Peter,\" Journal of the Evangelical Theological Society 42/4", "year": "1999", "view": "Argues that the case for pseudonymity is too incomplete to justify the scholarly consensus. On his reading, Paul's letters in 3:16 need mean only the letters known to Peter at the time, and the affectionate yet self-deprecating way Paul is described fits Peter better than a pseudepigrapher." }, { "author": "Richard J. Bauckham", "work": "Jude, 2 Peter (Word Biblical Commentary 50)", "year": "1983", "view": "Treats 2 Peter as pseudepigraphal but holds that the device was not a fraudulent claim to apostolic authority; it claimed to pass on the apostolic message faithfully. He also regards evidence that the Apocalypse of Peter used 2 Peter as ruling out a late date. (View as quoted in Kruger 1999.)" }, { "author": "J. N. D. Kelly", "work": "A Commentary on the Epistles of Peter and of Jude", "year": "1969", "view": "Regards 2 Peter as pseudonymous and describes that verdict as almost universally held in his day. (As quoted in Kruger 1999.)" }, { "author": "Jörg Frey, Matthijs den Dulk and Jan van der Watt (eds.)", "work": "2 Peter and the Apocalypse of Peter: Towards a New Perspective", "year": "2019", "view": "Frey's lectures argue that 2 Peter depends literarily on the Apocalypse of Peter and read the letter within second-century Christianity. Respondents, including Richard Bauckham, assess the proposal." }, { "author": "Harry Y. Gamble", "work": "The New Testament Canon: Its Making and Meaning", "year": "1985", "view": "States that Hippolytus is the first writer to show any knowledge of 2 Peter (as quoted by Kruger 1999)." }, { "author": "David Trobisch", "work": "Paul's Letter Collection: Tracing the Origins", "year": "1994", "view": "Bibliography-only further reading: the publisher's description says the book uses textual criticism to trace the growth of the Pauline corpus and suggests that Paul himself played a major role in publishing the first collection of his letters. The argument was not checked against the book." }, { "author": "Benjamin P. Laird", "work": "The Pauline Corpus in Early Christianity: Its Formation, Publication, and Circulation", "year": "2022", "view": "Argues that at least three archetypal editions of Paul's letters (10, 13 and 14 letters) were collected and edited as early as the first century. They circulated side by side until 14-letter editions became nearly universal by the fourth century." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q131178", "label": "Second Epistle of Peter" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q673569", "label": "Papyrus 72" } ], "title": "2 Petro 3:15–16: rejeo la mapema kwa barua za Paulo kama kundi", "summary": "Katika 2 Petro 3:15–16, mwandishi, akizungumza kama Petro, anamwita Paulo ndugu mpendwa, anarejelea barua zake kama kundi ambalo wasomaji tayari wanalijua, na kuziweka kwa kudokeza katika daraja la Maandiko. Ni miongoni mwa ushahidi wa mapema zaidi kwamba barua kadhaa za Paulo zilijulikana pamoja, ingawa haitaji yoyote kwa jina. Uzito wake unategemea tarehe inayobishaniwa: katikati ya miaka ya 60 ikiwa Petro aliiandika, baadaye ikiwa iliandikwa na mwingine kwa jina lake.", "dating": "Inabishaniwa: katikati ya miaka ya 60 BK ikiwa iliandikwa na Petro; mwishoni mwa karne ya kwanza hadi ya pili ikiwa ni ya mwandishi mwingine aliyetumia jina lake (kikomo cha juu cha 150 ni namba ya kukadiria mapendekezo ya karne ya pili). Hati ya mapema zaidi ni P72 (karne ya 3/4); ilitajwa kwanza kwa jina, kwa mashaka, na Origen (karne ya 3, aliyenukuliwa na Eusebius).", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "2 Petro 3:15–16 inarejelea barua za Paulo kwa wingi, kama kundi ambalo wasomaji tayari wanalijua, si barua waliotumiwa wao pekee. Hii inadhania kwamba nakala za barua kadhaa za Paulo zilikuwa zimefika nje ya wapokeaji wa kwanza; maagizo yake mwenyewe kwamba barua zisomwe kwa waumini wote na kupelekwa katika kanisa jirani (1 Wathesalonike 5:27; Wakolosai 4:16) yanafanya usambazaji huo uwe wa kuaminika.", "Kifungu kinaweka kwa kudokeza barua za Paulo katika kundi la Maandiko; wasomaji wengi huielewa kauli hivyo, ingawa wachache huisoma kama maandishi mengine kwa ujumla. Kinasema baadhi ya mambo ndani yake ni magumu na kwamba wasomaji wasiofundishwa na wasio thabiti huyapotosha, kwa hiyo tafsiri ya Paulo ilikuwa tayari ikibishaniwa kilipoandikwa.", "Ni ushahidi mmoja kati ya kadhaa wa mapema kwamba barua za Paulo zilisomwa nje ya mahali zilipotumwa kwanza. 1 Clement 47 inawarudisha watu wa Korintho kwenye 1 Wakorintho. Polykarp (Philippians 3.2; 11.2) anajua kwamba Paulo aliwaandikia Filipi na kumhusisha na fundisho linalopatikana katika 1 Wakorintho 6:2. Ignatius (Ephesians 12.2) anasema Paulo anawataja watu wa Efeso katika kila barua, kutia chumvi kunakodokeza kwamba alijua kadhaa.", "Hati ya kale zaidi iliyohifadhiwa ya kifungu ni P72 (P. Bodmer VIII, sasa katika Vatican Library), inayowekwa na INTF katika karne ya 3 au ya 4; kurasa zake 35-36 zina 2 Petro 3:11–18. Kwa kulinganisha, P46 (tarehe ya INTF karibu 200-225), kodeksi ya mapema ya barua za Paulo na Waebrania, haina 2 Petro." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Haisemi mwandishi alijua barua zipi au ngapi za Paulo. Kwa hiyo si ushahidi wa mkusanyo uliohaririwa, korpasi iliyowekwa ya barua kumi na tatu au kumi na nne, au kanoni iliyofungwa.", "Haiamui uandishi au tarehe yake yenyewe. Ikiwa 2 Petro iliandikwa na mwingine kwa jina la Petro, kifungu kinaonyesha jinsi mwandishi wa baadaye alivyoeleza mtazamo wa Petro kuhusu Paulo, si maneno ya Petro mwenyewe.", "Haisemi chochote kuhusu safari za Paulo wala kutoa uthibitisho wa kujitegemea wa njia ya safari au mpangilio wa matukio wa Matendo." ], "debate": "Wasomi wengi wakosoaji huona 2 Petro kuwa imeandikwa na mwingine kwa jina la Petro. Wanataja mtindo na msamiati wake, unaotofautiana na 1 Petro; kufanana kwake sana na Yuda; kupokelewa kwake mapema kwa polepole na kwa mashaka (kusita kwa Origen, na Eusebius kuiweka kati ya vitabu vinavyobishaniwa); na rejeo hili lenyewe kwa barua za Paulo kama kundi lililo katika daraja la Maandiko. Watetezi wa uandishi wa Petro wanajibu kwamba wingi unaweza kumaanisha barua ambazo mwandishi alijua tu, na kwamba sauti ya upendo lakini wazi inamfaa Petro. Mzozo mwingine ni kama 2 Petro ilitumia Apocalypse of Peter au ilitumiwa na kazi hiyo.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Ya Petro, katikati ya miaka ya 60", "statement": "Petro, labda akitumia katibu, aliandika muda mfupi kabla ya kifo chake chini ya Nero. Kifungu basi kingeonyesha barua za Paulo zikinakiliwa na kusomwa katika makanisa ndani ya miaka michache baada ya kuandikwa, na mtume aliyewahi kugombana na Paulo (Wagalatia 2:11–14), lakini pia kuunga mkono kazi kwa Mataifa (Wagalatia 2:9; Matendo 15:7–11), akimsifu." }, { "label": "Ya mwandishi mwingine kwa jina lake, baada ya mitume", "statement": "Mwandishi wa baadaye alitumia jina la Petro, akiwasilisha barua kama ya pili ya Petro na kama wosia wa kuaga (2 Petro 3:1; 2 Petro 1:14). Kifungu basi kinashuhudia barua kadhaa za Paulo zikiwa na hadhi ya mamlaka katika kizazi baada ya mitume, pamoja na picha ya kukumbukwa ya Petro na Paulo wakipatana." }, { "label": "Karne ya pili, baada ya Apocalypse of Peter", "statement": "Jörg Frey anasema 2 Petro inategemea Apocalypse of Peter. Hilo lingeiweka barua ndani kabisa ya karne ya pili, kwa hiyo ingeshuhudia jinsi barua za Paulo zilivyochukuliwa katika kipindi hicho badala ya wakati wa mitume." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-second-peter-pauls-letters" }, { "id": "ignatius-paul", "kind": "literary-early-christian", "dateFrom": 105, "dateTo": 150, "corpusReferences": [ "CPG 1025.1 (Ignatius, Ad Ephesios)" ], "confidence": "medium-high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 9:15", "Acts 10:41", "Acts 19:1-41", "Acts 20:17-38", "Acts 28:14-31", "Romans 1:7-15", "1 Corinthians 1:18-20", "1 Corinthians 4:13", "1 Corinthians 6:9-10", "1 Corinthians 15:8-9", "1 Corinthians 15:32", "1 Corinthians 16:8", "Ephesians 1:1", "1 Timothy 1:3", "2 Timothy 1:18", "2 Timothy 4:12" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.peter" ], "placeIds": [ "place.ephesus", "place.rome", "place.antioch", "place.syria" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "ignatius-lightfoot", "author": "Ignatius of Antioch", "work": "Epistle to the Ephesians", "locator": "Ign. Eph. 12.2", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/ignatius-ephesians-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Ye are associates in the mysteries with Paul, who was sanctified, who obtained a good report, who is worthy of all felicitation; in whose foot-steps I would fain be found treading, when I shall attain unto God; who in every letter maketh mention of you in Christ Jesus.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot and J. R. Harmer", "year": "1891" }, { "sourceKey": "ignatius-lightfoot", "author": "Ignatius of Antioch", "work": "Epistle to the Romans", "locator": "Ign. Rom. 4.3", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/ignatius-romans-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I do not enjoin you, as Peter and Paul did. They were Apostles, I am a convict; they were free, but I am a slave to this very hour.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot and J. R. Harmer", "year": "1891" }, { "sourceKey": "ignatius-lightfoot", "author": "Ignatius of Antioch", "work": "Epistle to the Romans", "locator": "Ign. Rom. 9.2 (echo of 1 Cor 15:8-9)", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/ignatius-romans-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But for myself I am ashamed to be called one of them; for neither am I worthy, being the very last of them and an untimely birth: but I have found mercy that I should be some one, if so be I shall attain unto God.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot and J. R. Harmer", "year": "1891" }, { "sourceKey": "ignatius-lightfoot", "author": "Ignatius of Antioch", "work": "Epistle to the Ephesians", "locator": "Ign. Eph. 18.1 (echo of 1 Cor 1:18-20; 4:13)", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/ignatius-ephesians-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "My spirit is made an offscouring for the Cross, which is a stumbling-block to them that are unbelievers, but to us salvation and life eternal.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot and J. R. Harmer", "year": "1891" }, { "sourceKey": "ignatius-lightfoot", "author": "Ignatius of Antioch", "work": "Epistle to the Smyrnaeans", "locator": "Ign. Smyrn. 3.3", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/ignatius-smyrnaeans-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And after His resurrection He [both] ate with them and drank with them as one in the flesh", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot and J. R. Harmer", "year": "1891" }, { "sourceKey": "ignatius-anf", "author": "Ignatius of Antioch", "work": "Epistle to the Ephesians, shorter (middle) recension, ANF 1", "locator": "Ign. Eph. 12 (shorter version)", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.v.ii.xii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Ye are initiated into the mysteries of the Gospel with Paul, the holy, the martyred, the deservedly most happy, at whose feet", "role": "edition", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson", "year": "1885" }, { "sourceKey": "ignatius-anf", "author": "Ignatius of Antioch (long recension, 4th-century revision)", "work": "Epistle to the Ephesians, longer recension, ANF 1", "locator": "Ign. Eph. 12 (longer version)", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.v.ii.xii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "with Paul, the holy, the martyred, inasmuch as he was “a chosen vessel;”", "role": "edition", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson", "year": "1885" }, { "sourceKey": "ignatius-anf", "author": "Ignatius of Antioch (Syriac abridgment)", "work": "Epistle to the Romans, Syriac version, ANF 1", "locator": "Ign. Rom. 4 (Syriac version)", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.v.xii.iv.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I do not, like Peter and Paul, issue orders unto you.", "role": "edition", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson", "year": "1885" }, { "sourceKey": "ignatius-anf", "author": "Ignatius of Antioch (long recension, 4th-century revision)", "work": "Epistle to the Romans, longer recension, ANF 1", "locator": "Ign. Rom. 4 (longer version)", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.v.v.iv.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "They were apostles of Jesus Christ, but I am the very least [of believers]:", "role": "edition", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson", "year": "1885" }, { "sourceKey": "ignatius-anf", "author": "ANF editors (A. Roberts, J. Donaldson; A. C. Coxe)", "work": "Introductory Note to the Epistles of Ignatius, ANF 1", "locator": "ANF 1, Introductory Note to the Epistles of Ignatius", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.v.i.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Of the seven Epistles which are acknowledged by Eusebius (Hist. Eccl., iii. 36), we possess two Greek recensions, a shorter and a longer. It is plain that one or other of these exhibits a corrupt text", "role": "early-study", "year": "1885" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Ecclesiastical History", "locator": "HE 3.36.10", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250103.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And when he had left Smyrna he wrote again from Troas to the Philadelphians and to the church of Smyrna; and particularly to Polycarp, who presided over the latter church.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-lightfoot", "author": "Polycarp of Smyrna", "work": "Epistle to the Philippians", "locator": "Pol. Phil. 13.2", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/polycarp-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The letters of Ignatius which were sent to us by him, and others as many as we had by us, we send unto you, according as ye gave charge; the which are subjoined to this letter; from which ye will be able to gain great advantage.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus of Lyons", "work": "Against Heresies", "locator": "Haer. 5.28.4 (quoting Ign. Rom. 4.1)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0103528.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "As a certain man of ours said, when he was condemned to the wild beasts because of his testimony with respect to God: I am the wheat of Christ, and am ground by the teeth of the wild beasts, that I may be found the pure bread of God.", "role": "primary-text", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata: Epistle of Ignatius to the Ephesians", "locator": "Q65051525 (P7988 CPG 1025.1)", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q65051525.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata: Letters of Ignatius", "locator": "Q350126", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q350126.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Theodor Zahn", "work": "Ignatius von Antiochien", "year": "1873", "view": "Defended the authenticity of the seven letters in the middle recension. Schoedel credits Zahn and Lightfoot as the basis of today's majority view." }, { "author": "J. B. Lightfoot", "work": "The Apostolic Fathers, Part II: S. Ignatius, S. Polycarp", "year": "1885 (2nd ed. 1889)", "view": "Defended the middle recension as Ignatius's genuine letters, treating the long recension as a later expansion and the Syriac as an abridgment. The 1891 Lightfoot-Harmer translation quoted here derives from this edition." }, { "author": "William Cureton", "work": "The Ancient Syriac Version of the Epistles of St. Ignatius to Polycarp, the Ephesians, and the Romans", "year": "1845", "view": "Argued that the three abridged Syriac letters come closest to what Ignatius actually wrote. Later scholarship has largely rejected this." }, { "author": "Robert Joly", "work": "Le dossier d'Ignace d'Antioche", "year": "1979", "view": "Disputes the authenticity of the seven letters, treating them as a later composition. This is the main modern minority position, and Schoedel cites it." }, { "author": "William R. Schoedel", "work": "Ignatius of Antioch: A Commentary on the Letters of Ignatius of Antioch (Hermeneia)", "year": "1985", "view": "Standard critical commentary. It accepts the middle recension as Ignatius's own work and reads it against his journey under guard from Syria to Rome." }, { "author": "William R. Schoedel", "work": "\"Ignatius, Epistles of,\" Anchor Bible Dictionary, vol. 3", "year": "1992", "view": "The middle recension is generally accepted as authentic. The long recension is a fourth-century revision with added spurious letters, and the Syriac 'short recension' is only an abridgment. The letters fit the second half of Trajan's reign or a little later." }, { "author": "Paul Foster", "work": "\"The Epistles of Ignatius of Antioch and the Writings that later formed the New Testament,\" in A. F. Gregory and C. M. Tuckett (eds.), The Reception of the New Testament in the Apostolic Fathers", "year": "2005", "view": "Assesses, writing by writing, which texts later in the New Testament Ignatius knew." }, { "author": "Timothy D. Barnes", "work": "The Date of Ignatius (The Expository Times 120)", "year": "2008", "view": "Argues that Ignatius knew the writings of the Gnostic teacher Ptolemaeus and that the letters were probably written in the 140s, treating Eusebius's placement of Ignatius under Trajan as not authoritative." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q44170", "label": "Ignatius of Antioch" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q350126", "label": "Letters of Ignatius" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q65051525", "label": "Epistle of Ignatius to the Ephesians" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q7811305", "label": "Epistle of Ignatius to the Romans" } ], "title": "Barua za Ignatius wa Antiokia kuhusu Paulo", "summary": "Barua za Ignatius wa Antiokia, zinazowekwa kwa kawaida karibu 110 BK na kuandikwa akiwa chini ya ulinzi njiani kwenda Rumi, zinaonyesha Paulo akiheshimiwa mapema kama mtume na mwandishi wa barua, lakini haziongezi taarifa mpya kuhusu kazi yake. Katika Ign. Eph. 12.2 anawaita watu wa Efeso washirika wa Paulo katika mafundisho ya imani, ambao Paulo anawataja katika kila barua. Katika Ign. Rom. 4.3 anawatofautisha Petro na Paulo, mitume walioweza kutoa amri, na yeye mwenyewe, mtu aliyehukumiwa.", "dating": "Kwa kawaida karibu 105-117 BK (mwishoni mwa utawala wa Trajan) au baadaye kidogo; Barnes (2008) anasema miaka ya 140. dateFrom na dateTo zinahusu tu mtazamo wa barua halisi; nadharia ya kughushi ingeweka barua baadaye katika karne ya pili.", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Katika toleo la kati la maandishi, linalokubaliwa na wasomi wengi, Ignatius anamwita Paulo aliyetakaswa na anayestahili kila pongezi, anatumaini kufuata nyayo zake, na kusema Paulo anawataja watu wa Efeso katika kila barua (Ign. Eph. 12.2). Kwa hiyo askofu wa Shamu tayari alimjua Paulo kama mwandishi wa barua mwenye uhusiano wa karibu na Efeso, na kwa usomaji wa kawaida kama mwandishi wa barua kadhaa.", "Ign. Rom. 4.3 inawataja Petro na Paulo pamoja kama mitume walioweza kulipa kanisa la Rumi amri, jambo ambalo Ignatius, mfungwa aliyehukumiwa, anakataa kufanya. Kifungu kipo katika aina zote tatu za maandishi zilizohifadhiwa: ufupisho wa Kisiria, toleo la kati na toleo refu.", "Ignatius anatumia tena maneno ya 1 Wakorintho. Eph. 18.1 ina mwangwi wa 1 Wakorintho 1:18–20 na 4:13; Rom. 9.2, ambapo anajiita wa mwisho kabisa na aliyezaliwa kabla ya wakati, ina mwangwi wa 1 Wakorintho 15:8–9; Eph. 16.1 na Phld. 3.3 zina mwangwi wa 1 Wakorintho 6:9–10. Kwa pamoja, haya yanaifanya 1 Wakorintho kuwa mfano ulio wazi zaidi wa barua ya Paulo aliyojua.", "Barua zenyewe zinathibitishwa mapema na vyanzo vya nje. Polykarp (Phil. 13.2) anazungumza kuhusu kukusanya na kupeleka barua za Ignatius. Irenaeus (Haer. 5.28.4) ananukuu Ign. Rom. 4.1 bila kumtaja kwa jina, na Eusebius (HE 3.36.12) anaihusisha nukuu na Ignatius. Eusebius anataja barua saba zinazounda toleo la kati katika HE 3.36.5-10." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Si njia ya kujitegemea ya kukagua Matendo. Ignatius hanukuu Matendo kwa uwazi. Ulinganifu wa karibu zaidi, Smyrn. 3.3 na Matendo 10:41, unaweza kutoka katika mapokeo ya pamoja na hauonyeshi kwamba alisoma Matendo. Usemi wa chombo kilichochaguliwa (Matendo 9:15) unaingia katika Eph. 12 katika toleo refu la karne ya nne tu. Picha yake ya uhusiano wa Paulo na Efeso si ushahidi tofauti wa Matendo 19–20.", "Kauli ya kila barua haiwezi kuchukuliwa kihalisi, kwa sababu Efeso inatajwa katika baadhi tu ya barua zinazohusishwa na Paulo (kwa mfano 1 Wakorintho 15:32; 16:8; 1 Timotheo 1:3; 2 Timotheo 1:18; 4:12). Kauli haionyeshi Ignatius alikuwa na barua ngapi au zipi za Paulo, wala haiamui kama Waefeso 1:1 ilitaja Efeso mwanzoni.", "Rom. 4.3 haisemi kwamba Petro na Paulo walikufa Rumi, walianzisha kanisa la Rumi, au walitoa amri zipi; hayo ni mahitimisho na mapokeo ya baadaye. Katika Eph. 12.2, neno ambalo Lightfoot anatafsiri kama aliyepata ushuhuda mzuri linakuwa aliyeuawa kwa imani katika Roberts-Donaldson, kwa hiyo si ushahidi thabiti wa Paulo kuuawa kwa imani." ], "debate": "Wasomi wengi, wakifuata Zahn na Lightfoot, wanakubali toleo la kati la barua saba kuwa halisi na kuliweka mwishoni mwa utawala wa Trajan au baadaye kidogo; Barnes anapendekeza miaka ya 140. Wachache, hasa Joly, huziona barua kama kazi ya kughushi ya baadaye. Kuhusu Eph. 12.2, wasomaji huuliza kama kila barua ni kutia chumvi, humaanisha katika sehemu zote za barua moja, au huonyesha mkusanyo unaojulikana wa barua za Paulo; kama neno linalomweleza Paulo humaanisha mwenye ushuhuda mzuri au aliyeuawa kwa imani; na ni barua ngapi zaidi ya 1 Wakorintho ambazo Ignatius alitumia kweli.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Kughushi kwa baadaye", "statement": "Barua saba ni kazi ya mwandishi mwingine aliyetumia jina la Ignatius baadaye katika karne ya pili (Joly 1979 ndiyo maelezo yanayojulikana zaidi). Kwa mtazamo huu, Eph. 12.2 na Rom. 4.3 bado zinaonyesha jinsi Paulo alivyokumbukwa katika karne ya pili, lakini si ushahidi kutoka ndani ya kizazi kimoja au viwili baada ya kifo chake tena." }, { "label": "Kutia chumvi na ujuzi mdogo", "statement": "Kila barua ni kutia chumvi kwa balagha, na huenda Ignatius alijua zaidi kidogo tu ya 1 Wakorintho. Baadhi ya misemo inayosikika kama ya Paulo ingeweza kutoka katika mapokeo ya kanisa yaliyosemwa badala ya kusoma barua zilizoandikwa." }, { "label": "Umbo fupi la Kisiria kama la asili", "statement": "Cureton (1845) alisema ni zile barua tatu za Kisiria zilizofupishwa tu ambazo ni halisi. Ephesians ya Kisiria haina sura 12, kwa hiyo kwa mtazamo wake kifungu cha kila barua kisingekuwa maneno ya Ignatius mwenyewe. Tafiti nyingi za baadaye huchukulia Kisiria kama ufupisho wa toleo la kati." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-ignatius-paul" }, { "id": "muratorian-fragment", "kind": "literary-early-christian", "dateFrom": 170, "dateTo": 400, "corpusReferences": [ "CLA III 352" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 1:1-2", "Colossians 4:14", "Colossians 4:16", "Romans 15:24-28", "1 Corinthians 1:10-12", "Galatians 5:2-6", "1 Timothy 1:1-2", "2 Timothy 1:1-2", "Titus 1:1-4", "Philemon 1:1-3" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.luke", "person.timothy", "person.titus", "person.philemon", "person.peter" ], "placeIds": [ "place.rome", "place.spain", "place.corinth", "place.ephesus", "place.philippi", "place.colossae", "place.galatia", "place.thessalonica" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "muratorian-fragment-anf", "author": "Anonymous (Muratorian Fragment)", "translator": "S. D. F. Salmond", "work": "Canon Muratorianus, in Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 5 (printed among the Fragments of Caius)", "year": "1886", "locator": "Canon Muratorianus 3, on Philemon, Titus and Timothy (ANF 5:603)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0510.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "He wrote, besides these, one to Philemon, and one to Titus, and two to Timothy, in simple personal affection and love indeed; but yet these are hallowed in the esteem of the Catholic Church, and in the regulation of ecclesiastical discipline.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "muratorian-fragment-anf", "author": "Anonymous (Muratorian Fragment)", "translator": "S. D. F. Salmond", "work": "Canon Muratorianus, in Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 5 (printed among the Fragments of Caius)", "year": "1886", "locator": "Canon Muratorianus 3, on Laodiceans and Alexandrians (ANF 5:603)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0510.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "There are also in circulation one to the Laodiceans, and another to the Alexandrians, forged under the name of Paul, and addressed against the heresy of Marcion; and there are also several others which cannot be received into the Catholic Church", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "muratorian-fragment-anf", "author": "Anonymous (Muratorian Fragment)", "translator": "S. D. F. Salmond", "work": "Canon Muratorianus, in Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 5 (printed among the Fragments of Caius)", "year": "1886", "locator": "Canon Muratorianus 2, on Acts and Theophilus (ANF 5:603)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0510.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Moreover, the Acts of all the Apostles are comprised by Luke in one book, and addressed to the most excellent Theophilus, because these different events took place when he was present himself", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "muratorian-fragment-anf", "author": "Anonymous (Muratorian Fragment)", "translator": "S. D. F. Salmond", "work": "Canon Muratorianus, in Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 5 (printed among the Fragments of Caius)", "year": "1886", "locator": "Canon Muratorianus 2, on Peter's passion and Paul's journey to Spain (ANF 5:603)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0510.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "by the omission of the passion of Peter, and also of the journey of Paul, when he went from the city—Rome—to Spain.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "muratorian-fragment-anf", "author": "Anonymous (Muratorian Fragment)", "translator": "S. D. F. Salmond", "work": "Canon Muratorianus, in Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 5 (printed among the Fragments of Caius)", "year": "1886", "locator": "Canon Muratorianus 4 (ANF 5:604)", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/caius/fragments/anf05.v.iii.iii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The Pastor, moreover, did Hermas write very recently in our times in the city of Rome, while his brother bishop Pius sat in the chair of the Church of Rome.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "muratorian-fragment-anf", "author": "ANF vol. 5 editors (editorial headnote)", "work": "Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 5, note to 'Canon Muratorianus'", "year": "1886", "locator": "ANF 5:603, headnote (CCEL note 4977)", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/caius/fragments/anf05.v.iii.iii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "was discovered by Muratori in the Ambrosian Library at Milan, and published by him in his Antiquitates Italicæ in 1740. This manuscript belongs to the seventh or eighth century.", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "work": "Against Marcion, in Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 3", "year": "1885", "locator": "Adv. Marc. 5.21", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03125.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I wonder, however, when he received (into his Apostolicon) this letter which was written but to one man, that he rejected the two epistles to Timothy and the one to Titus, which all treat of ecclesiastical discipline.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "work": "Against Marcion, in Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 3", "year": "1885", "locator": "Adv. Marc. 5.17", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03125.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "We have it on the true tradition of the Church, that this epistle was sent to the Ephesians, not to the Laodiceans. Marcion, however, was very desirous of giving it the new title (of Laodicean), as if he were extremely accurate in investigating such a point.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata item: Muratorian fragment", "locator": "Q692665", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q692665.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Albert C. Sundberg Jr.", "work": "Canon Muratori: A Fourth Century List (Harvard Theological Review 66)", "year": "1973", "view": "Dates the list to the 4th century and places its origin in the East rather than Rome." }, { "author": "Everett Ferguson", "work": "Canon Muratori: Date and Provenance (Studia Patristica 17)", "year": "1982", "view": "Answers Sundberg. Argues that the absence of Hebrews, the 2nd-century heresies named and other features point to a western, late-2nd-century setting." }, { "author": "Geoffrey Mark Hahneman", "work": "The Muratorian Fragment and the Development of the Canon", "year": "1992", "view": "Builds out Sundberg's case and dates the list c. 375, with a Syrian or Palestinian provenance." }, { "author": "Charles E. Hill", "work": "The Debate over the Muratorian Fragment and the Development of the Canon (Westminster Theological Journal 57)", "year": "1995", "view": "Rebuts Hahneman's reasons for setting aside the fragment's own claim about Hermas and Pius, and favours the earlier date." }, { "author": "Joseph Verheyden", "work": "The Canon Muratori: A Matter of Dispute (in The Biblical Canons, BETL 163)", "year": "2003", "view": "Finds none of the Sundberg-Hahneman arguments for a 4th-century eastern origin convincing. Places the author in the West at the end of the 2nd or beginning of the 3rd century." }, { "author": "Lee Martin McDonald", "work": "The Biblical Canon: Its Origin, Transmission, and Authority", "year": "2007", "view": "Leans toward Sundberg and Hahneman and favours a date after the mid-4th century in the East, while cautioning that this cannot be insisted on." }, { "author": "Eckhard J. Schnabel", "work": "The Muratorian Fragment: The State of Research (Journal of the Evangelical Theological Society 57)", "year": "2014", "view": "Surveys the research, judges the case for a 4th-century date unconvincing, and treats the fragment as written c. 200." }, { "author": "Clare K. Rothschild", "work": "The Muratorian Fragment as Roman Fake (Novum Testamentum 60)", "year": "2018", "view": "Argues that the fragment is a late-antique forgery made to look as if it came from the 2nd century." }, { "author": "Christophe Guignard", "work": "The Muratorian Fragment as a Late Antique Fake? An Answer to C. K. Rothschild (Revue des sciences religieuses 93)", "year": "2019", "view": "Rejects the forgery thesis. Holds that the fragment most likely dates from the second half of the 2nd century, or at the latest the early 3rd." }, { "author": "Johann Peter Kirsch", "work": "Muratorian Canon, The Catholic Encyclopedia vol. 10", "year": "1911", "view": "Says the codex came from Bobbio and is now in the Ambrosiana (Cod. J 101 sup.), dates it to the 8th century, places the text at Rome c. 180-200, probably translated from Greek, and notes that a few sentences survive in Monte Cassino codices of Paul's letters." }, { "author": "E. A. Lowe", "work": "Codices Latini Antiquiores, Part III: Italy, Ancona-Novara", "year": "1938", "view": "Catalogues the Milan codex as CLA III 352: a mid-8th-century uncial, probably written at Bobbio." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q692665", "label": "Muratorian fragment" } ], "title": "Orodha ya barua za Paulo katika Muratorian Fragment", "summary": "Muratorian Fragment, orodha ya Kilatini ya vitabu vya Agano Jipya inayowekwa kwa kawaida karibu 170-200 (baadhi wanasema karne ya 4), inakubali barua kumi na tatu za Paulo, pamoja na Filemoni, Tito na mbili kwa Timotheo, na kukataa barua kwa Walaodikia na kwa watu wa Aleksandria kama za kughushi. Imehifadhiwa kamili katika hati moja tu ya katikati ya karne ya 8 huko Milan. Inaonyesha jinsi barua za Paulo zilivyopokelewa, si nani aliziandika.", "dating": "Inaelekea maandishi yalitungwa mwishoni mwa karne ya 2 (karibu 170-200, au mwanzoni mwa karne ya 3 kwa uchelewa zaidi). Wachache huyatia katika karne ya 4, na hoja moja ya karibuni inayaita bandia ya mwishoni mwa zama za kale. dateTo 400 inajumuisha mtazamo wa karne ya 4 lakini si nadharia ya kughushi. Nakala pekee kamili ni ya katikati ya karne ya 8 (Lowe, CLA III 352: 'VIII med').", "currentLocation": "Biblioteca Ambrosiana, Milan (I 101 sup., hutajwa pia kama J 101 sup.)", "establishes": [ "Maandishi yaliyohifadhiwa yanakubali barua kumi na tatu chini ya jina la Paulo. Kuna barua kwa makanisa saba (Wakorintho, Waefeso, Wafilipi, Wakolosai, Wagalatia, Wathesalonike, Warumi), pamoja na barua ya pili kwa kila moja ya makanisa ya Korintho na Thesalonike, na moja kwa Filemoni, moja kwa Tito na mbili kwa Timotheo. Hati inadokeza hesabu hii lakini haiisemi kamwe wazi, wala haitaji Waebrania.", "Inaeleza barua kwa Filemoni, Tito na Timotheo kama barua binafsi ambazo Kanisa Katoliki (yaani la ulimwengu wote) hata hivyo linazichukulia kuwa takatifu na kuzitumia kwa nidhamu ya kanisa. Inakataa barua kwa Walaodikia na kwa watu wa Aleksandria kama zilizoghushiwa chini ya jina la Paulo kuhusiana na uzushi wa Marcion. Kwa hiyo mwandishi wake alitofautisha barua zilizokubaliwa kuwa za Paulo na zile zilizoandikwa na wengine kwa jina lake.", "Inamhusisha Luka, tabibu ambaye Paulo alimchukua kama mwenzake, na kitabu cha Matendo, na kusema kimeelekezwa kwa Theofilo. Inaeleza kwa nini Matendo haisemi chochote kuhusu kifo cha Petro au safari ya Paulo kutoka Rumi kwenda Hispania: inadai Luka alirekodi yale tu aliyoshuhudia mwenyewe.", "Nakala pekee kamili ni kodeksi ya Kilatini ya herufi kubwa ya karne ya 8 kutoka maktaba ya Bobbio, sasa katika Biblioteca Ambrosiana, Milan. CLA ya Lowe inaiweka katikati ya karne ya 8 na kuona inaelekea iliandikwa Bobbio. Muratori aliichapisha mwaka wa 1740 (ANF headnote). Sentensi chache pia zimehifadhiwa katika hati za Monte Cassino za barua za Paulo." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Inaonyesha barua ambazo mwandishi na jumuiya yake walikubali kuwa za Paulo, katika tarehe na mahali pa orodha panapobishaniwa. Haiamui yenyewe nani aliandika barua za kichungaji au barua nyingine yoyote yenye uandishi unaobishaniwa.", "Kauli yake kwamba Paulo alitoka Rumi kwenda Hispania inaripoti imani aliyokuwa nayo mwandishi, iliyotumiwa kueleza mwisho wa Matendo. Si ushahidi wa kujitegemea kwamba safari ilitokea.", "Si ushahidi wa karne ya kwanza, na tarehe na asili yake zinabishaniwa, kwa hiyo haiwezi kuthibitisha kanoni iliyofungwa kufikia 200 BK. Maoni yake ya kihistoria pia ni ya muhtasari: inaweka Paulo akimfuata mtangulizi wake Yohana katika kuandikia makanisa saba, jambo ambalo si mpangilio wa matukio unaotegemewa." ], "debate": "Tarehe ya mwishoni mwa karne ya 2 inategemea hasa mambo mawili: dai kwamba Hermas aliandika Shepherd hivi karibuni sana katika wakati wetu chini ya Pius, askofu wa Rumi katikati ya karne ya 2, na makundi ambayo orodha inakataa (Marcion, Valentinus, Wamontano). Sundberg (1973) na Hahneman (1992) wanapendekeza orodha ya mashariki ya karne ya 4, na Rothschild (2018) bandia ya mwishoni mwa zama za kale. Ferguson, Hill, Verheyden, Schnabel na Guignard wanajibu kwamba mazingira ya magharibi karibu 200 yanafaa zaidi. Mapitio ya Schnabel ya 2014 yanaona majibu mengi kwa Hahneman kuwa ya ukosoaji. Kauli ambayo tafsiri ya ANF ya 1886 inatafsiri kama kuelekezwa dhidi ya uzushi wa Marcion husomwa mara nyingi zaidi kama kughushi ili kuunga mkono uzushi wa Marcion.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Orodha ya mashariki ya karne ya nne", "statement": "Sundberg na Hahneman wanasoma hivi karibuni sana katika wakati wetu kwa upana na kuhusisha maandishi na katalogi za kanoni za karne ya 4. Hahneman anayaweka karibu 375 katika Shamu au Palestina. Kwa mtazamo huu, orodha inaonyesha kupokelewa kwa barua zilezile kumi na tatu za Paulo katika karne ya 4, si karne ya 2." }, { "label": "Bandia ya mwishoni mwa zama za kale", "statement": "Rothschild anasema orodha ilitungwa baadaye na kufanywa ionekane ya mapema, kwa hiyo rejeo lake kwa Pius ni mbinu ya kifasihi. Guignard anajibu kwamba Chromatius wa Aquileia (aliyekufa 407) alitumia maandishi hayo, na kwamba asili ya Kigiriki ni ngumu kuilinganisha na kughushi kwa baadaye huko magharibi." }, { "label": "Utambulisho wa barua zilizokataliwa", "statement": "Baadhi wanaelewa barua iliyokataliwa kwa Walaodikia kuwa kichwa cha Marcion cha barua ambayo kanisa liliita Waefeso (Tertullian, Against Marcion 5.17). Wengine hufikiria barua tofauti ya mtu mwingine aliyetumia jina la Paulo, kama Epistle to the Laodiceans fupi ya Kilatini inayopatikana katika Biblia za Kilatini za baadaye. Barua kwa watu wa Aleksandria haijulikani, na kuitambulisha kama Waebrania ni dhana tu." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-muratorian-fragment" }, { "id": "dionysius-gaius-martyrdom", "kind": "literary-early-christian", "dateFrom": 165, "dateTo": 326, "corpusReferences": [], "confidence": "medium-high", "epistemicStatus": "tradition", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 18:1-11", "Acts 22:25-28", "Acts 28:16", "Acts 28:30-31", "1 Corinthians 1:12", "1 Corinthians 3:6-10", "1 Corinthians 4:15", "Romans 1:13", "Romans 15:20-23", "Romans 15:24-28", "Philippians 1:25-26", "Philippians 2:24", "Philemon 1:22", "2 Timothy 4:6-8", "2 Timothy 4:16-18" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.peter", "person.nero" ], "placeIds": [ "place.rome", "place.corinth", "place.italia", "place.spain" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.25.6-7", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But I can show the trophies of the apostles. For if you will go to the Vatican or to the Ostian way, you will find the trophies of those who laid the foundations of this church.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.25.8", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "For both of them planted and likewise taught us in our Corinth. And they taught together in like manner in Italy, and suffered martyrdom at the same time.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.25.5", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "It is, therefore, recorded that Paul was beheaded in Rome itself, and that Peter likewise was crucified under Nero.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 2.22.2", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250102.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Thus after he had made his defense it is said that the apostle was sent again upon the ministry of preaching, and that upon coming to the same city a second time he suffered martyrdom.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 4.23.9", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250104.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "There is extant also another epistle written by Dionysius to the Romans, and addressed to Soter, who was bishop at that time.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius of Caesarea", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 6.20.3", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250106.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "There has reached us also a dialogue of Caius, a very learned man, which was held at Rome under Zephyrinus, with Proclus, who contended for the Phrygian heresy.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-prescription-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "The Prescription against Heretics", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "Praescr. 36, on Peter and Paul", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0311.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "How happy is its church, on which apostles poured forth all their doctrine along with their blood! Where Peter endures a passion like his Lord's! Where Paul wins his crown in a death like John's", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-prescription-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "The Prescription against Heretics", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "Praescr. 36, on the apostle John", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0311.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "where the Apostle John was first plunged, unhurt, into boiling oil, and thence remitted to his island-exile", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-prescription-anf", "author": "ANF editors", "work": "The Prescription against Heretics, ANF vol. 3, footnote", "year": "1885", "locator": "Praescr. 36, ANF footnote on 'a death like John's' (CCEL note 2235)", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf03.v.iii.xxxvi.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The Baptist’s.", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "work": "Church History of Eusebius, NPNF2 vol. 1, notes", "year": "1890", "locator": "Note on HE 2.22.2 (CCEL footnote 474), opening", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/npnf201.iii.vii.xxiii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Eusebius is the first writer to record the release of Paul from a first, and his martyrdom during a second Roman imprisonment.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "work": "Church History of Eusebius, NPNF2 vol. 1, notes", "year": "1890", "locator": "Note on HE 2.22.2 (CCEL footnote 474), on the second imprisonment", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/npnf201.iii.vii.xxiii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Scholars are greatly divided as to the fact of a second imprisonment. Nearly all that defend the genuineness of the Pastoral Epistles assume a second imprisonment", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "work": "Church History of Eusebius, NPNF2 vol. 1, notes", "year": "1890", "locator": "Note on HE 2.25.8 (CCEL footnote 555)", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/npnf201.iii.vii.xxvi.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Whatever may be the truth of Dionysius’ report as to Peter’s martyrdom at Rome, he is almost certainly in error in speaking as he does of Peter’s work in Corinth.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "work": "Church History of Eusebius, NPNF2 vol. 1, notes", "year": "1890", "locator": "Note on HE 2.25.8 (CCEL footnote 556)", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/npnf201.iii.vii.xxvi.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "allows some margin in time and does not necessarily imply the same day. Dionysius is the first one to connect the deaths of Peter and Paul chronologically, but later it became quite the custom.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-baptism-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "On Baptism", "translator": "S. Thelwall", "year": "1885", "locator": "De bapt. 17", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0321.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But if the writings which wrongly go under Paul's name, claim Thecla's example as a licence for women's teaching and baptizing, let them know that, in Asia, the presbyter who composed that writing", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "first-clement-lightfoot", "author": "Clement of Rome", "work": "First Epistle of Clement to the Corinthians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "year": "1891", "locator": "1 Clem. 5", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/1clement-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "having taught righteousness unto the whole world and having reached the farthest bounds of the West; and when he had borne his testimony before the rulers, so he departed from the world and went unto the holy place", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata item: Caius (early 3rd-century Christian author)", "locator": "Q2441699", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q2441699.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "pleiades", "work": "Pleiades place record: Via Ostiensis", "locator": "390205932", "url": "https://pleiades.stoa.org/places/390205932/json", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Brent D. Shaw", "work": "The Myth of the Neronian Persecution (Journal of Roman Studies 105)", "year": "2015", "view": "Disputes the conventional view that a state persecution under Nero after the fire of 64 included the deaths of Peter and Paul. He takes the Tacitus passage to be probably genuine but argues it reflects the ideas of Tacitus's own day." }, { "author": "Christopher P. Jones", "work": "The Historicity of the Neronian Persecution: A Response to Brent Shaw (New Testament Studies 63)", "year": "2017", "view": "Argues that there are no grounds for doubting Tacitus's report of the persecution. He notes that the later sources dating the martyrdoms of Peter and Paul to Nero's reign have no bearing on whether Tacitus is accurate." }, { "author": "Otto Zwierlein", "work": "Petrus in Rom: Die literarischen Zeugnisse", "year": "2009", "view": "Argues that the literary evidence does not show Peter was ever in Rome, martyred or buried there. He treats the Roman Peter tradition, including its pairing of Peter with Paul, as a second-century development." }, { "author": "Oscar Cullmann", "work": "Peter: Disciple, Apostle, Martyr (German original 1952)", "year": "1953", "view": "Judges Peter's journey to Rome and martyrdom there under Nero probable from the literary evidence, but holds that the Vatican excavations do not settle where his grave was." }, { "author": "J. M. C. Toynbee and J. B. Ward-Perkins", "work": "The Shrine of St. Peter and the Vatican Excavations", "year": "1956", "view": "Describe the Vatican excavations and identify the modest mid-second-century shrine under St Peter's with the Vatican 'trophy' Gaius mentions." }, { "author": "Sean McDowell", "work": "The Fate of the Apostles: Examining the Martyrdom Accounts of the Closest Followers of Jesus", "year": "2015", "view": "Assesses the martyrdom traditions apostle by apostle. Finds very good historical reason to think Paul died as a martyr in the mid-to-late 60s, and judges his beheading more probable than not but less certain." }, { "author": "M. R. James", "work": "The Apocryphal New Testament", "year": "1924", "view": "Translates the Martyrdom of Paul from the Acts of Paul, in which Nero orders Paul beheaded." }, { "author": "John Chapman", "work": "St. Dionysius, The Catholic Encyclopedia vol. 5", "year": "1909", "view": "Dates Dionysius of Corinth about 170, because he wrote to Pope Soter, whom it dates c. 168-176 (noting Harnack's 165-67 to 173-5)." }, { "author": "John Chapman", "work": "Tertullian, The Catholic Encyclopedia vol. 14", "year": "1912", "view": "Dates the Prescription against Heretics to about 200." }, { "author": "Francis Joseph Bacchus", "work": "Eusebius of Caesarea, The Catholic Encyclopedia vol. 5", "year": "1909", "view": "Holds that the Church History grew in stages: the ninth book was finished between 312 and 314, and the tenth was completed between the defeat of Licinius in 323 and the disgrace of Crispus in 326." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q679837", "label": "Dionysius of Corinth" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q2441699", "label": "Caius (Gaius), early 3rd-century Christian author" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1235854", "label": "Church History (Eusebius)" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q142999", "label": "Eusebius of Caesarea" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q174929", "label": "Tertullian" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "423025", "label": "Roma" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "570182", "label": "Corinthus/Korinthos" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "463398874", "label": "Vaticanus Mons" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "390205932", "label": "Via Ostiensis" } ], "title": "Dionisio wa Korintho, Gayo wa Rumi na Tertullian kuhusu kifo cha Paulo huko Rumi", "summary": "Kuuawa kwa Paulo huko Rumi kunategemea mapokeo ya kanisa, si Matendo, ambayo inaisha kabla kesi yake haijaamuliwa. Dionisio wa Korintho (karibu 170) anasema Petro na Paulo waliuawa kwa imani karibu wakati mmoja. Gayo wa Rumi (karibu 200) anaelekeza kwenye kumbukumbu za ushindi za mitume huko Vatican na kwenye Barabara ya Ostia, na Tertullian (karibu 200) anadokeza kukatwa kichwa. Shahidi mkuu wa awali, 1 Clement 5 (kwa kawaida karibu 96), hataji mahali. Eusebius (mwanzoni mwa karne ya 4) ndiye wa kwanza kueleza wazi kuachiliwa na kufungwa mara ya pili.", "dating": "Dionisio wa Korintho karibu 170 BK (barua kwa kanisa la Rumi chini ya askofu Soter); Gayo wa Rumi na Tertullian karibu 200 BK; Church History ya Eusebius ilikusanywa kwa hatua na kukamilishwa katika miaka ya 320. Maneno ya Dionisio wa Korintho na Gayo wa Rumi yamehifadhiwa kama nukuu katika Eusebius tu.", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi", "establishes": [ "Dionisio wa Korintho, askofu wa Korintho, aliliandikia kanisa la Rumi wakati wa askofu Soter (karibu 170 BK). Alisema Petro na Paulo walianzisha kanisa na kufundisha huko Korintho, walifundisha pamoja Italia na kuuawa kwa imani wakati mmoja (Church History 2.25.8; tarehe ya barua iko katika 4.23.9). McGiffert anataja kwamba kauli ya Kigiriki inaruhusu tofauti fulani ya muda na si lazima imaanishe siku ileile.", "Gayo wa Rumi, mhudumu wa kanisa la Rumi aliyekuwa akifanya kazi chini ya askofu Zephyrinus karibu 200 BK, alisema katika mabishano na Proclus, Mmontano (uzushi wa Kifrigia), kwamba angeweza kuonyesha kumbukumbu za ushindi za mitume huko Vatican na kwenye Barabara ya Ostia (Church History 2.25.6-7; 6.20.3). Kwa hiyo kufikia karibu 200 BK, kanisa la Rumi liliwahusisha mitume na kumbukumbu mbili maalumu.", "Tertullian, Prescription against Heretics 36 (karibu 200 BK), anasema Paulo alipata taji lake huko Rumi kwa kifo kama cha Yohana, ambacho wahariri wa ANF wanaeleza kuwa cha Mbatizaji, yaani kukatwa kichwa. Sentensi hiyohiyo inamweka Yohana mtume katika mafuta yanayochemka bila kuumia, kwa hiyo haya ni mapokeo ya Rumi, si jambo lililokaguliwa. Uraia wa Paulo (Matendo 22:25–28) pia ungefanya mtu atarajie kukatwa kichwa, kwa hiyo huenda maelezo hayo ni hitimisho.", "Katika maelezo yake ya mateso ya Nero, Eusebius anasema Paulo alikatwa kichwa Rumi (Church History 2.25.5). Pia anaripoti kwamba Paulo aliachiliwa baada ya kujitetea na kuuawa kwa imani katika ziara ya pili ya Rumi (2.22.2-8), akitanguliza habari hiyo kwa inasemekana na kuitetea kutoka 2 Timotheo 4. McGiffert (1890) alimwona kuwa mwandishi wa kwanza kurekodi hili kwa uwazi." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Hakuna anayetoa shtaka, kesi au mahali pa kuuawa, wala anayeweka tarehe ya kifo isipokuwa kwa kukihusisha na Petro au Nero. Dionisio wa Korintho na Gayo wa Rumi wanatufikia katika dondoo zilizochaguliwa na Eusebius tu. Tertullian alijua, na kukataa kama bandia, maandishi ya Paulo na Thekla, yanayotambulishwa kwa kawaida na Acts of Paul, ambayo Martyrdom yake pia ina Nero akimkata Paulo kichwa; mapokeo ya pamoja hayawezi kuondolewa kama uwezekano.", "Gayo wa Rumi hasemi kwamba kumbukumbu hizo zilikuwa makaburi, au mahali papi palihusiana na mtume yupi. Kuzisoma kama mahali pa kuzikwa ni tafsiri ya Eusebius. Kuihusisha Barabara ya Ostia na Paulo kunatoka katika mapokeo ya Rumi, si maneno ya Gayo wa Rumi.", "Hakuna mwandishi kabla ya Eusebius anayesema wazi kuachiliwa na kufungwa mara ya pili, ingawa 1 Clement 5 kuhusu mipaka ya mbali kabisa ya magharibi na safari ya Hispania ya Muratorian Fragment vinaweza kudokeza kazi baada ya Matendo 28. Uundaji huu upya unategemea 2 Timotheo kuwa ya Paulo na kuandikwa baada ya Matendo, mambo yote mawili yanayobishaniwa.", "Dionisio wa Korintho si wa kutegemewa katika kila jambo. Dai lake kwamba Petro na Paulo kwa pamoja walianzisha makanisa ya Korintho na Rumi haliendani vizuri na Matendo 18:1–11 na barua za Paulo mwenyewe (1 Wakorintho 3:6–10; 4:15; Warumi 1:13; 15:20–23). McGiffert alifikiri sehemu ya Korintho ya mapokeo inaelekea ilikua kwa sehemu kutokana na kundi la Kefa la 1 Wakorintho 1:12." ], "debate": "Wanahistoria wengi hukubali kwamba Paulo alikufa Rumi. Swali lililo wazi ni kila shahidi anaongeza kiasi gani kwa kujitegemea. Kumbukumbu za ushindi za Gayo wa Rumi zingeweza kuonyesha makaburi au mahali pa kuuawa. Kuachiliwa na kufungwa mara ya pili kunategemea kwa kiasi kikubwa 2 Timotheo kuwa barua ya Paulo mwenyewe, iliyoandikwa baada ya Matendo, jambo ambalo wasomi wengi wanatilia shaka. Brent Shaw anapinga kwamba mateso chini ya Nero yaliwaua Petro na Paulo. Christopher Jones anatetea taarifa ya Tacitus kuhusu mateso hayo. Otto Zwierlein anapinga kwamba Petro aliwahi kuwa Rumi, jambo linaloathiri dai la Dionisio wa Korintho kwamba wote wawili waliuawa kwa imani pamoja.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Kuachiliwa, kazi zaidi, kifo chini ya Nero", "statement": "Paulo aliachiliwa baada ya miaka miwili ya Matendo 28:30–31 na kufanya kazi zaidi, labda mashariki na labda Hispania (Warumi 15:24, 28), kabla ya kukamatwa tena na kuuawa chini ya Nero katikati ya miaka ya 60. Haya ni maelezo ya Eusebius, yanayokubaliwa kwa kawaida na wanaokubali 2 Timotheo kuwa ya Paulo. Ikiwa Wafilipi na Filemoni zinatoka katika kuzuiliwa huko Rumi, Paulo humo anatarajia kuachiliwa (Wafilipi 1:25–26; 2:24; Filemoni 1:22)." }, { "label": "Kuzuiliwa mara moja Rumi kukiishia kifo", "statement": "Kwa mtazamo huu, Paulo hakuachiliwa kamwe. Kuzuiliwa kunakoelezwa katika Matendo 28 kuliishia kuuawa kwake, na kifungo cha pili kilihitimishwa kutoka katika barua za kichungaji. McGiffert (1890) tayari alitaja kwamba wasomi wengi wanaokataa uhalisi wa barua za kichungaji pia wanakataa kifungo cha pili." }, { "label": "Kifo Rumi bila mateso ya Nero", "statement": "Brent Shaw anasema maelezo ya Tacitus kuhusu Nero kuwatesa Wakristo yanaonyesha mawazo ya wakati wa Tacitus mwenyewe. Ikiwa ndivyo, uhusiano kati ya vifo vya mitume na Nero huenda ni uundaji wa baadaye. Christopher Jones anajibu kwamba hakuna msingi wa kutilia shaka taarifa ya Tacitus." }, { "label": "Petro kuuawa kwa imani Rumi kama uundaji wa baadaye", "statement": "Otto Zwierlein anasema Petro hakufika Rumi kamwe. Anachukulia mapokeo yanayowaunganisha Petro na Paulo, pamoja na barua ya Dionisio wa Korintho, kama maendeleo ya kifasihi ya karne ya pili. Hili linaathiri zaidi dai la kuuawa pamoja kwa imani kuliko kifo cha Paulo huko Rumi, kwa kuwa Matendo yenyewe inampeleka Paulo huko." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-dionysius-gaius-martyrdom" }, { "id": "papyrus-46", "kind": "papyrus", "dateFrom": 175, "dateTo": 250, "corpusReferences": [ "Gregory-Aland P46", "INTF Liste docID 10046", "Chester Beatty Library BP II", "University of Michigan Library inv. 6238" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Romans 15:33", "Romans 14:24-26", "Romans 16:1-23", "Ephesians 1:1", "1 Thessalonians 5:23-28" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.phoebe", "person.priscilla", "person.aquila" ], "placeIds": [ "place.rome", "place.corinth", "place.ephesus", "place.galatia", "place.philippi", "place.colossae", "place.thessalonica", "place.cenchreae", "place.egypt" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste der griechischen Handschriften des Neuen Testaments (INTF NTVMR, page-level record)", "locator": "Gregory-Aland P46 (INTF docID 10046)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=10046&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "chester-beatty-library", "work": "Chester Beatty online exhibition page: New Testament (label for the Pauline Epistles leaf)", "locator": "CBL BP II f.61", "url": "https://chesterbeatty.ie/exhibitions/fragments/new-testament/", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "csntm", "work": "CSNTM manuscript record: P46", "locator": "GA P46", "url": "https://manuscripts.csntm.org/manuscript/View/GA_P46", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "INTF NTVMR transcription of P46", "locator": "P46 folio 20r", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/transcript/get/?docid=10046&pageID=210&format=xhtml", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "INTF NTVMR transcription of P46", "locator": "P46 folio 21v", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/transcript/get/?docid=10046&pageID=240&format=xhtml", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "INTF NTVMR transcription of P46", "locator": "P46 folio 75r", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/transcript/get/?docid=10046&pageID=1310&format=xhtml", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 6.14.2", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250106.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "He says that the Epistle to the Hebrews is the work of Paul, and that it was written to the Hebrews in the Hebrew language; but that Luke translated it carefully and published it for the Greeks", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 6.20.3", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250106.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "He mentions only thirteen epistles of the holy apostle, not counting that to the Hebrews with the others. And unto our day there are some among the Romans who do not consider this a work of the apostle.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "Against Marcion", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "Adv. Marc. 5.21.1", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03125.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I wonder, however, when he received (into his Apostolicon) this letter which was written but to one man, that he rejected the two epistles to Timothy and the one to Titus, which all treat of ecclesiastical discipline.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata item: Papyrus 46", "locator": "Q1513469", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Q1513469", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Frederic G. Kenyon", "work": "The Chester Beatty Biblical Papyri, Fasciculus III Supplement: Pauline Epistles", "year": "1936", "view": "Edited the Chester Beatty leaves and dated the codex to the early third century (the first half of that century). Using its page numbering, he reconstructed it as a single-quire codex and judged that the lost final leaves were too few to hold the Pastoral Letters." }, { "author": "Henry A. Sanders", "work": "A Third-Century Papyrus Codex of the Epistles of Paul", "year": "1935", "view": "Edited the University of Michigan leaves and, as the title states, dated the codex to the third century." }, { "author": "Young Kyu Kim", "work": "Palaeographical Dating of P⁴⁶ to the Later First Century (Biblica 69)", "year": "1988", "view": "Argued from comparative handwriting that the codex was copied in the later first century. Most palaeographers have not accepted this." }, { "author": "Bruce W. Griffin", "work": "The Paleographical Dating of P-46", "year": "1996", "view": "Rejected Kim's first-century date and argued for a range of roughly AD 175-225." }, { "author": "Philip W. Comfort and David P. Barrett", "work": "The Text of the Earliest New Testament Greek Manuscripts", "year": "2001", "view": "Favoured an earlier date, around the middle of the second century." }, { "author": "Pasquale Orsini and Willy Clarysse", "work": "Early New Testament Manuscripts and Their Dates: A Critique of Theological Palaeography (Ephemerides Theologicae Lovanienses 88)", "year": "2012", "view": "Argued that several early New Testament papyri had been dated too early and proposed more cautious ranges. They placed this codex in the early third century, in line with the INTF catalogue." }, { "author": "Jeremy Duff", "work": "P⁴⁶ and the Pastorals: A Misleading Consensus? (New Testament Studies 44)", "year": "1998", "view": "Argued that the scribe was fitting more text onto later pages and could have added leaves, so the codex may have been planned to include the Pastoral Letters." }, { "author": "T. W. Manson", "work": "St. Paul's Letter to the Romans - and Others", "year": "1948", "view": "Used the papyrus's placing of the doxology after Romans 15 to argue that a fifteen-chapter form went to Rome and that chapter 16 belonged to a copy sent to Ephesus." }, { "author": "Harry Y. Gamble", "work": "The Textual History of the Letter to the Romans", "year": "1977", "view": "Argued that the sixteen-chapter letter is original and the shorter forms are secondary, treating the doxology as a later addition." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1513469", "label": "Papyrus 46" } ], "title": "Papyrus 46 (P46), hati ya mapema zaidi yenye sehemu kubwa ya barua za Paulo", "summary": "P46 ndiyo hati ya mapema zaidi yenye sehemu kubwa ya barua za Paulo: karatasi 86 za kodeksi ya papyrus ya Kigiriki kutoka Misri, inayowekwa karibu 200 BK, sasa imegawanywa kati ya Dublin na Ann Arbor. Inaonyesha Warumi, Waebrania, 1 Wakorintho, 2 Wakorintho, Waefeso, Wagalatia, Wafilipi, Wakolosai na 1 Wathesalonike zikinakiliwa pamoja kama kitabu kimoja. Tarehe yake hutegemea mwandiko na inajadiliwa, na karatasi zilizopotea zinaacha wazi kama ilikuwa na 2 Wathesalonike, Filemoni au barua za kichungaji.", "dating": "Karibu 200 BK, ikikadiriwa kwa mwandiko wake pekee. INTF inatoa mwanzoni mwa karne ya tatu (200-225), CSNTM mwishoni mwa karne ya pili au mwanzoni mwa ya tatu (karibu 200), na lebo ya maonyesho ya Chester Beatty Library karne ya tatu BK. Mapendekezo yaliyochapishwa yanaanzia baadaye katika karne ya kwanza hadi karne ya tatu.", "currentLocation": "Chester Beatty Library, Dublin (BP II, karatasi 56); University of Michigan Library, Ann Arbor (inv. 6238, karatasi 30)", "establishes": [ "Karatasi themanini na sita za kodeksi moja ya papyrus ya Kigiriki ya barua za Paulo zimehifadhiwa, zikiwa zimegawanywa kati ya Chester Beatty Library, Dublin (BP II, karatasi 56) na University of Michigan Library, Ann Arbor (inv. 6238, karatasi 30). Katalogi zinaiweka karibu 200 BK kwa misingi ya palografia. Inatoka Misri: lebo ya maonyesho ya Chester Beatty Library inatoa Misri na karne ya tatu BK kwa karatasi moja (BP II f.61).", "Karatasi zilizohifadhiwa zina, kwa mpangilio huu: Warumi (kuanzia 5:17, yenye mapengo), Waebrania, 1 Wakorintho na 2 Wakorintho, Waefeso, Wagalatia, Wafilipi, Wakolosai na 1 Wathesalonike (vipande, ikiishia katika 5:28). Kwa hiyo barua hizi zilikuwa zikinakiliwa pamoja kama kitabu kimoja, huku Waebrania ikiwekwa moja kwa moja baada ya Warumi.", "Warumi katika P46 tayari ina sura 16, yenye kumpendekeza Fibi wa Kenkrea na salamu kwa Priska, Akila na wengine (16:1–23). Lakini inaweka maneno ya mwisho ya kumsifu Mungu baada ya 15:33 na kuendelea moja kwa moja kutoka 16:23 hadi kichwa cha Waebrania. Maneno hayo ni 16:25–27 katika matoleo ya uhakiki wa maandishi na 14:24–26 katika namba za WEB.", "Waefeso yake ina kichwa cha barua kwa watu wa Efeso, lakini salamu katika Waefeso 1:1 hazitaji mji unaoelekezwa. Kwa hiyo P46 ni shahidi wa mapema wa umbo hilo la mstari." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Kama kodeksi iliwahi kuwa na 2 Wathesalonike, Filemoni au barua za kichungaji. Karatasi zake za mwanzo na mwisho zimepotea, na maamuzi kuhusu kiasi cha maandishi ambacho karatasi zilizokosekana zingeweza kubeba ni makadirio.", "Nani aliandika barua yoyote iliyomo. Kujumuisha Waebrania kunaonyesha watumiaji wa kodeksi waliiweka pamoja na barua za Paulo. Huo ni ushahidi wa maoni yao, si wa nani aliiandika. Maoni yalitofautiana: Clement wa Aleksandria aliita Waebrania kazi ya Paulo, ilhali huko Rumi Caius alihesabu barua kumi na tatu tu za Paulo (Eusebius, Church History 6.14.2; 6.20.3).", "Tarehe halisi, au matukio ya Matendo. Tarehe inatoka katika mwandiko, si kauli yoyote ndani ya hati. Kodeksi inashuhudia maandishi na kusambaa kwa barua, si historia zinayoeleza au maelezo ya Matendo kuhusu historia hiyo." ], "debate": "Maswali matatu yako wazi. Tarehe: wataalamu wengi wa miandiko ya kale huweka mwandiko karibu 200 BK; INTF, na Orsini na Clarysse, wanauweka mwanzoni mwa karne ya tatu, na Griffin alipendekeza takriban 175-225. Kim alipendekeza baadaye katika karne ya kwanza (wafuasi wachache), na Comfort na Barrett katikati ya karne ya pili, ilhali Sanders, mhariri wa kwanza wa karatasi za Michigan, aliuweka katika karne ya tatu. Yaliyomo: Kenyon aliona karatasi za mwisho zilizopotea kuwa chache mno kubeba barua za kichungaji, huku Duff akisema mwandishi alikuwa akibana maandishi na angeweza kuongeza karatasi. Toleo la Marcion pia halikuwa nazo (Tertullian, Against Marcion 5.21), lakini huo ni mlinganisho kutoka eneo na kundi tofauti, si ushahidi kuhusu kodeksi hii. Warumi: je, maneno ya sifa baada ya 15:33 yanaonyesha toleo la sura kumi na tano (Manson), au kuwekwa baadaye katika barua ya awali ya sura kumi na sita (Gamble)?", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Tarehe ya mapema zaidi", "statement": "Kim (1988) aliweka P46 baadaye katika karne ya kwanza, na Comfort na Barrett (2001) katikati ya karne ya pili. Ikiwa mmoja yuko sahihi, mkusanyo ni wa zamani zaidi. Wataalamu wengi wa miandiko ya kale hupendelea karibu 200 BK, na tarehe yoyote inayotokana na mwandiko ina nafasi ya makosa ya miongo kadhaa." }, { "label": "Barua za kichungaji zilipangwa au kuongezwa (Duff)", "statement": "Duff (1998) alisema mwandishi alikuwa akibana maandishi katika kurasa za baadaye na huenda alipanga karatasi za ziada, kwa hiyo kodeksi huenda ilikusudiwa kujumuisha barua za kichungaji. Uamuzi wa kinyume wa Kenyon unategemea kukadiria nafasi iliyokuwapo katika karatasi zilizopotea. Karatasi zilizohifadhiwa haziwezi kuamua swali kwa upande wowote." }, { "label": "Warumi ya sura kumi na tano", "statement": "Manson alisoma maneno ya sifa baada ya 15:33 kama mwisho wa toleo la sura kumi na tano lililotumwa Rumi, huku sura 16 ikiwa ya nakala kwa Efeso. Gamble alisema barua ya sura kumi na sita ndiyo ya asili. P46 yenyewe bado inanukuu sura 16 kama sehemu ya Warumi." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence/papyrus-46" }, { "id": "marcion-apostolikon", "kind": "literary-early-christian", "dateFrom": 138, "dateTo": 161, "corpusReferences": [], "confidence": "medium-high", "epistemicStatus": "source-supported", "scriptureReferences": [ "Colossians 4:16", "Ephesians 1:1", "Ephesians 2:12", "1 Timothy 6:7", "1 Timothy 6:10" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.timothy", "person.titus", "person.philemon" ], "placeIds": [ "place.ephesus", "place.colossae" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "Against Marcion", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "Adv. Marc. 5.21.1", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03125.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I wonder, however, when he received (into his Apostolicon) this letter which was written but to one man, that he rejected the two epistles to Timothy and the one to Titus, which all treat of ecclesiastical discipline.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "Against Marcion", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "Adv. Marc. 5.17.1", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03125.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "We have it on the true tradition of the Church, that this epistle was sent to the Ephesians, not to the Laodiceans. Marcion, however, was very desirous of giving it the new title (of Laodicean), as if he were extremely accurate in investigating such a point.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "Against Marcion", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "Adv. Marc. 5.11.12", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03125.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I here pass over discussion about another epistle, which we hold to have been written to the Ephesians, but the heretics to the Laodiceans.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "Against Marcion", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "Adv. Marc. 5.13.4", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03125.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But what serious gaps Marcion has made in this epistle especially, by withdrawing whole passages at his will, will be clear from the unmutilated text of our own copy.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "Against Marcion", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "Adv. Marc. 1.19.2", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03121.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Of this teacher there is no doubt that he is a heretic of the Antonine period, impious under the pious. Now, from Tiberius to Antoninus Pius, there are about 115 years and 6-1/2 months.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "Against Marcion", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "Adv. Marc. 1.15", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03121.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "no creation of His at all has been discovered up to the fifteenth of the Emperor Severus", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "Haer. 1.27.2", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0103127.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "In like manner, too, he dismembered the Epistles of Paul, removing all that is said by the apostle respecting that God who made the world, to the effect that He is the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 4.11.9 (quoting Justin)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250104.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And there is a certain Marcion of Pontus, who is even now still teaching his followers to think that there is some other God greater than the Creator.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "muratorian-fragment-anf", "work": "Muratorian Fragment (Canon Muratorianus)", "translator": "S. D. F. Salmond", "year": "1886", "locator": "Muratorian Fragment, sec. 3 (ANF 5 numbering)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0510.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "There are also in circulation one to the Laodiceans, and another to the Alexandrians, forged under the name of Paul, and addressed against the heresy of Marcion", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-lightfoot", "author": "Polycarp", "work": "Epistle of Polycarp to the Philippians", "translator": "J. B. Lightfoot", "year": "1891", "locator": "Phil. 4.1", "url": "https://www.earlychristianwritings.com/text/polycarp-lightfoot.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But the love of money is the beginning of all troubles.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "INTF NTVMR transcription of P46", "locator": "P46 folio 75r", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/transcript/get/?docid=10046&pageID=1310&format=xhtml", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "edition" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Adolf von Harnack", "work": "Marcion: Das Evangelium vom fremden Gott", "year": "1921 (2nd ed. 1924)", "view": "Reconstructed Marcion's Gospel and Apostolikon from patristic citations. He treated Marcion as a deliberate editor who removed what he took to be Judaizing additions, and saw his canon as a major stimulus to the church's New Testament." }, { "author": "Karl Holl (ed.)", "work": "Epiphanius, vol. 2: Panarion haer. 34-64 (Die griechischen christlichen Schriftsteller 31)", "year": "1922", "view": "Critical edition of the Greek text. In it Panarion 42 lists Marcion's ten letters from Galatians to Philippians, with Philemon ninth and Philippians tenth, and says Marcion also had parts of a so-called 'Laodiceans'." }, { "author": "John Knox", "work": "Marcion and the New Testament: An Essay in the Early History of the Canon", "year": "1942", "view": "Argued that Marcion's two-part scripture, a Gospel and the Apostle, was the catalyst for the formation of the catholic New Testament." }, { "author": "Hans von Campenhausen", "work": "Die Entstehung der christlichen Bibel", "year": "1968", "view": "Argued that Marcion was the first to create a defined Christian scripture, and that the church's New Testament took shape partly in response." }, { "author": "Hans von Campenhausen", "work": "Polykarp von Smyrna und die Pastoralbriefe", "year": "1951", "view": "Proposed that the Pastoral Letters were written in the mid-second century, possibly by Polycarp, partly against Marcion-like teaching." }, { "author": "John J. Clabeaux", "work": "A Lost Edition of the Letters of Paul: A Reassessment of the Text of the Pauline Corpus Attested by Marcion", "year": "1989", "view": "Argued that many readings attributed to Marcion are pre-Marcionite, shared with other early text forms, so Marcion edited an inherited collection less than his critics claimed." }, { "author": "Ulrich Schmid", "work": "Marcion und sein Apostolos: Rekonstruktion und historische Einordnung der marcionitischen Paulusbriefausgabe", "year": "1995", "view": "Re-examined the patristic evidence critically. Concluded that Marcion used an existing edition of Paul's letters and that demonstrably tendentious changes are relatively few." }, { "author": "David Trobisch", "work": "Paul's Letter Collection: Tracing the Origins", "year": "1994", "view": "Argued that collecting Paul's letters began with Paul's own editing of some of them, so letter collections predate Marcion." }, { "author": "Jason D. BeDuhn", "work": "The First New Testament: Marcion's Scriptural Canon", "year": "2013", "view": "Offers an English reconstruction of Marcion's Gospel and Apostolikon, presents it as the first New Testament, and treats patristic charges of mutilation with caution." }, { "author": "Judith M. Lieu", "work": "Marcion and the Making of a Heretic: God and Scripture in the Second Century", "year": "2015", "view": "Stresses that Marcion is known only through polemical portraits, and cautions against confident reconstruction of his text or motives." }, { "author": "Luke Timothy Johnson", "work": "The First and Second Letters to Timothy (Anchor Bible 35A)", "year": "2001", "view": "Defends Pauline authorship and a first-century date for 1–2 Timothy, against the view that they were written in the second century." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q201346", "label": "Marcion of Sinope" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q754941", "label": "Marcionism" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q731974", "label": "Panarion" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q174929", "label": "Tertullian" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1231095", "label": "Epistle to the Laodiceans" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q408673", "label": "Epistle to the Ephesians" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q369042", "label": "pastoral epistles" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "638955", "label": "Laodicea ad Lycum/Diospolis/Roas" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "599612", "label": "Ephesus/Arsinoe(ia)" } ], "title": "Toleo la Marcion la barua kumi za Paulo (Apostolikon)", "summary": "Marcion wa Pontus, mwalimu wa katikati ya karne ya pili, alitumia toleo la barua kumi za Paulo lililoanza na Wagalatia. Halikuwa na 1 Timotheo, 2 Timotheo na Tito, na kulingana na Tertullian liliipa Waefeso kichwa cha Kwa Walaodikia. Limepotea na linajulikana kupitia wapinzani tu, hasa Tertullian (kuanzia karibu 207) na Epiphanius (baadaye katika karne ya nne). Linaonyesha kwamba barua kumi zilikuwa zimekusanywa katika toleo moja kufikia katikati ya karne ya pili. Haliwezi kuweka tarehe ya barua za kichungaji lenyewe.", "dating": "Katikati ya karne ya pili. Tertullian anaweka Marcion chini ya Antoninus Pius (138–161); tarehe ya toleo lenyewe haijulikani na huenda ni ya mapema zaidi. Kipindi cha 138–161 kinachotolewa hapa ni cha shughuli za Marcion, si tarehe ya toleo.", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi (yamepotea; yameundwa upya kutoka nukuu za Tertullian, Epiphanius na wengine)", "establishes": [ "Marcion alikuwa akifanya kazi katikati ya karne ya pili. Justin Martyr, aliyenukuliwa na Eusebius (Church History 4.11.9), anamweleza kuwa bado hai na akifundisha. Tertullian anamwita mzushi wa utawala wa Antoninus Pius, 138–161 (Against Marcion 1.19.2). Irenaeus tayari anamshutumu kwa kukata katika barua za Paulo kila kilichomtaja Muumba wa ulimwengu kama Baba wa Kristo (Against Heresies 1.27.2).", "Tertullian anapinga barua kumi kwa mpangilio huu katika Against Marcion book 5: Wagalatia, 1 Wakorintho, 2 Wakorintho, Warumi, 1 Wathesalonike, 2 Wathesalonike, Kwa Walaodikia (Waefeso), Wakolosai, Wafilipi na Filemoni. Epiphanius (Panarion 42), shahidi wa baadaye anayesema anatumia maandishi ya Marcion mwenyewe katika hoja zake, anatoa barua zilezile kumi huku Wagalatia ikiwa ya kwanza, lakini anataja Waefeso na kuweka Filemoni ya tisa na Wafilipi ya kumi.", "1 Timotheo, 2 Timotheo na Tito hazikuwa katika toleo. Tertullian anasema Marcion alikubali barua fupi binafsi kwa Filemoni lakini alikataa barua kwa Timotheo na Tito (Against Marcion 5.21.1). Waebrania haionekani katika orodha yoyote kati ya hizo mbili.", "Katika matumizi ya Wamarcioni, barua ambayo kanisa liliijua kama Waefeso ilikuwa na kichwa Kwa Walaodikia. Tertullian, akijadili Waefeso 2:12, anasema wazushi wanashikilia kwamba iliandikwa kwa Walaodikia, na anamlaumu Marcion kwa kichwa kipya (Against Marcion 5.11.12; 5.17.1). Epiphanius (Panarion 42) badala yake anaorodhesha Waefeso, lakini anasema Marcion pia alikuwa na sehemu za kinachoitwa Kwa Walaodikia." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Haitoi maneno halisi ya Marcion. Maandishi yamehifadhiwa katika nukuu na maelezo ya wapinzani tu, kwa hiyo uundaji upya wa kisasa hutofautiana, na baadhi ya usomaji unaolaumiwa kwa Marcion huenda ni tofauti za zamani alizorithi.", "Haionyeshi barua za kichungaji ziliandikwa lini au na nani. Kutokuwapo kwake kunaendana na dai la Tertullian kwamba Marcion alizikataa. Pia kunaendana na Marcion kutozijua, au kuandikwa baadaye.", "Haionyeshi kwamba Waefeso ilitumwa Laodikia mwanzoni. Kichwa cha Marcion huenda ni hitimisho kutoka Wakolosai 4:16 lililotumiwa kwa nakala isiyo na anwani ya Efeso. Tertullian anachukulia kichwa kama uvumbuzi wa Marcion.", "Haionyeshi kwamba Marcion alibuni mkusanyo wa barua za Paulo, au kwamba Agano Jipya la kanisa lilikuwa mwitikio kwake tu." ], "debate": "Maswali matatu bado yako wazi. Kwanza, je, Marcion alikusanya toleo hili au kulirithi, na alibadilisha kiasi gani? Wakosoaji wake wanadai alikata kwa makusudi (Tertullian, Against Marcion 5.13.4). Clabeaux na Schmid wanasema usomaji wake mwingi tayari ulikuwa ukisambaa, kwa hiyo alifanyia kazi mkusanyo aliourithi. Pili, je, kutokuwapo kwa 1 Timotheo, 2 Timotheo na Tito kunamaanisha alizikataa, kama Tertullian anavyosema? Huenda hakuzijua, au huenda hazikuwa zimeandikwa bado. Tatu, je, Kwa Walaodikia inahifadhi anwani halisi ya barua ambayo anwani yake ya Efeso haipo katika angalau nakala moja ya mapema (P46)? Au Marcion aliihitimisha kutoka Wakolosai 4:16?", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Toleo lililorithiwa, likihaririwa kidogo", "statement": "Clabeaux (1989) na Schmid (1995) wanasema Marcion alitumia toleo lililokuwapo la barua za Paulo. Usomaji mwingi ambao wakosoaji wake walimlaumu nao pia unaonekana katika maumbo mengine ya mapema ya maandishi. Kwa mtazamo huu, mabadiliko yake ya makusudi yalikuwa machache kuliko Tertullian na Epiphanius wanavyodokeza." }, { "label": "Barua za kichungaji ziliandikwa wakati wa Marcion (von Campenhausen)", "statement": "Mtazamo wa wachache, uliotetewa na von Campenhausen (1951), unaweka 1 Timotheo, 2 Timotheo na Tito katikati ya karne ya pili na kupendekeza Polykarp au mtu wa wakati wake kama mwandishi, akiandika kwa sehemu dhidi ya mafundisho kama ya Marcion. Kwa mtazamo huu, barua hazikuwa katika toleo la Marcion kwa sababu zilikuwa mpya au bado hazikuwa zikisambaa." }, { "label": "Barua za kichungaji zilikuwapo kabla ya Marcion", "statement": "Iwe ziliandikwa na Paulo (kama Johnson anavyosema) au mfuasi wa baadaye karibu na mwisho wa karne ya kwanza na mwanzo wa pili, barua tayari zilikuwapo na Marcion aliziondoa, kama Tertullian anavyosema. Ikiwa barua ya Polykarp kwa Filipi (4.1) ina mwangwi wa 1 Timotheo 6:7 na 6:10, 1 Timotheo ilijulikana kabla ya Marcion, ingawa methali ya pamoja ingeweza kueleza kufanana huko." }, { "label": "Kwa Walaodikia kama anwani halisi", "statement": "Angalau nakala moja ya mapema ya Waefeso (P46) haitaji mji katika mstari wa mwanzo, kwa hiyo baadhi ya wasomi huchukulia barua kama ya kuzungushwa, au iliyokusudiwa Laodikia, wakiitambulisha na barua ya Wakolosai 4:16. Muratorian Fragment inataja Kwa Walaodikia ya kughushi iliyohusishwa na uzushi wa Marcion, labda barua tofauti. Salmond anatafsiri Kilatini kama kuelekezwa dhidi ya; watafsiri wengine hukielewa kama kuandikwa kuendeleza uzushi wa Marcion." }, { "label": "Marcion kama kichocheo cha kanoni", "statement": "Harnack, Knox na von Campenhausen waliona maandiko ya Marcion ya sehemu mbili, Injili na Mtume, kama kichocheo muhimu kwa Agano Jipya la kanisa. Trobisch na wengine wanasema barua za Paulo zilikuwa zikikusanywa muda mrefu kabla ya Marcion. Kwa mtazamo huo, toleo lake linaonyesha utaratibu uliokuwapo badala ya kuanzisha mmoja." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-marcion-apostolikon" }, { "id": "papyrus-32", "kind": "papyrus", "dateFrom": 200, "dateTo": 299, "corpusReferences": [ "Gregory-Aland P32", "P.Ryl. 1 5", "Manchester, John Rylands Library, Gr. P. 5" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Titus 1:11-15", "Titus 2:3-8", "Titus 3:10", "1 Timothy 3:13-4:8", "Acts 28:30-31" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.titus" ], "placeIds": [ "place.crete", "place.rome" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste der griechischen Handschriften des Neuen Testaments (INTF online catalogue)", "locator": "Gregory-Aland P32", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=10032&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste der griechischen Handschriften des Neuen Testaments (INTF online catalogue)", "locator": "Gregory-Aland P133", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=10133&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste der griechischen Handschriften des Neuen Testaments (INTF online catalogue)", "locator": "Gregory-Aland P46", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=10046&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "Against Marcion (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 3)", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "Adv. Marc. 5.21.1", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03125.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I wonder, however, when he received (into his Apostolicon) this letter which was written but to one man, that he rejected the two epistles to Timothy and the one to Titus, which all treat of ecclesiastical discipline.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus", "work": "Against Heresies (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 1)", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "Against Heresies 3.3.3-4", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0103303.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Of this Linus, Paul makes mention in the Epistles to Timothy.", "role": "primary-text" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Arthur S. Hunt", "work": "Catalogue of the Greek Papyri in the John Rylands Library, Manchester, vol. 1: Literary Texts (Nos. 1-61)", "year": "1911", "view": "Published the fragment as No. 5 and dated it to the third century, comparing the hand to the Oxyrhynchus Genesis (P.Oxy. 656) and judging it perhaps the later of the two. He placed it at the bottom of a leaf from a papyrus book, noted an early variant at Titus 2:7 without treating it as original, and named no find-spot, which by his preface means the provenance was not assured." }, { "author": "Raymond E. Brown", "work": "An Introduction to the New Testament", "year": "1997", "view": "Sets out the arguments both for Paul's direct authorship of Titus and 1 Timothy and for later authorship within the Pauline tradition, in the section 'Who Wrote Titus and I Timothy?'" } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q2051055", "label": "Papyrus 32" } ], "title": "Papyrus 32: kipande cha mapema cha barua kwa Tito", "summary": "P32 ni kipande kidogo cha papyrus huko Manchester (P.Ryl. 1 5) kinachohifadhi sehemu za Tito 1:11–15 na 2:3–8 kutoka katika karatasi ya kodeksi. Kimewekwa kwa mwandiko katika karne ya tatu (INTF: 200-225 BK; Hunt alifikiri huenda ni cha baadaye kuliko mwandiko wa karne ya tatu alioulinganisha nacho). Pamoja na P133, ni miongoni mwa hati za zamani zaidi za barua za kichungaji zilizohifadhiwa. Kinaonyesha Tito ilikuwa ikinakiliwa katika umbo la kitabu kufikia wakati huo; hakiwezi kuamua nani aliandika barua au lini.", "dating": "Karne ya tatu kwa mwandiko (Hunt 1911, aliyefikiri huenda ni cha baadaye kuliko mwandiko wa karne ya tatu alioulinganisha nacho); mwanzoni mwa karne ya tatu, 200-225 BK, katika katalogi ya INTF. Kipindi cha 200-299 kinajumuisha maamuzi yote mawili.", "currentLocation": "John Rylands Library, University of Manchester (Gr. P. 5)", "establishes": [ "Kipande cha karibu 10.6 kwa 4.9 cm kutoka chini ya karatasi ya kodeksi ya papyrus kinahifadhi sehemu za Tito 1:11–15 upande mmoja na Tito 2:3–8 upande mwingine. A. S. Hunt alikichapisha mwaka wa 1911 kama P.Ryl. 1 5, na kimeorodheshwa kama Gregory-Aland P32 (Manchester, Gr. P. 5).", "Tarehe yake inategemea mwandiko pekee. Hunt (1911) aliulinganisha na papyrus ya Mwanzo ya Oxyrhynchus (P.Oxy. 656), akauweka katika karne ya tatu na kufikiri huenda ni wa baadaye kati ya miandiko hiyo miwili. Katalogi ya INTF inatoa 200-225 BK.", "Pamoja na P133 (1 Timotheo 3:13–4:8, iliyoorodheshwa kama ya karne ya tatu), ni miongoni mwa hati za zamani zaidi zinazojulikana za barua za kichungaji. Hakuna barua kati ya hizo tatu inayoonekana katika karatasi za P46 zilizohifadhiwa, kodeksi ya papyrus ya barua za Paulo ya mwanzoni mwa karne ya tatu.", "Hunt (1911) alitaja tofauti ya mapema ya herufi moja katika neno katika Tito 2:7, ambayo vinginevyo aliijua tu kama tofauti iliyorekodiwa katika hati mbili za karne ya tisa. Alitahadharisha kwamba ukale wake hauthibitishi kuwa ya asili." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Haionyeshi nani aliandika Tito au lini. Nakala iliyofanywa zaidi ya karne moja baada ya Paulo inaendana na uandishi wa Paulo na pia kutungwa kwa jina lake baada ya kifo chake.", "Si ushahidi wa mapema zaidi kwamba Tito ilikuwapo. Irenaeus, aliyeandika baadaye katika karne ya pili, tayari anahusisha Tito 3:10 na Paulo na kutaja barua za Paulo kwa Timotheo (Against Heresies 3.3.3-4).", "Haiwezi kuonyesha kodeksi yake ilikuwa na nini kingine (Tito pekee, barua tatu za kichungaji au mkusanyo mpana wa Paulo), au ilinakiliwa au kupatikana wapi. Hunt hataji mahali ilipopatikana, na kwa utaratibu alioeleza mwenyewe hilo humaanisha asili yake haikujulikana kwa uhakika." ], "debate": "Maswali mawili yako wazi. La kwanza ni tarehe. P32 imewekwa kwa mwandiko tu, kwa hiyo tarehe yoyote ni makadirio: Hunt alisema karne ya tatu, huenda baadaye kuliko mwandiko alioulinganisha nayo, na katalogi ya INTF inasema 200-225 BK. La pili ni umuhimu wake. Tertullian anaripoti kwamba Tito haikuwapo katika mkusanyo wa Marcion wa katikati ya karne ya pili, na haionekani katika kilichohifadhiwa cha P46. Baadhi hueleza kutokuwapo huko kama kukataliwa au kuachwa; wengine hukusoma kama ishara ya kutungwa baadaye. P32 inaonyesha Tito ikinakiliwa kama kitabu kufikia karne ya tatu, lakini haiwezi kuamua uandishi.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Iliandikwa na Paulo", "statement": "Wasomi wengi wa kiinjili na wengine huamini kwamba Paulo aliandika Tito, huenda kwa kutumia katibu, baada ya kuachiliwa kutoka kuzuiliwa na dola ya Rumi kwa Matendo 28:30–31, jambo ambalo Matendo haisimulii lakini mtazamo huu unaliunda upya kutoka katika barua na mapokeo ya baadaye. P32 inaendana na mtazamo huu lakini haiwezi kuuthibitisha, kwa sababu ni nakala iliyofanywa muda mrefu baada ya maisha ya Paulo." }, { "label": "Iliandikwa baadaye kwa jina la Paulo", "statement": "Wasomi wengi wakosoaji huona barua za kichungaji kuwa kazi ya mfuasi aliyeandika kwa jina la Paulo baada ya kifo chake. Wanataja msamiati, mpangilio wa kanisa na kutokuwapo kwa barua katika mkusanyo wa Marcion. Nakala ya karne ya tatu inaendana sawasawa na mtazamo huu." }, { "label": "Kipindi kipana zaidi cha tarehe kwa kipande", "statement": "Kwa sababu P32 inawekwa kwa kulinganisha miandiko tu, tarehe yake ni kipindi cha kukadiria badala ya mahali pa uhakika. Hunt mwenyewe alifikiri huenda ni ya baadaye kuliko papyrus ya Mwanzo ya karne ya tatu aliyoilinganisha nayo, kwa hiyo tarehe ya baadaye katika karne ya tatu haiwezi kuondolewa kama uwezekano." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-papyrus-32" }, { "id": "irenaeus-paul", "kind": "literary-early-christian", "dateFrom": 176, "dateTo": 189, "corpusReferences": [], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "1 Timothy 1:4", "1 Timothy 6:7", "1 Timothy 6:10", "1 Timothy 6:20", "2 Timothy 4:10-11", "2 Timothy 4:21", "Titus 3:10", "Colossians 4:14", "Galatians 2:1-2", "Acts 9:15-16", "Acts 11:27-30", "Acts 15:1-4", "Acts 16:8-13", "Acts 20:5-6", "Acts 27:1-28:16" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.luke", "person.timothy", "person.titus" ], "placeIds": [ "place.rome", "place.troas", "place.philippi", "place.jerusalem", "place.puteoli" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "Haer. 1, preface 1 (ANF editors' note identifies 1 Tim 1:4)", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.ix.ii.i.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "as certain men have set the truth aside, and bring in lying words and vain genealogies, which, as the apostle says,", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "Haer. 3.1.1", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.ix.iv.ii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Luke also, the companion of Paul, recorded in a book the Gospel preached by him.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "Haer. 3.3.3", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.ix.iv.iv.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The blessed apostles, then, having founded and built up the Church, committed into the hands of Linus the office of the episcopate. Of this Linus, Paul makes mention in the Epistles to Timothy.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "Haer. 3.3.4 (Titus 3:10 cited as Paul's)", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.ix.iv.iv.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Such was the horror which the apostles and their disciples had against holding even verbal communication with any corrupters of the truth; as Paul also says,", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "Haer. 3.13.3", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.ix.iv.xiv.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "If, then, any one shall, from the Acts of the Apostles, carefully scrutinize the time concerning which it is written that he went up to Jerusalem on account of the forementioned question, he will find those years mentioned by Paul coinciding with it.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "Haer. 3.14.1", "url": "https://www.ccel.org/ccel/schaff/anf01.ix.iv.xv.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "As Luke was present at all these occurrences, he carefully noted them down in writing, so that he cannot be convicted of falsehood or boastfulness", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "Haer. 3.15.1", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0103315.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "For neither can they contend that Paul was no apostle, when he was chosen for this purpose; nor can they prove Luke guilty of falsehood, when he proclaims the truth to us with all diligence.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "Haer. 1.16.3 (Titus 3:10 cited as Paul's command)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0103116.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "irenaeus-against-heresies-anf", "author": "Irenaeus", "work": "Against Heresies", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and William Rambaut", "year": "1885", "locator": "Haer. 5, preface (the work's title adopts the phrase of 1 Tim 6:20)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0103500.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 5.5.9", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250105.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "In the third book of his work Against Heresies he has inserted a list of the bishops of Rome, bringing it down as far as Eleutherus (whose times we are now considering), under whom he composed his work.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 5.6.1 (Greek text of Haer. 3.3.3)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250105.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Paul speaks of this Linus in his Epistles to Timothy.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 5.7.1 (title Irenaeus gave his five books)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250105.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 5.8.3 (Greek text of Haer. 3.1.1)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250105.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "and Luke, the attendant of Paul, recorded in a book the Gospel which Paul had declared.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 5.22", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250105.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "In the tenth year of the reign of Commodus, Victor succeeded Eleutherus, the latter having held the episcopate for thirteen years.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "Against Marcion", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885", "locator": "Adv. Marc. 5.21", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03125.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I wonder, however, when he received (into his Apostolicon) this letter which was written but to one man, that he rejected the two epistles to Timothy and the one to Titus, which all treat of ecclesiastical discipline.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "muratorian-fragment-anf", "work": "Muratorian Fragment", "translator": "S. D. F. Salmond", "year": "1886", "locator": "Muratorian Fragment, section 2 (printed in ANF 5 among the 'Fragments of Caius')", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0510.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Moreover, the Acts of all the Apostles are comprised by Luke in one book, and addressed to the most excellent Theophilus", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "muratorian-fragment-anf", "work": "Muratorian Fragment", "translator": "S. D. F. Salmond", "year": "1886", "locator": "Muratorian Fragment, section 3 (printed in ANF 5 among the 'Fragments of Caius')", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0510.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "He wrote, besides these, one to Philemon, and one to Titus, and two to Timothy", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "polycarp-philippians-anf", "author": "Polycarp", "work": "Epistle to the Philippians", "translator": "Alexander Roberts and James Donaldson", "year": "1885", "locator": "Phil. 4.1 (parallels 1 Tim 6:7, 10 without naming Paul)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0136.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "primary-text" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Joseph B. Tyson", "work": "Marcion and Luke-Acts: A Defining Struggle", "year": "2006", "view": "Proposes that Acts and the final form of Luke's Gospel were published around 120–125, with the need to counter Marcion as a prominent motive." }, { "author": "Bart D. Ehrman", "work": "Forged: Writing in the Name of God", "year": "2011", "view": "Argues that a number of New Testament writings bearing apostles' names were written by later authors, and counts the Pastoral Epistles among them." }, { "author": "Stanley E. Porter", "work": "The Pastoral Epistles: A Commentary on the Greek Text", "year": "2023", "view": "Defends Paul's authorship of the Pastoral Epistles in a detailed linguistic commentary on the Greek text." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q182123", "label": "Irenaeus" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1281900", "label": "Against Heresies (Irenaeus)" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "167717", "label": "Lugdunum (Lyon), Irenaeus's see" } ], "title": "Irenaeus wa Lyon kuhusu barua za kichungaji na mwandishi wa Matendo", "summary": "Irenaeus wa Lyon, akiandika Against Heresies karibu 180 BK, ananukuu wazi barua kwa Timotheo na Tito kama za Paulo na kusema Luka, anayemwita mwenzi asiyeachana na Paulo, aliandika Injili na Matendo. Ni miongoni mwa mashahidi wa mapema zaidi wanaoweza kupewa tarehe wa kuhusishwa huko kwa kazi hizo. Hiyo inaonyesha jinsi vitabu vilivyopokelewa kufikia wakati huo; haiamui uandishi, kwa kuwa hoja yake kuhusu Luka kuwa mwenzi inategemea kwa sehemu Matendo yenyewe.", "dating": "Karibu 180 BK (Book III iliandikwa wakati Eleutherius alikuwa askofu wa Rumi; Eusebius anampa miaka kumi na tatu inayoisha katika mwaka wa kumi wa Commodus, karibu 189)", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi (kamili katika tafsiri ya kale ya Kilatini tu; sehemu za Kigiriki zimehifadhiwa katika nukuu za Hippolytus, Epiphanius na Eusebius)", "establishes": [ "Kufikia karibu 180 BK, barua kwa Timotheo na Tito zilisomwa kama za Paulo katika makanisa ambayo Irenaeus anawakilisha. Anamtaja Paulo anaponukuu 2 Timotheo (Against Heresies 3.3.3; 3.14.1) na Tito (1.16.3; 3.3.4), ananukuu 1 Timotheo 1:4 kama maneno ya mtume katika utangulizi wake wa kwanza, na kuipa kazi kichwa kilichotokana na 1 Timotheo 6:20 (5, preface; Eusebius, Church History 5.7.1).", "Irenaeus anamtaja Luka, anayemwita mwenzi wa Paulo, kama mwandishi wa Injili ya Tatu (3.1.1) na kuchukulia Matendo kuwa kazi ya Luka. Ananukuu vifungu vinavyotumia nafsi ya kwanza wingi katika Matendo 16 na 20 na kufupisha safari iliyobaki, hadi safari ya baharini kwenda Puteoli na Rumi, kama rekodi ya Luka mwenyewe ya matukio aliyoshuhudia (3.14.1). Pia anamhusisha Luka na maelezo ya Matendo kuhusu mwito wa Paulo (3.15.1).", "Anasoma Matendo pamoja na barua za Paulo. Anasema ziara ya Yerusalemu ya Wagalatia 2:1–2 ndiyo inayorekodiwa katika Matendo 15:2, iliyofanywa kwa suala la kutahiriwa, hivyo kauli ya Paulo inakubaliana na maelezo ya Luka (3.13.3). Kama Wagalatia 2 inalingana na Matendo 15 au ziara ya njaa ya Matendo 11:27–30 bado inajadiliwa.", "Book III inaweza kuwekwa katika kipindi cha uaskofu wa Eleutherius. Orodha yake ya maaskofu wa Rumi inaanzia Linus, ambaye Irenaeus anamtambulisha na Linus wa barua kwa Timotheo, hadi Eleutherius kama askofu wa wakati huo (3.3.3). Eusebius ananukuu orodha kwa Kigiriki na, akiitegemea, kusema kazi ilitungwa chini ya Eleutherius (Church History 5.5.9; 5.6.1)." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Haithibitishi yenyewe kwamba Paulo aliandika barua za kichungaji au kwamba Luka aliandika Matendo. Irenaeus anaandika zaidi ya karne moja baada ya Paulo, katikati ya hoja dhidi ya wazushi, na hoja yake ya Luka kuwa mwenzi inategemea kwa sehemu vifungu vinavyotumia nafsi ya kwanza wingi katika Matendo, Wakolosai 4:14 na 2 Timotheo 4:11 vyenyewe.", "Si dalili ya kwanza ya vitabu hivi. Barua ya Polykarp kwa Filipi (4.1) ina kufanana kwa mapema zaidi na 1 Timotheo, ingawa haimtaji Paulo. Irenaeus anaonyesha kuhusishwa wazi na mwandishi, si matumizi ya kwanza. Wala hayuko peke yake: Muratorian Fragment, ambayo tarehe yake inabishaniwa, pia inahusisha Matendo na Luka na kuorodhesha barua moja kwa Tito na mbili kwa Timotheo kati ya barua za Paulo.", "Orodha yake ya urithi wa uongozi, yenye Linus kama askofu wa kwanza wa Rumi, ni mapokeo ya kanisa ya mwishoni mwa karne ya pili. Haithibitishi kwa kujitegemea jinsi kanisa la Rumi lilivyopangwa wakati wa maisha ya Paulo." ], "debate": "Wasomi hutofautiana kuhusu kile ambacho ushahidi wa Irenaeus unathibitisha. Wasomi wengi wakosoaji huona barua za kichungaji kuwa zimeandikwa na mwingine kwa jina la Paulo na kutilia shaka kwamba mwenzi wa Paulo aliandika Matendo; baadhi huweka Matendo katika karne ya pili, huku Tyson akiihusisha na mzozo wa Marcion. Kwa mtazamo huo, Irenaeus anashuhudia kupokelewa, si asili. Wengine huamini kwamba kuhusisha kwake kazi na waandishi wale wale kunahifadhi mapokeo ya awali yanayoendana na maandishi. Tertullian anasema Marcion alikataa barua za kichungaji; wasomi wanabishana kama alizikataa au hakuzijua kamwe.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Makubaliano ya baadaye", "statement": "Kufikia karibu 180, kuhusishwa huko kwa waandishi kulikuwa kumekubaliwa katika makanisa aliyoyajua Irenaeus huko Gaul, Rumi na Asia, lakini kusambaa kwa miongo kadhaa kungeweza kuleta makubaliano hayo. Kwa mtazamo huu, barua za kichungaji huenda ni za baada ya Paulo na Matendo ni kazi ya mwandishi wa baadaye, na Irenaeus anashuhudia kupokelewa tu." }, { "label": "Mapokeo ya awali yaliyohifadhiwa", "statement": "Irenaeus anasema alimwona Polykarp katika ujana wake na kurejelea makanisa yaliyoanzishwa na mitume. Kwa mtazamo huu, anapitisha mapokeo ambayo tayari yalikuwa yameimarika. Pamoja na vifungu vinavyotumia nafsi ya kwanza wingi katika Matendo, yanaunga mkono Luka kuandika Matendo na yanaendana na Paulo kuandika barua za kichungaji." }, { "label": "Kwa sehemu hitimisho kutoka maandishini", "statement": "Huenda Irenaeus alimtambua Luka kwa kusoma vifungu vinavyotumia nafsi ya kwanza wingi katika Matendo pamoja na Wakolosai 4:14 na 2 Timotheo 4:11. Ikiwa ndivyo, ushahidi wake hauko huru kabisa na ushahidi wa Agano Jipya unaotumiwa kuungwa mkono nao." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-irenaeus-paul" }, { "id": "acts-paul-thecla", "kind": "literary-early-christian", "dateFrom": 150, "dateTo": 200, "corpusReferences": [], "confidence": "medium-high", "epistemicStatus": "tradition", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 13:50-51", "2 Timothy 1:15-18", "2 Timothy 2:17-18", "2 Timothy 3:11", "2 Timothy 4:10", "2 Timothy 4:19", "2 Corinthians 10:10", "Galatians 4:13-14" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.titus", "person.demas", "person.onesiphorus" ], "placeIds": [ "place.iconium", "place.lystra", "place.pisidian-antioch", "place.myra" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "acts-paul-thecla-anf", "author": "Anonymous", "work": "Acts of Paul and Thecla (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 8)", "translator": "Alexander Walker", "year": "1886", "locator": "Acts of Paul and Thecla 1 (section numbers as in James 1924): Paul goes up to Iconium", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0816.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "As Paul was going up to Iconium after the flight from Antioch, his fellow-travellers were Demas and Ermogenes, full of hypocrisy", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "acts-paul-thecla-anf", "author": "Anonymous", "work": "Acts of Paul and Thecla (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 8)", "translator": "Alexander Walker", "year": "1886", "locator": "Acts of Paul and Thecla 3 (section numbers as in James 1924): Onesiphorus waits on the road to Lystra", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0816.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And he went along the road to Lystra, and stood waiting for him, and kept looking at the passers by according to the description of Titus.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "acts-paul-thecla-anf", "author": "Anonymous", "work": "Acts of Paul and Thecla (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 8)", "translator": "Alexander Walker", "year": "1886", "locator": "Acts of Paul and Thecla 3 (section numbers as in James 1924): description of Paul", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0816.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And he saw Paul coming, a man small in size, bald-headed, bandy-legged, well-built, with eyebrows meeting, rather long-nosed, full of grace. For sometimes he seemed like a man, and sometimes he had the countenance of an angel.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "acts-paul-thecla-anf", "author": "Anonymous", "work": "Acts of Paul and Thecla (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 8)", "translator": "Alexander Walker", "year": "1886", "locator": "Acts of Paul and Thecla 14 (section numbers as in James 1924): Demas and Hermogenes on the resurrection", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0816.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "And we shall teach you that the resurrection of which this man speaks has taken place, because it has already taken place in the children which we have", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "acts-paul-thecla-anf", "author": "Anonymous", "work": "Acts of Paul and Thecla (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 8)", "translator": "Alexander Walker", "year": "1886", "locator": "Acts of Paul and Thecla, editor's note introducing the alternative ending from Grabe's manuscript", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0816.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Instead of the last two sections, the ms. which Dr. Grabe used has the following:", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-baptism-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "On Baptism (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 3)", "translator": "S. Thelwall", "year": "1885", "locator": "On Baptism 17.5 (Thecla's example)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0321.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But if the writings which wrongly go under Paul's name, claim Thecla's example as a licence for women's teaching and baptizing", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-baptism-anf", "author": "Tertullian", "work": "On Baptism (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 3)", "translator": "S. Thelwall", "year": "1885", "locator": "On Baptism 17.5", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/0321.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "let them know that, in Asia, the presbyter who composed that writing, as if he were augmenting Paul's fame from his own store, after being convicted, and confessing that he had done it from love of Paul, was removed from his office.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History (Nicene and Post-Nicene Fathers, Series II vol. 1)", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 3.25.4", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250103.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Among the rejected writings must be reckoned also the Acts of Paul, and the so-called Shepherd, and the Apocalypse of Peter", "role": "primary-text" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Abraham J. Malherbe", "work": "A Physical Description of Paul (Harvard Theological Review 79)", "year": "1986", "view": "Argues that Greek influence is visible in early Christian reflection on Paul's physical appearance, and reads the Thecla portrait in that light." }, { "author": "Dennis Ronald MacDonald", "work": "The Legend and the Apostle: The Battle for Paul in Story and Canon", "year": "1983", "view": "Argues that legends about Paul and Thecla were transmitted orally before being written into the Acts of Paul, and that the author of the Pastoral Epistles knew such legends and wrote in Paul's name partly to counter them." }, { "author": "Stephen J. Davis", "work": "The Cult of Saint Thecla: A Tradition of Women's Piety in Late Antiquity", "year": "2001", "view": "Reconstructs the cult of Thecla in Asia Minor and Egypt from literary, artistic and archaeological evidence, and argues that it consistently promoted virginity and pilgrimage in ways that strengthened women's religious authority." }, { "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "The Church in the Roman Empire before A.D. 170", "year": "1893", "view": "Holds that the plain portrait of Paul embodies very early tradition and that the tale's Royal Road toward Lystra shows a writer who knew the localities, while disclaiming that the events narrated are historical." }, { "author": "M. R. James", "work": "The Apocryphal New Testament", "year": "1924", "view": "Dates the Acts of Paul to about AD 160 from Tertullian's report, treats Queen Tryphaena as a historical personage, and reports that Ramsay's theory of an earlier written Thecla story was not generally accepted." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q1282652", "label": "Acts of Paul and Thecla" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q764765", "label": "Acts of Paul" } ], "title": "Acts of Paul and Thecla na maelezo ya mapema zaidi ya Paulo", "summary": "Acts of Paul and Thecla inaonyesha jinsi Wakristo wa karne ya pili walivyomkumbuka na kumfikiria Paulo; si rekodi huru ya safari zake. Hadithi hii ya kusisimua, tukio moja la Acts of Paul ambalo pia lilisambaa kando, ina maelezo ya mapema zaidi yanayojulikana ya sura ya Paulo. Tertullian, akiandika karibu 200 BK, anasema mzee wa kanisa katika Asia alitunga maandishi kuhusu Thekla chini ya jina la Paulo kwa kumpenda Paulo na akaondolewa katika huduma.", "dating": "Ilitungwa kabla ya On Baptism ya Tertullian (karibu 200 BK; Ramsay aliiweka karibu 195), inaelekea karibu 150-200 BK; M. R. James (1924) alipendekeza karibu 160 BK. Hati zilizohifadhiwa ni za baadaye sana.", "currentLocation": "Mapokeo ya maandishi (Kigiriki, pamoja na matoleo ya Kikopti, Kilatini, Kisiria na mengine)", "establishes": [ "Kufikia karibu 200 BK, maandishi chini ya jina la Paulo yalitumia mfano wa Thekla kutetea wanawake kufundisha na kubatiza. Tertullian anasema mzee wa kanisa katika Asia aliyatunga kana kwamba anaongeza sifa ya Paulo na, baada ya kupatikana na hatia na kukiri alifanya hivyo kwa kumpenda Paulo, akaondolewa katika huduma (On Baptism 17.5).", "Yanatoa maelezo ya mapema zaidi yanayojulikana ya sura ya Paulo: mfupi, mwenye upara, miguu iliyopinda, mwenye mwili imara, nyusi zinazokutana na pua ndefu kiasi, aliyejaa neema, wakati mwingine akionekana mtu na wakati mwingine mwenye uso wa malaika (Acts of Paul and Thecla 3).", "Yanaanza Paulo akipanda kwenda Ikonio baada ya kukimbia Antiokia ya Pisidia, kama katika Matendo 13:50–51, huku Onesiforo akimsubiri njiani kwenda Listra (linganisha 2 Timotheo 3:11). Yanatumia majina yanayopatikana pia katika 2 Timotheo (Dema, Hermogene, Onesiforo, Tito), na kuwapa Dema na Hermogene fundisho kwamba ufufuo umekwisha kutokea, ambalo 2 Timotheo 2:17–18 inahusisha na Himenayo na Fileto.", "Kufikia mwanzoni mwa karne ya nne, Eusebius alihesabu Acts of Paul kati ya maandishi yaliyokataliwa, nje ya vitabu vilivyokubaliwa (Church History 3.25.4)." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Haionyeshi Paulo alivyokuwa anaonekana. Picha iliandikwa huenda miaka tisini au zaidi baada ya kifo chake, na mtoa habari anayetajwa, Tito, ni sehemu ya hadithi yenyewe.", "Si shahidi huru wa Matendo. Mahali na majina yake yanaweza kutoka Matendo na 2 Timotheo, kwa hiyo kukubaliana nayo hakuongezi uthibitisho tofauti.", "Haithibitishi kesi za Thekla, miujiza yake au nafasi ya malkia Tryphaena katika hayo. Hata ikiwa Tryphaena ndiye malkia tegemezi wa kihistoria aliyetambuliwa na James na Ramsay, kutaja mtu halisi hakuthibitishi tukio.", "Tertullian anatambua kazi kwa matumizi yake ya mfano wa Thekla tu. Haijaonyeshwa kwamba maandishi yake yalilingana tukio kwa tukio na Acts of Paul and Thecla iliyohifadhiwa; hati ni za baadaye sana, na mashahidi hutofautiana (toleo la Walker linachapisha mwisho mwingine kutoka hati ya Grabe)." ], "debate": "Maswali mawili bado yako wazi. Kwanza, je, picha ya Paulo inahifadhi kumbukumbu? Ramsay aliona maelezo yake ya kawaida yasiyomsifu kuwa na mapokeo ya mapema sana, na jiografia yake ya eneo kuonyesha mwandishi aliyelijua; wengine husoma sifa hizo kupitia desturi za Kigiriki za kueleza mwili na tabia, jambo ambalo lingeifanya picha ya kifasihi. Pili, hadithi inahusianaje na 2 Timotheo, ambayo inashirikiana nayo majina? Huenda mwandishi aliyakopa kutoka katika barua, au, kama MacDonald alivyosema, vyote viwili vinaweza kuonyesha hadithi za mdomo kuhusu Paulo zilizobishaniwa.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Kumbukumbu ya mapema ya eneo", "statement": "W. M. Ramsay (1893) alisema picha ya kawaida isiyosifu inabeba mapokeo ya mapema sana, na kwamba Barabara ya Kifalme ya hadithi kwenda Listra, jina ambalo aliamini liliacha kutumiwa baada ya 74 BK, inaonyesha mwandishi wa karne ya kwanza aliyelijua eneo. Ramsay mwenyewe hakudai matukio yalikuwa ya kihistoria. M. R. James (1924) aliripoti kwamba nadharia ya Ramsay ya hadithi ya Thekla iliyoandikwa mapema zaidi haikukubaliwa kwa ujumla." }, { "label": "Picha ya kifasihi", "statement": "Sifa zinafuata desturi za Kigiriki za kueleza mwili na tabia ya mtu, mazingira ambayo Abraham Malherbe (1986) alitumia kusoma picha. Kwa usomaji huu, inaonyesha jinsi Wakristo wa karne ya pili walivyomfikiria Paulo, si alivyokuwa anaonekana. Ikiwa sifa ni za desturi, kuonekana kwake kuwa za kawaida si hakikisho la kumbukumbu ya mapema." }, { "label": "Hitimisho kutoka barua", "statement": "Waandishi wa baadaye wangeweza kufikiria mtu asiyevutia kutoka katika barua za Paulo mwenyewe, ambamo wakosoaji husema kuonekana kwake kwa mwili ni dhaifu (2 Wakorintho 10:10), anakumbuka udhaifu wa mwili huko Galatia, na kusema watu wa huko walimpokea kama malaika wa Mungu (Wagalatia 4:13–14), chanzo kinachowezekana cha uso wa malaika wa picha." }, { "label": "Hadithi ya mdomo nyuma ya barua za kichungaji", "statement": "Dennis MacDonald (1983) alisema hadithi za Paulo na Thekla zilisambaa kwa mdomo kabla hazijaandikwa katika Acts of Paul, na kwamba barua za kichungaji ziliandikwa kwa sehemu kupinga hadithi hizo. Kwa mtazamo huu, hadithi haikukopa tu majina yake kutoka 2 Timotheo." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-acts-paul-thecla" }, { "id": "papyrus-30", "kind": "papyrus", "dateFrom": 200, "dateTo": 399, "corpusReferences": [ "Gregory-Aland P30", "P. Oxy. XIII 1598", "Ghent University Library Inv. 61", "INTF Liste docID 10030" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "1 Thessalonians 4:12-13", "1 Thessalonians 4:16-17", "1 Thessalonians 5:3", "1 Thessalonians 5:8-10", "1 Thessalonians 5:12-18", "1 Thessalonians 5:25-28", "2 Thessalonians 1:1-2", "Acts 17:1-10" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.silvanus", "person.timothy" ], "placeIds": [ "place.thessalonica" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste der griechischen Handschriften des Neuen Testaments (INTF, New Testament Virtual Manuscript Room)", "locator": "Gregory-Aland P30 (docID 10030)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=10030&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "csntm", "work": "CSNTM manuscript record: P30", "locator": "GA P30", "url": "https://manuscripts.csntm.org/manuscript/View/GA_P30", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata item: Papyrus 30", "locator": "Q2051048", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q2051048.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "B. P. Grenfell and A. S. Hunt", "work": "The Oxyrhynchus Papyri, Part XIII", "year": "1919", "view": "Edit P. Oxy. 1598, place the hand probably in the late third century while heading it late third or fourth, find the text eclectic, and suggest from the surviving page numbers that the codex was a collection of Paul's letters." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q2051048", "label": "Papyrus 30" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q622640", "label": "Oxyrhynchus (find-place)" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "736983", "label": "Oxyrhynchus/Pemje (find-place)" } ], "title": "Papyrus 30 (P. Oxy. 1598), vipande vya 1 Wathesalonike na 2 Wathesalonike huko Ghent", "summary": "P30 inaonyesha kwamba kufikia karibu karne ya tatu, 1 Wathesalonike na 2 Wathesalonike zilinakiliwa moja baada ya nyingine, inaelekea katika mkusanyo wa barua za Paulo. Vipande vyake, kutoka kodeksi iliyopatikana Oxyrhynchus na sasa huko Ghent, vinahifadhi sehemu za 1 Wathesalonike 4–5 na mwanzo wa 2 Wathesalonike, vyenye namba za kurasa 207-208 ambazo wahariri wa kwanza walifikiri zinaashiria mkusanyo huo. Haiwezi kuonyesha barua ziliandikwa lini, wapi au na nani.", "dating": "Karne ya tatu katika rekodi ya CSNTM na katika rekodi ya namba ya hifadhi ya Liste ya INTF, ambayo kichwa chake kinasema »E II - A III« (mwisho wa karne ya pili hadi mwanzo wa ya tatu). Wahariri wa kwanza waliweka mwandiko huenda mwishoni mwa karne ya tatu, wakitaja katika kichwa mwisho wa karne ya tatu au ya nne.", "currentLocation": "Ghent University Library, Inv. 61", "establishes": [ "Kodeksi ya papyrus kutoka Oxyrhynchus huko Misri ilikuwa na 1 Wathesalonike na ilinakiliwa katika karne ya tatu; wahariri wake wa kwanza waliruhusu karne ya nne pia. Vipande vinne kutoka karatasi mbili zilizofuatana na kipande kisichotambulika vimehifadhiwa, safu moja ya karibu mistari 34 kwa ukurasa. Karatasi zinahifadhi 1 Wathesalonike 4:12–13, 4:16–17, 5:3, 5:8–10, 5:12–18 na 5:25–28, zikiwa na mapengo makubwa.", "Katika kodeksi hii, 2 Wathesalonike ilifuata moja kwa moja 1 Wathesalonike. Safu moja ina, kwa mfuatano, mwisho wa 1 Wathesalonike, kichwa cha mwisho cha barua ya kwanza, kichwa cha mwanzo cha ya pili na salamu zake (2 Wathesalonike 1:1–2). Sehemu ya salamu imehifadhiwa, pamoja na sehemu ya jina Silwano.", "Namba za kurasa 207 na 208 zimehifadhiwa, kwa hiyo karibu kurasa 206 zilitangulia 1 Wathesalonike 4:12. Grenfell na Hunt (1919) walitaja kwamba mpangilio wa kawaida wa barua za Paulo kutoka Warumi hadi 1 Wathesalonike ungejaza kurasa hizo kabisa, na kupendekeza kwamba kitabu kilikuwa mkusanyo wa barua za Paulo. Hilo ni hitimisho lao.", "Maandishi ni mchanganyiko. Wahariri wa kwanza waliona yakikubaliana wakati mwingine na Codex Vaticanus na wakati mwingine na Sinaiticus na Alexandrinus. Kwa usomaji wao, 1 Wathesalonike inaisha kwa kichwa kifupi kinachopatikana katika Sinaiticus na mwandiko wa kwanza wa Vaticanus. Haina maelezo ya mwisho ambayo hati nyingine huongeza, mojawapo likisema barua iliandikwa kutoka Athene." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Haiweki tarehe au mahali pa kuandikwa kwa barua yoyote kati ya hizo mbili. Ni nakala iliyofanywa karibu karne mbili baadaye, na kutokuwapo kwa maelezo ya mwisho ya kutoka Athene hakuthibitishi wala kupinga mtazamo wowote wa mahali Paulo alipoandika 1 Wathesalonike.", "Haiamui nani aliandika 2 Wathesalonike. Inaonyesha tu kwamba kufikia karne ya tatu kodeksi hii iliibeba kama barua ya pili kwa watu wa Thesalonike, moja kwa moja baada ya ya kwanza na inaelekea ndani ya mkusanyo wa Paulo.", "Haithibitishi maelezo ya Matendo ya kazi ya Paulo huko Thesalonike (Matendo 17:1–10).", "Yaliyomo na mpangilio wa kurasa 206 zilizopotea vimehitimishwa kwa hesabu za kurasa; hakuna aliyeziona." ], "debate": "Tarehe inategemea mwandiko pekee. Grenfell na Hunt waliweka mwandiko huenda mwishoni mwa karne ya tatu, lakini katika kichwa cha kipengee wakasema mwisho wa karne ya tatu au ya nne. CSNTM inatoa karne ya tatu, kama Liste ya INTF katika rekodi ya namba ya hifadhi, ambayo kichwa chake kinasema »E II - A III« (mwisho wa karne ya pili hadi mwanzo wa ya tatu). Wazo la kodeksi kuwa mkusanyo wa barua za Paulo linategemea hesabu za kurasa. Karibu kurasa 206 zilizopotea zinaendana na mpangilio wa kawaida kutoka Warumi hadi 1 Wathesalonike, lakini yaliyomo mengine yenye urefu sawa hayawezi kuondolewa kama uwezekano. Kama Paulo aliandika 2 Wathesalonike inajadiliwa; papyrus inaeleza jinsi barua ilivyonakiliwa, si nani aliiandika.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Nakala ya baadaye kidogo", "statement": "Wahariri wa kwanza waliweka katika kichwa cha papyrus mwisho wa karne ya tatu au ya nne, ingawa walipendelea mwisho wa ya tatu. Ikiwa mwisho wa baadaye wa kipindi hicho ni sahihi, yaliyomo hayaathiriki, lakini P30 ingekuwa shahidi wa baadaye kidogo." }, { "label": "Nakala ya mapema kidogo", "statement": "Kichwa cha Liste ya INTF kinaweka P30 »E II - A III«, mwisho wa karne ya pili hadi mwanzo wa ya tatu. Tarehe bado inategemea mwandiko pekee, na yaliyomo hayaathiriki." }, { "label": "Si lazima korpasi kamili ya Paulo", "statement": "Namba za kurasa zinathibitisha tu kwamba karibu kurasa 206 zilitangulia 1 Wathesalonike 4:12. Uchaguzi au mpangilio tofauti wa maandishi yenye urefu sawa ungeweza kujaza nafasi ileile. Mkusanyo wa barua za Paulo ni hitimisho linaloelekea la wahariri, si kitu ambacho mtu ameona." }, { "label": "2 Wathesalonike ya mwingine kwa jina la Paulo", "statement": "Wasomi wengi wakosoaji huamini 2 Wathesalonike iliandikwa kwa jina la Paulo na mwandishi wa baadaye. Kwa mtazamo huo, P30 bado inaonyesha kwamba kufikia karne ya tatu barua ilinakiliwa moja kwa moja baada ya 1 Wathesalonike kama barua ya pili kwa watu wa Thesalonike. Papyrus inaendana na mtazamo wowote wa uandishi." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-papyrus-30" }, { "id": "papyrus-87", "kind": "papyrus", "dateFrom": 200, "dateTo": 299, "corpusReferences": [ "Gregory-Aland P87", "INTF Liste docID 10087", "Köln, Institut für Altertumskunde, Inv. Nr. 12", "P.Köln IV 170" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Philemon 1:13-15", "Philemon 1:24-25" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.philemon", "person.onesimus" ], "placeIds": [], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste (INTF NTVMR): manuscript record P87", "locator": "P87 (docID 10087)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=10087&detail=page&format=xml", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "INTF transcription of P87, folio 1r", "locator": "P87 f. 1r (Phlm 13-15)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/transcript/get/?docid=10087&pageID=10&format=teiraw", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "edition", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "INTF transcription of P87, folio 1v", "locator": "P87 f. 1v (Phlm 24-25)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/transcript/get/?docid=10087&pageID=20&format=teiraw", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "edition", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste (INTF NTVMR): manuscript record P139", "locator": "P139 (docID 10139)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=10139&detail=page&format=xml", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste (INTF NTVMR): manuscript record 01 (Codex Sinaiticus)", "locator": "01 (docID 20001)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=20001&detail=page&format=xml", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste (INTF NTVMR): manuscript record P46", "locator": "P46 (docID 10046)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=10046&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung" }, { "sourceKey": "csntm", "work": "CSNTM manuscript catalogue: GA P87", "locator": "GA P87", "url": "https://manuscripts.csntm.org/manuscript/View/GA_P87", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata: Papyrus 87", "locator": "Q571588", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q571588.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "tertullian-against-marcion-anf", "work": "Against Marcion (Ante-Nicene Fathers vol. 3)", "locator": "Adv. Marc. 5.21", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/03125.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "To this epistle alone did its brevity avail to protect it against the falsifying hands of Marcion. I wonder, however, when he received (into his Apostolicon) this letter which was written but to one man, that he rejected the two epistles to Timothy and the one to Titus", "role": "primary-text", "author": "Tertullian", "translator": "Peter Holmes", "year": "1885" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Cornelia Römer (editor of no. 170), in Bärbel Kramer, Cornelia Römer, Dieter Hagedorn and others", "work": "Kölner Papyri (P. Köln), Band 4 (Papyrologica Coloniensia VII)", "year": "1982", "view": "Edits the fragment as P.Köln IV 170. The University of Cologne's collection record for this edition dates it to the early third century and gives its origin as unknown." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q571588", "label": "Papyrus 87" } ], "title": "Papyrus 87, kipande cha Filemoni huko Cologne", "summary": "Papyrus 87 ni kipande kidogo cha ukurasa wa kodeksi, sasa huko Cologne, kinachohifadhi sehemu za Filemoni 13–15 upande mmoja na 24–25 upande mwingine. Kimeorodheshwa kama cha karne ya tatu, ni hati ya kale zaidi inayojulikana ya Filemoni, na kinaonyesha barua ikinakiliwa katika umbo la kitabu kufikia wakati huo. Herufi chache zilizotawanyika tu zimehifadhiwa, na hakisemi chochote kuhusu nani aliandika barua au wapi.", "dating": "Karne ya tatu BK, ikikadiriwa kwa mwandiko (INTF: 200-299; CSNTM: karne ya tatu). Rekodi ya mkusanyo wa Cologne kuhusu toleo lake (P.Köln IV 170, ed. C. Römer) inakiweka mapema katika karne hiyo.", "currentLocation": "Institut für Altertumskunde, University of Cologne (Inv. Nr. 12)", "establishes": [ "Kipande cha papyrus katika Institut für Altertumskunde, University of Cologne (Inv. Nr. 12), kilichosajiliwa na INTF kama Gregory-Aland P87, kinahifadhi sehemu za Filemoni 13–15 upande mmoja na Filemoni 24–25 upande mwingine.", "Pande zote mbili zina sehemu za barua ileile kwa mfuatano, kwa hiyo kipande kinatoka katika karatasi ya kodeksi, si gombo. INTF inarekodi sehemu za mistari minane upande mmoja na miwili upande mwingine, na kukadiria ukurasa wa awali kuwa na mistari 32.", "INTF inakiweka katika karne ya tatu (200-299 BK). Katika orodha ya INTF ndiyo hati pekee ya Filemoni iliyopewa tarehe kabla ya karne ya nne. Zinazofuata kwa ukale, P139 na Codex Sinaiticus, zote ni za karne ya nne.", "Ni ushahidi wa kimwili kwamba Filemoni ilikuwa ikinakiliwa kufikia karne ya tatu. Ushahidi kwamba barua ilisambaa mapema zaidi ni wa maandishi: Tertullian, akiandika mwanzoni mwa karne ya tatu, anaripoti kwamba mkusanyo wa Marcion wa barua za Paulo wa karne ya pili uliijumuisha." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Haionyeshi nani aliandika Filemoni, lini, au katika kifungo kipi. Rumi, Efeso na Kaisaria zote zimependekezwa, na maswali hayo hujadiliwa kutoka katika barua yenyewe.", "Sehemu kubwa ya maandishi katika unukuzi wa INTF ni urejeshaji wa wahariri. Upande wenye mistari 24–25, jina Dema limerejeshwa lote, na herufi mbili tu za jina la Luka zinasomwa, mojawapo ikiwa haina uhakika, kwa hiyo kipande hakishuhudii majina hayo chenyewe.", "Haionyeshi kama kodeksi yake ilikuwa na Filemoni pekee au mkusanyo wa barua za Paulo, au ilinakiliwa wapi. Rekodi za katalogi zilizotumiwa hazitoi mahali ilipopatikana." ], "debate": "Tarehe inategemea mwandiko pekee. INTF na CSNTM zinaorodhesha kipande kama cha karne ya tatu, na rekodi ya mkusanyo wa Cologne kuhusu toleo lake inaibana hadi mwanzoni mwa karne ya tatu; tarehe zinazotegemea mwandiko wa kifasihi kwa kawaida huruhusu miongo kadhaa pande zote mbili. Herufi chache sana zimehifadhiwa kiasi kwamba dai lolote kuhusu aina ya maandishi yake linapita kile kipande kinaonyesha. Hivyo pia dai lolote kwamba kilitoka katika toleo la mkusanyo wa barua za Paulo kama P46, ambayo karatasi zake zilizohifadhiwa, kama INTF inavyoziorodhesha, hazina sehemu yoyote ya Filemoni. Wasomi wengi hukubali Filemoni kuwa ya Paulo kwa misingi mingine; mahali alikoiandika bado panabishaniwa.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Usomaji wa kiwango cha chini", "statement": "Kipande cha karibu mistari kumi isiyo kamili kinaonyesha tu kwamba mtu alinakili Filemoni katika kodeksi kufikia karne ya tatu. Hakiwezi kuthibitisha mazingira ya barua au watu inaowataja. Maswali hayo yanategemea barua yenyewe na uhusiano wake na Wakolosai na Matendo." }, { "label": "Kutangulia kwa umri kwa kiasi kidogo", "statement": "Tarehe za mwandiko ni makadirio. Ikiwa P87 ilinakiliwa mwishoni mwa karne ya tatu na P139 au Codex Sinaiticus mwanzoni mwa karne ya nne, nakala za kale zaidi zilizohifadhiwa za Filemoni zingekuwa karibu kwa umri. P87 ingebaki ya mapema zaidi kwa tarehe ya katalogi, lakini kutangulia kwake kungeweza kuwa suala la miongo michache." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-papyrus-87" }, { "id": "codex-vaticanus-paul", "kind": "manuscript", "dateFrom": 300, "dateTo": 399, "corpusReferences": [ "Gregory-Aland 03 (B)", "Vat. gr. 1209", "INTF Liste docID 20003", "Gregory-Aland 1957 (15th-century supplement, Vat. gr. 1209 pp. 1519-1536)" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Romans 1:1-16:24", "1 Corinthians 1:1-16:24", "2 Corinthians 1:1-13:14", "Galatians 1:1-6:18", "Ephesians 1:1-6:24", "Philippians 1:1-4:23", "Colossians 1:1-4:18", "1 Thessalonians 1:1-5:28", "2 Thessalonians 1:1-3:18", "Hebrews 1:1-9:14" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul" ], "placeIds": [], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste der griechischen Handschriften des Neuen Testaments (INTF, New Testament Virtual Manuscript Room)", "locator": "Gregory-Aland 03 (docID 20003)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=20003&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste der griechischen Handschriften des Neuen Testaments (INTF, New Testament Virtual Manuscript Room)", "locator": "Gregory-Aland 1957 (docID 31957)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=31957&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "museum-record", "author": "Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana", "work": "DigiVatLib manuscript record, Vat.gr.1209", "locator": "Vat.gr.1209", "url": "https://digi.vatlib.it/mss/detail/Vat.gr.1209", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste der griechischen Handschriften des Neuen Testaments (INTF, New Testament Virtual Manuscript Room)", "locator": "Gregory-Aland 01 (docID 20001)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=20001&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste der griechischen Handschriften des Neuen Testaments (INTF, New Testament Virtual Manuscript Room)", "locator": "Gregory-Aland 02 (docID 20002)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=20002&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste der griechischen Handschriften des Neuen Testaments (INTF, New Testament Virtual Manuscript Room)", "locator": "Gregory-Aland P46 (docID 10046)", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=10046&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata: Codex Vaticanus", "locator": "Q209285", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q209285.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "F. H. A. Scrivener", "work": "A Plain Introduction to the Criticism of the New Testament", "year": "1861", "view": "Reports that the older, continuous section numbers in Vaticanus's Pauline letters end Galatians at 58, begin Ephesians at 70 and begin Hebrews at 59, and infers they were copied from an older manuscript with Hebrews before Ephesians." }, { "author": "Caspar René Gregory", "work": "Canon and Text of the New Testament", "year": "1907", "view": "Notes that in Vaticanus Hebrews follows Thessalonians, yet the continuous chapter numbers of Paul's letters show that Hebrews stood immediately after Galatians in the book where they were first assigned." }, { "author": "Umberto Benigni", "work": "Codex Vaticanus, in The Catholic Encyclopedia, vol. 4", "year": "1908", "view": "Calls the codex's original home uncertain: Hort placed it at Rome, Rendel Harris and Armitage Robinson in Asia Minor, and a more common opinion in Egypt." }, { "author": "Bruce M. Metzger and Bart D. Ehrman", "work": "The Text of the New Testament: Its Transmission, Corruption, and Restoration (4th ed.)", "year": "2005", "view": "Standard handbook on how the New Testament text was copied and transmitted, including a survey of the principal Greek manuscripts." }, { "author": "Bruce M. Metzger", "work": "The Canon of the New Testament: Its Origin, Development, and Significance", "year": "1987", "view": "Traces how the New Testament canon took shape and considers the differences in the sequence of its books." }, { "author": "David Trobisch", "work": "Paul's Letter Collection: Tracing the Origins", "year": "1994", "view": "Traces the growth of the collection of Paul's letters and suggests that Paul himself may have played a major role in publishing its first collection." }, { "author": "T. C. Skeat", "work": "The Codex Sinaiticus, the Codex Vaticanus and Constantine (Journal of Theological Studies)", "year": "1999", "view": "Argues that both codices were produced at Caesarea in connection with Constantine's order for Bibles from Eusebius. The proposal is debated." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q209285", "label": "Codex Vaticanus" } ], "title": "Codex Vaticanus (B) na barua za Paulo", "summary": "Codex Vaticanus (Vat. gr. 1209, Gregory-Aland 03), Biblia ya Kigiriki ya karne ya nne, inahifadhi Warumi hadi 2 Wathesalonike na Waebrania hadi 9:14, ambapo karatasi zake za awali zinaishia. Scrivener (1861) aliripoti kwamba namba zake zinazofuatana za sehemu za Paulo zinaruka kutoka Wagalatia (58) hadi Waefeso (70) na kuanza Waebrania katika 59, ikiashiria nakala ya zamani zaidi yenye Waebrania baada ya Wagalatia. Mwisho uliopotea hauwezi kuonyesha kama 1 Timotheo, 2 Timotheo, Tito na Filemoni zilifuata.", "dating": "Karne ya nne (INTF Liste »IV«; Vatican Library »sec. IV«); Waebrania 9:14 hadi mwisho na Ufunuo viliongezwa katika karne ya kumi na tano", "currentLocation": "Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana, Vatican City (Vat. gr. 1209)", "establishes": [ "Kodeksi ya Kigiriki ya karne ya nne katika Vatican Library (Vat. gr. 1209, Gregory-Aland 03) inahifadhi Warumi, 1 Wakorintho, 2 Wakorintho, Wagalatia, Waefeso, Wafilipi, Wakolosai, 1 Wathesalonike, 2 Wathesalonike na Waebrania 1:1–9:14. Hivi vinafuata Injili, Matendo na barua za jumla, kwenye kurasa 1445–1518 za kodeksi.", "Waebrania inaanza kwenye ukurasa uleule ambapo 2 Wathesalonike inaisha (p. 1512), kwa hiyo katika kodeksi hii inafuata moja kwa moja barua za Paulo kwa watu wa Thesalonike na ni sehemu ya mkusanyo wake.", "Kama Scrivener (1861) alivyoripoti, barua za Paulo zina mfululizo mmoja wa namba za sehemu katika mfumo wa zamani zaidi kati ya mifumo miwili ya kodeksi: Wagalatia inaishia 58, Waefeso inaanza 70 na Waebrania inaanza 59. Yeye na Gregory (1907) walihitimisha kwamba namba ziliwekwa kwa nakala ya zamani zaidi ambamo Waebrania ilisimama kati ya Wagalatia na Waefeso.", "Mwandiko wa awali unaishia Waebrania 9:14. Waebrania iliyobaki na Ufunuo (pp. 1519–1536) ni nyongeza ya karne ya kumi na tano, iliyopewa rekodi tofauti kama Gregory-Aland 1957." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Kama kodeksi ilikuwa na 1 Timotheo, 2 Timotheo, Tito na Filemoni. Mafungu ya mwisho ya karatasi yamepotea na idadi ya karatasi zinazokosekana haijulikani, kwa hiyo kodeksi haisemi kuhusu barua za kichungaji na Filemoni. Si ushahidi dhidi yake.", "Kwamba Paulo aliandika Waebrania. Nafasi yake kati ya barua za Paulo inaonyesha jinsi wanakili wa karne ya nne walivyopanga barua isiyotaja mwandishi. Haionyeshi nani aliiandika.", "Namba zinazofuatana za sehemu ziliwekwa kwanza lini au na nani, au tarehe na mahali pa nakala ya awali ambayo mpangilio wake zinaonyesha." ], "debate": "Yaliyomo yaliyohifadhiwa hayabishaniwi, na kuruka kwa namba za sehemu kumeripotiwa tangu karne ya kumi na tisa; tafsiri yake haijakubalika sawa. Wakati na mtu aliyeweka namba zinazofuatana, na kama zilitoka kwa mtangulizi wa maandishi wa kodeksi yenyewe au nakala nyingine, havina uhakika. Yaliyomo katika mafungu yaliyopotea yanahitimishwa: Sinaiticus na Alexandrinus zote hutoka Waebrania hadi 1 Timotheo, 2 Timotheo, Tito na Filemoni, lakini P46, yenye Waebrania baada ya Warumi, inaonyesha mikusanyo ya mapema ilitofautiana. Tarehe ya kodeksi ndani ya karne ya nne na asili yake bado vinajadiliwa: kufikia 1908, Rumi, Asia Ndogo na Misri zilikuwa zimependekezwa, na Skeat baadaye akapendekeza Kaisaria.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Namba zilizorithiwa (usomaji wa kawaida)", "statement": "Namba zinazofuatana za sehemu zilinakiliwa kutoka hati ya zamani zaidi ambamo Waebrania ilifuata Wagalatia. Kodeksi yenyewe iliweka Waebrania baada ya 2 Wathesalonike, mpangilio unaopatikana pia katika Codex Sinaiticus na Codex Alexandrinus." }, { "label": "Namba kutoka chanzo tofauti", "statement": "Mfumo wa sehemu huenda ulitoka katika nakala tofauti na ile iliyotoa maandishi. Ikiwa ndivyo, unarekodi mpangilio wa chanzo cha mfumo huo, si wa mtangulizi wa moja kwa moja wa maandishi ya kodeksi." }, { "label": "Yaliyomo katika mwisho uliopotea", "statement": "Inaelekea barua za kichungaji na Filemoni, na labda Ufunuo, zilifuata Waebrania, kama katika Codex Sinaiticus na Codex Alexandrinus. Hilo ni hitimisho la kueleweka kutoka Biblia zinazofanana, lakini hakuna karatasi iliyohifadhiwa inayolithibitisha kwa kodeksi hii." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-codex-vaticanus-paul" }, { "id": "paley-horae-paulinae", "kind": "study", "dateFrom": 1790, "dateTo": 1790, "corpusReferences": [], "confidence": "medium-high", "epistemicStatus": "debated", "scriptureReferences": [ "Romans 15:24-28", "Acts 20:2-3", "Acts 20:16", "Acts 24:17-19", "1 Corinthians 16:1-4", "2 Corinthians 8:1-4", "2 Corinthians 9:2", "1 Corinthians 4:17-19", "1 Corinthians 16:10-11", "Acts 19:21-22", "Acts 16:1", "2 Timothy 1:5", "2 Timothy 3:15", "Galatians 2:1-10", "Acts 15:1-29" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.timothy", "person.erastus" ], "placeIds": [ "place.macedonia", "place.achaia", "place.jerusalem", "place.corinth", "place.ephesus", "place.lystra" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "paley-horae-paulinae", "author": "William Paley", "work": "Horae Paulinae", "year": "1790", "locator": "ch. 1 (Exposition of the Argument); Works (London, 1819) vol. 2, p. 132", "url": "https://archive.org/details/paleyworks02paleuoft", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "In examining, therefore, the agreement between ancient writings, the character of truth and originality is undesignedness: and this test applies to every supposition", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "paley-horae-paulinae", "author": "William Paley", "work": "Horae Paulinae", "year": "1790", "locator": "ch. 1 (Exposition of the Argument); Works (London, 1819) vol. 2, p. 133", "url": "https://archive.org/details/paleyworks02paleuoft", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "As to the history, it extends to these points:—It proves the general reality of the circumstances: it proves the historian's knowledge of these circumstances.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "paley-horae-paulinae", "author": "William Paley", "work": "Horae Paulinae", "year": "1790", "locator": "ch. 1 (Exposition of the Argument); Works (London, 1819) vol. 2, p. 139", "url": "https://archive.org/details/paleyworks02paleuoft", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "If the reader, therefore, meets with a number which contains an instance that appears to him unsatisfactory, or founded in mistake, he will dismiss that number from the argument, but without prejudice to any other.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "paley-horae-paulinae", "author": "William Paley", "work": "Horae Paulinae", "year": "1790", "locator": "ch. 2 (Romans), no. 1; Works (London, 1819) vol. 2, p. 145", "url": "https://archive.org/details/paleyworks02paleuoft", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Here therefore, at length, but fetched from three different writings, we have obtained the several circumstances we inquired after, and which the Epistle to the Romans brings together", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "paley-horae-paulinae", "author": "William Paley", "work": "Horae Paulinae", "year": "1790", "locator": "ch. 3 (First Corinthians), no. 3; Works (London, 1819) vol. 2, p. 178", "url": "https://archive.org/details/paleyworks02paleuoft", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "One thing at least concerning it is certain: that if this passage of St. Paul's history had been taken from his letter, it would have sent Timothy to Corinth by name, or expressly however into Achaia.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "paley-horae-paulinae", "author": "William Paley", "work": "Horae Paulinae", "year": "1790", "locator": "ch. 5 (Galatians), no. 2; Works (London, 1819) vol. 2, p. 235", "url": "https://archive.org/details/paleyworks02paleuoft", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "the discrepancy in the two accounts is so considerable, that it is not without difficulty they can be adapted to the same transaction: so that upon this supposition, there is no place for suspecting that the writers were guided or assisted by each other.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "paley-horae-paulinae", "author": "William Paley", "work": "Horae Paulinae", "year": "1790", "locator": "ch. 12 (Second Timothy), no. 2; Works (London, 1819) vol. 2, p. 355", "url": "https://archive.org/details/paleyworks02paleuoft", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Here we have a fair unforced example of coincidence.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "paley-horae-paulinae", "author": "William Paley", "work": "Horae Paulinae (Dublin printing)", "year": "1790", "locator": "Title page and contents, Dublin printing of 1790 (Princeton Theological Seminary Library copy)", "url": "https://archive.org/details/horaepaulinaeo00pale", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "edition" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Lydia McGrew", "work": "Hidden in Plain View: Undesigned Coincidences in the Gospels and Acts", "year": "2017", "view": "Revives the long-neglected argument from undesigned coincidences, applying it within the Gospels and between Acts and Paul's letters, and argues that such puzzle-like fits are best explained by authors who knew the truth about the events and point to honest eyewitness sources." }, { "author": "J. J. Blunt", "work": "Undesigned Coincidences in the Writings both of the Old and New Testament, an Argument of their Veracity", "year": "1847", "view": "Applies the method of undesigned coincidences to the books of Moses, the Gospels and Acts, and other books of Scripture. The book rearranges studies Blunt published from 1828 onward." }, { "author": "F. C. Baur", "work": "Paulus, der Apostel Jesu Christi", "year": "1845", "view": "Accepts only Galatians, 1-2 Corinthians and Romans as authentic and reads Acts as a later account that embellished its traditions and drew artificial parallels between Peter and Paul. This undercuts Paley's premise of thirteen genuine letters and a well-informed Acts." }, { "author": "John Knox", "work": "Chapters in a Life of Paul", "year": "1950", "view": "Treats Paul's letters as the primary source for his life and Acts as a secondary one; where the two conflict, the letters are to be followed. Paley instead treats them as independent witnesses that check each other." }, { "author": "Richard I. Pervo", "work": "Dating Acts: Between the Evangelists and the Apologists", "year": "2006", "view": "Dates Acts to about 115 and argues that its author used Josephus and a collection of Paul's letters, the kind of dependence Paley's test is meant to rule out." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q433739", "label": "William Paley" } ], "title": "Horae Paulinae ya William Paley (1790): ulinganifu usiopangwa kati ya Matendo na barua za Paulo", "summary": "Horae Paulinae ya William Paley (1790) inalinganisha barua za Paulo na Matendo na kusema ulinganifu unaoonekana kutopangwa unaonyesha vyote viwili vinategemea matukio halisi. Mfano wake mkuu ni mchango wa Yerusalemu, ambao Warumi 15 unaueleza pamoja, huku Matendo, 1 Wakorintho na 2 Wakorintho zikiutoa katika vipande vilivyotawanyika. Ni hoja ya ulinganisho wa ndani, si ushahidi mpya, na inasimama tu ikiwa ulinganifu huo haujapangwa na unajitegemea, jambo ambalo baadhi ya wasomi wanapinga.", "dating": "1790 (ilichapishwa kwanza); nukuu hapa zimetoka Works zilizokusanywa za 1819", "currentLocation": "Kitabu kilichochapishwa; chapa ya Dublin ya 1790 na Works za 1819 zimehifadhiwa kidijitali katika archive.org", "establishes": [ "Jaribio la Paley (ch. 1): kukubaliana kwa historia na barua kunahesabika kama ushahidi tu ikiwa kunaonekana kutopangwa. Historia iliyokusanywa kutoka barua, barua zilizoghushiwa kutoka historia, au vyote vilivyotolewa katika chanzo kimoja cha pamoja vingezalisha ulinganifu uliopangwa. Analitumia jaribio kwa Matendo na barua kumi na tatu na kuweka namba kwa kila mfano ili msomaji aweze kukataa mmoja dhaifu bila kukataa mingine.", "Mfano wake mkuu (ch. 2, no. 1) unategemea uchunguzi mzuri wa maandishi. Warumi 15:25–26 inaunganisha zawadi za Makedonia na Akaya na safari inayokaribia ya Yerusalemu. Matendo 20:2–3 na 20:16 zinaeleza kukaa Ugiriki na kuharakisha kwenda Yerusalemu, lakini si mchango, ambao Matendo inataja tu katika utetezi wa Paulo mbele ya Feliki (24:17). 1 Wakorintho 16:1–4 na 2 Wakorintho 8:1–4 na 9:2 zinatoa habari za utoaji wa Akaya na Makedonia.", "Mfano wa pili (ch. 3, nos. 3-4): Matendo 19:21–22 inawatuma Timotheo na Erasto kwenda Makedonia kabla ya Paulo. 1 Wakorintho 4:17 inasema Timotheo tayari ametumwa, huku 16:10–11 ikichukulia kuwasili kwake Korintho kuwa hakuna uhakika. Paley anapatanisha vyote viwili kwa njia inayopitia Makedonia. Njia hiyo ni hitimisho lake mwenyewe, na anaiwasilisha kama inayoelekea, si iliyoelezwa wazi.", "Mifano yote miwili mikuu inategemea tu barua ambazo karibu wasomi wote wanakubali kuwa za Paulo (Warumi, 1 Wakorintho, 2 Wakorintho)." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Kwamba Matendo ni sahihi kote. Ulinganifu unahusu mipango ya safari, wenzi na mchango, si hotuba, miujiza au tafsiri ya msimulizi ya matukio.", "Kwamba barua zote kumi na tatu alizotumia Paley ni za Paulo. Mifano yake kutoka barua zinazobishaniwa, kama 2 Timotheo, ina nguvu kwa kadiri tu ya hoja ya kuweka barua hizo katika maisha ya Paulo.", "Kwamba ulinganifu unajitegemea bila shaka. Ikiwa mwandishi wa Matendo alijua barua, baadhi ya kufanana kungetegemeana badala ya kuthibitishana." ], "debate": "Hitimisho la Paley linasimama tu ikiwa ulinganifu unajitegemea. Tangu F. C. Baur, wasomi wengi wakosoaji wamesoma Matendo kama maelezo ya baadaye yaliyoundwa kwa makusudi, na wengi hukubali barua saba tu kuwa hakika za Paulo. Richard Pervo alisema Matendo ni ya mwanzoni mwa karne ya pili na ilitumia barua za Paulo, utegemezi uleule ambao jaribio la Paley linakusudia kuondoa. Jibu la mbinu hii, kutoka Paley hadi Lydia McGrew, ni kwamba ulinganifu ni wa njia zisizo za moja kwa moja mno kuwa wa kukopa: katika mifano ya Paley, Matendo inataja mchango kidogo sana na katika 19:22 inamtuma Timotheo kwenda Makedonia tu. Kama ukimya huo ni wa bahati au wa makusudi wenyewe unajadiliwa. Wasomi wengi wanafikiri mwandishi wa Matendo hakujua barua, jambo linalokubali msingi wa Paley wa kujitegemea. Badala yake wanajibu kwamba kukubaliana kuhusu safari na wenzi kunaonyesha taarifa nzuri kuhusu mwendo wa Paulo, si usahihi wa hotuba au teolojia ya Matendo, na huzipa barua nafasi ya kwanza vinapopingana (Knox).", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Matendo ilitumia barua", "statement": "Baadhi ya wasomi, hasa Richard Pervo, huamini mwandishi wa Matendo alijua barua kadhaa za Paulo. Kwa mtazamo huo, baadhi ya ulinganifu ni wa kukopa, si uthibitisho wa kujitegemea. Ulinganifu usio kamili ambao Paley anaonyesha (Matendo karibu kimya kuhusu mchango, Timotheo akitumwa Makedonia tu) basi ungemaanisha barua zilitumiwa kwa uhuru badala ya kunakiliwa." }, { "label": "Ukimya ni wa makusudi", "statement": "Baadhi ya wafafanuzi hueleza karibu ukimya wa Matendo kuhusu mchango kama kujizuia kwa makusudi, kwa mfano ikiwa zawadi haikupokelewa kwa furaha au ilihusishwa na kukamatwa kwa Paulo. Hilo lingefanya kuachwa kwake kuwa kumepangwa badala ya bahati. Bado lingedokeza kwamba mwandishi alijua kuhusu mchango." }, { "label": "Barua ya baadaye ilitumia Matendo", "statement": "Wasomi wengi wakosoaji huona 2 Timotheo kuwa imeandikwa baada ya maisha ya Paulo. Mwandishi wa baadaye angeweza kuchukua mama Myahudi wa Timotheo kutoka Matendo 16:1, jambo ambalo Paley anatoa kama ulinganifu usiopangwa na 2 Timotheo 1:5 na 3:15 (ch. 12, nos. 2-3). Kwa hiyo mifano hii ina uzito kwa wasomaji ambao tayari wanaweka barua katika wakati wa Paulo tu." }, { "label": "Ulinganifu unahesabiwa, mivutano inawekwa kando", "statement": "Wakosoaji wa mbinu wanasema orodha ya ulinganifu inaweza kuzidisha hoja isipokuwa mivutano, kama kati ya Wagalatia 1–2 na Matendo kuhusu ziara za Paulo za Yerusalemu, ipimwe pamoja nayo. Paley mwenyewe anajadili tofauti kati ya Wagalatia 2 na Matendo 15 na kusema inaonyesha hakuna mwandishi aliyemtegemea mwingine; watetezi wake huongeza kwamba kila ulinganifu lazima uhukumiwe kwa hali yake yenyewe." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-paley-horae-paulinae" }, { "id": "codex-sinaiticus-paul", "kind": "manuscript", "dateFrom": 300, "dateTo": 399, "corpusReferences": [ "Gregory-Aland 01", "INTF Liste docID 20001", "British Library Add. MS 43725" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "attested", "scriptureReferences": [ "Romans 1:1-16:24", "1 Corinthians 1:1-16:24", "2 Corinthians 1:1-13:14", "Galatians 1:1-6:18", "Ephesians 1:1-6:24", "Ephesians 1:1", "Philippians 1:1-4:23", "Colossians 1:1-4:18", "1 Thessalonians 1:1-5:28", "2 Thessalonians 1:1-3:18", "Hebrews 1:1-13:25", "1 Timothy 1:1-6:21", "2 Timothy 1:1-4:22", "Titus 1:1-3:15", "Philemon 1:1-25" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul" ], "placeIds": [ "place.ephesus", "place.caesarea" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "museum-record", "author": "Codex Sinaiticus Project", "work": "About the Codex: Content", "locator": "About the Codex: Content (surviving books; New Testament order, Hebrews after 2 Thessalonians, Acts between the Pastoral and Catholic Epistles)", "url": "https://www.codexsinaiticus.org/en/codex/content.aspx", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "museum-record", "author": "Codex Sinaiticus Project", "work": "About the Codex: Date", "locator": "About the Codex: Date (fourth century, sometimes mid-century, by palaeography; Vaticanus of similar date)", "url": "https://www.codexsinaiticus.org/en/codex/date.aspx", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "museum-record", "author": "Codex Sinaiticus Project", "work": "About the Codex: Significance", "locator": "About the Codex: Significance (corrections from the fourth to the twelfth century; order of books)", "url": "https://www.codexsinaiticus.org/en/codex/significance.aspx", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "museum-record", "author": "Codex Sinaiticus Project", "work": "About the Codex: History", "locator": "About the Codex: History (holdings: British Library 347 leaves; Leipzig 43 leaves; parts of six leaves in St Petersburg; further leaves at St Catherine's)", "url": "https://www.codexsinaiticus.org/en/codex/history.aspx", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "museum-record", "author": "Codex Sinaiticus Project", "work": "Transcription of Codex Sinaiticus, quire 36, folio 5 recto", "locator": "Quire 36, folio 5 recto: colophon after 2 Esdras stating that the text was collated with a very old copy corrected by the martyr Pamphilus", "url": "https://www.codexsinaiticus.org/handler/transcription.ashx?q=36&f=5&s=r&type=0", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "museum-record", "author": "Codex Sinaiticus Project", "work": "Transcription of Codex Sinaiticus, quire 37, folio 3 recto", "locator": "Quire 37, folio 3 recto: colophon after Esther stating that the text was collated with a very old copy corrected by the martyr Pamphilus, whose own subscription cites Origen's Hexapla", "url": "https://www.codexsinaiticus.org/handler/transcription.ashx?q=37&f=3&s=r&type=0", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste record and page index: GA 01", "locator": "Gregory-Aland 01 (docID 20001): IV century; British Library Add. 43725; page index Romans from 261r to Philemon at 298r, Hebrews 288v-293v, Acts from 299r", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=20001&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung", "work": "NTVMR transcription of GA 01, folio 280v", "locator": "GA 01 folio 280v (pageID 1620), Ephesians 1:1: first hand omits the place-name; corrector supplies it", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/transcript/get/?docid=20001&pageID=1620&format=xhtml", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste record and page index: GA 03", "locator": "Gregory-Aland 03 (docID 20003): IV century; Vat. gr. 1209; page index has Hebrews after 2 Thessalonians and ends at Hebrews 9:14", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=20003&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung", "work": "NTVMR transcription of GA 03, page 1493", "locator": "GA 03 page 1493 (pageID 2620), Ephesians 1:1: first hand omits the place-name; corrector supplies it", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/transcript/get/?docid=20003&pageID=2620&format=xhtml", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste record and page index: P46", "locator": "Gregory-Aland P46 (docID 10046): dated 200-225; page index Romans, Hebrews, 1-2 Corinthians, Ephesians, Galatians, Philippians, Colossians, 1 Thessalonians", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=10046&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung", "work": "NTVMR transcription of P46, folio 75r", "locator": "P46 folio 75r (pageID 1310), Ephesians 1:1: no place-name", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/transcript/get/?docid=10046&pageID=1310&format=xhtml", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "ntvmr-liste", "author": "Institut für Neutestamentliche Textforschung", "work": "Kurzgefasste Liste record and page index: GA 02", "locator": "Gregory-Aland 02 (docID 20002): V century; British Library Royal 1 D.VIII; page index has Hebrews after 2 Thessalonians", "url": "https://ntvmr.uni-muenster.de/community/vmr/api/metadata/liste/search/?docID=20002&detail=page", "publicDomain": false, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History, Book III", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 3.3.5", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250103.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Paul's fourteen epistles are well known and undisputed. It is not indeed right to overlook the fact that some have rejected the Epistle to the Hebrews, saying that it is disputed by the church of Rome, on the ground that it was not written by Paul.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History, Book VI", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 6.25.11-14", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250106.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "But who wrote the epistle, in truth, God knows. The statement of some who have gone before us is that Clement, bishop of the Romans, wrote the epistle, and of others that Luke, the author of the Gospel and the Acts, wrote it.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History, Book VII", "translator": "Arthur Cushman McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "HE 7.32.24-25 (Pamphilus a presbyter of the church at Caesarea in Palestine)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250107.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "In his time we became acquainted with Pamphilus, that most eloquent man, of truly philosophical life, who was esteemed worthy of the office of presbyter in that parish.", "role": "primary-text" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "D. C. Parker", "work": "Codex Sinaiticus: The Story of the World's Oldest Bible", "year": "2010", "view": "Bibliography only for this entry. A book-length introduction to the codex by the director of the University of Birmingham (ITSEE) team on the Codex Sinaiticus Project. The book's existence and authorship were verified; its arguments were not checked, and it is not cited here as support for any claim." }, { "author": "T. C. Skeat", "work": "The Codex Sinaiticus, the Codex Vaticanus and Constantine (Journal of Theological Studies 50)", "year": "1999", "view": "Bibliography only for this entry. The article discusses the two codices in relation to Constantine. Its title and journal were verified, but its argument was not checked against the text, so it is not cited here as support for any position on where the codex came from." }, { "author": "J. F. Fenlon", "work": "Codex Sinaiticus (The Catholic Encyclopedia, vol. 4)", "year": "1908", "view": "Reports that the codex's origin had been assigned to Rome, southern Italy, Egypt and Caesarea but could not be determined. Dates the corrector who added the Pamphilus note at the end of 2 Esdras probably to the seventh century, and notes that, although some linked the codex with Constantine's fifty copies, there is no sign it was ever at Constantinople." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q152962", "label": "Codex Sinaiticus" } ], "title": "Barua za Paulo katika Codex Sinaiticus", "summary": "Codex Sinaiticus, Biblia ya Kigiriki iliyonakiliwa katika karne ya nne na sasa sehemu yake kubwa ikiwa British Library, ndiyo hati ya zamani zaidi inayojulikana yenye barua zote kumi na tatu zinazobeba jina la Paulo, huku Waebrania ikiwa kati yake baada ya 2 Wathesalonike. Inaonyesha jinsi barua za Paulo zilivyokusanywa na kusomwa takriban karne tatu baada yake; ikiwa nakala iliyosahihishwa, haiweki kila usomaji wa awali wala kuamua nani aliandika Waebrania.", "dating": "Karne ya 4 BK (imewekwa kwa mwandiko; wakati mwingine huwekwa kwa usahihi zaidi katikati ya karne)", "currentLocation": "British Library, London (Add. MS 43725, yenye Agano Jipya lote); karatasi nyingine katika Leipzig University Library, National Library of Russia huko St Petersburg, na St Catherine's Monastery, Sinai", "establishes": [ "Kodeksi ya Kigiriki ya ngozi, iliyowekwa kwa mwandiko katika karne ya nne, inahifadhi Agano Jipya lote. Sehemu yake ya Paulo ina mpangilio Warumi, 1 Wakorintho, 2 Wakorintho, Wagalatia, Waefeso, Wafilipi, Wakolosai, 1 Wathesalonike, 2 Wathesalonike, Waebrania, 1 Timotheo, 2 Timotheo, Tito na Filemoni, na Matendo inafuata moja kwa moja (British Library Add. MS 43725, folios 261r-298r katika faharasa ya kurasa ya INTF).", "Ndiyo hati ya zamani zaidi inayojulikana yenye kila barua inayobeba jina la Paulo. Papyrus 46 (karibu 200-225), katika hali ilivyohifadhiwa, haina 2 Wathesalonike, 1 Timotheo, 2 Timotheo, Tito au Filemoni. Codex Vaticanus, ya karibu wakati huohuo, inaishia Waebrania 9:14, kwa hiyo kama iliwahi kuwa na 1 Timotheo, 2 Timotheo, Tito na Filemoni haijulikani.", "Katika kodeksi zote mbili kubwa za Kigiriki za karne ya nne, Sinaiticus na Vaticanus, Waebrania ilinakiliwa ndani ya mkusanyo wa Paulo; hapa iko kati ya 2 Wathesalonike na 1 Timotheo. Eusebius, katika karne hiyohiyo, anahesabu barua kumi na nne za Paulo, lakini anaripoti kwamba baadhi waliikataa Waebrania kwa sababu kanisa la Rumi lilibishana kama Paulo aliiandika.", "Katika Waefeso 1:1, mwandiko wa kwanza hauna kauli inayotaja Efeso, na msahihishaji wa baadaye aliiweka. Papyrus 46 na mwandiko wa kwanza wa Codex Vaticanus pia hazina kauli hiyo, kwa hiyo kodeksi ni miongoni mwa mashahidi wa mapema zaidi wa swali hilo la maandishi." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Nani aliandika Waebrania. Nafasi ya barua inaonyesha jinsi wanakili wa karne ya nne walivyoipanga, si nani aliiandika. Origen, kama Eusebius anavyomripoti, alifikiri mawazo yalikuwa ya Paulo na maneno ya mtu mwingine, na kusema ni Mungu tu anayejua mwandishi alikuwa nani.", "Maneno ya awali katika kila sehemu. Sinaiticus ni shahidi mmoja, aliyesahihishwa na waandishi wengi kuanzia karne ya nne hadi ya kumi na mbili, na usomaji wake lazima upimwe dhidi ya papyrus na hati nyingine.", "Ilinakiliwa wapi, nani aliilipia, au kama tukio lolote katika Matendo au barua lilitokea. Pendekezo lililotolewa tangu Tischendorf linaihusisha na nakala hamsini ambazo Constantine aliagiza kwa Eusebius (Eusebius, Life of Constantine 4.36), lakini hakuna rekodi inayothibitisha uhusiano, na nakala sahihi ya barua inashuhudia maandishi yake, si historia ambayo maandishi yanaeleza." ], "debate": "Asili: hakuna kitu ndani ya kodeksi kinachorekodi ilinakiliwa kwanza wapi au kwa ajili ya nani. Maelezo ya msahihishaji wa baadaye baada ya 2 Esdras na Esther yanasema maandishi yalikaguliwa dhidi ya nakala ya zamani sana iliyosahihishwa na mfia imani Pamphilus, mzee wa kanisa huko Kaisaria, jambo linalohusisha kodeksi na Kaisaria karne kadhaa baada ya kunakiliwa (Fenlon mwaka wa 1908 alimweka msahihishaji huyo huenda katika karne ya saba). Kaisaria, Misri (mara nyingi Aleksandria), Rumi na kusini mwa Italia zote zimependekezwa kama asili yake. Pendekezo lililotolewa tangu Tischendorf linaihusisha na nakala hamsini ambazo Constantine aliagiza kwa Eusebius (Eusebius, Life of Constantine 4.36), lakini hakuna rekodi inayothibitisha uhusiano. Tarehe: mwandiko unaiweka katika karne ya nne, wakati mwingine katikati yake, lakini tarehe za mwandiko ni makadirio. Mpangilio: Codex Vaticanus na Codex Alexandrinus ya karne ya tano pia huweka Waebrania baada ya 2 Wathesalonike, Papyrus 46 inaiweka baada ya Warumi, na Biblia za kisasa za magharibi huiweka baada ya Filemoni. Maandishi: wasomi hutofautiana kama jina la mahali katika Waefeso 1:1 lilikuwa la awali na kupotea mapema, au liliongezwa baadaye.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Waebrania ikisomwa kama ya Paulo", "statement": "Baadhi ya wafasiri wa kale na wa kisasa huchukulia nafasi ya Waebrania kati ya barua za Paulo kama kuunga mkono uandishi wa Paulo, au mwandishi kutoka watu wa karibu naye. Kupangwa huko kunaonyesha kweli kwamba sehemu kubwa ya kanisa lililozungumza Kigiriki ilihesabu Waebrania pamoja na barua za Paulo. Vyanzo vya wakati huohuo pia vinarekodi mashaka huko Rumi na mtazamo wa Origen kwamba maneno si ya Paulo, kwa hiyo nafasi haiwezi kuamua uandishi yenyewe." }, { "label": "Agizo la Constantine", "statement": "Pendekezo lililotolewa tangu Tischendorf linahusisha Sinaiticus, na wakati mwingine Codex Vaticanus, na nakala hamsini za ngozi za Maandiko ambazo Constantine aliagiza kwa Eusebius kwa makanisa ya mji wake mpya (Eusebius, Life of Constantine 4.36). Ukubwa na tarehe ya kodeksi vinafanya hilo liwezekane, lakini hakuna rekodi iliyohifadhiwa inayounganisha hati hii na agizo hilo, na Fenlon (1908) hakuona ishara kwamba iliwahi kuwa Constantinople." }, { "label": "Waefeso kama barua ya kuzungushwa", "statement": "Mashahidi kadhaa wa mapema, pamoja na mwandiko wa kwanza wa kodeksi hii, hawana jina la mahali katika Waefeso 1:1. Kwa msingi huo, baadhi huamini barua ilikusudiwa makanisa kadhaa. Wengine huchukulia jina kuwa la awali na kutokuwapo kwake kuwa badiliko la mapema wakati wa kunakili, ambalo msahihishaji wa kodeksi hii mwenyewe aliliondoa." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-codex-sinaiticus-paul" }, { "id": "smith-acts-27-seamanship", "kind": "study", "dateFrom": 1848, "dateTo": 1848, "corpusReferences": [], "confidence": "medium-high", "epistemicStatus": "reconstructed", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 27:12", "Acts 27:13-20", "Acts 27:21-26", "Acts 27:27-29", "Acts 27:39-44", "Acts 28:1" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.luke" ], "placeIds": [ "place.crete", "place.fair-havens", "place.malta" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "smith-voyage-shipwreck-1848", "author": "James Smith", "work": "The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul", "year": "1848", "locator": "Introduction, p. ix, note", "url": "https://archive.org/details/voyageandshipwr01smitgoog", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I question if modern science has ever done more to confirm an antient author than Captain Smyth's survey of St. Paul's Bay has done in the present case. The soundings alone would have furnished a conclusive test of the truth of the narrative.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "smith-voyage-shipwreck-1848", "author": "James Smith", "work": "The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul", "year": "1848", "locator": "Introduction, p. xiii", "url": "https://archive.org/details/voyageandshipwr01smitgoog", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "My knowledge of these subjects is only that of an amateur, yet a yacht sailor of more than thirty years' standing can scarcely fail to have acquired some skill in those principles of nautical science which are common to all times", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "smith-voyage-shipwreck-1848", "author": "James Smith", "work": "The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul", "year": "1848", "locator": "Introduction, p. xix", "url": "https://archive.org/details/voyageandshipwr01smitgoog", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "no man not a sailor could have written a narrative of a sea voyage so consistent in all its parts, unless from actual observation.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "smith-voyage-shipwreck-1848", "author": "James Smith", "work": "The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul", "year": "1848", "locator": "Crete to Melita, p. 60", "url": "https://archive.org/details/voyageandshipwr01smitgoog", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "In the dissertation on the wind Euroclydon I have stated my reasons for preferring the reading of the most ancient manuscripts and versions, Euro-aquilo, which must be between Eurus and Aquilo, or E. N. E.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "smith-voyage-shipwreck-1848", "author": "James Smith", "work": "The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul", "year": "1848", "locator": "Crete to Melita, p. 64", "url": "https://archive.org/details/voyageandshipwr01smitgoog", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Upon reaching it they availed themselves of the smooth water under its lee, to prepare the ship to resist the fury of the storm.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "smith-voyage-shipwreck-1848", "author": "James Smith", "work": "The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul", "year": "1848", "locator": "Crete to Melita, p. 81", "url": "https://archive.org/details/voyageandshipwr01smitgoog", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "on the 10th of August, 1810, the Lively, frigate, coming from the westward with a fair wind, made the land of Gozo, and the west end of Malta, before it was dark.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "smith-voyage-shipwreck-1848", "author": "James Smith", "work": "The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul", "year": "1848", "locator": "Crete to Melita, p. 82", "url": "https://archive.org/details/voyageandshipwr01smitgoog", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "This was upon the point of Koura, the very spot where a ship driving from the east into St. Paul's Bay must have seen and heard the breakers, and the only spot where she could have done so.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "smith-voyage-shipwreck-1848", "author": "James Smith", "work": "The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul", "year": "1848", "locator": "Crete to Melita, p. 85", "url": "https://archive.org/details/voyageandshipwr01smitgoog", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The mean of these extremes is thirty-three miles in twenty-four hours, and the mean of both estimates is thirty-six and a half miles in twenty-four hours.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "smith-voyage-shipwreck-1848", "author": "James Smith", "work": "The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul", "year": "1848", "locator": "Crete to Melita, p. 87", "url": "https://archive.org/details/voyageandshipwr01smitgoog", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I admit that a coincidence so very close as this is, is to a certain extent, accidental, but it is an accident which could not have happened had there been any inaccuracy on the part of the author of the narrative", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "smith-voyage-shipwreck-1848", "author": "James Smith", "work": "The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul", "year": "1848", "locator": "The Shipwreck, p. 102", "url": "https://archive.org/details/voyageandshipwr01smitgoog", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I am, however, inclined to think that the point of appulse was in the creek, which has no longer a sandy beach, but which must have had one formerly, although now worn away by the wasting action of the sea", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1896", "locator": "ch. XIV, p. 326", "url": "https://archive.org/details/stpaultravellerr00rams", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Smith tries to interpret the Greek words in that sense; but it must be observed that Luke never saw the harbour, and merely speaks on Paul's report of the professional opinion.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1896", "locator": "ch. XIV, p. 329", "url": "https://archive.org/details/stpaultravellerr00rams", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "I must with Smith believe that cables were passed underneath round the ship transversely to hold the timbers together. This is a possible operation in the circumstances, and a useful one.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1896", "locator": "ch. XIV, p. 334", "url": "https://archive.org/details/stpaultravellerr00rams", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Luke seems to have had the landsman's idea that they drifted to and fro in the Mediterranean. A sailor would have known that they drifted in a uniform direction", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1896", "locator": "ch. XIV, p. 341", "url": "https://archive.org/details/stpaultravellerr00rams", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "one of the completest services that has ever been rendered to New Testament scholarship is James Smith's proof that all these circumstances are united in St. Paul's Bay. The only difficulty to which he has applied a rather violent solution is the sandy beach", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata", "locator": "Q6143365", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Q6143365", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Colin J. Hemer", "work": "First Person Narrative in Acts 27-28 (Tyndale Bulletin 36)", "year": "1985", "view": "Rejects Robbins's proposed first-person sea-voyage genre and builds on Smith, while conceding that nautical precision alone shows only that the writer had made such a voyage." }, { "author": "Colin J. Hemer", "work": "The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History", "year": "1989", "view": "Tests details of Acts against literary, epigraphic and papyrological evidence, including records of the Alexandrian grain fleet, and presents Acts as a coherent product of its day (publisher's description). Its treatment of the voyage was not checked for this entry." }, { "author": "C. J. Hemer", "work": "Euraquilo and Melita (Journal of Theological Studies)", "year": "1975", "view": "Defends the wind-name read by the oldest manuscripts at Acts 27:14 and the Malta identification, in reply to Acworth's case for Mljet." }, { "author": "A. Acworth", "work": "Where was St. Paul Shipwrecked? A Re-examination of the Evidence (Journal of Theological Studies)", "year": "1973", "view": "Argues for Mljet, the Adriatic Melita, as the island of the shipwreck rather than Malta, as reported by Hemer (1985); the article itself was not checked." }, { "author": "Vernon K. Robbins", "work": "By Land and by Sea: The We-Passages and Ancient Sea Voyages (in C. H. Talbert, ed., Perspectives on Luke-Acts)", "year": "1978", "view": "Argues that first-person plural narration was a convention of ancient sea-voyage accounts, so the we-passages need not indicate an eyewitness (thesis as reported and contested by Hemer 1985)." }, { "author": "Dennis R. MacDonald", "work": "The Shipwrecks of Odysseus and Paul (New Testament Studies 45)", "year": "1999", "view": "According to its abstract, argues that Acts 27-28 repeatedly points to Odysseus's shipwrecks in Odyssey books 5 and 12, and that Luke related Paul's shipwreck to them to exalt Paul and his God by comparison." }, { "author": "Heinz Warnecke", "work": "Die tatsächliche Romfahrt des Apostels Paulus (Stuttgarter Bibelstudien 127)", "year": "1987", "view": "Argues that the shipwreck took place on Kephallenia in western Greece rather than on Malta." }, { "author": "Richard I. Pervo", "work": "Profit with Delight: The Literary Genre of the Acts of the Apostles", "year": "1987", "view": "Bibliography only for this entry; argument not checked." }, { "author": "Lionel Casson", "work": "Ships and Seamanship in the Ancient World", "year": "1971", "view": "Bibliography only for this entry; argument not checked." }, { "author": "Brian M. Rapske", "work": "Acts, Travel and Shipwreck (in D. W. J. Gill and C. Gempf, eds., The Book of Acts in Its Graeco-Roman Setting)", "year": "1994", "view": "Bibliography only for this entry; argument not checked." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q6143365", "label": "James Smith" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q20922918", "label": "St Paul's Bay" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q755984", "label": "St Paul's Island" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q213895", "label": "Gavdos" }, { "scheme": "pleiades", "id": "589858", "label": "Kaudos (island)" } ], "title": "Uchambuzi wa James Smith wa masuala ya ubaharia katika safari na kuvunjikiwa meli kwa Paulo (1848)", "summary": "Katika The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul (1848), James Smith wa Jordanhill, Mskoti aliyekuwa msafiri wa mashua za starehe na mtaalamu wa jiolojia, alipima Matendo 27 dhidi ya ramani za bahari, maelekezo ya usafiri na ushauri wa maafisa wa jeshi la majini. Alisema upepo mkali, kujikinga upande wa Kauda usiopigwa na upepo, kuifunga meli kuizunguka chini, kusukumwa na upepo na vipimo vya kina vyote vinaendana na kufika St Paul's Bay, Melita. Hii inaonyesha maelezo kuendana katika masuala ya ubaharia, ingawa baadhi ya misingi ilitoka Matendo yenyewe. Haiwezi kuthibitisha uandishi au kila tukio.", "dating": "1848 (toleo la kwanza; matoleo ya baadaye 1856, 1866 na 1880)", "currentLocation": "Kitabu kilichochapishwa; toleo la kwanza la 1848 limehifadhiwa kidijitali katika Internet Archive kutoka nakala ya Harvard College Library", "establishes": [ "Smith aliunda upya dhoruba ya Matendo 27:13–17 kama upepo mkali kutoka mashariki-kaskazini-mashariki, akipendelea katika Matendo 27:14 jina la upepo katika hati na matoleo ya zamani zaidi kuliko usomaji wa baadaye, ambalo aliona linataja upepo kati ya mashariki na kaskazini-mashariki. Uliisukuma meli kutoka baharini karibu na kusini-katikati ya Krete hadi upande wa Kauda (Gavdos ya leo) usiopigwa na upepo, ambapo mabaharia wangeweza kuinua mashua na kupitisha kamba kuizunguka sehemu ya chini ya meli.", "Smith alichukua wastani wa kusukumwa na upepo wa karibu maili thelathini na sita na nusu kwa siku kutoka makadirio ya manahodha wawili wa Royal Navy. Kwa kasi hiyo, meli iliyopunguza matanga ili kukabili dhoruba kutoka Kauda ingesafiri maili 476.6 hadi Koura Point, Melita, katika zaidi kidogo ya siku kumi na tatu. Hiyo inaendana na usiku wa kumi na nne wa Matendo 27:27, na mwelekeo uliokokotolewa unalingana na mwelekeo wa St Paul's Bay.", "Smith alilinganisha vipimo vya kina vya pima ishirini, kisha kumi na tano (Matendo 27:28), na upimaji wa kapteni Smyth wa St Paul's Bay, na kutaja mahakama ya kijeshi ya 1810 kuhusu frigeti Lively, ambayo mlinzi wake aliona mawimbi yakivunjika Koura Point kabla ya kuona nchi kavu (Matendo 27:27). Aliweka kukwama kwa meli karibu na Salmonetta (St Paul's Island), na kukubali kwamba kufanana kwa kusukumwa kulikuwa kwa bahati kwa sehemu na kwamba ufukwe wa mchanga wa ghuba ndogo umetoweka.", "Ramsay (1895) aliita hoja ya Smith kuhusu St Paul's Bay mojawapo ya huduma kamili zaidi kuwahi kutolewa kwa utafiti wa Agano Jipya na kukubaliana naye kuhusu kufunga kamba kwa kuvuka upana wa meli, lakini aliona suluhisho lake la ufukwe uliotoweka kuwa la kulazimisha kiasi. Pia alikataa uelewa wa Smith wa Kigiriki kuhusu Foinike na kusukumwa na upepo: Luka, ambaye hakuiona Foinike kamwe, alipasha maelezo yaliyovurugika, na kuandika kuhusu kusukumwa kwa wazo la mtu asiye baharia." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Si shahidi huru wa safari. Smith alitoa mwelekeo wa upepo kutoka jiografia ya simulizi yenyewe, akachukua kasi ya kusukumwa kutoka makadirio ya maafisa wa karne ya kumi na tisa, na kutumia mwisho wa kimapokeo wa kisiwa cha Melita. Kwa hiyo kulingana kunaonyesha kwamba maelezo yanaendana na upepo, ramani na pwani halisi; hakuthibitishi kila jambo kutoka ushahidi wa nje.", "Haionyeshi kwamba Luka aliandika kama shahidi wa macho, au kwamba matukio yasiyoweza kupimwa kwa masuala ya ubaharia yalitokea, kama ujumbe wa malaika na uhakikisho wa Paulo katika Matendo 27:21–26. Dai la Smith kwamba hakuna asiye baharia ambaye angeweza kuandika kwa mwafaka huo bila kuona mwenyewe ni hitimisho kutoka mwafaka wa simulizi, na wengine hulipinga. Hata Ramsay aliamini Luka alipasha habari ya Foinike kutoka kwa wengine na kueleza kusukumwa kama mtu asiye baharia.", "Haibainishi mahali halisi pa kutua wala kuamua kila jambo la kiufundi. Ghuba ndogo aliyochagua Smith inahitaji ufukwe ambao haupo tena, na namna ya kufunga kamba kuizunguka meli chini na mwelekeo wa bandari ya Foinike vyote bado vinajadiliwa." ], "debate": "Wanaovutiwa na Smith, kutoka Ramsay hadi Colin Hemer, husoma mwafaka wa masuala ya ubaharia katika simulizi kama ishara ya taarifa ya aliyeona mwenyewe. Wengine hujibu kwamba kusimulia safari ya baharini katika nafsi ya kwanza kulikuwa desturi ya kifasihi (Vernon Robbins), au kwamba Matendo 27–28 inaiga kuvunjikiwa meli kwa Odysseus (Dennis MacDonald). Kwa usomaji huo, usahihi unaweza kuonyesha ujuzi wa bahari badala ya kuwapo ndani ya meli. Hemer alijibu kwamba ulinganifu wa Robbins hauthibitishi desturi hiyo, huku akikubali kwamba usahihi wa ubaharia pekee unaonyesha tu mwandishi alikuwa amefanya safari ya aina hiyo. Maswali ya kiufundi pia yako wazi: kama kamba za kuifunga meli zilipita kwa upana au urefu wa sehemu ya chini, Foinike ilielekea wapi, na kama jina la kale Melita lilimaanisha kisiwa cha Malta kweli. Heinz Warnecke alipendekeza Kephallenia, na A. Acworth na O. F. A. Meinardus Mljet.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Desturi ya kifasihi", "statement": "Vernon Robbins anasema usimulizi wa nafsi ya kwanza wingi ulikuwa sehemu ya desturi za maelezo ya kale ya safari za baharini. Kwa usomaji huo, majaribio ya Smith yanaonyesha mwandishi alijua jinsi meli na upepo wa Bahari ya Mediterania vinavyofanya kazi, si kwamba alikuwa ndani ya meli. Hemer alijibu kwamba mifano ya Robbins haithibitishi aina hiyo ya uandishi." }, { "label": "Kuiga Homer", "statement": "Dennis MacDonald anasema Matendo 27–28 mara kwa mara inaelekeza kwenye kuvunjikiwa meli kwa Odysseus, ikishiriki picha za ubaharia, ahadi ya kimungu ya usalama na shujaa anayekaribishwa na watu wa kisiwa, ili kumwinua Paulo na Mungu wake kwa ulinganisho. Umbo lake basi lingekuwa la kifasihi hata pale jiografia yake ni ya kweli." }, { "label": "Kisiwa kingine", "statement": "Heinz Warnecke aliweka kuvunjika kwa meli Kephallenia, karibu na magharibi mwa Ugiriki. Mtazamo wa zamani, uliopingwa na Smith na kufufuliwa na A. Acworth (1973) na O. F. A. Meinardus, uliweka jina la kale Melita huko Mljet (Meleda) katika Adriatic. Kisiwa cha Melita, na hasa St Paul's Bay, bado ndicho kinachokubaliwa na wengi." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-smith-acts-27-seamanship" }, { "id": "ramsay-acts-accuracy", "kind": "study", "dateFrom": 1895, "dateTo": 1896, "corpusReferences": [], "confidence": "medium-high", "epistemicStatus": "debated", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 13:49", "Acts 14:1-7", "Acts 14:11", "Acts 16:6", "Acts 18:23", "Galatians 1:2", "Galatians 3:1" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.barnabas", "person.luke" ], "placeIds": [ "place.iconium", "place.lystra", "place.derbe", "place.galatia", "place.pisidian-antioch" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895 (tenth edition, 1907)", "locator": "ch. 1 §1 (Trustworthiness)", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/ramsay/paul_roman/paul_roman.iv.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "On the contrary, I began with a mind unfavourable to it, for the ingenuity and apparent completeness of the Tübingen theory had at one time quite convinced me.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895 (tenth edition, 1907)", "locator": "ch. 5 §6 (The Cities of Lycaonia)", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/ramsay/paul_roman/paul_roman.viii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "it was accurate at the period when Paul visited Lycaonia; that it was accurate at no other time except between 37 and 72 A.D.; and that its only meaning is to distinguish between the Roman part of Lycaonia and the non-Roman part ruled by Antiochus.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895 (tenth edition, 1907)", "locator": "Preface to the second edition (dated 25 March 1896)", "url": "https://ccel.org/ccel/ramsay/paul_roman/paul_roman.iii.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "With the Galatian question the date and authorship of Acts are bound up: the more I study, the more clearly I see that it is impossible to reconcile the “North-Galatian theory” with the first-century origin and Lukan authorship of Acts", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "wikidata", "work": "Wikidata item for William Mitchell Ramsay", "locator": "Q326308", "url": "https://www.wikidata.org/wiki/Special:EntityData/Q326308.json", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "catalogue-record" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "W. Ward Gasque", "work": "Sir William M. Ramsay: Archaeologist and New Testament Scholar", "year": "1966", "view": "A sympathetic survey. It counts the reliability of Luke-Acts, the South Galatian identification and the stress on historical context as Ramsay's lasting contributions. It reports that Ramsay's 1915 retelling made Acts 14:5-12 the first prompt for his change of mind, and it concedes that the South Galatian case cannot be proved to every scholar's satisfaction." }, { "author": "F. F. Bruce", "work": "Foreword to W. W. Gasque, Sir William M. Ramsay: Archaeologist and New Testament Scholar", "year": "1966", "view": "Says the nineteenth-century Ramsay, if inclined to overstate his case, had a good case to overstate, and that his later role as a popular apologist harmed his scholarly reputation." }, { "author": "Stephen Neill", "work": "The Interpretation of the New Testament 1861-1961", "year": "1964", "view": "As reported by Gasque, names two abiding results of Ramsay's work: his case for the accuracy of the Lukan writings and his South Galatian identification. Notes that many German scholars had little first-hand acquaintance with the archaeological evidence." }, { "author": "Ernst Haenchen", "work": "Die Apostelgeschichte (English translation: The Acts of the Apostles, 1971)", "year": "1956", "view": "Bibliography only for this entry; argument not checked." }, { "author": "C. K. Barrett", "work": "Luke the Historian in Recent Study", "year": "1961", "view": "According to Gasque, suggests a date for Acts as late as AD 95-115." }, { "author": "J. C. O'Neill", "work": "The Theology of Acts in Its Historical Setting", "year": "1961", "view": "Dates Acts to the second century. Gasque cites the book as an example of the position Ramsay had abandoned." }, { "author": "Colin J. Hemer", "work": "The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History", "year": "1989", "view": "Tests details of Acts against literary, epigraphic and papyrological evidence and presents Acts as a coherent product of its day (publisher's description). Secondary summaries report that it dates Acts to about AD 62; the chapters were not checked for this entry." }, { "author": "J. B. Lightfoot", "work": "Saint Paul's Epistle to the Galatians", "year": "1865", "view": "The classic defence, in Ramsay's day, of the North Galatian view: Paul's Galatians were the Gaulish population of central Asia Minor (as summarised by Gasque; the first-edition preface is dated February 1865)." }, { "author": "James Moffatt", "work": "An Introduction to the Literature of the New Testament", "year": "1911", "view": "Defends the North Galatian destination against Ramsay's South Galatian case (checked in the revised third edition of 1918). Gasque calls him Ramsay's faithful antagonist on this question." }, { "author": "F. H. Chase", "work": "The Galatia of the Acts (articles in The Expositor)", "year": "1893-1894", "view": "Criticised Ramsay's South Galatian argument. Ramsay credited this criticism with prompting the renewed work behind St Paul the Traveller." }, { "author": "Hans Dieter Betz", "work": "Galatians (Hermeneia)", "year": "1979", "view": "Bibliography only for this entry; argument not checked." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q326308", "label": "William Mitchell Ramsay" } ], "title": "St Paul the Traveller ya W. M. Ramsay (1895) na hoja ya usahihi wa Matendo", "summary": "Katika St Paul the Traveller (1895), W. M. Ramsay, mtaalamu wa masomo ya kale wa Aberdeen, aliandika kwamba awali alikuwa amekubali mtazamo wa Tübingen wa Matendo kama kazi ya karne ya pili. Miaka ya kazi kuhusu Asia Ndogo ilimshawishi kwamba maneno yake ya kieneo yanaendana na Galatia ya Kirumi ya karne ya kwanza, kama katika kukimbia kutoka Ikonio kwenda Likaonia (Matendo 14:6). Pale usomaji wake unapokuwa sahihi, unaonyesha mwandishi alijua eneo; hauthibitishi kila tukio, na kipindi chake cha tarehe na hoja yake ya kusini mwa Galatia bado vinajadiliwa.", "dating": "Ilichapishwa kwanza 1895 (wakfu una tarehe 17 Septemba, utangulizi 23 Septemba 1895); nukuu zimekaguliwa dhidi ya toleo la kumi, Hodder and Stoughton, 1907", "currentLocation": "Kitabu kilichochapishwa; toleo la kumi (Hodder and Stoughton, 1907) limehifadhiwa kidijitali na Christian Classics Ethereal Library", "establishes": [ "Mwaka wa 1895, Ramsay aliandika kwamba nadharia ya Tübingen ilikuwa imemshawishi kikamilifu na kwamba aliichukulia Matendo kama kazi ya karne ya pili. Alisema mtazamo wake ulibadilika polepole alipotumia Matendo kama chanzo cha jiografia ya eneo, vitu vya kale na jamii ya Asia Ndogo.", "Alisema Matendo 14:6 inaonyesha mpaka halisi. Kwa maelezo yake, Ikonio ilikuwa katika wilaya ya Kifrigia ya jimbo la Galatia, huku Listra na Derbe zikiwa katika sehemu yake ya Kirumi (»Galatic«) ya Likaonia. Aliamini maelezo hayo yalikuwa sahihi kati ya 37 na 72 BK tu.", "Ramsay aliamini usomaji wa Wagalatia wa kuielekeza kusini mwa Galatia ulihusiana na asili ya karne ya kwanza na uandishi wa Luka wa Matendo. Hoja yake kuhusu Galatia ilipingwa tangu mwanzo, na Dkt. Chase katika Expositor (1893-94), na baadaye na James Moffatt. Hata mtathmini mwenye huruma, F. F. Bruce (1966), aliona kwamba alikuwa na mwelekeo wa kuzidisha hoja yake, ingawa ilikuwa hoja nzuri ya kuzidishwa." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Haionyeshi kwamba matukio, hotuba au miujiza ya Matendo ilitokea kama ilivyosimuliwa. Mpaka, cheo au wilaya sahihi inaonyesha mwandishi alijua mazingira, si kwamba kila tukio ni la kihistoria.", "Maelezo ya Ramsay ya kubadilisha mawazo yake ni ushahidi kwamba alibadili mawazo, si uthibitisho wa kujitegemea wa Matendo. Katika kusimulia tena kwake mwaka wa 1915, kama Gasque anavyofupisha, tukio la Likaonia la Matendo 14:5–12 ndilo hatua ya mabadiliko. Maandishi ya 1895 badala yake yanasisitiza mzozo wa kama Paulo alisafiri kupitia kaskazini mwa Galatia au kupitia Likaonia.", "Haiamui kama Wagalatia ilielekezwa kusini mwa Galatia, au tarehe ya mapema na uandishi wa Luka wa Matendo. Yote matatu bado yanajadiliwa." ], "debate": "Maswali matatu bado yako wazi. Kwanza, je, ujuzi sahihi wa eneo unaelekeza kwa mwenzi wa Paulo (Ramsay, Hemer), au unaendana na mwandishi wa baadaye mwenye taarifa nzuri aliyeunda matukio kiteolojia? Tarehe zinazopendekezwa za Matendo zinaanzia mwanzoni mwa miaka ya 60 (Hemer), kupitia miaka ya 80 inayokubaliwa sana, hadi karne ya pili (O'Neill); Gasque anaripoti Barrett akiruhusu tarehe ya baadaye hadi 95-115. Pili, je, watu ambao Paulo aliwaandikia Wagalatia waliishi katika miji ya kusini ya jimbo la Kirumi au katika Galatia ya kikabila upande wa kaskazini (Lightfoot, Moffatt)? Tatu, je, kipindi cha 37-72 cha Ramsay, kinachotegemea mgawanyo kati ya Likaonia ya Kirumi na sehemu ya »Antiochian«, kinaamua kwa kiwango alichodai, kutokana na kukiri kwake mwenyewe kwamba ushahidi wa wilaya za jimbo ulikuwa mchache?", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Mwandishi wa baadaye mwenye taarifa nzuri", "statement": "Jiografia na maneno sahihi ya utawala yangeweza kutoka katika vyanzo, ujuzi wa safari au matumizi ya kieneo yaliyodumu muda mrefu. Kwa hiyo yanaendana na mwandishi aliyeandika mwishoni mwa karne ya kwanza au baadaye, aliyeunda hadithi kwa malengo ya kiteolojia. Kwa mtazamo huu, Ramsay alionyesha mwandishi alijua Asia Ndogo, si kwamba alikuwa mwenzi wa Paulo." }, { "label": "Usomaji wa kaskazini mwa Galatia", "statement": "J. B. Lightfoot, mtetezi mkuu wa mtazamo huo katika wakati wa Ramsay, aliwaona wapokeaji wa Wagalatia ya Paulo kuwa watu wa asili ya Gaul wa katikati ya Asia Ndogo, waliotembelewa katika safari za Matendo 16:6 na 18:23. Moffatt alidumisha mtazamo dhidi ya Ramsay, kama, kwa taarifa ya Gasque, tafiti nyingi za Kijerumani zilivyofanya. Watetezi wake pia hutumia Matendo kwa njia ya Paulo, kwa hiyo dai la Ramsay kwamba mtazamo wao hauendani na Matendo ya karne ya kwanza iliyoandikwa na Luka ni hitimisho lake mwenyewe." }, { "label": "Ramsay akiboreshwa, si kupinduliwa", "statement": "Warithi wenye huruma kama Gasque na Hemer wanadumisha mbinu yake ya kupima Matendo dhidi ya maandishi ya kuchongwa na jiografia. Gasque anaona ushahidi unapendelea hoja ya kusini mwa Galatia lakini hauwezi kuithibitisha kwa kuridhisha kila msomi. Bruce, katika dibaji yake kwa Gasque, aliona kwamba nafasi ya baadaye ya Ramsay kama mtetezi wa imani kwa umma ilidhuru sifa yake ya kitaaluma." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-ramsay-acts-accuracy" }, { "id": "lukan-titles-overview", "kind": "study", "dateFrom": -22, "dateTo": 160, "corpusReferences": [ "IG XIV 601" ], "confidence": "high", "epistemicStatus": "source-supported", "scriptureReferences": [ "Acts 13:6-12", "Acts 16:12-40", "Acts 17:5-9", "Acts 18:12-17", "Acts 19:29-41", "Acts 21:30-40", "Acts 22:24-29", "Acts 23:10-30", "Acts 24:22", "Acts 28:7-10" ], "personIds": [ "person.paul", "person.silas", "person.sergius-paulus", "person.gallio", "person.claudius", "person.jason", "person.lysias", "person.publius" ], "placeIds": [ "place.cyprus", "place.paphos", "place.achaia", "place.corinth", "place.macedonia", "place.thessalonica", "place.philippi", "place.ephesus", "place.malta", "place.jerusalem" ], "sources": [ { "sourceKey": "dio-cassius-cary", "author": "Cassius Dio", "work": "Roman History", "translator": "Earnest Cary", "year": "1917", "locator": "54.4.1 (22 BC)", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Cassius_Dio/54*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "It was at this time that he restored to the people both Cyprus and Gallia Narbonensis as districts no longer needing the presence of his armies; and thus proconsuls began to be sent to those provinces also.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "tacitus-annals-church-brodribb", "author": "Tacitus", "work": "Annals", "translator": "A. J. Church and W. J. Brodribb", "year": "1876", "locator": "Ann. 1.76 (AD 15)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.02.0078:book=1:chapter=76", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Achaia and Macedonia, on complaining of their burdens, were, it was decided, to be relieved for a time from pro-consular government and to be transferred to the emperor.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "dio-cassius-cary", "author": "Cassius Dio", "work": "Roman History", "translator": "Earnest Cary", "year": "1924", "locator": "60.24.1 (AD 44)", "url": "https://penelope.uchicago.edu/Thayer/E/Roman/Texts/Cassius_Dio/60*.html", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "Achaia and Macedonia, which ever since the reign of Tiberius had been assigned to governors directly appointed, Claudius now made to depend upon the lot once more.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895", "locator": "ch. X sect. 3, p. 218 (praetors at Philippi)", "url": "https://archive.org/download/stpaultraveller02ramsgoog/stpaultraveller02ramsgoog_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The title Praetors was not technically accurate, but was frequently employed as a courtesy title for the supreme magistrates of a Roman colony; and, as usual, Luke moves on the plane of educated conversation in such matters, and not on the plane of rigid technical accuracy.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "eusebius-history-mcgiffert", "author": "Eusebius", "work": "Church History", "translator": "A. C. McGiffert", "year": "1890", "locator": "Hist. eccl. 4.15.27 (quoting Mart. Pol. 12.2)", "url": "https://www.newadvent.org/fathers/250104.htm", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "they cried out and asked the Asiarch Philip to let a lion loose upon Polycarp. But he said that it was not lawful for him, since he had closed the games.", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895", "locator": "ch. XII sect. 5, p. 281 (Asiarchs)", "url": "https://archive.org/download/stpaultraveller02ramsgoog/stpaultraveller02ramsgoog_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The Asiarchs, or High Priests of Asia, were the heads of the imperial, political-religious organisation of the province in the worship of \"Rome and the Emperors\"", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895", "locator": "ch. XII sect. 5, p. 281 (town clerk)", "url": "https://archive.org/download/stpaultraveller02ramsgoog/stpaultraveller02ramsgoog_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The Clerk was probably the most important official in Ephesus, and therefore in close contact with the court of the proconsul, who generally resided in that city", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "ramsay-st-paul-traveller", "author": "W. M. Ramsay", "work": "St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen", "year": "1895", "locator": "ch. XIV sect. 9, p. 343 (Malta)", "url": "https://archive.org/download/stpaultraveller02ramsgoog/stpaultraveller02ramsgoog_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "The title \"first\" is technically correct in Melita: it has inscriptional authority.", "role": "early-study" }, { "sourceKey": "kaibel-ig-xiv", "author": "G. Kaibel", "work": "Inscriptiones Graecae XIV: Inscriptiones Siciliae et Italiae", "year": "1890", "locator": "IG XIV 601 (p. 112)", "url": "https://archive.org/download/bub_gb_WNFOCQoUpq4C/bub_gb_WNFOCQoUpq4C_djvu.txt", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "", "role": "edition" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-war-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "The Jewish War", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "War 5.243-244 (Whiston 5.5.8; his 'legion' renders a general Greek word for a military unit)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0148:book=5:whiston%20chapter=5:whiston%20section=8", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "it had passages down to them both, through which the guard (for there always lay in this tower a Roman legion) went several ways among the cloisters, with their arms, on the Jewish festivals, in order to watch the people, that they might not there attempt to make any innovations", "role": "primary-text" }, { "sourceKey": "josephus-antiquities-whiston", "author": "Flavius Josephus", "work": "Antiquities of the Jews", "translator": "William Whiston", "year": "1737", "locator": "Ant. 20.136 (Whiston 20.6.3)", "url": "https://www.perseus.tufts.edu/hopper/text?doc=Perseus:text:1999.01.0146:book=20:whiston%20chapter=6:whiston%20section=3", "publicDomain": true, "quote": "He also gave order that Celer the tribune should be carried back to Jerusalem, and should be drawn through the city in the sight of all the people, and then should be slain.", "role": "primary-text" } ], "modernScholarship": [ { "author": "Ernest DeWitt Burton", "work": "The Politarchs (American Journal of Theology 2)", "year": "1898", "view": "Collected the known politarch inscriptions, chiefly Macedonian with a few from Thrace, Bithynia, the Bosporus and Egypt and none from Greece proper. Found the office at Thessalonica from Augustus to the mid-second century, and noted that the form used in Acts was otherwise unknown in surviving literature, a related form appearing in Aeneas Tacticus." }, { "author": "E. L. Hicks", "work": "The Collection of Ancient Greek Inscriptions in the British Museum, Part III: Priene, Iasos and Ephesos", "year": "1890", "view": "From the Ephesian inscriptions, including the Salutaris bequest of AD 104, found the clerk of the people drafting decrees with the strategoi and managing public business, and judged Acts 19:35-41 one more instance of Luke's accuracy with titles. Treated Asiarch as another title of the provincial high priest of Asia." }, { "author": "A. N. Sherwin-White", "work": "Roman Society and Roman Law in the New Testament", "year": "1963", "view": "Writing as a Roman historian, argued that Acts' picture of provincial government, civic and colonial magistrates and legal procedure fits the first century AD closely, and judged its historicity in such matters strongly confirmed." }, { "author": "Colin J. Hemer", "work": "The Book of Acts in the Setting of Hellenistic History", "year": "1989", "view": "Examined numerous details of Acts against literary, epigraphic and papyrological evidence, official titles among them, presenting Acts as a coherent and consistent product of its own day; defended Lukan authorship and a date before AD 70." }, { "author": "Richard I. Pervo", "work": "Profit with Delight: The Literary Genre of the Acts of the Apostles", "year": "1987", "view": "Compared Acts with ancient novels, arguing that it shares their blend of edification and entertainment; noted that many novels also feature real persons and historiographical techniques, and treated historicity as a question separate from genre." }, { "author": "Richard I. Pervo", "work": "Dating Acts: Between the Evangelists and the Apologists", "year": "2006", "view": "Dated Acts to about AD 115, arguing among other points that its author knew Josephus's later writings, so accurate period detail is compatible with a late date." }, { "author": "Stephan Witetschek", "work": "Artemis and Asiarchs: Some Remarks on Ephesian Local Colour in Acts 19 (Biblica 90)", "year": "2009", "view": "Argued that the Asiarchs of Acts 19:31 call into question their identification with the high priests of the provincial imperial cult, and that Acts' Ephesian local colour is a source less for Paul's time than for Luke's own." } ], "authorityIds": [ { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q40309", "label": "Acts of the Apostles" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q2912782", "label": "proconsul" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q7210123", "label": "Politarch" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q727844", "label": "Asiarch" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q59671", "label": "lictor" }, { "scheme": "wikidata", "id": "Q849288", "label": "military tribune" } ], "title": "Vyeo rasmi katika Matendo, mji kwa mji", "summary": "Matendo inatoa cheo kinachofaa kila mahali inapoeleza: maliwali katika Kipro na Akaya, politarki huko Thesalonike, praetori wenye liktori katika koloni la Filipi, asiarki na katibu wa mji huko Efeso, mtu wa kwanza huko Melita na jemadari wa Kirumi huko Yerusalemu. Maandishi ya kuchongwa na waandishi wa kale wanashuhudia mengi kati yake; huko Filipi, praetori lilikuwa jina la heshima. Hii inaonyesha ujuzi mzuri wa eneo au vyanzo; haithibitishi kila tukio lilitokea wala kuweka tarehe ya Matendo.", "dating": "Matumizi yanashuhudiwa kuanzia 22 KK (Kipro iliporudishwa chini ya maliwali) hadi katikati ya karne ya pili BK (Filipo asiarki huko Smyrna, karibu 155-160 kwa tarehe ya kawaida; maazimio ya Efeso hadi 160 BK). Vyanzo vingine vya kuripoti ni vya baadaye (Cassius Dio, mwanzoni mwa karne ya tatu; Eusebius, mwanzoni mwa ya nne). Matukio ya Matendo yako karibu 46-60 BK kwa mpangilio wa kawaida.", "currentLocation": "Hapahusiki: muhtasari wa maandishi kadhaa na maandishi ya kuchongwa; angalia vipengee vilivyounganishwa kwa mahali pa kila kitu.", "establishes": [ "Maliwali wa Matendo huko Kipro na Akaya (Matendo 13:7; Matendo 18:12) wanaendana na hadhi ya kila jimbo wakati huo. Augustus alirudisha Kipro kwa watu mwaka wa 22 KK, kisha maliwali wakaitawala (Dio 54.4.1). Akaya ilihamishiwa kwa kaisari mwaka wa 15 BK na kurudi kwa maliwali walioteuliwa kwa kura ya nasibu chini ya Klaudio mwaka wa 44 BK (Tacitus, Annals 1.76; Dio 60.24.1), kabla ya kipindi cha Galio kama liwali, kinachowekwa kwa kawaida mwanzoni mwa miaka ya 50.", "Politarki (Matendo 17:6 na 17:8) kilikuwa hasa cheo cha kiraia cha Makedonia. Mwaka wa 1898, Burton alitaja kwamba, nje ya Matendo, umbo hili la neno wakati huo lilijulikana katika maandishi ya kuchongwa tu (umbo linalohusiana linapatikana katika Aeneas Tacticus). Orodha yake ilikuwa hasa ya Makedonia, yenye mifano michache kutoka Thrace, Bithinia, Bosporus na Misri na hakuna kutoka Ugiriki yenyewe; huko Thesalonike inaanzia Augustus hadi katikati ya karne ya pili.", "Katika koloni la Kirumi la Filipi (Matendo 16:12), Matendo inawaita mahakimu kwa neno la kawaida la Kigiriki la praetori na kuwapa liktori (Matendo 16:20–38). Ramsay aliona praetori si cheo sahihi kiufundi bali cheo cha heshima kilichotumiwa mara nyingi kwa mahakimu wakuu wa koloni, huku Luka akiandika katika kiwango cha mazungumzo ya watu waliosoma badala ya usahihi mkali wa kiufundi.", "Huko Efeso, asiarki wa Matendo (Matendo 19:31) wana cheo cha jimbo kinachoshuhudiwa nje ya Matendo: katika Martyrdom of Polycarp, iliyonukuliwa na Eusebius (Church History 4.15.27), umati wa Smyrna unamwomba Filipo asiarki amshambulie Polykarp kwa simba. Ramsay aliona katibu wa mji kuwa huenda afisa muhimu zaidi wa Efeso; toleo la Hicks la 1890 la maandishi yake ya kuchongwa linaonyesha katibu akiandika maazimio na kusimamia shughuli za umma.", "Huko Melita, maandishi ya kuchongwa ya Kigiriki (IG XIV 601) yanampa mtu wa daraja la eques la Kirumi jina protos Melitaion, wa kwanza wa watu wa Melita, na tanbihi ya Kaibel inalinganisha Matendo 28:7. Huko Yerusalemu, Yosefo anasema kikosi cha Kirumi kilikaa daima katika ngome ya Antonia, yenye njia za kushuka hadi matao ya hekalu ilizotumia wakati wa sikukuu (War 5.243-244). Pia anamtaja jemadari (chiliarch), Celer, katika Uyahudi chini ya Klaudio (Ant. 20.136)." ], "doesNotEstablish": [ "Kwamba tukio fulani lilitokea kama lilivyosimuliwa. Cheo sahihi cha maafisa wa Thesalonike au Melita hakithibitishi shambulizi la nyumba ya Yasoni au kuponywa kwa baba ya Publio; kila tukio linahitaji tathmini yake.", "Tarehe au mwandishi wa Matendo yenyewe. Vyeo vingi kati ya hivi viliendelea kutumiwa kwa vizazi (politarki huko Thesalonike hadi karne ya pili, asiarki bado katikati ya karne ya pili), kwa hiyo mwandishi wa baadaye mwenye vyanzo vizuri pia angeweza kuvipata kwa usahihi.", "Usahihi wa kiufundi unaofanana kila mahali. Huko Filipi, praetori kwa uamuzi wa Ramsay kilikuwa cheo cha heshima badala ya cheo rasmi cha koloni, na Matendo pia inatumia neno la jumla la watawala huko (Matendo 16:19). Usahihi ni wa matumizi yenye taarifa na elimu, si maneno ya kisheria.", "Kwamba kila afisa aliyetajwa kwa jina ametambulishwa kwa kujitegemea, au kwamba kila cheo kilikuwa na maana moja isiyobadilika. Kama maandishi yoyote ya kuchongwa yanamtaja liwali Sergio Paulo, asiarki walikuwa nani hasa, na kama wa kwanza wa Melita ilikuwa wadhifa rasmi au daraja la heshima (tanbihi ya Kaibel inasema tu ni hadhi fulani ya kiraia) vyote bado vinajadiliwa." ], "debate": "Ramsay, Sherwin-White na Hemer walichukulia mfululizo wa maelezo sahihi ya eneo, pamoja na vyeo, kama ushahidi unaokusanyika kwamba Matendo inategemea ujuzi wa mapema wenye taarifa nzuri; Ramsay alitetea Luka kama mwenzi wa Paulo, na Hemer alitetea uandishi wa Luka na tarehe kabla ya 70 BK. Pervo anajibu kwamba riwaya za kale pia zilitumia watu halisi na mbinu za uandishi wa historia, na aliweka Matendo karibu 115; Witetschek husoma maelezo yake ya eneo la Efeso kama ushahidi zaidi wa wakati wa Luka mwenyewe kuliko wa Paulo. Maswali madogo zaidi yanabaki wazi, hasa kama asiarki alikuwa tu kuhani mkuu wa Asia (mtazamo wa Ramsay ulioshirikiwa na Hicks mwaka wa 1890) au kitu kingine, shaka ambayo Witetschek huitoa katika Matendo 19:31 yenyewe.", "alternatives": [ { "label": "Mwenzi mwenye taarifa nzuri", "statement": "Aina nyingi za vyeo sahihi vya mahali maalumu zinaonyesha mwandishi aliyesafiri na Paulo au alijua miji hii moja kwa moja, kama Ramsay na Hemer walivyosema. Hii inaendana na vifungu vinavyotumia nafsi ya kwanza wingi, lakini ni hitimisho kutoka usahihi, si uthibitisho wa uandishi." }, { "label": "Mwandishi wa baadaye mwenye vyanzo vizuri", "statement": "Mwandishi wa mwishoni mwa karne ya kwanza au mwanzoni mwa ya pili, akitumia kumbukumbu za safari, watoa habari wa eneo au maelezo ya awali, angeweza kutoa vyeo vilivyoendelea kutumiwa wakati wake mwenyewe. Kwa mtazamo huu, vyeo vinathibitisha zaidi ubora wa vyanzo, au wakati wa mwandishi mwenyewe, kuliko tarehe ya mapema (Pervo; Witetschek)." }, { "label": "Uhalisia wa kifasihi", "statement": "Riwaya za kale pia zilitumia watu halisi, mahali na mbinu za uandishi wa historia, kwa hiyo maelezo sahihi ya eneo yanaonyesha uwezo lakini hayawezi yenyewe kutofautisha historia na hadithi ya kubuni. Kila tukio lazima lihukumiwe kwa ushahidi wake wenyewe." } ], "canonicalUrl": "https://paulineletters.com/sw/explore/evidence#evidence-lukan-titles-overview" } ], "contentDigest": "d71fc6635a40327612048fec7bf2a6b89af7e67b6daf6a6c0264157c44f1a5a5" }